Version Control with Subversion

针对 Subversion 1.6

(编译自 r3821/r5091)

Ben Collins-Sussman

Brian W. Fitzpatrick

C. Michael Pilato

本书使用创作共用许可证。可以访问 http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.0/ 或发送邮件到 Creative Commons, 559 Nathan Abbott Way, Stanford, California 94305, USA,以查看本许可证。

(TBA)


目录

前言
序言
1. Subversion 是什么?
1.1. Subversion 是正确的工具吗?
1.2. Subversion 的历史
1.3. Subversion 的架构
1.4. Subversion 的组件
1.5. Subversion 有什么新东西?
2. 读者
3. 怎样阅读本书
4. 本书的结构
5. 本书是免费的
6. 致谢
1. 基本概念
1. 版本控制基础概念
1.1. 版本库
1.2. 工作副本
1.3. 版本模型
1.3.1. 文件共享的问题
1.3.2. “锁定-修改-解锁”方案
1.3.3. “拷贝-修改-合并”方案
2. Subversion 的版本控制
2.1. Subversion 版本库
2.2. 修订版本
2.3. 版本库的地址
2.4. Subversion 的工作副本
2.4.1. 工作副本的工作方式
2.4.2. 工作副本基本交互操作
2.4.3. 混合版本的工作副本
3. 总结
2. 基本使用
1. 求助!
2. 导入数据到你的版本库
2.1. 导入文件和目录
2.2. 推荐的版本库布局
2.3. 名称中有什么?
3. 创建工作副本
4. 基本的工作循环
4.1. 更新你的工作副本
4.2. 开始修改
4.3. 检查你的修改
4.3.1. 查看你的修改概况
4.3.2. 检查你的本地修改的详情
4.4. 修正错误
4.5. 解决冲突
4.5.1. 交互式的查看冲突区别
4.5.2. 交互式的解决冲突区别
4.5.3. 延后解决冲突
4.5.4. 手工合并冲突
4.5.5. 丢弃你的修改而接收新获取的修订版本
4.5.6. Punting: using svn revert
4.6. 提交你的修改
5. 检验历史
5.1. 检查历史修改详情
5.1.1. 检查本地修改
5.1.2. 比较工作副本和版本库
5.1.3. 比较版本库中的版本
5.2. 产生历史修改列表
5.3. 浏览版本库
5.3.1. svn cat
5.3.2. svn list
5.4. 获得旧的版本库快照
6. 有时你只需要清理
6.1. 处理你的工作副本
6.2. 从中断中恢复
7. 处理结构性冲突
7.1. An Example Tree Conflict
8. 总结
3. 高级主题
1. 版本清单
1.1. 修订版本关键字
1.2. 版本日期
2. Peg 和实施修订版本
3. 属性
3.1. 为什么需要属性?
3.2. 操作属性
3.3. 属性和 Subversion 工作流程
3.4. 自动设置属性
4. 文件移植性
4.1. 文件内容类型
4.2. 文件的可执行性
4.3. 行结束字符序列
5. 忽略未版本控制的条目
6. 关键字替换
7. 稀疏目录
8. 锁定
8.1. 创建锁定
8.2. 发现锁定
8.3. 解除和偷窃锁定
8.4. 锁定交流
9. 外部定义
10. 修改列表
10.1. 创建和更新修改列表
10.2. 用修改列表作为操作过滤器
10.3. 修改列表的限制
11. 网络模型
11.1. 请求和响应
11.2. 客户端凭证
11.2.1. 缓存凭证
11.2.2. 禁用密码缓存
11.2.3. 删除缓存的凭证
11.2.4. 命令行认证
11.2.5. 认证总结
12. 总结
4. 分支与合并
1. 什么是分支?
2. 使用分支
2.1. 创建分支
2.2. 在分支上工作
2.3. 分支背后的关键概念
3. 基本合并
3.1. 变更集
3.2. 保持分支同步
3.3. 重新集成分支
3.4. 合并信息和预览
3.5. 取消修改
3.6. 找回删除的项目
4. 高级合并
4.1. 摘录合并
4.2. 合并的语法:完整的描述
4.3. 不使用合并信息的合并
4.4. 合并冲突
4.5. 阻塞修改
4.6. Keeping a Reintegrated Branch Alive
4.7. 感知合并的日志和注解
4.8. 关注还是忽视祖先
4.9. 合并和移动
4.10. 阻塞不知道合并的客户端
4.11. 合并跟踪的最终信息
5. 使用分支
6. 标签
6.1. 建立简单标签
6.2. 建立复杂标签
7. 维护分支
7.1. 版本库布局
7.2. 数据的生命周期
8. 常用分支模式
8.1. 发布分支
8.2. 特性分支
9. 供方分支
9.1. 常规的供方分支管理过程
9.2. svn_load_dirs.pl
10. 总结
5. 版本库管理
1. Subversion 版本库的定义
2. 版本库开发策略
2.1. 规划你的版本库结构
2.2. 决定在哪里与如何部署你的版本库
2.3. 选择数据存储格式
2.3.1. Berkeley DB
2.3.2. FSFS
3. 创建和配置你的版本库
3.1. 创建版本库
3.2. 实现版本库钩子
3.3. Berkeley DB 配置
3.4. FSFS 配置
4. 版本库维护
4.1. 管理员的工具箱
4.1.1. svnadmin
4.1.2. svnlook
4.1.3. svndumpfilter
4.1.4. svnsync
4.1.5. fsfs-reshard.py
4.1.6. Berkeley DB 工具
4.2. 修正提交消息
4.3. 管理磁盘空间
4.3.1. 让 Subversion 节约磁盘空间
4.3.2. 删除终止的事务
4.3.3. 删除不使用的 Berkeley DB 日志文件
4.3.4. 打包 FSFS 文件系统
4.4. Berkeley DB 恢复
4.5. 版本库数据的移植
4.6. 过滤版本库历史
4.7. 版本库复制
4.8. 版本库备份
4.9. 管理版本库的 UUID
5. 移动和删除版本库
6. 总结
6. 服务配置
1. 概述
2. 选择一个服务器配置
2.1. svnserve 服务器
2.2. 穿越 SSH 隧道的 svnserve 服务器
2.3. Apache 的 HTTP 服务器
2.4. 推荐
3. svnserve - 定制的服务器
3.1. 调用服务器
3.1.1. svnserve 与守护进程
3.1.2. 通过 inetd 调用 svnserve
3.1.3. 通过隧道调用 svnserve
3.1.4. svnserve as a Windows service
3.1.5. svnserve as a launchd job
3.2. 内置的认证和授权
3.2.1. 创建一个用户文件和认证域
3.2.2. 设置访问控制
3.3. 让 svnserve 使用 SASL
3.3.1. 使用 SASL 认证
3.3.2. SASL 加密
3.4. 穿越 SSH 隧道
3.5. SSH Configuration Tricks
3.5.1. 初始设置
3.5.2. 控制调用的命令
4. httpd - Apache 的 HTTP 服务器
4.1. 先决条件
4.2. 基本的 Apache 配置
4.3. 认证选项
4.3.1. Basic authentication
4.3.2. Digest authentication
4.4. 授权选项
4.4.1. 整体访问控制
4.4.2. 每目录访问控制
4.4.3. 禁用基于路径的检查
4.5. Protecting network traffic with SSL
4.5.1. Subversion server SSL certificate configuration
4.5.2. Subversion client SSL certificate management
4.6. 额外的糖果
4.6.1. 版本库浏览
4.6.2. Apache 日志
4.6.3. 通过代理写
4.6.4. 其它的 Apache 特性
5. 基于路径的授权
6. High-level Logging
7. 支持多种版本库访问方法
7. 定制你的 Subversion 体验
1. 运行配置区
1.1. 配置区布局
1.2. 配置和 Windows 注册表
1.3. 配置选项
1.3.1. 服务器
1.3.2. 配置
2. 本地化
2.1. 理解区域设置
2.2. Subversion 对区域设置的使用
3. 使用外置编辑器
4. 使用外置比较与合并工具
4.1. 外置 diff
4.2. 外置 diff3
4.3. External merge
5. 总结
8. 嵌入 Subversion
1. 分层的库设计
1.1. 版本库层
1.2. 版本库访问层
1.3. 客户端层
2. 进入工作副本的管理区
2.1. 条目文件
2.2. 原始副本和属性文件
3. 使用 API
3.1. Apache 可移植运行库
3.2. Functions and Batons
3.3. URL 和路径需求
3.4. 使用 C 和 C++ 以外的语言
3.5. 代码样例
4. 总结
9. Subversion 完全参考
1. svn—Subversion Command-Line Client
1.1. svn 选项
1.2. svn 子命令
svn add
svn blame (praise, annotate, ann)
svn cat
svn changelist (cl)
svn checkout (co)
svn cleanup
svn commit (ci)
svn copy (cp)
svn delete (del, remove, rm)
svn diff (di)
svn export
svn help (h, ?)
svn import
svn info
svn list (ls)
svn lock
svn log
svn merge
svn mergeinfo
svn mkdir
svn move (mv)
svn propdel (pdel, pd)
svn propedit (pedit, pe)
svn propget (pget, pg)
svn proplist (plist, pl)
svn propset (pset, ps)
svn resolve
svn resolved
svn revert
svn status (stat, st)
svn switch (sw)
svn unlock
svn update (up)
2. svnadmin—Subversion Repository Administration
2.1. svnadmin 选项
2.2. svnadmin 子命令
svnadmin crashtest
svnadmin create
svnadmin deltify
svnadmin dump
svnadmin help (h, ?)
svnadmin hotcopy
svnadmin list-dblogs
svnadmin list-unused-dblogs
svnadmin load
svnadmin lslocks
svnadmin lstxns
svnadmin pack
svnadmin recover
svnadmin rmlocks
svnadmin rmtxns
svnadmin setlog
svnadmin setrevprop
svnadmin setuuid
svnadmin upgrade
svnadmin verify
3. svnlook—Subversion Repository Examination
3.1. svnlook 选项
3.2. svnlook 子命令
svnlook author
svnlook cat
svnlook changed
svnlook date
svnlook diff
svnlook dirs-changed
svnlook help (h, ?)
svnlook history
svnlook info
svnlook lock
svnlook log
svnlook propget (pget, pg)
svnlook proplist (plist, pl)
svnlook tree
svnlook uuid
svnlook youngest
4. svnsync—Subversion Repository Mirroring
4.1. svnsync 选项
4.2. svnsync 子命令
svnsync copy-revprops
svnsync help
svnsync info
svnsync initialize (init)
svnsync synchronize (sync)
5. svnserve—Custom Subversion Server
5.1. svnserve 选项
6. svndumpfilter—Subversion History Filtering
6.1. svndumpfilter 选项
6.2. svndumpfilter 子命令
svndumpfilter exclude
svndumpfilter include
svndumpfilter help
7. svnversion—Subversion Working Copy Version Info
svnversion
8. mod_dav_svn—Subversion Apache HTTP Server Module
mod_dav_svn 配置指令
9. mod_authz_svn—Subversion Apache HTTP Authorization Module
mod_authz_svn 配置指令
10. Subversion 属性
10.1. 版本控制的属性
10.2. 未版本控制的属性
11. 版本库钩子
start-commit
pre-commit
post-commit
pre-revprop-change
post-revprop-change
pre-lock
post-lock
pre-unlock
post-unlock
A. Subversion 快速入门指南
1. 安装 Subversion
2. 快速指南
B. CVS 用户的 Subversion 指南
1. 版本号现在不同了
2. 目录的版本
3. 更多离线操作
4. 区分状态和更新
4.1. 状态
4.2. 更新
5. 分支和标签
6. 元数据属性
7. 解决冲突
8. 二进制文件和行结束标记转换
9. 版本化的模块
10. 认证
11. 迁移 CVS 版本库到 Subversion
C. WebDAV 和自动版本
1. 什么是 WebDAV?
2. 自动版本化
3. 客户端交互性
3.1. 独立的 WebDAV 应用程序
3.1.1. Microsoft Office,Dreamweaver,Photoshop
3.1.2. Cadaver,DAV 浏览器
3.2. 文件浏览器的 WebDAV 扩展
3.2.1. Microsoft Web 文件夹
3.2.2. Nautilus,Konqueror
3.3. WebDAV 的文件系统实现
3.3.1. WebDrive,NetDrive
3.3.2. Mac OS X
3.3.3. Linux davfs2
D. 版权
索引

插图清单

1. Subversion 的架构
1.1. 一个典型的客户/服务器系统
1.2. 需要避免的问题
1.3. “锁定-修改-解锁”方案
1.4. “拷贝-修改-合并”方案
1.5. “拷贝-修改-合并”方案(续)
1.6. Tree changes over time
1.7. 版本库的文件系统
4.1. 分支与开发
4.2. 开始规划版本库
4.3. 版本库与复制
4.4. 一个文件的分支历史
8.1. 二维的文件和目录
8.2. 版本时间 - 第三维!

表格清单

1.1. 版本库访问 URL
2.1. 常用日志操作
4.1. 分支与合并命令
5.1. 版本库数据存储对照表
6.1. Subversion 服务器选项比较
C.1. 常用的 WebDAV 客户端

范例清单

4.1. Merge-tracking gatekeeper start-commit hook script
5.1. txn-info.sh (报告异常事务)
5.2. 镜像版本库的 pre-revprop-change 钩子
5.3. 镜像版本库的 start-commit 钩子
6.1. A sample svnserve launchd job definition
6.2. 匿名访问的配置样例
6.3. 认证访问的配置样例
6.4. 混合认证/匿名访问的配置样例
6.5. 禁用所有的路径检查
7.1. 注册表条目(.reg)文件样例
7.2. diffwrap.py
7.3. diffwrap.bat
7.4. diff3wrap.py
7.5. diff3wrap.bat
7.6. mergewrap.py
7.7. mergewrap.bat
8.1. Using the repository layer
8.2. Using the repository layer with Python
8.3. 一个 Python 状态爬虫

前言

Karl Fogel

芝加哥,2004 年 3 月 14 日。

一个差劲的常见问题列表(FAQ)总是充斥着作者渴望被问到的问题,而不是人们真正想要了解的问题。也许你曾经见过下面这样的问题:

Q:怎样使用 Glorbosoft XYZ 最大程度的提高团队生产率?

A:许多客户希望知道怎样利用我们革命性的专利办公套件最大程度的提高生产率。答案非常简单:首先,点击文件菜单,找到提高生产率条目,然后 …

类似的问题完全不符合 FAQ 的精神。没人会打电话给技术支持中心,询问怎样提高生产率?相反,人们经常询问一些非常具体的问题,像怎样让日程系统提前两天,而不是一天提醒相关用户?等等。但是想象比发现真正的问题更容易。构建一个真实的问题列表需要持之以恒的, 有组织的辛勤工作:跨越整个软件生命周期,追踪新提出的问题,监控反馈信息,所有的问题要整理成一个统一的, 可查询的整体,并且能够真实的反映所有用户的感受。这需要耐心,如自然学家一样严谨的态度,没有浮华的假设,没有虚幻的断言—相反的,需要开放的视野和精确的记录。

我很喜欢这本书,因为它正是按照这种精神建立起来的,这种精神体现在本书的每一页中。这是作者与用户直接交流的结果。而这一切是源于 Ben Collins-Sussman 对于 Subversion 邮件列表中常见问题的研究。他发现人们总是在邮件列表中重复询问一些基本问题:使用 Subversion 的标准流程是怎样的?分支与标签同其它版本控制系统的工作方式一样吗?我怎样知道某处的修改是谁做的?

日复一日看到相同问题的烦闷,促使 Ben 在 2002 年的夏天努力工作了一个月,撰写了一本 Subversion 手册,一本六十页厚的, 涵盖了所有 Subversion 使用基础知识的手册。这本手册没有说明最终定稿的时间,但它随着 Subversion 的每个版本一起发布,帮助许多用户跨过学习之初的艰难。当 O'Reilly 决定出版一本完备的 Subversion 图书的时候,一条捷径浮出水面:扩充 Subversion 手册。

新书的三位合著者因而面临着一个不寻常的机会。从职责上讲,他们的任务是从一个目录和一些草稿为基础,自上而下的写一部专著。但事实上,他们的灵感源泉则来自一些具体的内容,稳定却难以组织。Subversion 被数以千计的早期用户采用,这些用户提供了大量的反馈,不仅仅针对 Subversion,还包括业已存在的文档。

在写这本书的过程里,Ben,Mike 和 Brian 一直像鬼魂一样游荡在 Subversion 邮件列表和聊天室中,仔细的研究用户实际遇到的问题。监视这些反馈也是他们在 CollabNet 工作的一部分,这给他们撰写 Subversion 文档提供了巨大的便利。这本书建立在丰富的使用经验,而非在流沙般脆弱的想象之上,它结合了用户手册和 FAQ 的优点。初次阅读时,这种二元性的优势并不明显,按照顺序,从前到后,这本书只是简单的从头到尾描述了软件的细节。书中的内容包括一章概述,一章必不可少的快速指南,一章关于管理配置,一些高级主题,当然还包括命令参考手册和故障排除指南。而当你过一段时间之后,再次翻开本书查找一些特定问题的解决方案时,这种二元性才得以显现:这些生动的细节一定来自不可预测的实际用例的提炼,大多是源于用户的需要和视点。

Of course, no one can promise that this book will answer every question you have about Subversion. Sometimes the precision with which it anticipates your questions will seem eerily telepathic; yet occasionally, you will stumble into a hole in the community's knowledge and come away empty-handed. When this happens, the best thing you can do is email and present your problem. The authors are still there and still watching, and the authors include not just the three listed on the cover, but many others who contributed corrections and original material. From the community's point of view, solving your problem is merely a pleasant side effect of a much larger project—namely, slowly adjusting this book, and ultimately Subversion itself, to more closely match the way people actually use it. They are eager to hear from you, not only because they can help you, but because you can help them. With Subversion, as with all active free software projects, you are not alone.

让这本书将成为你的第一个伙伴。

序言

 

即使你能确认什么是完美,也不要让完美成为好的敌人。更何况你不能确认。因为落入过去陷阱的不悦,你会在设计时因为担心自己的缺陷而无所作为。

 
 --Greg Hudson,Subversion 开发者

In the world of open source software, the Concurrent Versions System (CVS) was the tool of choice for version control for many years. And rightly so. CVS was open source software itself, and its nonrestrictive modus operandi and support for networked operation allowed dozens of geographically dispersed programmers to share their work. It fit the collaborative nature of the open source world very well. CVS and its semi-chaotic development model have since become cornerstones of open source culture.

But CVS was not without its flaws, and simply fixing those flaws promised to be an enormous effort. Enter Subversion. Subversion was designed to be a successor to CVS, and its originators set out to win the hearts of CVS users in two ways—by creating an open source system with a design (and look and feel) similar to CVS, and by attempting to avoid most of CVS's noticeable flaws. While the result wasn't—and isn't—the next great evolution in version control design, Subversion is very powerful, very usable, and very flexible.

This book is written to document the 1.6 series of the Apache Subversion™[1] version control system. We have made every attempt to be thorough in our coverage. However, Subversion has a thriving and energetic development community, so already a number of features and improvements are planned for future versions that may change some of the commands and specific notes in this book.

1. Subversion 是什么?

Subversion is a free/open source version control system (VCS). That is, Subversion manages files and directories, and the changes made to them, over time. This allows you to recover older versions of your data or examine the history of how your data changed. In this regard, many people think of a version control system as a sort of time machine.

Subversion 的版本库可以通过网络访问,从而使用户可以在不同的电脑上进行操作。从某种程度上来说,允许用户在各自的空间里修改和管理同一组数据可以促进团队协作。因为修改不再是单线进行,开发速度会更快。此外,由于所有的工作都已版本化,也就不必担心由于错误的更改而影响软件质量—如果出现不正确的更改,只要撤销那一次更改操作即可。

Some version control systems are also software configuration management (SCM) systems. These systems are specifically tailored to manage trees of source code and have many features that are specific to software development—such as natively understanding programming languages, or supplying tools for building software. Subversion, however, is not one of these systems. It is a general system that can be used to manage any collection of files. For you, those files might be source code—for others, anything from grocery shopping lists to digital video mixdowns and beyond.

1.1. Subversion 是正确的工具吗?

如果你是一个考虑如何使用 Subversion 的用户或管理员,你要问自己的第一件事就是: "这是这项工作的正确工具吗?",Subversion 是一个梦幻般的锤子,但要小心不要把任何问题当作钉子。

如果你希望归档文件和目录旧版本,有可能要恢复或需要查看日志获得其修改的历史,那么 Subversion 是你需要的工具。如果你需要和别人协作文档(通常通过网络)并跟踪所做的修改,那么 Subversion 也适合。这是 Subversion 为什么使用在软件开发环境—编程是天生的社会活动,Subversion 使得与其他程序员的交互变得简单。当然,使用 Subversion 也有代价:管理负担。你会需要管理一个存放所有历史的数据版本库,并需要经常的备份。而在日常的工作中,你不能像往常一样复制, 移动, 重命名或删除文件,相反,你需要通过 Subversion 完成这些工作。

Assuming you're fine with the extra workflow, you should still make sure you're not using Subversion to solve a problem that other tools solve better. For example, because Subversion replicates data to all the collaborators involved, a common misuse is to treat it as a generic distribution system. People will sometimes use Subversion to distribute huge collections of photos, digital music, or software packages. The problem is that this sort of data usually isn't changing at all. The collection itself grows over time, but the individual files within the collection aren't being changed. In this case, using Subversion is overkill.[2] There are simpler tools that efficiently replicate data without the overhead of tracking changes, such as rsync or unison.

1.2. Subversion 的历史

In early 2000, CollabNet, Inc. (http://www.collab.net) began seeking developers to write a replacement for CVS. CollabNet offered[3] a collaboration software suite called CollabNet Enterprise Edition (CEE), of which one component was version control. Although CEE used CVS as its initial version control system, CVS's limitations were obvious from the beginning, and CollabNet knew it would eventually have to find something better. Unfortunately, CVS had become the de facto standard in the open source world largely because there wasn't anything better, at least not under a free license. So CollabNet determined to write a new version control system from scratch, retaining the basic ideas of CVS, but without the bugs and misfeatures.

In February 2000, they contacted Karl Fogel, the author of Open Source Development with CVS (Coriolis, 1999), and asked if he'd like to work on this new project. Coincidentally, at the time Karl was already discussing a design for a new version control system with his friend Jim Blandy. In 1995, the two had started Cyclic Software, a company providing CVS support contracts, and although they later sold the business, they still used CVS every day at their jobs. Their frustration with CVS had led Jim to think carefully about better ways to manage versioned data, and he'd already come up with not only the Subversion name, but also the basic design of the Subversion data store. When CollabNet called, Karl immediately agreed to work on the project, and Jim got his employer, Red Hat Software, to essentially donate him to the project for an indefinite period of time. CollabNet hired Karl and Ben Collins-Sussman, and detailed design work began in May 2000. With the help of some well-placed prods from Brian Behlendorf and Jason Robbins of CollabNet, and from Greg Stein (at the time an independent developer active in the WebDAV/DeltaV specification process), Subversion quickly attracted a community of active developers. It turned out that many people had encountered the same frustrating experiences with CVS and welcomed the chance to finally do something about it.

最初的设计小组设定了简单的开发目标。他们不想在版本控制方法学中开垦处女地,他们只是希望修正 CVS。他们决定 Subversion 应符合 CVS 的特性,并保留相同的开发模型,但不再重复 CVS 的一些显著缺陷。尽管 Subversion 并不需要成为 CVS 的完全替代品,但它应该与 CVS 保持足够的相似性,以使 CVS 用户可以轻松的转移到 Subversion 上。

经过14个月的编码,2001年8月31日,Subversion 能够自己管理自己了,开发者停止使用 CVS 保存 Subversion 的代码,而使用 Subversion 本身。

While CollabNet started the project, and still funds a large chunk of the work (it pays the salaries of a few full-time Subversion developers), Subversion is run like most open source projects, governed by a loose, transparent set of rules that encourage meritocracy. In 2009, CollabNet worked with the Subversion developers towards the goal of integrating the Subversion project into the Apache Software Foundation (ASF), one of the most well-known collectives of open source projects in the world. Subversion's technical roots, community priorities, and development practices were a perfect fit for the ASF, many of whose members were already active Subversion contributors. In early 2010, Subversion was fully adopted into the ASF's family of top-level projects, moved its project web presence to http://subversion.apache.org, and was rechristened Apache Subversion.

1.3. Subversion 的架构

图 1 “Subversion 的架构”给出了 Subversion 设计总体上的俯视图

图 1. Subversion 的架构

Subversion 的架构


On one end is a Subversion repository that holds all of your versioned data. On the other end is your Subversion client program, which manages local reflections of portions of that versioned data. Between these extremes are multiple routes through a Repository Access (RA) layer, some of which go across computer networks and through network servers which then access the repository, others of which bypass the network altogether and access the repository directly.

1.4. Subversion 的组件

安装好的 Subversion 由几个部分组成,下面将简单的介绍一下这些组件。下文的描述或许过于简略,不易理解,但不用担心—本书后面的章节中会用更多的内容来详细阐述这些组件。

svn

命令行客户端程序

svnversion

此工具用来显示工作副本的状态(用术语来说,就是当前项目的修订版本)。

svnlook

直接查看 Subversion 版本库的工具

svnadmin

建立, 调整和修复 Subversion 版本库的工具

mod_dav_svn

Apache HTTP 服务器的一个插件,使版本库可以通过网络访问

svnserve

A custom standalone server program, runnable as a daemon process or invokable by SSH; another way to make your repository available to others over a network

svndumpfilter

过滤 Subversion 版本库转储数据流的工具

svnsync

一个通过网络增量镜像版本库的程序

1.5. Subversion 有什么新东西?

The first edition of this book was published by O'Reilly Media in 2004, shortly after Subversion had reached 1.0. Since that time, the Subversion project has continued to release new major releases of the software. Here's a quick summary of major new changes since Subversion 1.0. Note that this is not a complete list; for full details, please visit Subversion's web site at http://subversion.apache.org.

Subversion 1.1 (2004年9月)

1.1 版本引入了 FSFS,纯文件的版本库存储选项。虽然 Berkeley DB 后端被广泛的使用,但因为 FSFS 其较低的门槛和较小的管理需要,FSFS 还是成为新建版本库的缺省的选项。另外这个版本能够将符号链纳入版本控制,能够自动封装 URL,还有本地化的用户界面。

Subversion 1.2 (2005年5月)

1.2 版本引入了文件在服务器端锁定的功能,实现对特定资源的顺序访问。虽然 Subversion 一直基本上是一个并行版本控制系统,特定类型的的二进制文件(例如艺术作品)不能合并在一起,锁定特性填补了对此类资源的版本化保护。随着锁定也引入了一个完整的 WebDAV 自动版本实现,允许 Subversion 版本库作为网络文件夹加载。最后,Subversion 1.2 开始使用新的,更快的二进制差异算法来压缩和检索文件的旧版本。

Subversion 1.3 (2005年12月)

1.3 版本为 svnserve 服务器引入路径为基础的授权控制,与 Apache 服务器对应的特性匹配。Apache 服务器自己也获得了新的日志特性,Subversion 其它语言的 API 绑定也取得了巨大的进步。

Subversion 1.4(2006年9月)

1.4 版本引入了完全的新工具 — svnsync — 用来通过网络完成单向的版本库复制。一个重要的部分是工作副本元数据得到修补,不再使用 XML(获得客户端的速度改善),而 Berkeley DB 版本库后端获得了在发生崩溃时自动恢复的能力。

Subversion 1.5 (2008年6月)

Release 1.5 took much longer to finish than prior releases, but the headliner feature was gigantic: semi-automated tracking of branching and merging. This was a huge boon for users, and pushed Subversion far beyond the abilities of CVS and into the ranks of commercial competitors such as Perforce and ClearCase. Subversion 1.5 also introduced a bevy of other user-focused features, such as interactive resolution of file conflicts, sparse checkouts, client-side management of changelists, powerful new syntax for externals definitions, and SASL authentication support for the svnserve server.

Subversion 1.6 (2009年3月)

Release 1.6 continued to make branching and merging more robust by introducing tree conflicts, and offered improvements to several other existing features: more interactive conflict resolution options; de-telescoping and outright exclusion support for sparse checkouts; file-based externals definitions; and operational logging support for svnserve similar to what mod_dav_svn offered. Also, the command-line client introduced a new shortcut syntax for referring to Subversion repository URLs.

2. 读者

This book is written for computer-literate folk who want to use Subversion to manage their data. While Subversion runs on a number of different operating systems, its primary user interface is command-line-based. That command-line tool (svn), and some additional auxiliary programs, are the focus of this book.

For consistency, the examples in this book assume that the reader is using a Unix-like operating system and is relatively comfortable with Unix and command-line interfaces. That said, the svn program also runs on non-Unix platforms such as Microsoft Windows. With a few minor exceptions, such as the use of backward slashes (\) instead of forward slashes (/) for path separators, the input to and output from this tool when run on Windows are identical to that of its Unix counterpart.

大多数读者可能是那些需要跟踪代码变化的程序员或者系统管理员。这是 Subversion 最普遍的用途,因此这个场景贯穿于整本书的例子中。但是 Subversion 可以用来管理任何类型的数据 — 图像, 音乐, 数据库, 文档等等。对于 Subversion,数据就是数据而已。

While this book is written with the assumption that the reader has never used a version control system, we've also tried to make it easy for users of CVS (and other systems) to make a painless leap into Subversion. Special sidebars may mention other version control systems from time to time, and 附录 B, CVS 用户的 Subversion 指南 summarizes many of the differences between CVS and Subversion.

需要说明的是,所有源代码示例仅仅是例子而已。这些例子需要通过正确编译器参数进行编译,在这里列举它们只是为了说明特定的场景,并非为了展示优秀的编码风格或实践。

3. 怎样阅读本书

技术书籍经常要面对这样两难的困境:是迎合自上至下的初学者,还是自下至上的初学者。一个自上至下的学习者会喜欢略读文档,得到对系统工作原理的总体看法;然后她才会开始实际使用软件。而一个自下至上的学习者,是通过实践学习的人,她希望快速的开始使用软件,自己领会软件的使用,只在必要时读取相关章节。大多数图书会倾向于针对某一类读者,而本书毫无疑问倾向于自上至下的方法(如果你阅读了本节,那你也一定是一个自上至下的学习者!)。然而,如果你是自下至上的人,不要失望。本书以 Subversion 为主题的广泛观察进行组织,每个章节都包含了大量可以尝试的详细实例。如果你希望马上开工,没有耐心等待,你可以看附录 A, Subversion 快速入门指南

本书适用于具有不同背景知识的各个层次的读者 - 从未使用过版本控制的新手,到经验丰富的系统管理员都能够从本书中获益。根据基础的不同,某些的章节可能对某些读者更有价值。下面的内容可以看作是为不同类型的读者提供的推荐阅读清单

资深系统管理员

假定你从前使用过版本控制,并且迫切需要建立起 Subversion 服务器并尽快运行起来。第 5 章 版本库管理第 6 章 服务配置将会告诉你如何建立起一个版本库,并将其在网络上发布。然后,第 2 章 基本使用附录 B, CVS 用户的 Subversion 指南将向你展示怎样使用 Subversion 客户端软件。

新用户

如果管理员已经为你准备好了 Subversion 服务,你所需要的是学习如何使用客户端。如果你没有使用版本控制系统,那么第 1 章 基本概念介绍了版本控制的重要思想,第 2 章 基本使用是重要的入门教程。

高级用户

无论是用户还是管理员,项目终将会壮大起来。那时,就需要学习更多 Subversion 的高级功能(第 3 章 高级主题),像如何使用分支和执行合并(第 4 章 分支与合并),怎样配制运行参数(第 7 章 定制你的 Subversion 体验),等等。这两章在学习的初期并不重要,但熟悉了基本操作之后还是非常有必要了解一下。

开发者

你应该已经很熟悉 Subversion 了,并且想扩展它或使用它的 API 开发新软件。第 8 章 嵌入 Subversion将最适合你。

本书以参考材料作为结束 — 第 9 章 Subversion 完全参考是一部 Subversion 全部命令的详细指南,此外,在附录中还有许多很有意义的主题。阅读完本书后,这些章节将会是你经常查阅的内容。

4. 本书的结构

以下是各个章节的内容介绍:

第 1 章 基本概念

介绍了版本控制的基础知识及不同的版本模型,同时讲述了 Subversion 版本库,工作副本和修订版本的概念。

第 2 章 基本使用

引领你开始一个 Subversion 用户的工作。示范怎样使用 Subversion 获得, 修改和提交数据。

第 3 章 高级主题

覆盖了许多普通用户最终要面对的复杂特性,例如版本化的元数据, 文件锁定和 peg 修订版本。

第 4 章 分支与合并

讨论分支, 合并与标签,包括最佳实践的介绍,常见用例的描述,怎样取消修改,以及怎样从一个分支转到另一个分支。

第 5 章 版本库管理

讲述 Subversion 版本库的基本概念,怎样建立, 配置和维护版本库,以及哪些工具可以完成上述的工作。

第 6 章 服务配置

描述了如何配置 Subversion 服务器,以及访问版本库的不同方式:HTTP, svn 协议和本地磁盘访问。这里也介绍了认证,授权与匿名访问的细节。

第 7 章 定制你的 Subversion 体验

研究了 Subversion 的客户端配置文件,对国际化字符的处理,以及 Subversion 如何与外置工具交互。

第 8 章 嵌入 Subversion

介绍了 Subversion 的内部信息, Subversion 的文件系统,以及程序员眼中的工作副本管理区,展示了如何使用公共 API 编写 Subversion 应用程序。最重要的内容是,如何为 Subversion 的开发贡献力量。

第 9 章 Subversion 完全参考

以大量的实例,详细描述了 svn, svnadminsvnlook 的所有子命令。

附录 A, Subversion 快速入门指南

对于缺乏耐心的家伙,我们会立刻解释如何安装和使用 Subversion。我们已经告诫你了。

附录 B, CVS 用户的 Subversion 指南

详细比较了 Subversion 与 CVS 的异同,并针对如何消除多年使用 CVS 养成的坏习惯提出建议。内容包括 Subversion 版本号, 版本化的目录, 离线操作, updatestatus 的对比, 分支, 标签, 元数据, 冲突处理和认证。

附录 C, WebDAV 和自动版本

描述了WebDAV 与 DeltaV 的细节,并介绍了如何将 Subversion 版本库作为可读/写的 DAV 共享装载。

附录 D, 版权

Creative Commons Attribution License 的副本,本书的许可证。

5. 本书是免费的

本书最初是作为 Subversion 项目的文档,并由 Subversion 的开发者开始撰写的,后来成为一个独立的项目并进行了重写。与 Subversion 相同,它始终按自由许可证(参见 附录 D, 版权)发布。事实上,本书是在公众的关注中写出来的,最初是 Subversion 项目的一部分,这有两种含义:

  • 总可以在 Subversion 的版本库里找到本书的最新版本。

  • 可以任意分发或修改本书 — 它在自由许可证的控制之下。你的唯一限制是必须保留原始作者。当然,与其独自发布私有版本,不如向 Subversion 开发社区提供反馈和修正信息。

本书的在线主页和许多志愿者的翻译工作位于 http://svnbook.red-bean.com。在这个网站上,你可以找到本书最新快照和标签版本的链接的各种格式,以及访问本书的 Subversion 版本库(存放 DocBook XML 源文件)的指令。我们欢迎和鼓励反馈。请将所有的评论, 抱怨和对本书源文件的补丁发送到

6. 致谢

This book would not be possible (nor very useful) if Subversion did not exist. For that, the authors would like to thank Brian Behlendorf and CollabNet for the vision to fund such a risky and ambitious new open source project; Jim Blandy for the original Subversion name and design—we love you, Jim; and Karl Fogel for being such a good friend and a great community leader, in that order.[4]

Thanks to O'Reilly and the team of professional editors who have helped us polish this text at various stages of its evolution: Chuck Toporek, Linda Mui, Tatiana Apandi, Mary Brady, and Mary Treseler. Your patience and support has been tremendous.

Finally, we thank the countless people who contributed to this book with informal reviews, suggestions, and patches. An exhaustive listing of those folks' names would be impractical to print and maintain here, but may their names live on forever in this book's version control history!




[1] We'll refer to it simply as Subversion throughout this book. You'll thank us when you realize just how much space that saves!

[2] 或者像一个朋友说的,用别克拍苍蝇

[3] CollabNet Enterprise Edition has since been replaced by a new product line called CollabNet TeamForge.

[4] 噢,还要感谢 Karl 为了本书所付出的辛勤工作。

第 1 章 基本概念

This chapter is a short, casual introduction to Subversion and its approach to version control. We begin with a discussion of general version control concepts, work our way into the specific ideas behind Subversion, and show some simple examples of Subversion in use.

虽然我们在本章中以分享程序源代码作为例子,但是记住 Subversion 可以管理任何类型的文件集—它并非是程序员专用的。

1. 版本控制基础概念

A version control system (or revision control system) is a system that tracks incremental versions (or revisions) of files and, in some cases, directories over time. Of course, merely tracking the various versions of a user's (or group of users') files and directories isn't very interesting in itself. What makes a version control system useful is the fact that it allows you to explore the changes which resulted in each of those versions and facilitates the arbitrary recall of the same.

In this section, we'll introduce some fairly high-level version control system components and concepts. We'll limit our discussion to modern version control systems—in today's interconnected world, there is very little point in acknowledging version control systems which cannot operate across wide-area networks.

1.1. 版本库

At the core of the version control system is a repository, which is the central store of that system's data. The repository usually stores information in the form of a filesystem tree—a hierarchy of files and directories. Any number of clients connect to the repository, and then read or write to these files. By writing data, a client makes the information available to others; by reading data, the client receives information from others. 图 1.1 “一个典型的客户/服务器系统” illustrates this.

图 1.1. 一个典型的客户/服务器系统

一个典型的客户/服务器系统


Why is this interesting? So far, this sounds like the definition of a typical file server. And indeed, the repository is a kind of file server, but it's not your usual breed. What makes the repository special is that as the files in the repository are changed, the repository remembers each version of those files.

When a client reads data from the repository, it normally sees only the latest version of the filesystem tree. But what makes a version control client interesting is that it also has the ability to request previous states of the filesystem from the repository. A version control client can ask historical questions such as What did this directory contain last Wednesday? and Who was the last person to change this file, and what changes did he make? These are the sorts of questions that are at the heart of any version control system.

1.2. 工作副本

A version control system's value comes from the fact that it tracks versions of files and directories, but the rest of the software universe doesn't operate on versions of files and directories. Most software programs understand how to operate only on a single version of a specific type of file. So how does a version control user interact with an abstract—and, often, remote—repository full of multiple versions of various files in a concrete fashion? How does his or her word processing software, presentation software, source code editor, web design software, or some other program—all of which trade in the currency of simple data files—get access to such files? The answer is found in the version control construct known as a working copy.

A working copy is, quite literally, a local copy of a particular version of a user's VCS-managed data upon which that user is free to work. Working copies[5] appear to other software just as any other local directory full of files, so those programs don't have to be version-control-aware in order to read from and write to that data. The task of managing the working copy and communicating changes made to its contents to and from the repository falls squarely to the version control system's client software.

1.3. 版本模型

If the primary mission of a version control system is to track the various versions of digital information over time, a very close secondary mission in any modern version control system is to enable collaborative editing and sharing of that data. But different systems use different strategies to achieve this. It's important to understand these different strategies, for a couple of reasons. First, it will help you compare and contrast existing version control systems, in case you encounter other systems similar to Subversion. Beyond that, it will also help you make more effective use of Subversion, since Subversion itself supports a couple of different ways of working.

1.3.1. 文件共享的问题

所有的版本控制系统都需要解决这样一个基础问题:怎样让系统允许用户共享信息,而不会让他们因意外而互相干扰?版本库里意外覆盖别人的更改非常的容易。

考虑图 1.2 “需要避免的问题”的情景。假设我们有两个共同工作者,Harry 和 Sally。他们想同时编辑版本库里的同一个文件,如果 Harry 先保存它的修改,(过了一会)Sally 可能凑巧用自己的版本覆盖了这些文件,Harry 的更改不会永远消失(因为系统记录了每次修改),但 Harry 所有的修改不会出现在 Sally 新版本的文件中,因为她没有在开始的时候看到 Harry 的修改。所以 Harry 的工作还是丢失了—至少是从最新的版本中丢失了—而且可能是意外的。这就是我们要明确避免的情况!

图 1.2. 需要避免的问题

需要避免的问题


1.3.2. “锁定-修改-解锁”方案

许多版本控制系统使用锁定-修改-解锁机制解决这种问题,在这样的模型里,在一个时间段里版本库的一个文件只允许被一个人修改。首先在修改之前,Harry要锁定住这个文件,锁定很像是从图书馆借一本书,如果Harry锁住这个文件,Sally不能做任何修改,如果Sally想请求得到一个锁,版本库会拒绝这个请求。在Harry结束编辑并且放开这个锁之前,她只可以阅读文件。Harry解锁后,就要换班了,Sally得到自己的轮换位置,锁定并且开始编辑这个文件。图 1.3 ““锁定-修改-解锁”方案”描述了这样的解决方案。

图 1.3. “锁定-修改-解锁”方案

“锁定-修改-解锁”方案


锁定-修改-解锁模型有一点问题就是限制太多,经常会成为用户的障碍:

  • 锁定可能导致管理问题。有时候 Harry 会锁住文件然后忘了此事,这就是说 Sally 一直等待解锁来编辑这些文件,她在这里僵住了。然后 Harry 去旅行了,现在 Sally 只好去找管理员放开锁,这种情况会导致不必要的耽搁和时间浪费。

  • 锁定可能导致不必要的串行开发。如果 Harry 编辑一个文件的开始,Sally 想编辑同一个文件的结尾,这种修改不会冲突,设想修改可以正确的合并到一起,他们可以轻松的并行工作而没有太多的坏处,没有必要让他们轮流工作。

  • 锁定可能导致错误的安全状态。假设 Harry 锁定和编辑一个文件 A,同时 Sally 锁定并编辑文件 B。但是如果 A 和 B 互相依赖,修改导致它们不兼容会怎么样呢?这样 A 和 B 不能正确的工作了,锁定机制对防止此类问题将无能为力—从而产生了一种处于安全状态的假相。很容易想象 Harry 和 Sally 都以为自己锁住了文件,而且从一个安全,孤立的情况开始工作,因而没有尽早发现他们不匹配的修改。锁定经常成为真正交流的替代品。

1.3.3. “拷贝-修改-合并”方案

Subversion, CVS, and many other version control systems use a copy-modify-merge model as an alternative to locking. In this model, each user's client contacts the project repository and creates a personal working copy. Users then work simultaneously and independently, modifying their private copies. Finally, the private copies are merged together into a new, final version. The version control system often assists with the merging, but ultimately, a human being is responsible for making it happen correctly.

这是一个例子,Harry 和 Sally 为同一个项目各自建立了一个工作副本,工作是并行的,修改了同一个文件 A,Sally 首先保存修改到版本库,当 Harry 想去提交修改的时候,版本库提示文件 A 已经过期,换句话说,A在他上次更新之后已经更改了,所以当他通过客户端请求合并版本库和他的工作副本之后,碰巧 Sally 的修改和他的不冲突,所以一旦他把所有的修改集成到一起,他可以将工作拷贝保存到版本库,图 1.4 ““拷贝-修改-合并”方案”图 1.5 ““拷贝-修改-合并”方案(续)”展示了这一过程。

图 1.4. “拷贝-修改-合并”方案

“拷贝-修改-合并”方案


图 1.5. “拷贝-修改-合并”方案(续)

“拷贝-修改-合并”方案(续)


但是如果 Sally 和 Harry 的修改交迭了该怎么办?这种情况叫做冲突,这通常不是个大问题,当 Harry 告诉他的客户端去合并版本库的最新修改到自己的工作副本时,他的文件 A 就会处于冲突状态:他可以看到一对冲突的修改集,并手工的选择保留一组修改。需要注意的是软件不能自动的解决冲突,只有人可以理解并作出智能的选择,一旦 Harry 手工的解决了冲突—也许需要与 Sally 讨论—它可以安全的把合并的文件保存到版本库。

拷贝-修改-合并模型感觉有一点混乱,但在实践中,通常运行的很平稳,用户可以并行的工作,不必等待别人,当工作在同一个文件上时,也很少会有交迭发生,冲突并不频繁,处理冲突的时间远比等待解锁花费的时间少。

最后,一切都要归结到一条重要的因素:用户交流。当用户交流贫乏,语法和语义的冲突就会增加,没有系统可以强制用户完美的交流,没有系统可以检测语义上的冲突,所以没有任何证据能够承诺锁定系统可以防止冲突,实践中,锁定除了约束了生产力,并没有做什么事。

2. Subversion 的版本控制

We've mentioned already that Subversion is a modern, network-aware version control system. As we described in 第 1 节 “版本控制基础概念” (our high-level version control overview), a repository serves as the core storage mechanism for Subversion's versioned data, and it's via working copies that users and their software programs interact with that data. In this section, we'll begin to introduce the specific ways in which Subversion implements version control.

2.1. Subversion 版本库

Subversion implements the concept of a version control repository much as any other modern version control system would. Unlike a working copy, a Subversion repository is an abstract entity, able to be operated upon almost exclusively by Subversion's own libraries and tools. As most of a user's Subversion interactions involve the use of the Subversion client and occur in the context of a working copy, we spend the majority of this book discussing the Subversion working copy and how to manipulate it. For the finer details of the repository, though, check out 第 5 章 版本库管理.

2.2. 修订版本

A Subversion client commits (that is, communicates the changes made to) any number of files and directories as a single atomic transaction. By atomic transaction, we mean simply this: either all of the changes are accepted into the repository, or none of them is. Subversion tries to retain this atomicity in the face of program crashes, system crashes, network problems, and other users' actions.

Each time the repository accepts a commit, this creates a new state of the filesystem tree, called a revision. Each revision is assigned a unique natural number, one greater than the number assigned to the previous revision. The initial revision of a freshly created repository is numbered 0 and consists of nothing but an empty root directory.

图 1.6 “Tree changes over time”可以更形象的描述版本库,想象有一组修订号,从 0 开始,从左到右,每一个修订号有一个目录树挂在它下面,每一个树好像是一次提交后的版本库快照

图 1.6. Tree changes over time

Tree changes over time


2.3. 版本库的地址

Subversion client programs use URLs to identify versioned files and directories in Subversion repositories. For the most part, these URLs use the standard syntax, allowing for server names and port numbers to be specified as part of the URL.

  • http://svn.example.com/svn/project
  • http://svn.example.com:9834/repos

Subversion repository URLs aren't limited to only the http:// variety. Because Subversion offers several different ways for its clients to communicate with its servers, the URLs used to address the repository differ subtly depending on which repository access mechanism is employed. 表 1.1 “版本库访问 URL” describes how different URL schemes map to the available repository access methods. For more details about Subversion's server options, see 第 6 章 服务配置.

表 1.1. 版本库访问 URL

模式访问方法
file:///直接版本库访问(本地磁盘)
http://通过配置Subversion的Apache服务器的WebDAV协议
https://Same as http://, but with SSL encapsulation (encryption and authentication)
svn://通过定制的协议访问 svnserve 服务器
svn+ssh://Same as svn://, but through an SSH tunnel


Subversion's handling of URLs has some notable nuances. For example, URLs containing the file:// access method (used for local repositories) must, in accordance with convention, have either a server name of localhost or no server name at all:

  • file:///var/svn/repos
  • file://localhost/var/svn/repos

同样,在 Windows 平台下使用 file:// 模式时需要使用一个非正式的标准语法来访问本机上不在同一个磁盘分区中的版本库。下面的任意一个 URL 路径语法都可以工作,其中的 X 表示版本库所在的磁盘分区:

  • file:///X:/var/svn/repos
  • file:///X|/var/svn/repos

Note that a URL uses forward slashes even though the native (non-URL) form of a path on Windows uses backslashes. Also note that when using the file:///X|/ form at the command line, you need to quote the URL (wrap it in quotation marks) so that the vertical bar character is not interpreted as a pipe.

[注意]注意

也必须意识到 Subversion 的 file:// URL 不能在普通的 web 服务器中工作。当你尝试在 web 服务器查看一个 file:// URL 时,它会通过直接检测文件系统读取和显示那个位置的文件内容,但是 Subversion 的资源存在于虚拟文件系统(见第 1.1 节 “版本库层”)中,你的浏览器不会理解怎样读取这个文件系统。

The Subversion client will automatically encode URLs as necessary, just like a web browser does. For example, the URL http://host/path with space/project/españa — which contains both spaces and upper-ASCII characters — will be automatically interpreted by Subversion as if you'd provided http://host/path%20with%20space/project/espa%C3%B1a. If the URL contains spaces, be sure to place it within quotation marks at the command line so that your shell treats the whole thing as a single argument to the program.

There is one notable exception to Subversion's handling of URLs which also applies to its handling of local paths in many contexts, too. If the final path component of your URL or local path contains an at sign (@), you need to use a special syntax—described in 第 2 节 “Peg 和实施修订版本”—in order to make Subversion properly address that resource.

In Subversion 1.6, a new caret (^) notation was introduced as a shorthand for the URL of the repository's root directory. For example, you can use the ^/tags/bigsandwich/ to refer to the URL of the /tags/bigsandwich directory in the root of the repository. Note that this URL syntax works only when your current working directory is a working copy—the command-line client knows the repository's root URL by looking at the working copy's metadata. Also note that when you wish to refer precisely to the root directory of the repository, you must do so using ^/ (with the trailing slash character), not merely ^.

2.4. Subversion 的工作副本

一个 Subversion工 作副本是你本地机器上的一个普通目录,保存着一些文件,你可以任意的编辑文件,而且如果是源代码文件,你可以像平常一样编译,你的工作副本是你的私有工作区,在你明确的做了特定操作之前,Subversion 不会把你的修改与其他人的合并,也不会把你的修改展示给别人,你甚至可以拥有同一个项目的多个工作副本。

当你在工作副本作了一些修改并且确认它们工作正常之后,Subversion 提供了一个命令可以发布你的修改给项目中的其他人(通过写到版本库),如果别人发布了各自的修改,Subversion 提供了手段可以把这些修改与你的工作目录进行合并(通过读取版本库)。

工作副本也包括一些由 Subversion 创建并维护的额外文件,用来协助执行命令。通常情况下,你的工作副本的每个文件夹都有一个以 .svn 为名的文件夹,也被叫做工作副本的管理目录,这个目录里的文件能够帮助 Subversion 识别哪些文件做过修改,哪些文件相对于别人的工作已经过期。

[提示]提示

While .svn is the de facto name of the Subversion administrative directory, Windows users may run into problems with the ASP.NET Web application framework disallowing access to directories whose names begin with a dot (.). As a special consideration to users in such situations, Subversion will instead use _svn as the administrative directory name if it finds a variable named SVN_ASP_DOT_NET_HACK in its operating environment. Throughout this book, any reference you find to .svn applies also to _svn when this ASP.NET hack is in use.

2.4.1. 工作副本的工作方式

For each file in a working directory, Subversion records (among other things) two essential pieces of information:

  • 作为工作文件基准的版本(叫做文件的工作版本)

  • 本地副本最近一次被版本库更新的时间戳。

给定这些信息,通过与版本库通讯,Subversion可以告诉我们工作文件是处于如下四种状态的那一种:

未修改且是当前的

文件在工作目录里没有修改,在工作版本之后没有修改提交到版本库。svn commit 操作不做任何事情,svn update 不做任何事情。

本地已修改且是当前的

在工作目录已经修改,从基本修订版本之后没有修改提交到版本库。本地修改没有提交,因此 svn commit 会成功提交,svn update 不做任何事情。

本地未修改,已过时

这个文件在工作目录没有修改,但在版本库中已经修改了。这个文件最终将更新到最新版本,成为当时的公共修订版本。svn commit 不做任何事情,svn update 将会取得最新的版本到工作副本。

本地已修改,已过时

这个文件在工作目录和版本库都得到修改。一个 svn commit 将会失败,这个文件必须首先更新,svn update 命令会合并公共和本地修改,如果 Subversion 不可以自动完成,将会让用户解决冲突。

2.4.2. 工作副本基本交互操作

一个典型的 Subversion 版本库经常包含许多项目的文件(或者说源代码),通常每一个项目都是版本库的子目录,在这种布局下,一个用户的工作副本往往对应版本库的的一个子目录。

举一个例子,你的版本库包含两个软件项目,paintcalc。每个项目在它们各自的顶级子目录下,见图 1.7 “版本库的文件系统”

图 1.7. 版本库的文件系统

版本库的文件系统


To get a working copy, you must check out some subtree of the repository. (The term check out may sound like it has something to do with locking or reserving resources, but it doesn't; it simply creates a working copy of the project for you.) For example, if you check out /calc, you will get a working copy like this:

$ svn checkout http://svn.example.com/repos/calc
A    calc/Makefile
A    calc/integer.c
A    calc/button.c
Checked out revision 56.
$ ls -A calc
Makefile  button.c integer.c .svn/
$

列表中的 A 表示 Subversion 增加了一些条目到工作副本,你现在有了一个 /calc 的个人拷贝,有一个附加的目录—.svn—保存着前面提及的 Subversion 需要的额外信息。

假定你修改了 button.c,因为 .svn 目录记录着文件的修改日期和原始内容,Subversion 可以告诉你已经修改了文件,然而,在你明确告诉它之前,Subversion 不会将你的改变公开,将改变公开的操作被叫做提交(committing,或者是检入)修改到版本库。

将你的修改发布给别人,你可以使用 Subversion 的 commit 命令:

$ svn commit button.c -m "Fixed a typo in button.c."
Sending        button.c
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 57.
$

这时你对 button.c 的修改已经提交到了版本库,其中包含了关于此次提交的日志信息(例如是修改了拼写错误)。如果其他人取出了 /calc 的一个工作副本,他们会看到这个文件最新的版本。

假设你有个合作者 Sally,她和你同时取出了 /calc 的一个工作拷贝,你提交了对 button.c 的修改,Sally 的工作副本并没有改变,Subversion 只在用户要求的时候才改变工作副本。

要使项目最新,Sally 可以通过使用 svn update 命令,要求 Subversion 更新她的工作副本。这将结合你和所有其他人在她上次更新之后的改变到她的工作副本。

$ pwd
/home/sally/calc
$ ls -A
Makefile button.c integer.c .svn/
$ svn update
U    button.c
Updated to revision 57.
$

svn update 命令的输出表明 Subversion 更新了 button.c 的内容,注意,Sally 不必指定要更新的文件,subversion 利用 .svn 以及版本库的进一步信息决定哪些文件需要更新。

2.4.3. 混合版本的工作副本

As a general principle, Subversion tries to be as flexible as possible. One special kind of flexibility is the ability to have a working copy containing files and directories with a mix of different working revision numbers. Subversion working copies do not always correspond to any single revision in the repository; they may contain files from several different revisions. For example, suppose you check out a working copy from a repository whose most recent revision is 4:



calc/

   Makefile:4

   integer.c:4

   button.c:4

此刻,工作目录与版本库的修订版本 4 完全对应,然而,你修改了 button.c 并且提交之后,假设没有别的提交出现,你的提交会在版本库建立修订版本 5,你的工作副本会是这个样子的:



calc/

   Makefile:4

   integer.c:4

   button.c:5

假设此刻,Sally 提交了对 integer.c 的修改,建立修订版本 6,如果你使用 svn update 来更新你的工作副本,你会看到:



calc/

   Makefile:6

   integer.c:6

   button.c:6

Sally 对 integer.c 的改变会出现在你的工作副本,你对 button.c 的改变还在,在这个例子里,Makefile 在 4, 5, 6 的修订版本都是一样的,但是 Subversion 会把他的 Makefile 的修订号设为 6 来表明它是最新的,所以你在工作副本顶级目录作一次干净的更新,会使得所有内容对应版本库的同一修订版本。

2.4.3.1. 更新和提交是分开的

One of the fundamental rules of Subversion is that a push action does not cause a pull nor vice versa. Just because you're ready to submit new changes to the repository doesn't mean you're ready to receive changes from other people. And if you have new changes still in progress, svn update should gracefully merge repository changes into your own, rather than forcing you to publish them.

这个规则的主要副作用就是,工作副本需要记录额外的信息来追踪混合修订版本,并且也需要能容忍这种混合,当目录本身也是版本化的时候情况更加复杂。

举个例子,假定你有一个工作副本,修订版本号是10。你修改了 foo.html,然后执行 svn commit,在版本库里创建了修订版本15。当成功提交之后,许多用户希望工作副本完全变成修订版本15,但是事实并非如此。修订版本从10到15会发生任何修改,可是客户端在运行 svn update 之前不知道版本库发生了怎样的改变,svn commit 不会拖出任何新的修改。另一方面,如果 svn commit 会自动下载最新的修改,可以使得整个工作副本成为修订版本15—但是,那样我们会打破完全分开的原则。因此,Subversion 客户端最安全的方式是标记一个文件— foo.html —为修订版本15,工作副本余下的部分还是修订版本10。只有运行 svn update 才会下载最新的修改,整个工作副本被标记为修订版本15。

2.4.3.2. 混合修订版本很常见

事实上,每次运行 svn commit,你的工作拷贝都会进入混合多个修订版本的状态,刚刚提交的文件会比其他文件有更高的修订版本号。经过多次提交(其间没有更新),你的工作副本会完全是混合的修订版本。即使只有你一个人使用版本库,你依然会见到这个现象。为了检查混合工作修订版本,可以使用 svn status 命令的选项 --verbose (详细信息见第 4.3.1 节 “查看你的修改概况”)。

通常,新用户对于工作副本的混合修订版本一无所知,这会让人糊涂,因为许多客户端命令对于所检验条目的修订版本很敏感。例如 svn log 命令显示一个文件或目录的历史修改信息(见第 5.2 节 “产生历史修改列表”),当用户对一个工作副本对象调用这个命令,他们希望看到这个对象的整个历史信息。但是如果这个对象的修订版本已经相当老了(通常因为很长时间没有运行 svn update),此时会显示比这个对象更老的历史。

2.4.3.3. 混合版本很有用

如果你的项目十分复杂,有时候你会发现强制工作副本的一部分回溯到过去非常有用(或者更新到过去的某个修订版本),你将在第 2 章 基本使用学习到如何这样做。或许你很希望测试某一子目录下某一子模块的早期版本,又或是要测试一个 bug 什么时候发生,这是版本控制系统像时间机器的一个方面—这个特性允许工作副本的任何一个部分在历史中前进或后退。

2.4.3.4. 混合版本有限制

无论你如何在工作副本中利用混合修订版本,这种灵活性还是有限制的。

首先,你不可以提交一个不是完全最新的文件或目录,如果有个新的版本存在于版本库,你的删除操作会被拒绝,这防止你不小心破坏你没有见到的东西。

第二,如果目录已经不是最新的了,你不能提交一个目录的元数据更改。你将会在第 3 章 高级主题学习附加属性,一个目录的工作修订版本定义了许多条目和属性,因而对一个过期的版本提交属性会破坏一些你没有见到的属性。

3. 总结

我们在这一章里学习了许多 Subversion 的基本概念:

  • 我们介绍了中央版本库, 客户工作副本和版本库修订树的概念。

  • 我们介绍了两个协作者如何使用 Subversion 通过拷贝-修改-合并模型发布和获得对方的修改。

  • 我们讨论了一些 Subversion 跟踪和管理工作副本信息的方式。

现在,你一定对 Subversion 在多数情形下的工作方式有了很好的认识,有了这些知识的武装,你一定已经准备好跳到下一章去了,一个关于 Subversion 命令与特性的详细教程。




[5] The term working copy can be generally applied to any one file version's local instance. When most folks use the term, though, they are referring to a whole directory tree containing files and subdirectories managed by the version control system.

第 2 章 基本使用

Theory is useful, but its application is just plain fun. Let's move now into the details of using Subversion. By the time you reach the end of this chapter, you will be able to perform all the tasks you need to use Subversion in a normal day's work. You'll start with getting your files into Subversion, followed by an initial checkout of your code. We'll then walk you through making changes and examining those changes. You'll also see how to bring changes made by others into your working copy, examine them, and work through any conflicts that might arise.

This chapter will not provide exhaustive coverage of all of Subversion's commands—rather, it's a conversational introduction to the most common Subversion tasks that you'll encounter. This chapter assumes that you've read and understood 第 1 章 基本概念 and are familiar with the general model of Subversion. For a complete reference of all commands, see 第 9 章 Subversion 完全参考.

Also, this chapter assumes that the reader is seeking information about how to interact in a basic fashion with an existing Subversion repository. No repository means no working copy; no working copy means not much of interest in this chapter. There are many Internet sites which offer free or inexpensive Subversion repository hosting services. Or, if you'd prefer to set up and administer your own repositories, check out 第 5 章 版本库管理. But don't expect the examples in this chapter to work without the user having access to a Subversion repository.

Finally, any Subversion operation that contacts the repository over a network may potentially require that the user authenticate. For the sake of simplicity, our examples throughout this chapter avoid demonstrating and discussing authentication. Be aware that if you hope to apply the knowledge herein to an existing, real-world Subversion instance, you'll probably be forced to provide at least a username and password to the server. See 第 11.2 节 “客户端凭证” for a detailed description of Subversion's handling of authentication and client credentials.

1. 求助!

It goes without saying that this book exists to be a source of information and assistance for Subversion users new and old. Conveniently, though, the Subversion command-line is self-documenting, alleviating the need to grab a book off the shelf (wooden, virtual, or otherwise). The svn help command is your gateway to that built-in documentation:

$ svn help
Subversion command-line client, version 1.6.13.
Type 'svn help <subcommand>' for help on a specific subcommand.
Type 'svn --version' to see the program version and RA modules
  or 'svn --version --quiet' to see just the version number.

Most subcommands take file and/or directory arguments, recursing
on the directories.  If no arguments are supplied to such a
command, it recurses on the current directory (inclusive) by default.

Available subcommands:
   add
   blame (praise, annotate, ann)
   cat
…

As described in the previous output, you can ask for help on a particular subcommand by running svn help SUBCOMMAND. Subversion will respond with the full usage message for that subcommand, including its syntax, options, and behavior:

$ svn help help
help (?, h): Describe the usage of this program or its subcommands.
usage: help [SUBCOMMAND...]

Global options:
  --username ARG           : specify a username ARG
  --password ARG           : specify a password ARG
…

Many Unix-based distributions of Subversion include manual pages of the sort that can be invoked using the man program, but those tend to carry only pointers to other sources of real help, such as the project's website and to the website which hosts this book. Also, several companies offer Subversion help and support, too, usually via a mixture of web-based discussion forums and fee-based consulting. And of course, the Internet holds a decade's worth of Subversion-related discussions just begging to be located by your favorite search engine. Subversion help is never too far away.

2. 导入数据到你的版本库

有两种方法可以将新文件引入 Subversion 版本库:svn importsvn add,我们将在本章讨论 svn import,而会在回顾 Subversion 的典型一天时讨论 svn add

2.1. 导入文件和目录

svn import 是将未版本化文件导入版本库的最快方法,会根据需要创建中介目录。svn import 不需要一个工作副本,你的文件会直接提交到版本库,这通常用在你希望将一组文件加入到 Subversion 版本库时,例如:

$ svn import /path/to/mytree \
             http://svn.example.com/svn/repo/some/project \
             -m "Initial import"
Adding         mytree/foo.c
Adding         mytree/bar.c
Adding         mytree/subdir
Adding         mytree/subdir/quux.h

Committed revision 1.
$

The previous example copied the contents of the local directory mytree into the directory some/project in the repository. Note that you didn't have to create that new directory first—svn import does that for you. Immediately after the commit, you can see your data in the repository:

$ svn list http://svn.example.com/svn/repo/some/project
bar.c
foo.c
subdir/
$

Note that after the import is finished, the original local directory is not converted into a working copy. To begin working on that data in a versioned fashion, you still need to create a fresh working copy of that tree.

2.2. 推荐的版本库布局

Subversion provides the ultimate flexibility in terms of how you arrange your data. Because it simply versions directories and files, and because it ascribes no particular meaning to any of those objects, you may arrange the data in your repository in any way that you choose. Unfortunately, this flexibility also means that it's easy to find yourself lost without a roadmap as you attempt to navigate different Subversion repositories which may carry completely different and unpredictable arrangements of the data within them.

To counteract this confusion, we recommend that you follow a repository layout convention (established long ago, in the nascency of the Subversion project itself) in which a handful of strategically named Subversion repository directories convey valuable meaning about the data they hold. Most projects have a recognizable main line, or trunk, of development; some branches, which are divergent copies of development lines; and some tags, which are named, stable snapshots of a particular line of development. So we first recommend that each project have a recognizable project root in the repository, a directory under which all of the versioned information for that project—and only that project—lives. Secondly, we suggest that each project root contain a trunk subdirectory for the main development line, a branches subdirectory in which specific branches (or collections of branches) will be created, and a tags subdirectory in which specific tags (or collections of tags) will be created. Of course, if a repository houses only a single project, the root of the repository can serve as the project root, too.

以下是一些例子:

$ svn list file:///var/svn/single-project-repo
trunk/
branches/
tags/
$ svn list file:///var/svn/multi-project-repo
project-A/
project-B/
$ svn list file:///var/svn/multi-project-repo/project-A
trunk/
branches/
tags/
$

We talk much more about tags and branches in 第 4 章 分支与合并. For details and some advice on how to set up repositories when you have multiple projects, see 第 7.1 节 “版本库布局”. Finally, we discuss project roots more in 第 2.1 节 “规划你的版本库结构”.

2.3. 名称中有什么?

Subversion 努力不限制版本控制的数据类型。文件的内容和属性值都是按照二进制数据存储和传递,并且第 4.1 节 “文件内容类型”给 Subversion 提示,以说明对于特定文件文本化的操作是没有意义的,也有一些地方,Subversion 对存放的信息有限制。

Subversion 内部使用二进制处理数据—例如,属性名称,路径名和日志信息— UTF-8 编码的 Unicode,这并不意味着与 Subversion 的交互必须完全使用 UTF-8。作为一个惯例,Subversion 的客户端能够透明的转化 UTF-8 和你所使用系统的编码,前提是可以进行有意义的转换(当然是大多数目前常见的编码)。

此外,路径名称在 WebDAV 交换中会作为 XML 属性值,就像 Subversion 的管理文件。这意味着路径名称只能包含合法的 XML(1.0) 字符,Subversion 也会禁止路径名称中出现 TAB, CR 或 LF 字符,所以它们才不会在区别程序或如svn logsvn status (stat, st)的输出命令中断掉。

虽然看起来要记住很多事情,但在实践中这些限制很少会成为问题。只要你的本地设置兼容 UTF-8,也不在路径名称中使用控制字符,与 Subversion 的通讯就不会有问题。命令行客户端会添加一些额外的帮助字节—自动将你输入的 URL 路径字符转化为合法正确的内部用版本。

3. 创建工作副本

Most of the time, you will start using a Subversion repository by performing a checkout of your project. Checking out a directory from a repository creates a working copy of that directory on your local machine. Unless otherwise specified, this copy contains the youngest (that is, most recently created or modified) versions of the directory and its children found in the Subversion repository:

$ svn checkout http://svn.example.com/svn/repo/trunk
A    trunk/README
A    trunk/INSTALL
A    trunk/src/main.c
A    trunk/src/header.h
…
Checked out revision 8810.
$

Although the preceding example checks out the trunk directory, you can just as easily check out a deeper subdirectory of a repository by specifying that subdirectory's URL as the checkout URL:

$ svn checkout http://svn.example.com/svn/repo/trunk/src
A    src/main.c
A    src/header.h
A    src/lib/helpers.c
…
Checked out revision 8810.
$

Since Subversion uses a copy-modify-merge model instead of lock-modify-unlock (see 第 1.3 节 “版本模型”), you can immediately make changes to the files and directories in your working copy. Your working copy is just like any other collection of files and directories on your system. You can edit the files inside it, rename it, even delete the entire working copy and forget about it.

[警告]警告

因为你的工作副本同你系统上的文件和目录没有任何区别,你可以随意修改文件,但是你必须告诉 Subversion 你做的其他任何事。例如,你希望拷贝或移动工作副本的一个文件,你应该使用 svn copy 或者 svn move,而不要使用操作系统的拷贝移动命令,我们会在本章后面详细介绍。

除非你准备好了提交一个新文件或目录,或改变了已存在的,否则没有必要通知Subversion你做了什么。

Notice that in the previous pair of examples, Subversion chose to create a working copy in a directory named for the final component of the checkout URL. This occurs only as a convenience to the user when the checkout URL is the only bit of information provided to the svn checkout command. Subversion's command-line client gives you additional flexibility, though, allowing you to optionally specify the local directory name that Subversion should use for the working copy it creates. For example:

$ svn checkout http://svn.example.com/svn/repo/trunk my-working-copy
A    my-working-copy/README
A    my-working-copy/INSTALL
A    my-working-copy/src/main.c
A    my-working-copy/src/header.h
…
Checked out revision 8810.
$

If the local directory you specify doesn't yet exist, that's okay—svn checkout will create it for you.

4. 基本的工作循环

Subversion 有许多特性, 选项和华而不实的高级功能,但日常的工作中你只使用其中的一小部分,在这一节里,我们会介绍许多你在日常工作中常用的命令。

典型的工作周期是这样的:

  1. Update your working copy. This involves the use of the svn update command.

  2. Make your changes. The most common changes that you'll make are edits to the contents of your existing files. But sometimes you need to add, remove, copy and move files and directories—the svn add, svn delete, svn copy, and svn move commands handle those sorts of structural changes within the working copy.

  3. Review your changes. The svn status and svn diff commands are critical to reviewing the changes you've made in your working copy.

  4. Fix your mistakes. Nobody's perfect, so as you review your changes, you may spot something that's not quite right. Sometimes the easiest way to fix a mistake is start all over again from scratch. The svn revert command restores a file or directory to its unmodified state.

  5. Resolve any conflicts (merge others' changes). In the time it takes you to make and review your changes, others might have made and published changes, too. You'll want to integrate their changes into your working copy to avoid the potential out-of-dateness scenarios when you attempt to publish your own. Again, the svn update command is the way to do this. If this results in local conflicts, you'll need to resolve those using the svn resolve command.

  6. Publish (commit) your changes. The svn commit command transmits your changes to the repository where, if they are accepted, they create the newest versions of all the things you modified. Now others can see your work, too!

4.1. 更新你的工作副本

When working on a project that is being modified via multiple working copies, you'll want to update your working copy to receive any changes committed from other working copies since your last update. These might be changes that other members of your project team have made, or they might simply be changes you've made yourself from a different computer. To protect your data, Subversion won't allow you commit new changes to out-of-date files and directories, so it's best to have the latest versions of all your project's files and directories before making new changes of your own.

Use svn update to bring your working copy into sync with the latest revision in the repository:

$ svn update
U    foo.c
U    bar.c
Updated to revision 2.
$

这种情况下,其他人在你上次更新之后提交了对foo.cbar.c的修改,因此Subversion更新你的工作副本来引入这些更改。

When the server sends changes to your working copy via svn update, a letter code is displayed next to each item to let you know what actions Subversion performed to bring your working copy up to date. To find out what these letters mean, run svn help update or see svn update (up).

4.2. 开始修改

Now you can get to work and make changes in your working copy. You can make two kinds of changes to your working copy: file changes and tree changes. You don't need to tell Subversion that you intend to change a file; just make your changes using your text editor, word processor, graphics program, or whatever tool you would normally use. Subversion automatically detects which files have been changed, and in addition, it handles binary files just as easily as it handles text files—and just as efficiently, too. Tree changes are different, and involve changes to a directory's structure. Such changes include adding and removing files, renaming files or directories, and copying files or directories to new locations. For tree changes, you use Subversion operations to schedule files and directories for removal, addition, copying, or moving. These changes may take place immediately in your working copy, but no additions or removals will happen in the repository until you commit them.

下面是 Subversion 用来修改目录树结构的五个最常用的子命令。

svn add FOO

Use this to schedule the file, directory, or symbolic link FOO to be added to the repository. When you next commit, FOO will become a child of its parent directory. Note that if FOO is a directory, everything underneath FOO will be scheduled for addition. If you want only to add FOO itself, pass the --depth=empty option.

svn delete FOO

Use this to schedule the file, directory, or symbolic link FOO to be deleted from the repository. If FOO is a file or link, it is immediately deleted from your working copy. If FOO is a directory, it is not deleted, but Subversion schedules it for deletion. When you commit your changes, FOO will be entirely removed from your working copy and the repository.[6]

svn copy FOO BAR

Create a new item BAR as a duplicate of FOO and automatically schedule BAR for addition. When BAR is added to the repository on the next commit, its copy history is recorded (as having originally come from FOO). svn copy does not create intermediate directories unless you pass the --parents option.

svn move FOO BAR

This command is exactly the same as running svn copy FOO BAR; svn delete FOO. That is, BAR is scheduled for addition as a copy of FOO, and FOO is scheduled for removal. svn move does not create intermediate directories unless you pass the --parents option.

svn mkdir FOO

This command is exactly the same as running mkdir FOO; svn add FOO. That is, a new directory named FOO is created and scheduled for addition.

4.3. 检查你的修改

Once you've finished making changes, you need to commit them to the repository, but before you do so, it's usually a good idea to take a look at exactly what you've changed. By examining your changes before you commit, you can compose a more accurate log message (a human-readable description of the committed changes stored alongside those changes in the repository). You may also discover that you've inadvertently changed a file, and that you need to undo that change before committing. Additionally, this is a good opportunity to review and scrutinize changes before publishing them. You can see an overview of the changes you've made by using the svn status command, and you can dig into the details of those changes by using the svn diff command.

4.3.1. 查看你的修改概况

To get an overview of your changes, use the svn status command. You'll probably use svn status more than any other Subversion command.

[提示]提示

Because the cvs status command's output was so noisy, and because cvs update not only performs an update, but also reports the status of your local changes, most CVS users have grown accustomed to using cvs update to report their changes. In Subversion, the update and status reporting facilities are completely separate. See 第 4 节 “区分状态和更新” for more details.

If you run svn status at the top of your working copy with no additional arguments, it will detect and report all file and tree changes you've made.

$ svn status
?       scratch.c
A       stuff/loot
A       stuff/loot/new.c
D       stuff/old.c
M       bar.c
$

In its default output mode, svn status prints seven columns of characters, followed by several whitespace characters, followed by a file or directory name. The first column tells the status of a file or directory and/or its contents. Some of the most common codes that svn status displays are:

? item

The file, directory, or symbolic link item is not under version control.

A item

预定加入到版本库的文件, 目录或符号链的item

C item

文件 item 发生了冲突。从服务器收到的修改与工作副本的本地修改发生交迭(在更新期间不会被解决)。在你提交到版本库前,必须手工解决冲突。

D item

文件, 目录或是符号链item预定从版本库中删除。

M item

文件item的内容被修改了。

如果你传递一个路径给svn status,它只给你这个项目的信息:

$ svn status stuff/fish.c
D       stuff/fish.c

svn status也有一个--verbose(-v)选项,它可以显示工作副本中的所有项目,即使没有改变过的:

$ svn status -v
M               44        23    sally     README
                44        30    sally     INSTALL
M               44        20    harry     bar.c
                44        18    ira       stuff
                44        35    harry     stuff/trout.c
D               44        19    ira       stuff/fish.c
                44        21    sally     stuff/things
A                0         ?     ?        stuff/things/bloo.h
                44        36    harry     stuff/things/gloo.c

这是 svn status长形式。第一列的含义不变,第二列显示工作版本号。第三列和第四列显示最后一次修改的版本号和修改者。

None of the prior invocations to svn status contact the repository—they merely report what is known about the working copy items based on the records stored in the working copy administrative area and on the timestamps and contents of modified files. But sometimes it is useful to see which of the items in your working copy have been modified in the repository since the last time you updated your working copy. For this, svn status offers the --show-updates (-u) option, which contacts the repository and adds information about items that are out of date:

$ svn status -u -v
M      *        44        23    sally     README
M               44        20    harry     bar.c
       *        44        35    harry     stuff/trout.c
D               44        19    ira       stuff/fish.c
A                0         ?     ?        stuff/things/bloo.h
Status against revision:   46

Notice in the previous example the two asterisks: if you were to run svn update at this point, you would receive changes to README and trout.c. This tells you some very useful information—because one of those items is also one that you have locally modified (the file README), you'll need to update and get the servers changes for that file before you commit, or the repository will reject your commit for being out of date. We discuss this in more detail later.

svn status can display much more information about the files and directories in your working copy than we've shown here—for an exhaustive description of svn status and its output, run svn help status or see svn status (stat, st).

4.3.2. 检查你的本地修改的详情

Another way to examine your changes is with the svn diff command, which displays differences in file content. When you run svn diff at the top of your working copy with no arguments, Subversion will print the changes you've made to human-readable files in your working copy. It displays those changes in unified diff format, a format which describes changes as hunks (or snippets) of a file's content where each line of text is prefixed with a single-character code: a space, which means the line was unchanged; a minus sign (-), which means the line was removed from the file; or a plus sign (+), which means the line was added to the file. In the context of svn diff, those minus-sign- and plus-sign-prefixed lines show how the lines looked before and after your modifications, respectively.

举例如下:

$ svn diff
Index: bar.c
===================================================================
--- bar.c	(revision 3)
+++ bar.c	(working copy)
@@ -1,7 +1,12 @@
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#include <unistd.h>
+
+#include <stdio.h>

 int main(void) {
-  printf("Sixty-four slices of American Cheese...\n");
+  printf("Sixty-five slices of American Cheese...\n");
 return 0;
 }

Index: README
===================================================================
--- README	(revision 3)
+++ README	(working copy)
@@ -193,3 +193,4 @@
+Note to self:  pick up laundry.

Index: stuff/fish.c
===================================================================
--- stuff/fish.c	(revision 1)
+++ stuff/fish.c	(working copy)
-Welcome to the file known as 'fish'.
-Information on fish will be here soon.

Index: stuff/things/bloo.h
===================================================================
--- stuff/things/bloo.h	(revision 8)
+++ stuff/things/bloo.h	(working copy)
+Here is a new file to describe
+things about bloo.

The svn diff command produces this output by comparing your working files against its pristine text-base. Files scheduled for addition are displayed as files in which every line was added; files scheduled for deletion are displayed as if every line was removed from those files. The output from svn diff is compatible with the patch program. The patch program reads and applies patch files (or patches), which are files that describe differences made to one or more files. Because of this, you can share the changes you've made in your working copy with someone else without first committing those changes by creating a patch file from the redirected output of svn diff:

$ svn diff > patchfile
$

Subversion uses its internal diff engine, which produces unified diff format, by default. If you want diff output in a different format, specify an external diff program using --diff-cmd and pass any additional flags that it needs via the --extensions (-x) option. For example, you might want Subversion to defer its difference calculation and display to the GNU diff program, asking that program to print local modifications made to the file foo.c in context diff format (another flavor of difference format) while ignoring changes made only to the case of the letters used in the file's contents:

$ svn diff --diff-cmd /usr/bin/diff -x "-i" foo.c
…
$

4.4. 修正错误

Suppose while viewing the output of svn diff you determine that all the changes you made to a particular file are mistakes. Maybe you shouldn't have changed the file at all, or perhaps it would be easier to make different changes starting from scratch. You could edit the file again and unmake all those changes. You could try to find a copy of how the file looked before you changed it, and then copy its contents atop your modified version. You could attempt to apply those changes to the file again in reverse using patch -R. And there are probably other approaches you could take.

Fortunately in Subversion, undoing your work and starting over from scratch doesn't require such acrobatics. Just use the svn revert command:

$ svn status README
M       README
$ svn revert README
Reverted 'README'
$ svn status README
$

In this example, Subversion has reverted the file to its premodified state by overwriting it with the pristine version of the file cached in the text-base area. But note that svn revert can undo any scheduled operation—for example, you might decide that you don't want to add a new file after all:

$ svn status new-file.txt
?       new-file.txt
$ svn add new-file.txt
A         new-file.txt
$ svn revert new-file.txt
Reverted 'new-file.txt'
$ svn status new-file.txt
?       new-file.txt
$

或许你不小心删除了一个文件:

$ svn status README
$ svn delete README
D         README
$ svn revert README
Reverted 'README'
$ svn status README
$

The svn revert command offers salvation for imperfect people. It can save you huge amounts of time and energy that would otherwise be spent manually unmaking changes or, worse, disposing of your working copy and checking out a fresh one just to have a clean slate to work with again.

4.5. 解决冲突

We've already seen how svn status -u can predict conflicts, but dealing with those conflicts is still something that remains to be done. Conflicts can occur any time you attempt to merge or integrate (in a very general sense) changes from the repository into your working copy. By now you know that svn update creates exactly that sort of scenario—that command's very purpose is to bring your working copy up to date with the repository by merging all the changes made since your last update into your working copy. So how does Subversion report these conflicts to you, and how do you deal with them?

Suppose you run svn update and you see this sort of interesting output:

$ svn update
U    INSTALL
G    README
Conflict discovered in 'bar.c'.
Select: (p) postpone, (df) diff-full, (e) edit,
        (mc) mine-conflict, (tc) theirs-conflict,
        (s) show all options: 

The U (which stands for Updated) and G (for merGed) codes are no cause for concern; those files cleanly absorbed changes from the repository. A file marked with U contains no local changes but was updated with changes from the repository. One marked with G had local changes to begin with, but the changes coming from the repository didn't overlap with those local changes.

It's the next few lines which are interesting. First, Subversion reports to you that in its attempt to merge outstanding server changes into the file bar.c, it has detected that some of those changes clash with local modifications you've made to that file in your working copy but have not yet committed. Perhaps someone has changed the same line of text you also changed. Whatever the reason, Subversion instantly flags this file as being in a state of conflict. It then asks you what you want to do about the problem, allowing you to interactively choose an action to take toward resolving the conflict. The most commonly used options are displayed, but you can see all of the options by typing s:

…
Select: (p) postpone, (df) diff-full, (e) edit,
        (mc) mine-conflict, (tc) theirs-conflict,
        (s) show all options: s

  (e)  edit             - change merged file in an editor
  (df) diff-full        - show all changes made to merged file
  (r)  resolved         - accept merged version of file

  (dc) display-conflict - show all conflicts (ignoring merged version)
  (mc) mine-conflict    - accept my version for all conflicts (same)
  (tc) theirs-conflict  - accept their version for all conflicts (same)

  (mf) mine-full        - accept my version of entire file (even non-conflicts)
  (tf) theirs-full      - accept their version of entire file (same)

  (p)  postpone         - mark the conflict to be resolved later
  (l)  launch           - launch external tool to resolve conflict
  (s)  show all         - show this list

Select: (p) postpone, (df) diff-full, (e) edit,
        (mc) mine-conflict, (tc) theirs-conflict,
        (s) show all options:

在我们详细查看每个选项含义之前,让我们简短的回顾一下所有这些选项。

(e) edit

用你喜欢的编辑器打开冲突的文件,编辑器是环境变量EDITOR设置的。

(df) diff-full

使用标准区别格式显示base修订版本和冲突文件本身的区别。

(r) resolved

完成文件编辑之后,通知 svn 你已经解决了文件的冲突,它应该接受当前的内容—从本质上讲就是你已经解决了冲突。

(dc) display-conflict

Display all conflicting regions of the file, ignoring changes which were successfully merged.

(mc) mine-conflict

Discard any newly received changes from the server which conflict with your local changes to the file under review. However, accept and merge all non-conflicting changes received from the server for that file.

(tc) theirs-conflict

Discard any local changes which conflict with incoming changes from the server for the file under review. However, preserve all non-conflicting local changes to that file.

(mf) mine-full

Discard all newly received changes from the server for the file under review, but preserve all your local changes for that file.

(tf) theirs-full

Discard all your local changes to the file under review and use only the newly received changes from the server for that file.

(p) postpone

让文件在更新完成之后保持冲突状态。

(l) launch

启动外部程序来执行冲突解决,这需要一些预先的准备。

(s) show all

显示所有在冲突解决时可能使用的命令。

我们现在会更详细的覆盖这些命令,根据关联功能对其进行分组。

4.5.1. 交互式的查看冲突区别

Before deciding how to attack a conflict interactively, odds are that you'd like to see exactly what is in conflict. Two of the commands available at the interactively conflict resolution prompt can assist you here. The first is the diff-full command (df), which displays all the local modifications to the file in question plus any conflict regions:

…
Select: (p) postpone, (df) diff-full, (e) edit,
        (mc) mine-conflict, (tc) theirs-conflict,
        (s) show all options: df
--- .svn/text-base/sandwich.txt.svn-base      Tue Dec 11 21:33:57 2007
+++ .svn/tmp/tempfile.32.tmp     Tue Dec 11 21:34:33 2007
@@ -1 +1,5 @@
-Just buy a sandwich.
+<<<<<<< .mine
+Go pick up a cheesesteak.
+=======
+Bring me a taco!
+>>>>>>> .r32
…

The first line of the diff content shows the previous contents of the working copy (the BASE revision), the next content line is your change, and the last content line is the change that was just received from the server (usually the HEAD revision).

The second command is similar to the first, but the display-conflict (dc) command shows only the conflict regions, not all the changes made to the file. Additionally, this command uses a slightly different display format for the conflict regions which allows you to more easily compare the file's contents in those regions as they would appear in each of three states: original and unedited; with your local changes applied and the server's conflicting changes ignored; and with only the server's incoming changes applied and your local, conflicting changes reverted.

After reviewing the information provided by these commands, you're ready to move on to the next action.

4.5.2. 交互式的解决冲突区别

There are several different ways to resolve conflicts interactively—two of which allow you to selectively merge and edit changes, the rest of which allow you to simply pick a version of the file and move along.

If you wish to choose some combination of your local changes, you can use the edit command (e) to manually edit the file with conflict markers in a text editor (configured per the instructions in 第 3 节 “使用外置编辑器”). After you've edited the file, if you're satisfied with the changes you've made, you can tell Subversion that the edited file is no longer in conflict by using the resolve command (r).

Regardless of what your local Unix snob will likely tell you, editing the file by hand in your favorite text editor is a somewhat low-tech way of remedying conflicts (see 第 4.5.4 节 “手工合并冲突” for a walkthrough). For this reason, Subversion provides the launch resolution command (l) to fire up a fancy graphical merge tool instead (see 第 4.3 节 “External merge”).

如果你决定不需要合并任何变更,而只是接受某个版本的文件,你可以通过 mine-full 命令(mf)选择你的修改(也称为 mine)或使用 theirs-full 命令(tf)选择别人的。

Finally, there is also a pair of compromise options available. The mine-conflict (mc) and theirs-conflict (tc) commands instruct Subversion to select your local changes or the server's incoming changes, respectively, as the winner for all conflicts in the file. But, unlike the mine-full and theirs-full commands, these commands preserve both your local changes and changes received from the server in regions of the file where no conflict was detected.

4.5.3. 延后解决冲突

This may sound like an appropriate section for avoiding marital disagreements, but it's actually still about Subversion, so read on. If you're doing an update and encounter a conflict that you're not prepared to review or resolve, you can type p to postpone resolving a conflict on a file-by-file basis when you run svn update. If you know in advance that you don't want to resolve any conflicts interactively, you can pass the --non-interactive option to svn update, and any file in conflict will be marked with a C automatically.

The C (for Conflicted) means that the changes from the server overlapped with your own, and now you have to manually choose between them after the update has completed. When you postpone a conflict resolution, svn typically does three things to assist you in noticing and resolving that conflict:

  • Subversion 在更新时打印 C 标记,并且标记这个文件处于冲突状态。

  • 如果Subversion认为这个文件是可以合并的,它会置入冲突标记—特殊的横线分开冲突的两面—在文件里可视化的描述重叠的部分(Subversion 使用 svn:mime-type 属性来决定一个文件是否可以使用基于上下文的,以行为基础的合并,更多信息可以参见第 4.1 节 “文件内容类型”。)

  • 对于每一个冲突的文件,Subversion放置三个额外的未版本化文件到你的工作副本:

    filename.mine

    This is the file as it existed in your working copy before you began the update process. It contains any local modifications you had made to the file up to that point. (If Subversion considers the file to be unmergeable, the .mine file isn't created, since it would be identical to the working file.)

    filename.rOLDREV

    This is the file as it existed in the BASE revision—that is, the unmodified revision of the file in your working copy before you began the update process—where OLDREV is that base revision number.

    filename.rNEWREV

    This is the file that your Subversion client just received from the server via the update of your working copy, where NEWREV corresponds to the revision number to which you were updating (HEAD, unless otherwise requested).

举一个例子,Sally 修改了 sandwich.txt,还没有提交。这时候,Harry 提交了他对这个文件的修改。Sally 在提交之前更新她的工作副本,得到了冲突,她选择了延迟解决冲突:

$ svn update
Conflict discovered in 'sandwich.txt'.
Select: (p) postpone, (df) diff-full, (e) edit,
        (mc) mine-conflict, (tc) theirs-conflict,
        (s) show all options: p
C    sandwich.txt
Updated to revision 2.
Summary of conflicts:
  Text conflicts: 1
$ ls -1
sandwich.txt
sandwich.txt.mine
sandwich.txt.r1
sandwich.txt.r2

在这种情况下,Subversion 会允许 Sally 提交 sandwich.txt,直到这三个临时文件被删除。

$ svn commit -m "Add a few more things"
svn: Commit failed (details follow):
svn: Aborting commit: '/home/sally/svn-work/sandwich.txt' remains in conflict

如果你延迟解决冲突,你需要在 Subversion 允许你提交你的修改之前解决冲突。你可以通过 svn resolve 命令和 --accept 选项的多个参数之中的一个来完成。

如果你希望选择上次检出后修改之前的文件版本,选择 base 参数。

如果你希望选择只包含你修改的版本,选择 mine-full 参数。

如果你希望选择最近从服务器更新的版本(因此会丢弃你的所有编辑),选择 theirs-full 参数。

然而,如果你想在自己的修改与服务器端的修改之间部分选择的话,请手工合并冲突文本(检查和编辑文件中的冲突标记),然后选择参数 working

svn resolve 删除这三个临时文件,使用 --accept 选项指定的文件版本,从而 Subversion 不会再认为文件处于冲突状态。

$ svn resolve --accept working sandwich.txt
Resolved conflicted state of 'sandwich.txt'

4.5.4. 手工合并冲突

第一次尝试解决冲突让人感觉很害怕,但经过一点训练,它简单的像是骑着车子下坡。

这里一个简单的例子。由于不良的交流,你和同事 Sally 同时编辑了 sandwich.txt 。Sally 提交了修改,当你准备更新你的工作副本时,冲突发生了,你不得不去修改 sandwich.txt 来解决冲突。首先,看一下这个文件:

$ cat sandwich.txt
Top piece of bread
Mayonnaise
Lettuce
Tomato
Provolone
<<<<<<< .mine
Salami
Mortadella
Prosciutto
=======
Sauerkraut
Grilled Chicken
>>>>>>> .r2
Creole Mustard
Bottom piece of bread

小于号, 等于号和大于号字符串是冲突标记,并不是冲突的数据。你通常要确包这些内容在下次提交之前被删除,前两组冲突标记中间的内容是你在冲突区所做的修改:

<<<<<<< .mine
Salami
Mortadella
Prosciutto
=======

后两组冲突标记之间的内容是 Sally 提交的修改:

=======
Sauerkraut
Grilled Chicken
>>>>>>> .r2

Usually you won't want to just delete the conflict markers and Sally's changes—she's going to be awfully surprised when the sandwich arrives and it's not what she wanted. This is where you pick up the phone or walk across the office and explain to Sally that you can't get sauerkraut from an Italian deli.[7] Once you've agreed on the changes you will commit, edit your file and remove the conflict markers:

Top piece of bread
Mayonnaise
Lettuce
Tomato
Provolone
Salami
Mortadella
Prosciutto
Creole Mustard
Bottom piece of bread

现在运行svn resolve,你已经准备好提交修改了:

$ svn resolve --accept working sandwich.txt
Resolved conflicted state of 'sandwich.txt'
$ svn commit -m "Go ahead and use my sandwich, discarding Sally's edits."

注意 svn resolve 不像我们本章学过的其他命令一样需要参数。在任何情况下,当你认为解决了冲突的时候,需要小心运行svn resolve—一旦删除了临时文件,Subversion 会允许你提交这些文件,即使文件中还存在冲突标记。

记住,如果你修改冲突时感到困惑,你可以参考 Subversion 生成的三个文件—包括你未作更新的文件。你也可以使用三方交互合并工具检查这三个文件。

4.5.5. 丢弃你的修改而接收新获取的修订版本

如果你遇到冲突,决定丢弃你的修改,你可以运行 svn resolve --accept theirs-full CONFLICTED-PATH , Subversion 会丢弃你做的修改,并且删除临时文件:

$ svn update
Conflict discovered in 'sandwich.txt'.
Select: (p) postpone, (df) diff-full, (e) edit,
        (mc) mine-conflict, (tc) theirs-conflict,
        (s) show all options: p
C    sandwich.txt
Updated to revision 2.
Summary of conflicts:
  Text conflicts: 1
$ ls sandwich.*
sandwich.txt  sandwich.txt.mine  sandwich.txt.r2  sandwich.txt.r1
$ svn resolve --accept theirs-full sandwich.txt
Resolved conflicted state of 'sandwich.txt'
$

4.5.6. Punting: using svn revert

如果你决定丢弃自己的修改,并且重新开始编辑(无论是发生在冲突之后,还是其它情况),只需撤销你的修改:

$ svn revert sandwich.txt
Reverted 'sandwich.txt'
$ ls sandwich.*
sandwich.txt
$

注意,当你恢复一个冲突的文件后,不需要再运行 svn resolve

4.6. 提交你的修改

最后!你的修改结束了,你合并了服务器上所有的修改,你准备好提交修改到版本库。

The svn commit command sends all of your changes to the repository. When you commit a change, you need to supply a log message describing your change. Your log message will be attached to the new revision you create. If your log message is brief, you may wish to supply it on the command line using the --message (-m) option:

$ svn commit -m "Corrected number of cheese slices."
Sending        sandwich.txt
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 3.

However, if you've been composing your log message in some other text file as you work, you may want to tell Subversion to get the message from that file by passing its filename as the value of the --file (-F) option:

$ svn commit -F logmsg
Sending        sandwich.txt
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 4.

如果你没有使用 --message (-m 或者 --file (-F) 选项, Subversion 会自动启动你喜欢的编辑器(参见第 1.3.2 节 “配置”中的 editor-cmd 部分)来编辑日志信息。

[提示]提示

If you're in your editor writing a commit message and decide that you want to cancel your commit, you can just quit your editor without saving changes. If you've already saved your commit message, simply delete all the text, save again, and then abort:

$ svn commit
Waiting for Emacs...Done

Log message unchanged or not specified
(a)bort, (c)ontinue, (e)dit
a
$

版本库不知道也不关心你的修改作为一个整体是否有意义,它只检查是否有其他人修改了同一个文件。如果别人已经这样做了,你的整个提交会失败,并且提示你一个或多个文件已经过时了:

$ svn commit -m "Add another rule"
Sending        rules.txt
svn: Commit failed (details follow):
svn: File '/sandwich.txt' is out of date
…

(错误信息的精确措辞依赖于网络协议和你使用的服务器,但对于所有的情况,其思想完全一样。)

此刻,你需要运行 svn update 来处理所有的合并和冲突,然后再尝试提交。

我们已经覆盖了 Subversion 基本的工作周期。Subversion 还有许多其它特性可以管理你的版本库和工作副本,但是只使用前面介绍的命令你就可以进行日常工作了。我们还会覆盖更常用的还算频繁的命令。

5. 检验历史

你的版本库就像是一台时间机器。它记录了所有提交的修改,允许你检查文件或目录,以及相关元数据的历史。通过一个 Subversion 命令你可以根据时间或版本号取出一个过去的版本(或者恢复现在的工作副本)。然而,有时候我们只是想看看历史而不想回到历史。

有多个命令可以从版本库为你提供历史数据:

svn diff

显示特定修改的行级详细信息

svn log

展示给你主要信息:每个版本,以及附加在版本上的作者与日期信息和所有路径修改。

svn cat

显示指定版本的某一个文件

svn list

显示指定版本的目录中的文件

5.1. 检查历史修改详情

我们已经看过 svn diff—它使用标准差异文件格式显示区别,我们用它在提交到版本库前显示本地修改。

事实上,svn diff种不同的用法:

  • 检查本地修改

  • 比较工作副本与版本库

  • 比较版本库中的版本

5.1.1. 检查本地修改

像我们看到的,不使用任何参数调用时,svn diff 将会比较你的工作文件与缓存在 .svn原始副本:

$ svn diff
Index: rules.txt
===================================================================
--- rules.txt	(revision 3)
+++ rules.txt	(working copy)
@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
 Be kind to others
 Freedom = Responsibility
 Everything in moderation
-Chew with your mouth open
+Chew with your mouth closed
+Listen when others are speaking
$

5.1.2. 比较工作副本和版本库

如果传递一个 --revision (-r) 参数,你的工作副本会与版本库中的指定版本比较:

$ svn diff -r 3 rules.txt
Index: rules.txt
===================================================================
--- rules.txt	(revision 3)
+++ rules.txt	(working copy)
@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
 Be kind to others
 Freedom = Responsibility
 Everything in moderation
-Chew with your mouth open
+Chew with your mouth closed
+Listen when others are speaking
$

5.1.3. 比较版本库中的版本

如果通过 --revision (-r) 传递两个通过冒号分开的版本号,这两个版本会直接比较:

$ svn diff -r 2:3 rules.txt
Index: rules.txt
===================================================================
--- rules.txt	(revision 2)
+++ rules.txt	(revision 3)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
 Be kind to others
-Freedom = Chocolate Ice Cream
+Freedom = Responsibility
 Everything in moderation
 Chew with your mouth open
$

与前一个修订版本比较的更方便办法是使用选项 --change(-c) :

$ svn diff -c 3 rules.txt
Index: rules.txt
===================================================================
--- rules.txt	(revision 2)
+++ rules.txt	(revision 3)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
 Be kind to others
-Freedom = Chocolate Ice Cream
+Freedom = Responsibility
 Everything in moderation
 Chew with your mouth open
$

最后,即使你在本机没有工作副本,还是可以比较版本库的修订版本,只需要在命令行中输入合适的URL:

$ svn diff -c 5 http://svn.example.com/repos/example/trunk/text/rules.txt
…
$

5.2. 产生历史修改列表

找出一个文件或目录的历史信息,需要使用 svn log 命令。svn log 将会给你提供记录,包括:谁对文件或目录作了修改, 哪个版本作了修改, 版本的日期和时间, 还有如果你当时提供了日志信息,也会显示:

$ svn log
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r3 | sally | 2008-05-15 23:09:28 -0500 (Thu, 15 May 2008) | 1 line

Added include lines and corrected # of cheese slices.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r2 | harry | 2008-05-14 18:43:15 -0500 (Wed, 14 May 2008) | 1 line

Added main() methods.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r1 | sally | 2008-05-10 19:50:31 -0500 (Sat, 10 May 2008) | 1 line

Initial import
------------------------------------------------------------------------

注意日志信息缺省根据时间逆序排列。如果你希望察看特定顺序的一段修订版本或者单一版本,请使用 --revision (-r) 选项:

表 2.1. 常用日志操作

Command描述
svn log -r 5:19Display logs for revisions 5 through 19 in chronological order
svn log -r 19:5Display logs for revisions 5 through 19 in reverse chronological order
svn log -r 8只显示版本 8 的日志


你也可以检查单个文件或目录的日志历史。例如:

$ svn log foo.c
…
$ svn log http://foo.com/svn/trunk/code/foo.c
…

这样只会显示这个工作文件(或者 URL)做过修改的版本的日志信息。

如果你希望得到目录和文件更多的信息,你可以对 svn log命令使用选项 --verbose (-v)。因为 Subversion 允许移动和复制文件和目录,所以跟踪路径修改非常重要。在详细模式下,svn log 输出中会包括路径修改的历史:

$ svn log -r 8 -v
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r8 | sally | 2008-05-21 13:19:25 -0500 (Wed, 21 May 2008) | 1 line
Changed paths:
   M /trunk/code/foo.c
   M /trunk/code/bar.h
   A /trunk/code/doc/README

Frozzled the sub-space winch.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

svn log 还有一个选项 --quiet (-q),它会禁止日志信息的主要部分。当 与--verbose 结合使用,仅会显示修改的文件名。

5.3. 浏览版本库

通过使用 svn catsvn list ,你可以在不修改工作副本的情况下查看不同版本的文件和目录的内容。实际上,你甚至也不需要有一个工作副本。

5.3.1. svn cat

如果你只是希望检查一个过去的版本而不希望察看它们的区别,使用svn cat

$ svn cat -r 2 rules.txt
Be kind to others
Freedom = Chocolate Ice Cream
Everything in moderation
Chew with your mouth open
$

你可以重定向输出到一个文件:

$ svn cat -r 2 rules.txt > rules.txt.v2
$

5.3.2. svn list

svn list可以在不下载文件到本地目录的情况下来察看目录中的文件:

$ svn list http://svn.example.com/repo/project
README
branches/
tags/
trunk/

如果你希望察看详细信息,你可以使用--verbose(-v) 参数:

$ svn list -v http://svn.example.com/repo/project
  23351 sally                 Feb 05 13:26 ./
  20620 harry            1084 Jul 13  2006 README
  23339 harry                 Feb 04 01:40 branches/
  23198 harry                 Jan 23 17:17 tags/
  23351 sally                 Feb 05 13:26 trunk/

这些列告诉你文件和目录最后修改的修订版本, 做出修改的用户, 如果是文件还会有文件的大小,最后是修改日期和项目的名字。

[警告]警告

The svn list command with no arguments defaults to the repository URL of the current working directory, not the local working copy directory. After all, if you want a listing of your local directory, you could use just plain ls (or any reasonable non-Unixy equivalent).

5.4. 获得旧的版本库快照

In addition to all of the previous commands, you can use the --revision (-r) option with svn update to take an entire working copy back in time:[8]

# Make the current directory look like it did in r1729.
$ svn update -r 1729
…
$
[提示]提示

Many Subversion newcomers attempt to use the preceding svn update example to undo committed changes, but this won't work as you can't commit changes that you obtain from backdating a working copy if the changed files have newer revisions. See 第 3.6 节 “找回删除的项目” for a description of how to undo a commit.

If you'd prefer to create a whole new working copy from an older snapshot, you can do so by modifying the typical svn checkout command. As with svn update, you can provide the --revision (-r) option. But for reasons that we cover in 第 2 节 “Peg 和实施修订版本”, you might instead want to specify the target revision as part of Subversion's expanded URL syntax.

# Checkout the trunk from r1729.
$ svn checkout http://svn.example.com/svn/repo/trunk@1729 trunk-1729
…
# Checkout the current trunk as it looked in r1729.
$ svn checkout http://svn.example.com/svn/repo/trunk -r 1729 trunk-1729
…
$

Lastly, if you're building a release and wish to bundle up your files from Subversion but don't want those pesky .svn directories in the way, you can use svn export to create a local copy of all or part of your repository sans .svn directories. The basic syntax of this subcommand is identical to that of the svn checkout:

# Export the trunk from the latest revision.
$ svn export http://svn.example.com/svn/repo/trunk trunk-export
…
# Export the trunk from r1729.
$ svn export http://svn.example.com/svn/repo/trunk@1729 trunk-1729
…
# Export the current trunk as it looked in r1729. 
$ svn export http://svn.example.com/svn/repo/trunk -r 1729 trunk-1729
…
$

6. 有时你只需要清理

现在我们已经覆盖了使用Subversion的日常任务,我们会检阅一些工作副本相关的管理任务。

6.1. 处理你的工作副本

Subversion doesn't track either the state or the existence of working copies on the server, so there's no server overhead to keeping working copies around. Likewise, there's no need to let the server know that you're going to delete a working copy.

如果你还是喜欢使用工作副本,直到你再次使用它之前,把其保留在磁盘没有任何错误,任何时候一个svn update命令可以让使用的文件成为最新。

However, if you're definitely not going to use a working copy again, you can safely delete the entire thing using whatever directory removal capabilities your operating system offers. We recommend that before you do so you run svn status and review any files listed in its output that are prefixed with a ? to make certain that they're not of importance.

6.2. 从中断中恢复

When Subversion modifies your working copy—either your files or its own administrative state—it tries to do so as safely as possible. Before changing the working copy, Subversion logs its intentions in a private to-do list, of sorts. Next, it performs those actions to affect the desired change, holding a lock on the relevant part of the working copy while it works. This prevents other Subversion clients from accessing the working copy mid-change. Finally, Subversion releases its lock and cleans up its private to-do list. Architecturally, this is similar to a journaled filesystem. If a Subversion operation is interrupted (e.g, if the process is killed or if the machine crashes), the private to-do list remains on disk. This allows Subversion to return to that list later to complete any unfinished operations and return your working copy to a consistent state.

This is exactly what svn cleanup does: it searches your working copy and runs any leftover to-do items, removing working copy locks as it completes those operations. If Subversion ever tells you that some part of your working copy is locked, run svn cleanup to remedy the problem. The svn status command will inform you about administrative locks in the working copy, too, by displaying an L next to those locked paths:

$ svn status
  L     somedir
M       somedir/foo.c
$ svn cleanup
$ svn status
M       somedir/foo.c

Don't confuse these working copy administrative locks with the user-managed locks that Subversion users create when using the lock-modify-unlock model of concurrent version control; see the sidebar 锁定的三种含义 for clarification.

7. 处理结构性冲突

So far, we have only talked about conflicts at the level of file content. When you and your collaborators make overlapping changes within the same file, Subversion forces you to merge those changes before you can commit.[9]

But what happens if your collaborators move or delete a file that you are still working on? Maybe there was a miscommunication, and one person thinks the file should be deleted, while another person still wants to commit changes to the file. Or maybe your collaborators did some refactoring, renaming files and moving around directories in the process. If you were still working on these files, those modifications may need to be applied to the files at their new location. Such conflicts manifest themselves at the directory tree structure level rather than at the file content level, and are known as tree conflicts.

As with textual conflicts, tree conflicts prevent a commit from being made from the conflicted state, giving the user the opportunity to examine the state of the working copy for potential problems arising from the tree conflict, and resolving any such problems before committing.

7.1. An Example Tree Conflict

假定你正在工作的软件项目布局如下:

$ svn list -Rv svn://svn.example.com/trunk/
      4 harry                 Feb 06 14:34 ./
      4 harry              23 Feb 06 14:34 COPYING
      4 harry              41 Feb 06 14:34 Makefile
      4 harry              33 Feb 06 14:34 README
      4 harry                 Feb 06 14:34 code/
      4 harry              51 Feb 06 14:34 code/bar.c
      4 harry             124 Feb 06 14:34 code/foo.c

你的协作者 Harry 已经将 bar.c 改名为 baz.c。你仍旧使用 bar.c 工作,不知道它在版本库中已经改名。

Harry 的提交日志是:

$ svn log -r5 svn://svn.example.com/trunk
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r5 | harry | 2009-02-06 14:42:59 +0000 (Fri, 06 Feb 2009) | 2 lines
Changed paths:
   M /trunk/Makefile
   D /trunk/code/bar.c
   A /trunk/code/baz.c (from /trunk/code/bar.c:4)

Rename bar.c to baz.c, and adjust Makefile accordingly.

你的本地修改是:

$ svn diff
Index: code/foo.c
===================================================================
--- code/foo.c  (revision 4)
+++ code/foo.c  (working copy)
@@ -3,5 +3,5 @@
 int main(int argc, char *argv[])
 {
        printf("I don't like being moved around!\n%s", bar());
-       return 0;
+       return 1;
 }
Index: code/bar.c
===================================================================
--- code/bar.c  (revision 4)
+++ code/bar.c  (working copy)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
 const char *bar(void)
 {
-       return "Me neither!\n";
+       return "Well, I do like being moved around!\n";
 }

Your changes are all based on revision 4. They cannot be committed because Harry has already checked in revision 5:

$ svn commit -m "Small fixes"
Sending        code/bar.c
Sending        code/foo.c
Transmitting file data ..
svn: Commit failed (details follow):
svn: File not found: transaction '5-5', path '/trunk/code/bar.c'

这时候你需要执行 svn update 命令。此外,更新工作目录后你可以看到 Harry 的修改,发现产生了树冲突,从而你有机会评估和正确处理它。

$ svn update
   C code/bar.c
A    code/baz.c
U    Makefile
Updated to revision 5.
Summary of conflicts:
  Tree conflicts: 1

在输出中,svn update 在第四列使用大写字母 C 标记树冲突。svn status 展现了冲突的额外信息:

$ svn status
M       code/foo.c
A  +  C code/bar.c
      >   local edit, incoming delete upon update
M       code/baz.c

Note how bar.c is automatically scheduled for re-addition in your working copy, which simplifies things in case you want to keep the file.

Because a move in Subversion is implemented as a copy operation followed by a delete operation, and these two operations cannot be easily related to one another during an update, all Subversion can warn you about is an incoming delete operation on a locally modified file. This delete operation may be part of a move, or it could be a genuine delete operation. Talking to your collaborators, or, as a last resort, svn log, is a good way to find out what has actually happened.

Both foo.c and baz.c are reported as locally modified in the output of svn status. You made the changes to foo.c yourself, so this should not be surprising. But why is baz.c reported as locally modified?

The answer is that despite the limitations of the move implementation, Subversion was smart enough to transfer your local edits in bar.c into baz.c:

$ svn diff code/baz.c
Index: code/baz.c
===================================================================
--- code/baz.c  (revision 5)
+++ code/baz.c  (working copy)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
 const char *bar(void)
 {
-       return "Me neither!\n";
+       return "Well, I do like being moved around!\n";
 }
[警告]警告

Local edits to the file bar.c, which is renamed during an update to baz.c, will only be applied to bar.c if your working copy of bar.c is based on the revision in which it was last modified before being moved in the repository. Otherwise, Subversion will resort to retreiving baz.c from the repository, and will not try to transfer your local modifications to it. You will have to do so manually.

svn info shows the URLs of the items involved in the conflict. The left URL shows the source of the local side of the conflict, while the right URL shows the source of the incoming side of the conflict. These URLs indicate where you should start searching the repository's history for the change which conflicts with your local change.

$ svn info code/bar.c | tail -n 4 
Tree conflict: local edit, incoming delete upon update
  Source  left: (file) ^/trunk/code/bar.c@4
  Source right: (none) ^/trunk/code/bar.c@5

bar.c is now said to be the victim of a tree conflict. It cannot be committed until the conflict is resolved:

$ svn commit -m "Small fixes" 
svn: Commit failed (details follow):
svn: Aborting commit: 'code/bar.c' remains in conflict

So how can this conflict be resolved? You can either agree or disagree with the move Harry made. In case you agree, you can delete bar.c and mark the tree conflict as resolved:

$ svn delete --force code/bar.c
D         code/bar.c
$ svn resolve --accept=working code/bar.c
Resolved conflicted state of 'code/bar.c'
$ svn status
M       code/foo.c
M       code/baz.c
$ svn diff
Index: code/foo.c
===================================================================
--- code/foo.c  (revision 5)
+++ code/foo.c  (working copy)
@@ -3,5 +3,5 @@
 int main(int argc, char *argv[])
 {
        printf("I don't like being moved around!\n%s", bar());
-       return 0;
+       return 1;
 }
Index: code/baz.c
===================================================================
--- code/baz.c  (revision 5)
+++ code/baz.c  (working copy)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
 const char *bar(void)
 {
-       return "Me neither!\n";
+       return "Well, I do like being moved around!\n";
 }

If you do not agree with the move, you can delete baz.c instead, after making sure any changes made to it after it was renamed are either preserved or not worth keeping. Do not forget to revert the changes Harry made to the Makefile. Since bar.c is already scheduled for re-addition, there is nothing else left to do, and the conflict can be marked resolved:

$ svn delete --force code/baz.c
D         code/baz.c
$ svn resolve --accept=working code/bar.c
Resolved conflicted state of 'code/bar.c'
$ svn status
M       code/foo.c
A  +    code/bar.c
D       code/baz.c
M       Makefile
$ svn diff
Index: code/foo.c
===================================================================
--- code/foo.c	(revision 5)
+++ code/foo.c	(working copy)
@@ -3,5 +3,5 @@
 int main(int argc, char *argv[])
 {
 	printf("I don't like being moved around!\n%s", bar());
-	return 0;
+	return 1;
 }
Index: code/bar.c
===================================================================
--- code/bar.c	(revision 5)
+++ code/bar.c	(working copy)
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
 const char *bar(void)
 {
-	return "Me neither!\n";
+	return "Well, I do like being moved around!\n";
 }
Index: code/baz.c
===================================================================
--- code/baz.c	(revision 5)
+++ code/baz.c	(working copy)
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
-const char *bar(void)
-{
-	return "Me neither!\n";
-}
Index: Makefile
===================================================================
--- Makefile	(revision 5)
+++ Makefile	(working copy)
@@ -1,2 +1,2 @@
 foo: 
-	$(CC) -o $@ code/foo.c code/baz.c
+	$(CC) -o $@ code/foo.c code/bar.c

In either case, you have now resolved your first tree conflict! You can commit your changes and tell Harry during tea break about all the extra work he caused for you.

8. 总结

Now we've covered most of the Subversion client commands. Notable exceptions are those dealing with branching and merging (see 第 4 章 分支与合并) and properties (see 第 3 节 “属性”). However, you may want to take a moment to skim through 第 9 章 Subversion 完全参考 to get an idea of all the different commands that Subversion has—and how you can use them to make your work easier.




[6] Of course, nothing is ever totally deleted from the repository—just from its HEAD revision. You may continue to access the deleted item in previous revisions. Should you desire to resurrect the item so that it is again present in HEAD, see 第 3.6 节 “找回删除的项目”.

[7] 如果你向他们询问,他们非常有理由把你带到城外的铁轨上。

[8] 看到了吧?我们说过Subversion是一个时间机器。

[9] Well, you could mark files containing conflict markers as resolved and commit them, if you really wanted to. But this is rarely done in practice.

第 3 章 高级主题

If you've been reading this book chapter by chapter, from start to finish, you should by now have acquired enough knowledge to use the Subversion client to perform the most common version control operations. You understand how to check out a working copy from a Subversion repository. You are comfortable with submitting and receiving changes using the svn commit and svn update operations. You've probably even developed a reflex that causes you to run the svn status command almost unconsciously. For all intents and purposes, you are ready to use Subversion in a typical environment.

但是Subversion的特性并没有止于普通的版本控制操作,它也有一些超越了与版本库传递文件和目录修改以外的功能。

This chapter highlights some of Subversion's features that, while important, may not be part of the typical user's daily routine. It assumes that you are familiar with Subversion's basic file and directory versioning capabilities. If you aren't, you'll want to first read 第 1 章 基本概念 and 第 2 章 基本使用. Once you've mastered those basics and consumed this chapter, you'll be a Subversion power user!

1. 版本清单

As we described in 第 2.2 节 “修订版本”, revision numbers in Subversion are pretty straightforward—integers that keep getting larger as you commit more changes to your versioned data. Still, it doesn't take long before you can no longer remember exactly what happened in each and every revision. Fortunately, the typical Subversion workflow doesn't often demand that you supply arbitrary revisions to the Subversion operations you perform. For operations that do require a revision specifier, you generally supply a revision number that you saw in a commit email, in the output of some other Subversion operation, or in some other context that would give meaning to that particular number.

[注意]注意

Referring to revision numbers with an r prefix (r314, for example) is an established practice in Subversion communities, and is both supported and encouraged by many Subversion-related tools. In most places where you would specify a bare revision number on the command line, you may also use the rNNN syntax.

But occasionally, you need to pinpoint a moment in time for which you don't already have a revision number memorized or handy. So besides the integer revision numbers, svn allows as input some additional forms of revision specifiers: revision keywords and revision dates.

[注意]注意

The various forms of Subversion revision specifiers can be mixed and matched when used to specify revision ranges. For example, you can use -r REV1:REV2 where REV1 is a revision keyword and REV2 is a revision number, or where REV1 is a date and REV2 is a revision keyword, and so on. The individual revision specifiers are independently evaluated, so you can put whatever you want on the opposite sides of that colon.

1.1. 修订版本关键字

The Subversion client understands a number of revision keywords. These keywords can be used instead of integer arguments to the --revision (-r) option, and are resolved into specific revision numbers by Subversion:

HEAD

版本库中最新的(或者是最年轻的)版本。

BASE

The revision number of an item in a working copy. If the item has been locally modified, this refers to the way the item appears without those local modifications.

COMMITTED

项目最近修改的修订版本,与BASE相同或更早。

PREV

The revision immediately before the last revision in which an item changed. Technically, this boils down to COMMITTED-1.

As can be derived from their descriptions, the PREV, BASE, and COMMITTED revision keywords are used only when referring to a working copy path—they don't apply to repository URLs. HEAD, on the other hand, can be used in conjunction with both of these path types.

下面是一些修订版本关键字的例子:

$ svn diff -r PREV:COMMITTED foo.c
# shows the last change committed to foo.c

$ svn log -r HEAD
# shows log message for the latest repository commit

$ svn diff -r HEAD
# compares your working copy (with all of its local changes) to the
# latest version of that tree in the repository

$ svn diff -r BASE:HEAD foo.c
# compares the unmodified version of foo.c with the latest version of
# foo.c in the repository

$ svn log -r BASE:HEAD
# shows all commit logs for the current versioned directory since you
# last updated

$ svn update -r PREV foo.c
# rewinds the last change on foo.c, decreasing foo.c's working revision

$ svn diff -r BASE:14 foo.c
# compares the unmodified version of foo.c with the way foo.c looked
# in revision 14

1.2. 版本日期

Revision numbers reveal nothing about the world outside the version control system, but sometimes you need to correlate a moment in real time with a moment in version history. To facilitate this, the --revision (-r) option can also accept as input date specifiers wrapped in curly braces ({ and }). Subversion accepts the standard ISO-8601 date and time formats, plus a few others. Here are some examples.

$ svn checkout -r {2006-02-17}
$ svn checkout -r {15:30}
$ svn checkout -r {15:30:00.200000}
$ svn checkout -r {"2006-02-17 15:30"}
$ svn checkout -r {"2006-02-17 15:30 +0230"}
$ svn checkout -r {2006-02-17T15:30}
$ svn checkout -r {2006-02-17T15:30Z}
$ svn checkout -r {2006-02-17T15:30-04:00}
$ svn checkout -r {20060217T1530}
$ svn checkout -r {20060217T1530Z}
$ svn checkout -r {20060217T1530-0500}
…
[注意]注意

Keep in mind that most shells will require you to, at a minimum, quote or otherwise escape any spaces that are included as part of revision date specifiers. Certain shells may also take issue with the unescaped use of curly brances, too. Consult your shell's documentation for the requirements specific to your environment.

当你指定一个日期,Subversion会在版本库找到接近这个日期的最近版本,并且对这个版本继续操作:

$ svn log -r {2006-11-28}
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r12 | ira | 2006-11-27 12:31:51 -0600 (Mon, 27 Nov 2006) | 6 lines
…

你可以使用时间段。Subversion 会找到这段时间的所有版本:

$ svn log -r {2006-11-20}:{2006-11-29}
…
[警告]警告

Since the timestamp of a revision is stored as an unversioned, modifiable property of the revision (see 第 3 节 “属性”), revision timestamps can be changed to represent complete falsifications of true chronology, or even removed altogether. Subversion's ability to correctly convert revision dates into real revision numbers depends on revision datestamps maintaining a sequential ordering—the younger the revision, the younger its timestamp. If this ordering isn't maintained, you will likely find that trying to use dates to specify revision ranges in your repository doesn't always return the data you might have expected.

2. Peg 和实施修订版本

We copy, move, rename, and completely replace files and directories on our computers all the time. And your version control system shouldn't get in the way of your doing these things with your version-controlled files and directories, either. Subversion's file management support is quite liberating, affording almost as much flexibility for versioned files as you'd expect when manipulating your unversioned ones. But that flexibility means that across the lifetime of your repository, a given versioned object might have many paths, and a given path might represent several entirely different versioned objects. This introduces a certain level of complexity to your interactions with those paths and objects.

Subversion is pretty smart about noticing when an object's version history includes such changes of address. For example, if you ask for the revision history log of a particular file that was renamed last week, Subversion happily provides all those logs—the revision in which the rename itself happened, plus the logs of relevant revisions both before and after that rename. So, most of the time, you don't even have to think about such things. But occasionally, Subversion needs your help to clear up ambiguities.

The simplest example of this occurs when a directory or file is deleted from version control, and then a new directory or file is created with the same name and added to version control. The thing you deleted and the thing you later added aren't the same thing. They merely happen to have had the same path—/trunk/object, for example. What, then, does it mean to ask Subversion about the history of /trunk/object? Are you asking about the thing currently at that location, or the old thing you deleted from that location? Are you asking about the operations that have happened to all the objects that have ever lived at that path? Subversion needs a hint about what you really want.

And thanks to moves, versioned object history can get far more twisted than even that. For example, you might have a directory named concept, containing some nascent software project you've been toying with. Eventually, though, that project matures to the point that the idea seems to actually have some wings, so you do the unthinkable and decide to give the project a name.[10] Let's say you called your software Frabnaggilywort. At this point, it makes sense to rename the directory to reflect the project's new name, so concept is renamed to frabnaggilywort. Life goes on, Frabnaggilywort releases a 1.0 version and is downloaded and used daily by hordes of people aiming to improve their lives.

It's a nice story, really, but it doesn't end there. Entrepreneur that you are, you've already got another think in the tank. So you make a new directory, concept, and the cycle begins again. In fact, the cycle begins again many times over the years, each time starting with that old concept directory, then sometimes seeing that directory renamed as the idea cures, sometimes seeing it deleted when you scrap the idea. Or, to get really sick, maybe you rename concept to something else for a while, but later rename the thing back to concept for some reason.

In scenarios like these, attempting to instruct Subversion to work with these reused paths can be a little like instructing a motorist in Chicago's West Suburbs to drive east down Roosevelt Road and turn left onto Main Street. In a mere 20 minutes, you can cross Main Street in Wheaton, Glen Ellyn, and Lombard. And no, they aren't the same street. Our motorist—and our Subversion—need a little more detail to do the right thing.

Fortunately, Subversion allows you to tell it exactly which Main Street you meant. The mechanism used is called a peg revision, and you provide these to Subversion for the sole purpose of identifying unique lines of history. Because at most one versioned object may occupy a path at any given time—or, more precisely, in any one revision—the combination of a path and a peg revision is all that is needed to unambiguously identify a specific line of history. Peg revisions are specified to the Subversion command-line client using at syntax, so called because the syntax involves appending an at sign (@) and the peg revision to the end of the path with which the revision is associated.

But what of the --revision (-r) of which we've spoken so much in this book? That revision (or set of revisions) is called the operative revision (or operative revision range). Once a particular line of history has been identified using a path and peg revision, Subversion performs the requested operation using the operative revision(s). To map this to our Chicagoland streets analogy, if we are told to go to 606 N. Main Street in Wheaton,[11] we can think of Main Street as our path and Wheaton as our peg revision. These two pieces of information identify a unique path that can be traveled (north or south on Main Street), and they keep us from traveling up and down the wrong Main Street in search of our destination. Now we throw in 606 N. as our operative revision of sorts, and we know exactly where to go.

Say that long ago we created our repository, and in revision 1 we added our first concept directory, plus an IDEA file in that directory talking about the concept. After several revisions in which real code was added and tweaked, we, in revision 20, renamed this directory to frabnaggilywort. By revision 27, we had a new concept, a new concept directory to hold it, and a new IDEA file to describe it. And then five years and thousands of revisions flew by, just like they would in any good romance story.

Now, years later, we wonder what the IDEA file looked like back in revision 1. But Subversion needs to know whether we are asking about how the current file looked back in revision 1, or whether we are asking for the contents of whatever file lived at concept/IDEA in revision 1. Certainly those questions have different answers, and because of peg revisions, you can ask those questions. To find out how the current IDEA file looked in that old revision, you run:

$ svn cat -r 1 concept/IDEA 
svn: Unable to find repository location for 'concept/IDEA' in revision 1

Of course, in this example, the current IDEA file didn't exist yet in revision 1, so Subversion gives an error. The previous command is shorthand for a longer notation which explicitly lists a peg revision. The expanded notation is:

$ svn cat -r 1 concept/IDEA@BASE
svn: Unable to find repository location for 'concept/IDEA' in revision 1

当执行时,它包含期望的结果。

The perceptive reader is probably wondering at this point whether the peg revision syntax causes problems for working copy paths or URLs that actually have at signs in them. After all, how does svn know whether news@11 is the name of a directory in my tree or just a syntax for revision 11 of news? Thankfully, while svn will always assume the latter, there is a trivial workaround. You need only append an at sign to the end of the path, such as news@11@. svn cares only about the last at sign in the argument, and it is not considered illegal to omit a literal peg revision specifier after that at sign. This workaround even applies to paths that end in an at sign—you would use filename@@ to talk about a file named filename@.

Let's ask the other question, then—in revision 1, what were the contents of whatever file occupied the address concepts/IDEA at the time? We'll use an explicit peg revision to help us out.

$ svn cat concept/IDEA@1
The idea behind this project is to come up with a piece of software
that can frab a naggily wort.  Frabbing naggily worts is tricky
business, and doing it incorrectly can have serious ramifications, so
we need to employ over-the-top input validation and data verification
mechanisms.

Notice that we didn't provide an operative revision this time. That's because when no operative revision is specified, Subversion assumes a default operative revision that's the same as the peg revision.

As you can see, the output from our operation appears to be correct. The text even mentions frabbing naggily worts, so this is almost certainly the file that describes the software now called Frabnaggilywort. In fact, we can verify this using the combination of an explicit peg revision and explicit operative revision. We know that in HEAD, the Frabnaggilywort project is located in the frabnaggilywort directory. So we specify that we want to see how the line of history identified in HEAD as the path frabnaggilywort/IDEA looked in revision 1.

$ svn cat -r 1 frabnaggilywort/IDEA@HEAD
The idea behind this project is to come up with a piece of software
that can frab a naggily wort.  Frabbing naggily worts is tricky
business, and doing it incorrectly can have serious ramifications, so
we need to employ over-the-top input validation and data verification
mechanisms.

And the peg and operative revisions need not be so trivial, either. For example, say frabnaggilywort had been deleted from HEAD, but we know it existed in revision 20, and we want to see the diffs for its IDEA file between revisions 4 and 10. We can use peg revision 20 in conjunction with the URL that would have held Frabnaggilywort's IDEA file in revision 20, and then use 4 and 10 as our operative revision range.

$ svn diff -r 4:10 http://svn.red-bean.com/projects/frabnaggilywort/IDEA@20
Index: frabnaggilywort/IDEA
===================================================================
--- frabnaggilywort/IDEA	(revision 4)
+++ frabnaggilywort/IDEA	(revision 10)
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
-The idea behind this project is to come up with a piece of software
-that can frab a naggily wort.  Frabbing naggily worts is tricky
-business, and doing it incorrectly can have serious ramifications, so
-we need to employ over-the-top input validation and data verification
-mechanisms.
+The idea behind this project is to come up with a piece of
+client-server software that can remotely frab a naggily wort.
+Frabbing naggily worts is tricky business, and doing it incorrectly
+can have serious ramifications, so we need to employ over-the-top
+input validation and data verification mechanisms.

Fortunately, most folks aren't faced with such complex situations. But when you are, remember that peg revisions are that extra hint Subversion needs to clear up ambiguity.

3. 属性

We've already covered in detail how Subversion stores and retrieves various versions of files and directories in its repository. Whole chapters have been devoted to this most fundamental piece of functionality provided by the tool. And if the versioning support stopped there, Subversion would still be complete from a version control perspective.

但不仅仅如此。

In addition to versioning your directories and files, Subversion provides interfaces for adding, modifying, and removing versioned metadata on each of your versioned directories and files. We refer to this metadata as properties, and they can be thought of as two-column tables that map property names to arbitrary values attached to each item in your working copy. Generally speaking, the names and values of the properties can be whatever you want them to be, with the constraint that the names must contain only ASCII characters. And the best part about these properties is that they, too, are versioned, just like the textual contents of your files. You can modify, commit, and revert property changes as easily as you can file content changes. And the sending and receiving of property changes occurs as part of your typical commit and update operations—you don't have to change your basic processes to accommodate them.

[注意]注意

Subversion has reserved the set of properties whose names begin with svn: as its own. While there are only a handful of such properties in use today, you should avoid creating custom properties for your own needs whose names begin with this prefix. Otherwise, you run the risk that a future release of Subversion will grow support for a feature or behavior driven by a property of the same name but with perhaps an entirely different interpretation.

Properties show up elsewhere in Subversion, too. Just as files and directories may have arbitrary property names and values attached to them, each revision as a whole may have arbitrary properties attached to it. The same constraints apply—human-readable names and anything-you-want binary values. The main difference is that revision properties are not versioned. In other words, if you change the value of, or delete, a revision property, there's no way, within the scope of Subversion's functionality, to recover the previous value.

Subversion has no particular policy regarding the use of properties. It asks only that you do not use property names that begin with the prefix svn: as that's the namespace that it sets aside for its own use. And Subversion does, in fact, use properties—both the versioned and unversioned variety. Certain versioned properties have special meaning or effects when found on files and directories, or they house a particular bit of information about the revisions on which they are found. Certain revision properties are automatically attached to revisions by Subversion's commit process, and they carry information about the revision. Most of these properties are mentioned elsewhere in this or other chapters as part of the more general topics to which they are related. For an exhaustive list of Subversion's predefined properties, see 第 10 节 “Subversion 属性”.

[注意]注意

While Subversion automatically attaches properties (svn:date, svn:author, svn:log, and so on) to revisions, it does not presume thereafter the existence of those properties, and neither should you or the tools you use to interact with your repository. Revision properties can be deleted programmatically or via the client (if allowed by the repository hooks) without damaging Subversion's ability to function. So, when writing scripts which operate on your Subversion repository data, do not make the mistake of assuming that any particular revision property exists on a revision.

In this section, we will examine the utility—both to users of Subversion and to Subversion itself—of property support. You'll learn about the property-related svn subcommands and how property modifications affect your normal Subversion workflow.

3.1. 为什么需要属性?

Just as Subversion uses properties to store extra information about the files, directories, and revisions that it contains, you might also find properties to be of similar use. You might find it useful to have a place close to your versioned data to hang custom metadata about that data.

Say you wish to design a web site that houses many digital photos and displays them with captions and a datestamp. Now, your set of photos is constantly changing, so you'd like to have as much of this site automated as possible. These photos can be quite large, so as is common with sites of this nature, you want to provide smaller thumbnail images to your site visitors.

Now, you can get this functionality using traditional files. That is, you can have your image123.jpg and an image123-thumbnail.jpg side by side in a directory. Or if you want to keep the filenames the same, you might have your thumbnails in a different directory, such as thumbnails/image123.jpg. You can also store your captions and datestamps in a similar fashion, again separated from the original image file. But the problem here is that your collection of files multiplies with each new photo added to the site.

Now consider the same web site deployed in a way that makes use of Subversion's file properties. Imagine having a single image file, image123.jpg, with properties set on that file that are named caption, datestamp, and even thumbnail. Now your working copy directory looks much more manageable—in fact, it looks to the casual browser like there are nothing but image files in it. But your automation scripts know better. They know that they can use svn (or better yet, they can use the Subversion language bindings—see 第 3 节 “使用 API”) to dig out the extra information that your site needs to display without having to read an index file or play path manipulation games.

[注意]注意

While Subversion places few restrictions on the names and values you use for properties, it has not been designed to optimally carry large property values or large sets of properties on a given file or directory. Subversion commonly holds all the property names and values associated with a single item in memory at the same time, which can cause detrimental performance or failed operations when extremely large property sets are used.

Custom revision properties are also frequently used. One common such use is a property whose value contains an issue tracker ID with which the revision is associated, perhaps because the change made in that revision fixes a bug filed in the tracker issue with that ID. Other uses include hanging more friendly names on the revision—it might be hard to remember that revision 1935 was a fully tested revision. But if there's, say, a test-results property on that revision with the value all passing, that's meaningful information to have. And Subversion allows you to easily do this via the --with-revprop option of the svn commit command:

$ svn commit -m "Fix up the last remaining known regression bug." \
      --with-revprop "test-results=all passing"
Sending        lib/crit_bits.c
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 912.
$

3.2. 操作属性

The svn program affords a few ways to add or modify file and directory properties. For properties with short, human-readable values, perhaps the simplest way to add a new property is to specify the property name and value on the command line of the svn propset subcommand:

$ svn propset copyright '(c) 2006 Red-Bean Software' calc/button.c
property 'copyright' set on 'calc/button.c'
$

But we've been touting the flexibility that Subversion offers for your property values. And if you are planning to have a multiline textual, or even binary, property value, you probably do not want to supply that value on the command line. So the svn propset subcommand takes a --file (-F) option for specifying the name of a file that contains the new property value.

$ svn propset license -F /path/to/LICENSE calc/button.c
property 'license' set on 'calc/button.c'
$

There are some restrictions on the names you can use for properties. A property name must start with a letter, a colon (:), or an underscore (_); after that, you can also use digits, hyphens (-), and periods (.).[12]

In addition to the propset command, the svn program supplies the propedit command. This command uses the configured editor program (see 第 1.3.2 节 “配置”) to add or modify properties. When you run the command, svn invokes your editor program on a temporary file that contains the current value of the property (or that is empty, if you are adding a new property). Then, you just modify that value in your editor program until it represents the new value you wish to store for the property, save the temporary file, and then exit the editor program. If Subversion detects that you've actually changed the existing value of the property, it will accept that as the new property value. If you exit your editor without making any changes, no property modification will occur:

$ svn propedit copyright calc/button.c  ### exit the editor without changes
No changes to property 'copyright' on 'calc/button.c'
$

We should note that, as with other svn subcommands, those related to properties can act on multiple paths at once. This enables you to modify properties on whole sets of files with a single command. For example, we could have done the following:

$ svn propset copyright '(c) 2006 Red-Bean Software' calc/*
property 'copyright' set on 'calc/Makefile'
property 'copyright' set on 'calc/button.c'
property 'copyright' set on 'calc/integer.c'
…
$

All of this property adding and editing isn't really very useful if you can't easily get the stored property value. So the svn program supplies two subcommands for displaying the names and values of properties stored on files and directories. The svn proplist command will list the names of properties that exist on a path. Once you know the names of the properties on the node, you can request their values individually using svn propget. This command will, given a property name and a path (or set of paths), print the value of the property to the standard output stream.

$ svn proplist calc/button.c
Properties on 'calc/button.c':
  copyright
  license
$ svn propget copyright calc/button.c
(c) 2006 Red-Bean Software

There's even a variation of the proplist command that will list both the name and the value for all of the properties. Simply supply the --verbose (-v) option.

$ svn proplist -v calc/button.c
Properties on 'calc/button.c':
  copyright
    (c) 2006 Red-Bean Software
  license
    ================================================================
    Copyright (c) 2006 Red-Bean Software.  All rights reserved.

    Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
    modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions 
    are met:

    1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
    notice, this list of conditions, and the recipe for Fitz's famous
    red-beans-and-rice.
    …

The last property-related subcommand is propdel. Since Subversion allows you to store properties with empty values, you can't remove a property altogether using svn propedit or svn propset. For example, this command will not yield the desired effect:

$ svn propset license "" calc/button.c
property 'license' set on 'calc/button.c'
$ svn proplist -v calc/button.c
Properties on 'calc/button.c':
  copyright
    (c) 2006 Red-Bean Software
  license
    
$

你需要用子命令 propdel 来删除属性。语法与其它与属性命令相似:

$ svn propdel license calc/button.c
property 'license' deleted from 'calc/button.c'.
$ svn proplist -v calc/button.c
Properties on 'calc/button.c':
  copyright
    (c) 2006 Red-Bean Software
$

Remember those unversioned revision properties? You can modify those, too, using the same svn subcommands that we just described. Simply add the --revprop command-line parameter and specify the revision whose property you wish to modify. Since revisions are global, you don't need to specify a target path to these property-related commands so long as you are positioned in a working copy of the repository whose revision property you wish to modify. Otherwise, you can simply provide the URL of any path in the repository of interest (including the repository's root URL). For example, you might want to replace the commit log message of an existing revision.[13] If your current working directory is part of a working copy of your repository, you can simply run the svn propset command with no target path:

$ svn propset svn:log "* button.c: Fix a compiler warning." -r11 --revprop
property 'svn:log' set on repository revision '11'
$

即使你没有从版本库检出一个工作副本,你仍然可以通过提供版本库根 URL 来修改属性:

$ svn propset svn:log "* button.c: Fix a compiler warning." -r11 --revprop \
              http://svn.example.com/repos/project
property 'svn:log' set on repository revision '11'
$

Note that the ability to modify these unversioned properties must be explicitly added by the repository administrator (see 第 4.2 节 “修正提交消息”). That's because the properties aren't versioned, so you run the risk of losing information if you aren't careful with your edits. The repository administrator can set up methods to protect against this loss, and by default, modification of unversioned properties is disabled.

[提示]提示

Users should, where possible, use svn propedit instead of svn propset. While the end result of the commands is identical, the former will allow them to see the current value of the property that they are about to change, which helps them to verify that they are, in fact, making the change they think they are making. This is especially true when modifying unversioned revision properties. Also, it is significantly easier to modify multiline property values in a text editor than at the command line.

3.3. 属性和 Subversion 工作流程

Now that you are familiar with all of the property-related svn subcommands, let's see how property modifications affect the usual Subversion workflow. As we mentioned earlier, file and directory properties are versioned, just like your file contents. As a result, Subversion provides the same opportunities for merging—cleanly or with conflicts—someone else's modifications into your own.

As with file contents, your property changes are local modifications, made permanent only when you commit them to the repository with svn commit. Your property changes can be easily unmade, too—the svn revert command will restore your files and directories to their unedited states—contents, properties, and all. Also, you can receive interesting information about the state of your file and directory properties by using the svn status and svn diff commands.

$ svn status calc/button.c
 M      calc/button.c
$ svn diff calc/button.c
Property changes on: calc/button.c
___________________________________________________________________
Name: copyright
   + (c) 2006 Red-Bean Software

$

Notice how the status subcommand displays M in the second column instead of the first. That is because we have modified the properties on calc/button.c, but not its textual contents. Had we changed both, we would have seen M in the first column, too. (We cover svn status in 第 4.3.1 节 “查看你的修改概况”).

You might also have noticed the nonstandard way that Subversion currently displays property differences. You can still use svn diff and redirect its output to create a usable patch file. The patch program will ignore property patches—as a rule, it ignores any noise it can't understand. This does, unfortunately, mean that to fully apply a patch generated by svn diff, any property modifications will need to be applied by hand.

3.4. 自动设置属性

Properties are a powerful feature of Subversion, acting as key components of many Subversion features discussed elsewhere in this and other chapters—textual diff and merge support, keyword substitution, newline translation, and so on. But to get the full benefit of properties, they must be set on the right files and directories. Unfortunately, that step can be easily forgotten in the routine of things, especially since failing to set a property doesn't usually result in an obvious error (at least compared to, say, failing to add a file to version control). To help your properties get applied to the places that need them, Subversion provides a couple of simple but useful features.

Whenever you introduce a file to version control using the svn add or svn import commands, Subversion tries to assist by setting some common file properties automatically. First, on operating systems whose filesystems support an execute permission bit, Subversion will automatically set the svn:executable property on newly added or imported files whose execute bit is enabled. (See 第 4.2 节 “文件的可执行性” later in this chapter for more about this property.)

Second, Subversion tries to determine the file's MIME type. If you've configured a mime-types-files runtime configuration parameter, Subversion will try to find a MIME type mapping in that file for your file's extension. If it finds such a mapping, it will set your file's svn:mime-type property to the MIME type it found. If no mapping file is configured, or no mapping for your file's extension could be found, Subversion will fall back to its own very basic heuristic to determine whether the file contains nontextual content. If so, it automatically sets the svn:mime-type property on that file to application/octet-stream (the generic this is a collection of bytes MIME type). Of course, if Subversion guesses incorrectly, or if you wish to set the svn:mime-type property to something more precise—perhaps image/png or application/x-shockwave-flash—you can always remove or edit that property. (For more on Subversion's use of MIME types, see 第 4.1 节 “文件内容类型” later in this chapter.)

[注意]注意

UTF-16 is commonly used to encode files whose semantic content is textual in nature, but the encoding itself makes heavy use of bytes which are outside the typical ASCII character byte range. As such, Subversion will tend to classify such files as binary files, much to the chagrin of users who desire line-based differencing and merging, keyword substitution, and other behaviors for those files.

Subversion also provides, via its runtime configuration system (see 第 1 节 “运行配置区”), a more flexible automatic property setting feature that allows you to create mappings of filename patterns to property names and values. Once again, these mappings affect adds and imports, and can not only override the default MIME type decision made by Subversion during those operations, but can also set additional Subversion or custom properties, too. For example, you might create a mapping that says that anytime you add JPEG files—ones whose names match the pattern *.jpg—Subversion should automatically set the svn:mime-type property on those files to image/jpeg. Or perhaps any files that match *.cpp should have svn:eol-style set to native, and svn:keywords set to Id. Automatic property support is perhaps the handiest property-related tool in the Subversion toolbox. See 第 1.3.2 节 “配置” for more about configuring that support.

[注意]注意

Subversion administrators commonly ask if it is possible to configure, on the server side, a set of property definitions which all connecting clients will automatically consider when operating on working copies checked out from that server. Unfortunately, Subversion doesn't offer this feature. Administrators can use hook scripts to validate that the properties added to and modified on files and directories match the administrator's preferred policies, rejecting commits which are non-compliant in this fashion. (See 第 3.2 节 “实现版本库钩子” for more about hook scripts.) But there's no way to automatically dictate those preferences to Subversion clients beforehand.

4. 文件移植性

Fortunately for Subversion users who routinely find themselves on different computers with different operating systems, Subversion's command-line program behaves almost identically on all those systems. If you know how to wield svn on one platform, you know how to wield it everywhere.

However, the same is not always true of other general classes of software or of the actual files you keep in Subversion. For example, on a Windows machine, the definition of a text file would be similar to that used on a Linux box, but with a key difference—the character sequences used to mark the ends of the lines of those files. There are other differences, too. Unix platforms have (and Subversion supports) symbolic links; Windows does not. Unix platforms use filesystem permission to determine executability; Windows uses filename extensions.

Because Subversion is in no position to unite the whole world in common definitions and implementations of all of these things, the best it can do is to try to help make your life simpler when you need to work with your versioned files and directories on multiple computers and operating systems. This section describes some of the ways Subversion does this.

4.1. 文件内容类型

Subversion joins the ranks of the many applications that recognize and make use of Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME) content types. Besides being a general-purpose storage location for a file's content type, the value of the svn:mime-type file property determines some behavioral characteristics of Subversion itself.

For example, one of the benefits that Subversion typically provides is contextual, line-based merging of changes received from the server during an update into your working file. But for files containing nontextual data, there is often no concept of a line. So, for versioned files whose svn:mime-type property is set to a nontextual MIME type (generally, something that doesn't begin with text/, though there are exceptions), Subversion does not attempt to perform contextual merges during updates. Instead, any time you have locally modified a binary working copy file that is also being updated, your file is left untouched and Subversion creates two new files. One file has a .oldrev extension and contains the BASE revision of the file. The other file has a .newrev extension and contains the contents of the updated revision of the file. This behavior is really for the protection of the user against failed attempts at performing contextual merges on files that simply cannot be contextually merged.

[警告]警告

The svn:mime-type property, when set to a value that does not indicate textual file contents, can cause some unexpected behaviors with respect to other properties. For example, since the idea of line endings (and therefore, line-ending conversion) makes no sense when applied to nontextual files, Subversion will prevent you from setting the svn:eol-style property on such files. This is obvious when attempted on a single file target—svn propset will error out. But it might not be as clear if you perform a recursive property set, where Subversion will silently skip over files that it deems unsuitable for a given property.

Subversion provides a number of mechanisms by which to automatically set the svn:mime-type property on a versioned file. See 第 3.4 节 “自动设置属性” for details.

Also, if the svn:mime-type property is set, then the Subversion Apache module will use its value to populate the Content-type: HTTP header when responding to GET requests. This gives your web browser a crucial clue about how to display a file when you use it to peruse your Subversion repository's contents.

4.2. 文件的可执行性

On many operating systems, the ability to execute a file as a command is governed by the presence of an execute permission bit. This bit usually defaults to being disabled, and must be explicitly enabled by the user for each file that needs it. But it would be a monumental hassle to have to remember exactly which files in a freshly checked-out working copy were supposed to have their executable bits toggled on, and then to have to do that toggling. So, Subversion provides the svn:executable property as a way to specify that the executable bit for the file on which that property is set should be enabled, and Subversion honors that request when populating working copies with such files.

This property has no effect on filesystems that have no concept of an executable permission bit, such as FAT32 and NTFS.[15] Also, although it has no defined values, Subversion will force its value to * when setting this property. Finally, this property is valid only on files, not on directories.

4.3. 行结束字符序列

Unless otherwise noted using a versioned file's svn:mime-type property, Subversion assumes the file contains human-readable data. Generally speaking, Subversion uses this knowledge only to determine whether contextual difference reports for that file are possible. Otherwise, to Subversion, bytes are bytes.

This means that by default, Subversion doesn't pay any attention to the type of end-of-line (EOL) markers used in your files. Unfortunately, different operating systems have different conventions about which character sequences represent the end of a line of text in a file. For example, the usual line-ending token used by software on the Windows platform is a pair of ASCII control characters—a carriage return (CR) followed by a line feed (LF). Unix software, however, just uses the LF character to denote the end of a line.

Not all of the various tools on these operating systems understand files that contain line endings in a format that differs from the native line-ending style of the operating system on which they are running. So, typically, Unix programs treat the CR character present in Windows files as a regular character (usually rendered as ^M), and Windows programs combine all of the lines of a Unix file into one giant line because no carriage return-linefeed (or CRLF) character combination was found to denote the ends of the lines.

This sensitivity to foreign EOL markers can be frustrating for folks who share a file across different operating systems. For example, consider a source code file, and developers that edit this file on both Windows and Unix systems. If all the developers always use tools that preserve the line-ending style of the file, no problems occur.

But in practice, many common tools either fail to properly read a file with foreign EOL markers, or convert the file's line endings to the native style when the file is saved. If the former is true for a developer, he has to use an external conversion utility (such as dos2unix or its companion, unix2dos) to prepare the file for editing. The latter case requires no extra preparation. But both cases result in a file that differs from the original quite literally on every line! Prior to committing his changes, the user has two choices. Either he can use a conversion utility to restore the modified file to the same line-ending style that it was in before his edits were made, or he can simply commit the file—new EOL markers and all.

The result of scenarios like these include wasted time and unnecessary modifications to committed files. Wasted time is painful enough. But when commits change every line in a file, this complicates the job of determining which of those lines were changed in a nontrivial way. Where was that bug really fixed? On what line was a syntax error introduced?

The solution to this problem is the svn:eol-style property. When this property is set to a valid value, Subversion uses it to determine what special processing to perform on the file so that the file's line-ending style isn't flip-flopping with every commit that comes from a different operating system. The valid values are:

native

This causes the file to contain the EOL markers that are native to the operating system on which Subversion was run. In other words, if a user on a Windows machine checks out a working copy that contains a file with an svn:eol-style property set to native, that file will contain CRLF EOL markers. A Unix user checking out a working copy that contains the same file will see LF EOL markers in his copy of the file.

Note that Subversion will actually store the file in the repository using normalized LF EOL markers regardless of the operating system. This is basically transparent to the user, though.

CRLF

这会导致这个文件使用CRLF序列作为EOL标志,不管使用何种操作系统。

LF

这会导致文件使用LF字符作为EOL标志,不管使用何种操作系统。

CR

This causes the file to contain CR characters for EOL markers, regardless of the operating system in use. This line-ending style is not very common.

5. 忽略未版本控制的条目

In any given working copy, there is a good chance that alongside all those versioned files and directories are other files and directories that are neither versioned nor intended to be. Text editors litter directories with backup files. Software compilers generate intermediate—or even final—files that you typically wouldn't bother to version. And users themselves drop various other files and directories wherever they see fit, often in version control working copies.

It's ludicrous to expect Subversion working copies to be somehow impervious to this kind of clutter and impurity. In fact, Subversion counts it as a feature that its working copies are just typical directories, just like unversioned trees. But these not-to-be-versioned files and directories can cause some annoyance for Subversion users. For example, because the svn add and svn import commands act recursively by default and don't know which files in a given tree you do and don't wish to version, it's easy to accidentally add stuff to version control that you didn't mean to. And because svn status reports, by default, every item of interest in a working copy—including unversioned files and directories—its output can get quite noisy where many of these things exist.

So Subversion provides two ways for telling it which files you would prefer that it simply disregard. One of the ways involves the use of Subversion's runtime configuration system (see 第 1 节 “运行配置区”), and therefore applies to all the Subversion operations that make use of that runtime configuration—generally those performed on a particular computer or by a particular user of a computer. The other way makes use of Subversion's directory property support and is more tightly bound to the versioned tree itself, and therefore affects everyone who has a working copy of that tree. Both of the mechanisms use file patterns (strings of literal and special wildcard characters used to match against filenames) to decide which files to ignore.

The Subversion runtime configuration system provides an option, global-ignores, whose value is a whitespace-delimited collection of file patterns. The Subversion client checks these patterns against the names of the files that are candidates for addition to version control, as well as to unversioned files that the svn status command notices. If any file's name matches one of the patterns, Subversion will basically act as if the file didn't exist at all. This is really useful for the kinds of files that you almost never want to version, such as editor backup files such as Emacs' *~ and .*~ files.

When found on a versioned directory, the svn:ignore property is expected to contain a list of newline-delimited file patterns that Subversion should use to determine ignorable objects in that same directory. These patterns do not override those found in the global-ignores runtime configuration option, but are instead appended to that list. And it's worth noting again that, unlike the global-ignores option, the patterns found in the svn:ignore property apply only to the directory on which that property is set, and not to any of its subdirectories. The svn:ignore property is a good way to tell Subversion to ignore files that are likely to be present in every user's working copy of that directory, such as compiler output or—to use an example more appropriate to this book—the HTML, PDF, or PostScript files generated as the result of a conversion of some source DocBook XML files to a more legible output format.

[注意]注意

Subversion's support for ignorable file patterns extends only to the one-time process of adding unversioned files and directories to version control. Once an object is under Subversion's control, the ignore pattern mechanisms no longer apply to it. In other words, don't expect Subversion to avoid committing changes you've made to a versioned file simply because that file's name matches an ignore pattern—Subversion always notices all of its versioned objects.

The global list of ignore patterns tends to be more a matter of personal taste and ties more closely to a user's particular tool chain than to the details of any particular working copy's needs. So, the rest of this section will focus on the svn:ignore property and its uses.

假定你的svn status有如下输出:

$ svn status calc
 M      calc/button.c
?       calc/calculator
?       calc/data.c
?       calc/debug_log
?       calc/debug_log.1
?       calc/debug_log.2.gz
?       calc/debug_log.3.gz

In this example, you have made some property modifications to button.c, but in your working copy, you also have some unversioned files: the latest calculator program that you've compiled from your source code, a source file named data.c, and a set of debugging output logfiles. Now, you know that your build system always results in the calculator program being generated.[16] And you know that your test suite always leaves those debugging logfiles lying around. These facts are true for all working copies of this project, not just your own. And you know that you aren't interested in seeing those things every time you run svn status, and you are pretty sure that nobody else is interested in them either. So you use svn propedit svn:ignore calc to add some ignore patterns to the calc directory.

$ svn propget svn:ignore calc
calculator
debug_log*
$

After you've added this property, you will now have a local property modification on the calc directory. But notice what else is different about your svn status output:

$ svn status
 M      calc
 M      calc/button.c
?       calc/data.c

Now, all that cruft is missing from the output! Your calculator compiled program and all those logfiles are still in your working copy; Subversion just isn't constantly reminding you that they are present and unversioned. And now with all the uninteresting noise removed from the display, you are left with more intriguing items—such as that source code file data.c that you probably forgot to add to version control.

Of course, this less-verbose report of your working copy status isn't the only one available. If you actually want to see the ignored files as part of the status report, you can pass the --no-ignore option to Subversion:

$ svn status --no-ignore
 M      calc
 M      calc/button.c
I       calc/calculator
?       calc/data.c
I       calc/debug_log
I       calc/debug_log.1
I       calc/debug_log.2.gz
I       calc/debug_log.3.gz

As mentioned earlier, the list of file patterns to ignore is also used by svn add and svn import. Both of these operations involve asking Subversion to begin managing some set of files and directories. Rather than force the user to pick and choose which files in a tree she wishes to start versioning, Subversion uses the ignore patterns—both the global and the per-directory lists—to determine which files should not be swept into the version control system as part of a larger recursive addition or import operation. And here again, you can use the --no-ignore option to tell Subversion to disregard its ignores list and operate on all the files and directories present.

[提示]提示

Even if svn:ignore is set, you may run into problems if you use shell wildcards in a command. Shell wildcards are expanded into an explicit list of targets before Subversion operates on them, so running svn SUBCOMMAND * is just like running svn SUBCOMMAND file1 file2 file3 …. In the case of the svn add command, this has an effect similar to passing the --no-ignore option. So instead of using a wildcard, use svn add --force . to do a bulk scheduling of unversioned things for addition. The explicit target will ensure that the current directory isn't overlooked because of being already under version control, and the --force option will cause Subversion to crawl through that directory, adding unversioned files while still honoring the svn:ignore property and global-ignores runtime configuration variable. Be sure to also provide the --depth files option to the svn add command if you don't want a fully recursive crawl for things to add.

6. 关键字替换

Subversion has the ability to substitute keywords—pieces of useful, dynamic information about a versioned file—into the contents of the file itself. Keywords generally provide information about the last modification made to the file. Because this information changes each time the file changes, and more importantly, just after the file changes, it is a hassle for any process except the version control system to keep the data completely up to date. Left to human authors, the information would inevitably grow stale.

For example, say you have a document in which you would like to display the last date on which it was modified. You could burden every author of that document to, just before committing their changes, also tweak the part of the document that describes when it was last changed. But sooner or later, someone would forget to do that. Instead, simply ask Subversion to perform keyword substitution on the LastChangedDate keyword. You control where the keyword is inserted into your document by placing a keyword anchor at the desired location in the file. This anchor is just a string of text formatted as $KeywordName$.

All keywords are case-sensitive where they appear as anchors in files: you must use the correct capitalization for the keyword to be expanded. You should consider the value of the svn:keywords property to be case-sensitive, too—certain keyword names will be recognized regardless of case, but this behavior is deprecated.

Subversion defines the list of keywords available for substitution. That list contains the following keywords, some of which have aliases that you can also use:

Date

This keyword describes the last time the file was known to have been changed in the repository, and is of the form $Date: 2006-07-22 21:42:37 -0700 (Sat, 22 Jul 2006) $. It may also be specified as LastChangedDate. Unlike the Id keyword, which uses UTC, the Date keyword displays dates using the local time zone.

Revision

This keyword describes the last known revision in which this file changed in the repository, and looks something like $Revision: 144 $. It may also be specified as LastChangedRevision or Rev.

Author

This keyword describes the last known user to change this file in the repository, and looks something like $Author: harry $. It may also be specified as LastChangedBy.

HeadURL

This keyword describes the full URL to the latest version of the file in the repository, and looks something like $HeadURL: http://svn.example.com/repos/trunk/calc.c $. It may be abbreviated as URL.

Id

This keyword is a compressed combination of the other keywords. Its substitution looks something like $Id: calc.c 148 2006-07-28 21:30:43Z sally $, and is interpreted to mean that the file calc.c was last changed in revision 148 on the evening of July 28, 2006 by the user sally. The date displayed by this keyword is in UTC, unlike that of the Date keyword (which uses the local time zone).

Header

This keyword is similar to the Id keyword but contains the full URL of the latest revision of the item, identical to HeadURL. Its substitution looks something like $Header: http://svn.example.com/repos/trunk/calc.c 148 2006-07-28 21:30:43Z sally $.

Several of the preceding descriptions use the phrase last known or similar wording. Keep in mind that keyword expansion is a client-side operation, and your client knows only about changes that have occurred in the repository when you update your working copy to include those changes. If you never update your working copy, your keywords will never expand to different values even if those versioned files are being changed regularly in the repository.

Simply adding keyword anchor text to your file does nothing special. Subversion will never attempt to perform textual substitutions on your file contents unless explicitly asked to do so. After all, you might be writing a document[17] about how to use keywords, and you don't want Subversion to substitute your beautiful examples of unsubstituted keyword anchors!

To tell Subversion whether to substitute keywords on a particular file, we again turn to the property-related subcommands. The svn:keywords property, when set on a versioned file, controls which keywords will be substituted on that file. The value is a space-delimited list of keyword names or aliases.

举个例子,假定你有一个版本化的文件weather.txt,内容如下:

Here is the latest report from the front lines.
$LastChangedDate$
$Rev$
Cumulus clouds are appearing more frequently as summer approaches.

With no svn:keywords property set on that file, Subversion will do nothing special. Now, let's enable substitution of the LastChangedDate keyword.

$ svn propset svn:keywords "Date Author" weather.txt
property 'svn:keywords' set on 'weather.txt'
$

Now you have made a local property modification on the weather.txt file. You will see no changes to the file's contents (unless you made some of your own prior to setting the property). Notice that the file contained a keyword anchor for the Rev keyword, yet we did not include that keyword in the property value we set. Subversion will happily ignore requests to substitute keywords that are not present in the file and will not substitute keywords that are not present in the svn:keywords property value.

Immediately after you commit this property change, Subversion will update your working file with the new substitute text. Instead of seeing your keyword anchor $LastChangedDate$, you'll see its substituted result. That result also contains the name of the keyword and continues to be delimited by the dollar sign ($) characters. And as we predicted, the Rev keyword was not substituted because we didn't ask for it to be.

Note also that we set the svn:keywords property to Date Author, yet the keyword anchor used the alias $LastChangedDate$ and still expanded correctly:

Here is the latest report from the front lines.
$LastChangedDate: 2006-07-22 21:42:37 -0700 (Sat, 22 Jul 2006) $
$Rev$
Cumulus clouds are appearing more frequently as summer approaches.

If someone else now commits a change to weather.txt, your copy of that file will continue to display the same substituted keyword value as before—until you update your working copy. At that time, the keywords in your weather.txt file will be resubstituted with information that reflects the most recent known commit to that file.

You can also instruct Subversion to maintain a fixed length (in terms of the number of bytes consumed) for the substituted keyword. By using a double colon (::) after the keyword name, followed by a number of space characters, you define that fixed width. When Subversion goes to substitute your keyword for the keyword and its value, it will essentially replace only those space characters, leaving the overall width of the keyword field unchanged. If the substituted value is shorter than the defined field width, there will be extra padding characters (spaces) at the end of the substituted field; if it is too long, it is truncated with a special hash (#) character just before the final dollar sign terminator.

For example, say you have a document in which you have some section of tabular data reflecting the document's Subversion keywords. Using the original Subversion keyword substitution syntax, your file might look something like:

$Rev$:     Revision of last commit
$Author$:  Author of last commit
$Date$:    Date of last commit

Now, that looks nice and tabular at the start of things. But when you then commit that file (with keyword substitution enabled, of course), you see:

$Rev: 12 $:     Revision of last commit
$Author: harry $:  Author of last commit
$Date: 2006-03-15 02:33:03 -0500 (Wed, 15 Mar 2006) $:    Date of last commit

The result is not so beautiful. And you might be tempted to then adjust the file after the substitution so that it again looks tabular. But that holds only as long as the keyword values are the same width. If the last committed revision rolls into a new place value (say, from 99 to 100), or if another person with a longer username commits the file, stuff gets all crooked again. However, if you are using Subversion 1.2 or later, you can use the new fixed-length keyword syntax and define some field widths that seem sane, so your file might look like this:

$Rev::               $:  Revision of last commit
$Author::            $:  Author of last commit
$Date::              $:  Date of last commit

You commit this change to your file. This time, Subversion notices the new fixed-length keyword syntax and maintains the width of the fields as defined by the padding you placed between the double colon and the trailing dollar sign. After substitution, the width of the fields is completely unchanged—the short values for Rev and Author are padded with spaces, and the long Date field is truncated by a hash character:

$Rev:: 13            $:  Revision of last commit
$Author:: harry      $:  Author of last commit
$Date:: 2006-03-15 0#$:  Date of last commit

The use of fixed-length keywords is especially handy when performing substitutions into complex file formats that themselves use fixed-length fields for data, or for which the stored size of a given data field is overbearingly difficult to modify from outside the format's native application. Of course, where binary file formats are concerned, you must always take great care that any keyword substitution you introduce—fixed-length or otherwise—does not violate the integrity of that format. While it might sound easy enough, this can be an astonishingly difficult task for most of the popular binary file formats in use today, and not something to be undertaken by the faint of heart!

[警告]警告

Be aware that because the width of a keyword field is measured in bytes, the potential for corruption of multibyte values exists. For example, a username that contains some multibyte UTF-8 characters might suffer truncation in the middle of the string of bytes that make up one of those characters. The result will be a mere truncation when viewed at the byte level, but will likely appear as a string with an incorrect or garbled final character when viewed as UTF-8 text. It is conceivable that certain applications, when asked to load the file, would notice the broken UTF-8 text and deem the entire file corrupt, refusing to operate on the file altogether. So, when limiting keywords to a fixed size, choose a size that allows for this type of byte-wise expansion.

7. 稀疏目录

By default, most Subversion operations on directories act in a recursive manner. For example, svn checkout creates a working copy with every file and directory in the specified area of the repository, descending recursively through the repository tree until the entire structure is copied to your local disk. Subversion 1.5 introduces a feature called sparse directories (or shallow checkouts) that allows you to easily check out a working copy—or a portion of a working copy—more shallowly than full recursion, with the freedom to bring in previously ignored files and subdirectories at a later time.

For example, say we have a repository with a tree of files and directories with names of the members of a human family with pets. (It's an odd example, to be sure, but bear with us.) A regular svn checkout operation will give us a working copy of the whole tree:

$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos mom
A    mom/son
A    mom/son/grandson
A    mom/daughter
A    mom/daughter/granddaughter1
A    mom/daughter/granddaughter1/bunny1.txt
A    mom/daughter/granddaughter1/bunny2.txt
A    mom/daughter/granddaughter2
A    mom/daughter/fishie.txt
A    mom/kitty1.txt
A    mom/doggie1.txt
Checked out revision 1.
$

Now, let's check out the same tree again, but this time we'll ask Subversion to give us only the topmost directory with none of its children at all:

$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos mom-empty --depth empty
Checked out revision 1
$

Notice that we added to our original svn checkout command line a new --depth option. This option is present on many of Subversion's subcommands and is similar to the --non-recursive (-N) and --recursive (-R) options. In fact, it combines, improves upon, supercedes, and ultimately obsoletes these two older options. For starters, it expands the supported degrees of depth specification available to users, adding some previously unsupported (or inconsistently supported) depths. Here are the depth values that you can request for a given Subversion operation:

--depth empty

Include only the immediate target of the operation, not any of its file or directory children.

--depth files

Include the immediate target of the operation and any of its immediate file children.

--depth immediates

Include the immediate target of the operation and any of its immediate file or directory children. The directory children will themselves be empty.

--depth infinity

Include the immediate target, its file and directory children, its children's children, and so on to full recursion.

Of course, merely combining two existing options into one hardly constitutes a new feature worthy of a whole section in our book. Fortunately, there is more to this story. This idea of depth extends not just to the operations you perform with your Subversion client, but also as a description of a working copy citizen's ambient depth, which is the depth persistently recorded by the working copy for that item. Its key strength is this very persistence—the fact that it is sticky. The working copy remembers the depth you've selected for each item in it until you later change that depth selection; by default, Subversion commands operate on the working copy citizens present, regardless of their selected depth settings.

[提示]提示

You can check the recorded ambient depth of a working copy using the svn info command. If the ambient depth is anything other than infinite recursion, svn info will display a line describing that depth value:

$ svn info mom-immediates | grep "^Depth:"
Depth: immediates
$

Our previous examples demonstrated checkouts of infinite depth (the default for svn checkout) and empty depth. Let's look now at examples of the other depth values:

$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos mom-files --depth files
A    mom-files/kitty1.txt
A    mom-files/doggie1.txt
Checked out revision 1.
$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos mom-immediates --depth immediates
A    mom-immediates/son
A    mom-immediates/daughter
A    mom-immediates/kitty1.txt
A    mom-immediates/doggie1.txt
Checked out revision 1.
$

As described, each of these depths is something more than only the target, but something less than full recursion.

We've used svn checkout as an example here, but you'll find the --depth option present on many other Subversion commands, too. In those other commands, depth specification is a way to limit the scope of an operation to some depth, much like the way the older --non-recursive (-N) and --recursive (-R) options behave. This means that when operating on a working copy of some depth, while requesting an operation of a shallower depth, the operation is limited to that shallower depth. In fact, we can make an even more general statement: given a working copy of any arbitrary—even mixed—ambient depth, and a Subversion command with some requested operational depth, the command will maintain the ambient depth of the working copy members while still limiting the scope of the operation to the requested (or default) operational depth.

In addition to the --depth option, the svn update and svn switch subcommands also accept a second depth-related option: --set-depth. It is with this option that you can change the sticky depth of a working copy item. Watch what happens as we take our empty-depth checkout and gradually telescope it deeper using svn update --set-depth NEW-DEPTH TARGET:

$ svn update --set-depth files mom-empty
A    mom-empty/kittie1.txt
A    mom-empty/doggie1.txt
Updated to revision 1.
$ svn update --set-depth immediates mom-empty
A    mom-empty/son
A    mom-empty/daughter
Updated to revision 1.
$ svn update --set-depth infinity mom-empty
A    mom-empty/son/grandson
A    mom-empty/daughter/granddaughter1
A    mom-empty/daughter/granddaughter1/bunny1.txt
A    mom-empty/daughter/granddaughter1/bunny2.txt
A    mom-empty/daughter/granddaughter2
A    mom-empty/daughter/fishie1.txt
Updated to revision 1.
$

随着我们逐渐的增加我们的depth选择,版本库给我们目录树的片段。

In our example, we operated only on the root of our working copy, changing its ambient depth value. But we can independently change the ambient depth value of any subdirectory inside the working copy, too. Careful use of this ability allows us to flesh out only certain portions of the working copy tree, leaving other portions absent altogether (hence the sparse bit of the feature's name). Here's an example of how we might build out a portion of one branch of our family's tree, enable full recursion on another branch, and keep still other pieces pruned (absent from disk).

$ rm -rf mom-empty
$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos mom-empty --depth empty
Checked out revision 1.
$ svn update --set-depth empty mom-empty/son
A    mom-empty/son
Updated to revision 1.
$ svn update --set-depth empty mom-empty/daughter
A    mom-empty/daughter
Updated to revision 1.
$ svn update --set-depth infinity mom-empty/daughter/granddaughter1
A    mom-empty/daughter/granddaughter1
A    mom-empty/daughter/granddaughter1/bunny1.txt
A    mom-empty/daughter/granddaughter1/bunny2.txt
Updated to revision 1.
$

Fortunately, having a complex collection of ambient depths in a single working copy doesn't complicate the way you interact with that working copy. You can still make, revert, display, and commit local modifications in your working copy without providing any new options (including --depth and --set-depth) to the relevant subcommands. Even svn update works as it does elsewhere when no specific depth is provided—it updates the working copy targets that are present while honoring their sticky depths.

You might at this point be wondering, So what? When would I use this? One scenario where this feature finds utility is tied to a particular repository layout, specifically where you have many related or codependent projects or software modules living as siblings in a single repository location (trunk/project1, trunk/project2, trunk/project3, etc.). In such scenarios, it might be the case that you personally care about only a handful of those projects—maybe some primary project and a few other modules on which it depends. You can check out individual working copies of all of these things, but those working copies are disjoint and, as a result, it can be cumbersome to perform operations across several or all of them at the same time. The alternative is to use the sparse directories feature, building out a single working copy that contains only the modules you care about. You'd start with an empty-depth checkout of the common parent directory of the projects, and then update with infinite depth only the items you wish to have, like we demonstrated in the previous example. Think of it like an opt-in system for working copy citizens.

The original (Subversion 1.5) implementation of shallow checkouts was good, but didn't support de-telescoping of working copy items. Subversion 1.6 remedies this problem. For example, running svn update --set-depth empty in an infinite-depth working copy will discard everything but the topmost directory.[18] Subversion 1.6 also introduces another supported value for the --set-depth option: exclude. Using --set-depth exclude with svn update will cause the update target to be removed from the working copy entirely—a directory target won't even be left present-but-empty. This is especially handy when there are more things that you'd like to keep in a working copy than things you'd like to not keep.

Consider a directory with hundreds of subdirectories, one of which you would like to omit from your working copy. Using an additive approach to sparse directories, you might check out the directory with an empty depth, then explicitly telescope (using svn update --set-depth infinity) each and every subdirectory of the directory except the one you don't care about it.

$ svn checkout http://svn.example.com/repos/many-dirs --depth empty
…
$ svn update --set-depth infinity many-dirs/wanted-dir-1
…
$ svn update --set-depth infinity many-dirs/wanted-dir-2
…
$ svn update --set-depth infinity many-dirs/wanted-dir-3
…
### and so on, and so on, ...

This could be quite tedious, especially since you don't even have stubs of these directories in your working copy to deal with. Such a working copy would also have another characteristic that you might not expect or desire: if someone else creates any new subdirectories in this top-level directory, you won't receive those when you update your working copy.

With Subversion 1.6, you could take a different approach. First, you'd check out the directory in full. Then you would run svn update --set-depth exclude on the one subdirectory you don't care about.

$ svn checkout http://svn.example.com/repos/many-dirs
…
$ svn update --set-depth exclude many-dirs/unwanted-dir
D         many-dirs/unwanted-dir
$

This approach leaves your working copy with the same stuff as in the first approach, but any new subdirectories which appear in the top-level directory would also show up when you update your working copy. The downside of this approach is that you have to actually check out that whole subdirectory that you don't even want just so you can tell Subversion that you don't want it. This might not even be possible if that subdirectory is too large to fit on your disk (which might, after all, be the very reason you don't want it in your working copy).

[注意]注意

While the functionality for excluding an existing item from a working copy was hung off of the svn update command, you might have noticed that the output from svn update --set-depth exclude differs from that of a normal update operation. This output betrays the fact that, under the hood, exlusion is a completely client-side operation, very much unlike a typical update.

In such a situation, you might consider a compromise approach. First, check out the top-level directory with --depth immediates. Then, exclude the directory you don't want using svn update --set-depth exclude. Finally, telescope all the items that remain to infinite depth, which should be fairly easy to do because they are all addressable in your shell.

$ svn checkout http://svn.example.com/repos/many-dirs --depth immediates
…
$ svn update --set-depth exclude many-dirs/unwanted-dir
D         many-dirs/unwanted-dir
$ svn update --set-depth infinity many-dirs/*
…
$

Once again, your working copy will have the same stuff as in the previous two scenarios. But now, any time a new file or subdirectory is committed to the top-level directory, you'll receive it—at an empty depth—when you update your working copy. You can now decide what to do with such newly appearing working copy items: expand them into infinite depth, or exclude them altogether.

8. 锁定

Subversion's copy-modify-merge version control model lives and dies on its data merging algorithms—specifically on how well those algorithms perform when trying to resolve conflicts caused by multiple users modifying the same file concurrently. Subversion itself provides only one such algorithm: a three-way differencing algorithm that is smart enough to handle data at a granularity of a single line of text. Subversion also allows you to supplement its content merge processing with external differencing utilities (as described in 第 4.2 节 “外置 diff3” and 第 4.3 节 “External merge”), some of which may do an even better job, perhaps providing granularity of a word or a single character of text. But common among those algorithms is that they generally work only on text files. The landscape starts to look pretty grim when you start talking about content merges of nontextual file formats. And when you can't find a tool that can handle that type of merging, you begin to run into problems with the copy-modify-merge model.

Let's look at a real-life example of where this model runs aground. Harry and Sally are both graphic designers working on the same project, a bit of marketing collateral for an automobile mechanic. Central to the design of a particular poster is an image of a car in need of some bodywork, stored in a file using the PNG image format. The poster's layout is almost finished, and both Harry and Sally are pleased with the particular photo they chose for their damaged car—a baby blue 1967 Ford Mustang with an unfortunate bit of crumpling on the left front fender.

Now, as is common in graphic design work, there's a change in plans, which causes the car's color to be a concern. So Sally updates her working copy to HEAD, fires up her photo-editing software, and sets about tweaking the image so that the car is now cherry red. Meanwhile, Harry, feeling particularly inspired that day, decides that the image would have greater impact if the car also appears to have suffered greater impact. He, too, updates to HEAD, and then draws some cracks on the vehicle's windshield. He manages to finish his work before Sally finishes hers, and after admiring the fruits of his undeniable talent, he commits the modified image. Shortly thereafter, Sally is finished with the car's new finish and tries to commit her changes. But, as expected, Subversion fails the commit, informing Sally that her version of the image is now out of date.

Here's where the difficulty sets in. If Harry and Sally were making changes to a text file, Sally would simply update her working copy, receiving Harry's changes in the process. In the worst possible case, they would have modified the same region of the file, and Sally would have to work out by hand the proper resolution to the conflict. But these aren't text files—they are binary images. And while it's a simple matter to describe what one would expect the results of this content merge to be, there is precious little chance that any software exists that is smart enough to examine the common baseline image that each of these graphic artists worked against, the changes that Harry made, and the changes that Sally made, and then spit out an image of a busted-up red Mustang with a cracked windshield!

Of course, things would have gone more smoothly if Harry and Sally had serialized their modifications to the image—if, say, Harry had waited to draw his windshield cracks on Sally's now-red car, or if Sally had tweaked the color of a car whose windshield was already cracked. As is discussed in 第 1.3.3 节 ““拷贝-修改-合并”方案”, most of these types of problems go away entirely where perfect communication between Harry and Sally exists.[19] But as one's version control system is, in fact, one form of communication, it follows that having that software facilitate the serialization of nonparallelizable editing efforts is no bad thing. This is where Subversion's implementation of the lock-modify-unlock model steps into the spotlight. This is where we talk about Subversion's locking feature, which is similar to the reserved checkouts mechanisms of other version control systems.

Subversion's locking feature exists ultimately to minimize wasted time and effort. By allowing a user to programmatically claim the exclusive right to change a file in the repository, that user can be reasonably confident that any energy he invests on unmergeable changes won't be wasted—his commit of those changes will succeed. Also, because Subversion communicates to other users that serialization is in effect for a particular versioned object, those users can reasonably expect that the object is about to be changed by someone else. They, too, can then avoid wasting their time and energy on unmergeable changes that won't be committable due to eventual out-of-dateness.

When referring to Subversion's locking feature, one is actually talking about a fairly diverse collection of behaviors, which include the ability to lock a versioned file[20] (claiming the exclusive right to modify the file), to unlock that file (yielding that exclusive right to modify), to see reports about which files are locked and by whom, to annotate files for which locking before editing is strongly advised, and so on. In this section, we'll cover all of these facets of the larger locking feature.

8.1. 创建锁定

In the Subversion repository, a lock is a piece of metadata that grants exclusive access to one user to change a file. This user is said to be the lock owner. Each lock also has a unique identifier, typically a long string of characters, known as the lock token. The repository manages locks, ultimately handling their creation, enforcement, and removal. If any commit transaction attempts to modify or delete a locked file (or delete one of the parent directories of the file), the repository will demand two pieces of information—that the client performing the commit be authenticated as the lock owner, and that the lock token has been provided as part of the commit process as a form of proof that the client knows which lock it is using.

To demonstrate lock creation, let's refer back to our example of multiple graphic designers working on the same binary image files. Harry has decided to change a JPEG image. To prevent other people from committing changes to the file while he is modifying it (as well as alerting them that he is about to change it), he locks the file in the repository using the svn lock command.

$ svn lock banana.jpg -m "Editing file for tomorrow's release."
'banana.jpg' locked by user 'harry'.
$

The preceding example demonstrates a number of new things. First, notice that Harry passed the --message (-m) option to svn lock. Similar to svn commit, the svn lock command can take comments—via either --message (-m) or --file (-F)—to describe the reason for locking the file. Unlike svn commit, however, svn lock will not demand a message by launching your preferred text editor. Lock comments are optional, but still recommended to aid communication.

Second, the lock attempt succeeded. This means that the file wasn't already locked, and that Harry had the latest version of the file. If Harry's working copy of the file had been out of date, the repository would have rejected the request, forcing Harry to svn update and reattempt the locking command. The locking command would also have failed if the file had already been locked by someone else.

As you can see, the svn lock command prints confirmation of the successful lock. At this point, the fact that the file is locked becomes apparent in the output of the svn status and svn info reporting subcommands.

$ svn status
     K  banana.jpg

$ svn info banana.jpg
Path: banana.jpg
Name: banana.jpg
URL: http://svn.example.com/repos/project/banana.jpg
Repository Root: http://svn.example.com/repos/project
Repository UUID: edb2f264-5ef2-0310-a47a-87b0ce17a8ec
Revision: 2198
Node Kind: file
Schedule: normal
Last Changed Author: frank
Last Changed Rev: 1950
Last Changed Date: 2006-03-15 12:43:04 -0600 (Wed, 15 Mar 2006)
Text Last Updated: 2006-06-08 19:23:07 -0500 (Thu, 08 Jun 2006)
Properties Last Updated: 2006-06-08 19:23:07 -0500 (Thu, 08 Jun 2006)
Checksum: 3b110d3b10638f5d1f4fe0f436a5a2a5
Lock Token: opaquelocktoken:0c0f600b-88f9-0310-9e48-355b44d4a58e
Lock Owner: harry
Lock Created: 2006-06-14 17:20:31 -0500 (Wed, 14 Jun 2006)
Lock Comment (1 line):
Editing file for tomorrow's release.

$

The fact that the svn info command, which does not contact the repository when run against working copy paths, can display the lock token reveals an important piece of information about those tokens: they are cached in the working copy. The presence of the lock token is critical. It gives the working copy authorization to make use of the lock later on. Also, the svn status command shows a K next to the file (short for locKed), indicating that the lock token is present.

现在Harry已经锁定了banana.jpg,Sally不能修改或删除这个文件:

$ svn delete banana.jpg
D         banana.jpg
$ svn commit -m "Delete useless file."
Deleting       banana.jpg
svn: Commit failed (details follow):
svn: Server sent unexpected return value (423 Locked) in response to DELETE\
 request for '/repos/project/!svn/wrk/64bad3a9-96f9-0310-818a-df4224ddc35d/\
banana.jpg'
$

But Harry, after touching up the banana's shade of yellow, is able to commit his changes to the file. That's because he authenticates as the lock owner and also because his working copy holds the correct lock token:

$ svn status
M    K  banana.jpg
$ svn commit -m "Make banana more yellow"
Sending        banana.jpg
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 2201.
$ svn status
$

Notice that after the commit is finished, svn status shows that the lock token is no longer present in the working copy. This is the standard behavior of svn commit—it searches the working copy (or list of targets, if you provide such a list) for local modifications and sends all the lock tokens it encounters during this walk to the server as part of the commit transaction. After the commit completes successfully, all of the repository locks that were mentioned are released—even on files that weren't committed. This is meant to discourage users from being sloppy about locking or from holding locks for too long. If Harry haphazardly locks 30 files in a directory named images because he's unsure of which files he needs to change, yet changes only four of those files, when he runs svn commit images, the process will still release all 30 locks.

This behavior of automatically releasing locks can be overridden with the --no-unlock option to svn commit. This is best used for those times when you want to commit changes, but still plan to make more changes and thus need to retain existing locks. You can also make this your default behavior by setting the no-unlock runtime configuration option (see 第 1 节 “运行配置区”).

Of course, locking a file doesn't oblige one to commit a change to it. The lock can be released at any time with a simple svn unlock command:

$ svn unlock banana.c
'banana.c' unlocked.

8.2. 发现锁定

When a commit fails due to someone else's locks, it's fairly easy to learn about them. The easiest way is to run svn status -u:

$ svn status -u
M               23   bar.c
M    O          32   raisin.jpg
        *       72   foo.h
Status against revision:     105
$

In this example, Sally can see not only that her copy of foo.h is out of date, but also that one of the two modified files she plans to commit is locked in the repository. The O symbol stands for Other, meaning that a lock exists on the file and was created by somebody else. If she were to attempt a commit, the lock on raisin.jpg would prevent it. Sally is left wondering who made the lock, when, and why. Once again, svn info has the answers:

$ svn info ^/raisin.jpg
Path: raisin.jpg
Name: raisin.jpg
URL: http://svn.example.com/repos/project/raisin.jpg
Repository Root: http://svn.example.com/repos/project
Repository UUID: edb2f264-5ef2-0310-a47a-87b0ce17a8ec
Revision: 105
Node Kind: file
Last Changed Author: sally
Last Changed Rev: 32
Last Changed Date: 2006-01-25 12:43:04 -0600 (Sun, 25 Jan 2006)
Lock Token: opaquelocktoken:fc2b4dee-98f9-0310-abf3-653ff3226e6b
Lock Owner: harry
Lock Created: 2006-02-16 13:29:18 -0500 (Thu, 16 Feb 2006)
Lock Comment (1 line):
Need to make a quick tweak to this image.
$

Just as you can use svn info to examine objects in the working copy, you can also use it to examine objects in the repository. If the main argument to svn info is a working copy path, then all of the working copy's cached information is displayed; any mention of a lock means that the working copy is holding a lock token (if a file is locked by another user or in another working copy, svn info on a working copy path will show no lock information at all). If the main argument to svn info is a URL, the information reflects the latest version of an object in the repository, and any mention of a lock describes the current lock on the object.

So in this particular example, Sally can see that Harry locked the file on February 16 to make a quick tweak. It being June, she suspects that he probably forgot all about the lock. She might phone Harry to complain and ask him to release the lock. If he's unavailable, she might try to forcibly break the lock herself or ask an administrator to do so.

8.3. 解除和偷窃锁定

A repository lock isn't sacred—in Subversion's default configuration state, locks can be released not only by the person who created them, but by anyone. When somebody other than the original lock creator destroys a lock, we refer to this as breaking the lock.

From the administrator's chair, it's simple to break locks. The svnlook and svnadmin programs have the ability to display and remove locks directly from the repository. (For more information about these tools, see 第 4.1 节 “管理员的工具箱”.)

$ svnadmin lslocks /var/svn/repos
Path: /project2/images/banana.jpg
UUID Token: opaquelocktoken:c32b4d88-e8fb-2310-abb3-153ff1236923
Owner: frank
Created: 2006-06-15 13:29:18 -0500 (Thu, 15 Jun 2006)
Expires: 
Comment (1 line):
Still improving the yellow color.

Path: /project/raisin.jpg
UUID Token: opaquelocktoken:fc2b4dee-98f9-0310-abf3-653ff3226e6b
Owner: harry
Created: 2006-02-16 13:29:18 -0500 (Thu, 16 Feb 2006)
Expires: 
Comment (1 line):
Need to make a quick tweak to this image.

$ svnadmin rmlocks /var/svn/repos /project/raisin.jpg
Removed lock on '/project/raisin.jpg'.
$

The more interesting option is to allow users to break each other's locks over the network. To do this, Sally simply needs to pass the --force to the svn unlock command:

$ svn status -u
M               23   bar.c
M    O          32   raisin.jpg
        *       72   foo.h
Status against revision:     105
$ svn unlock raisin.jpg
svn: 'raisin.jpg' is not locked in this working copy
$ svn info raisin.jpg | grep URL
URL: http://svn.example.com/repos/project/raisin.jpg
$ svn unlock http://svn.example.com/repos/project/raisin.jpg
svn: Unlock request failed: 403 Forbidden (http://svn.example.com)
$ svn unlock --force http://svn.example.com/repos/project/raisin.jpg
'raisin.jpg' unlocked.
$

Now, Sally's initial attempt to unlock failed because she ran svn unlock directly on her working copy of the file, and no lock token was present. To remove the lock directly from the repository, she needs to pass a URL to svn unlock. Her first attempt to unlock the URL fails, because she can't authenticate as the lock owner (nor does she have the lock token). But when she passes --force, the authentication and authorization requirements are ignored, and the remote lock is broken.

Simply breaking a lock may not be enough. In the running example, Sally may not only want to break Harry's long-forgotten lock, but relock the file for her own use. She can accomplish this by using svn unlock with --force and then svn lock back-to-back, but there's a small chance that somebody else might lock the file between the two commands. The simpler thing to do is to steal the lock, which involves breaking and relocking the file all in one atomic step. To do this, Sally passes the --force option to svn lock:

$ svn lock raisin.jpg
svn: Lock request failed: 423 Locked (http://svn.example.com)
$ svn lock --force raisin.jpg
'raisin.jpg' locked by user 'sally'.
$

In any case, whether the lock is broken or stolen, Harry may be in for a surprise. Harry's working copy still contains the original lock token, but that lock no longer exists. The lock token is said to be defunct. The lock represented by the lock token has either been broken (no longer in the repository) or stolen (replaced with a different lock). Either way, Harry can see this by asking svn status to contact the repository:

$ svn status
     K  raisin.jpg
$ svn status -u
     B          32   raisin.jpg
Status against revision:     105
$ svn update
  B  raisin.jpg
Updated to revision 105.
$ svn status
$

If the repository lock was broken, then svn status --show-updates (-u) displays a B (Broken) symbol next to the file. If a new lock exists in place of the old one, then a T (sTolen) symbol is shown. Finally, svn update notices any defunct lock tokens and removes them from the working copy.

8.4. 锁定交流

We've seen how svn lock and svn unlock can be used to create, release, break, and steal locks. This satisfies the goal of serializing commit access to a file. But what about the larger problem of preventing wasted time?

For example, suppose Harry locks an image file and then begins editing it. Meanwhile, miles away, Sally wants to do the same thing. She doesn't think to run svn status -u, so she has no idea that Harry has already locked the file. She spends hours editing the file, and when she tries to commit her change, she discovers that either the file is locked or that she's out of date. Regardless, her changes aren't mergeable with Harry's. One of these two people has to throw away his or her work, and a lot of time has been wasted.

Subversion's solution to this problem is to provide a mechanism to remind users that a file ought to be locked before the editing begins. The mechanism is a special property: svn:needs-lock. If that property is attached to a file (regardless of its value, which is irrelevant), Subversion will try to use filesystem-level permissions to make the file read-only—unless, of course, the user has explicitly locked the file. When a lock token is present (as a result of using svn lock), the file becomes read/write. When the lock is released, the file becomes read-only again.

The theory, then, is that if the image file has this property attached, Sally would immediately notice something is strange when she opens the file for editing: many applications alert users immediately when a read-only file is opened for editing, and nearly all would prevent her from saving changes to the file. This reminds her to lock the file before editing, whereby she discovers the preexisting lock:

$ /usr/local/bin/gimp raisin.jpg
gimp: error: file is read-only!
$ ls -l raisin.jpg
-r--r--r--   1 sally   sally   215589 Jun  8 19:23 raisin.jpg
$ svn lock raisin.jpg
svn: Lock request failed: 423 Locked (http://svn.example.com)
$ svn info http://svn.example.com/repos/project/raisin.jpg | grep Lock
Lock Token: opaquelocktoken:fc2b4dee-98f9-0310-abf3-653ff3226e6b
Lock Owner: harry
Lock Created: 2006-06-08 07:29:18 -0500 (Thu, 08 June 2006)
Lock Comment (1 line):
Making some tweaks.  Locking for the next two hours.
$
[提示]提示

Users and administrators alike are encouraged to attach the svn:needs-lock property to any file that cannot be contextually merged. This is the primary technique for encouraging good locking habits and preventing wasted effort.

Note that this property is a communication tool that works independently from the locking system. In other words, any file can be locked, whether or not this property is present. And conversely, the presence of this property doesn't make the repository require a lock when committing.

Unfortunately, the system isn't flawless. It's possible that even when a file has the property, the read-only reminder won't always work. Sometimes applications misbehave and hijack the read-only file, silently allowing users to edit and save the file anyway. There's not much that Subversion can do in this situation—at the end of the day, there's simply no substitution for good interpersonal communication.[21]

9. 外部定义

Sometimes it is useful to construct a working copy that is made out of a number of different checkouts. For example, you may want different subdirectories to come from different locations in a repository or perhaps from different repositories altogether. You could certainly set up such a scenario by hand—using svn checkout to create the sort of nested working copy structure you are trying to achieve. But if this layout is important for everyone who uses your repository, every other user will need to perform the same checkout operations that you did.

Fortunately, Subversion provides support for externals definitions. An externals definition is a mapping of a local directory to the URL—and ideally a particular revision—of a versioned directory. In Subversion, you declare externals definitions in groups using the svn:externals property. You can create or modify this property using svn propset or svn propedit (see 第 3.2 节 “操作属性”). It can be set on any versioned directory, and its value describes both the external repository location and the client-side directory to which that location should be checked out.

The convenience of the svn:externals property is that once it is set on a versioned directory, everyone who checks out a working copy with that directory also gets the benefit of the externals definition. In other words, once one person has made the effort to define the nested working copy structure, no one else has to bother—Subversion will, after checking out the original working copy, automatically also check out the external working copies.

[警告]警告

The relative target subdirectories of externals definitions must not already exist on your or other users' systems—Subversion will create them when it checks out the external working copy.

You also get in the externals definition design all the regular benefits of Subversion properties. The definitions are versioned. If you need to change an externals definition, you can do so using the regular property modification subcommands. When you commit a change to the svn:externals property, Subversion will synchronize the checked-out items against the changed externals definition when you next run svn update. The same thing will happen when others update their working copies and receive your changes to the externals definition.

[提示]提示

因为svn:externals的值是多行的,所以我们强烈建议使用svn propedit,而不是使用svn propset

Subversion releases prior to 1.5 honor an externals definition format that is a multiline table of subdirectories (relative to the versioned directory on which the property is set), optional revision flags, and fully qualified, absolute Subversion repository URLs. An example of this might look as follows:

$ svn propget svn:externals calc
third-party/sounds             http://svn.example.com/repos/sounds
third-party/skins -r148        http://svn.example.com/skinproj
third-party/skins/toolkit -r21 http://svn.example.com/skin-maker

注意前一个外部定义实例,当有人取出了一个calc目录的工作拷贝,Subversion会继续来取出外部定义的项目。

$ svn checkout http://svn.example.com/repos/calc
A    calc
A    calc/Makefile
A    calc/integer.c
A    calc/button.c
Checked out revision 148.

Fetching external item into calc/third-party/sounds
A    calc/third-party/sounds/ding.ogg
A    calc/third-party/sounds/dong.ogg
A    calc/third-party/sounds/clang.ogg
…
A    calc/third-party/sounds/bang.ogg
A    calc/third-party/sounds/twang.ogg
Checked out revision 14.

Fetching external item into calc/third-party/skins
…

As of Subversion 1.5, though, a new format of the svn:externals property is supported. Externals definitions are still multiline, but the order and format of the various pieces of information have changed. The new syntax more closely mimics the order of arguments you might pass to svn checkout: the optional revision flags come first, then the external Subversion repository URL, and finally the relative local subdirectory. Notice, though, that this time we didn't say fully qualified, absolute Subversion repository URLs. That's because the new format supports relative URLs and URLs that carry peg revisions. The previous example of an externals definition might, in Subversion 1.5, look like the following:

$ svn propget svn:externals calc
      http://svn.example.com/repos/sounds third-party/sounds
-r148 http://svn.example.com/skinproj third-party/skins
-r21  http://svn.example.com/skin-maker third-party/skins/toolkit

Or, making use of the peg revision syntax (which we describe in detail in 第 2 节 “Peg 和实施修订版本”), it might appear as:

$ svn propget svn:externals calc
http://svn.example.com/repos/sounds third-party/sounds
http://svn.example.com/skinproj@148 third-party/skins
http://svn.example.com/skin-maker@21 third-party/skins/toolkit
[提示]提示

You should seriously consider using explicit revision numbers in all of your externals definitions. Doing so means that you get to decide when to pull down a different snapshot of external information, and exactly which snapshot to pull. Besides avoiding the surprise of getting changes to third-party repositories that you might not have any control over, using explicit revision numbers also means that as you backdate your working copy to a previous revision, your externals definitions will also revert to the way they looked in that previous revision, which in turn means that the external working copies will be updated to match the way they looked back when your repository was at that previous revision. For software projects, this could be the difference between a successful and a failed build of an older snapshot of your complex codebase.

For most repositories, these three ways of formatting the externals definitions have the same ultimate effect. They all bring the same benefits. Unfortunately, they all bring the same annoyances, too. Since the definitions shown use absolute URLs, moving or copying a directory to which they are attached will not affect what gets checked out as an external (though the relative local target subdirectory will, of course, move with the renamed directory). This can be confusing—even frustrating—in certain situations. For example, say you have a top-level directory named my-project, and you've created an externals definition on one of its subdirectories (my-project/some-dir) that tracks the latest revision of another of its subdirectories (my-project/external-dir).

$ svn checkout http://svn.example.com/projects .
A    my-project
A    my-project/some-dir
A    my-project/external-dir
…
Fetching external item into 'my-project/some-dir/subdir'
Checked out external at revision 11.

Checked out revision 11.
$ svn propget svn:externals my-project/some-dir
subdir http://svn.example.com/projects/my-project/external-dir

$

Now you use svn move to rename the my-project directory. At this point, your externals definition will still refer to a path under the my-project directory, even though that directory no longer exists.

$ svn move -q my-project renamed-project
$ svn commit -m "Rename my-project to renamed-project."
Deleting       my-project
Adding         renamed-project

Committed revision 12.
$ svn update

Fetching external item into 'renamed-project/some-dir/subdir'
svn: Target path does not exist
$

Also, absolute URLs can cause problems with repositories that are available via multiple URL schemes. For example, if your Subversion server is configured to allow everyone to check out the repository over http:// or https://, but only allow commits to come in via https://, you have an interesting problem on your hands. If your externals definitions use the http:// form of the repository URLs, you won't be able to commit anything from the working copies created by those externals. On the other hand, if they use the https:// form of the URLs, anyone who might be checking out via http:// because his client doesn't support https:// will be unable to fetch the external items. Be aware, too, that if you need to reparent your working copy (using svn switch with the --relocate option), externals definitions will not also be reparented.

Subversion 1.5 takes a huge step in relieving these frustrations. As mentioned earlier, the URLs used in the new externals definition format can be relative, and Subversion provides syntax magic for specifying multiple flavors of URL relativity.

../

相对于设置 svn:externals 属性的目录的 URL。

^/

相对于设置 svn:externals 属性的版本库的根。

//

相对于设置 svn:externals 属性的目录的 URL 的方案。

/

相对于设置 svn:externals 属性的服务器的根 URL。

So, looking a fourth time at our previous externals definition example, and making use of the new absolute URL syntax in various ways, we might now see:

$ svn propget svn:externals calc
^/sounds third-party/sounds
/skinproj@148 third-party/skins
//svn.example.com/skin-maker@21 third-party/skins/toolkit
$

Subversion 1.6 brings two more improvements to externals definitions. First, it adds a quoting and escape mechanism to the syntax so that the path of the external working copy may contain whitespace. This was previously problematic, of course, because whitespace is used to delimit the fields in an externals definition. Now you need only wrap such a path specification in double-quote (") characters or escape the problematic characters in the path with a backslash (\) character. Of course, if you have spaces in the URL portion of the external definition, you should use the standard URI-encoding mechanism to represent those.

$ svn propget svn:externals paint
http://svn.thirdparty.com/repos/My%20Project "My Project"
http://svn.thirdparty.com/repos/%22Quotes%20Too%22 \"Quotes\ Too\"
$

Subversion 1.6 also introduces support for external definitions for files. File externals are configured just like externals for directories and appear as a versioned file in the working copy.

For example, let's say you had the file /trunk/bikeshed/blue.html in your repository, and you wanted this file, as it appeared in revision 40, to appear in your working copy of /trunk/www/ as green.html.

The externals definition required to achieve this should look familiar by now:

$ svn propget svn:externals www/
^/trunk/bikeshed/blue.html@40 green.html
$ svn update
Fetching external item into 'www'
E    www/green.html
Updated external to revision 40.

Update to revision 103.
$ svn status
    X   www/green.html
$

As you can see in the previous output, Subversion denotes file externals with the letter E when they are fetched into the working copy, and with the letter X when showing the working copy status.

[警告]警告

While directory externals can place the external directory at any depth, and any missing intermediate directories will be created, file externals must be placed into a working copy that is already checked out.

When examining the file external with svn info, you can see the URL and revision the external is coming from:

$ svn info www/green.html 
Path: www/green.html
Name: green.html
URL: http://svn.example.com/projects/my-project/trunk/bikeshed/blue.html
Repository Root: http://svn.example.com/projects/my-project
Repository UUID: b2a368dc-7564-11de-bb2b-113435390e17
Revision: 40
Node kind: file
Schedule: normal
Last Changed Author: harry
Last Changed Rev: 40
Last Changed Date: 2009-07-20 20:38:20 +0100 (Mon, 20 Jul 2009)
Text Last Updated: 2009-07-20 23:22:36 +0100 (Mon, 20 Jul 2009)
Checksum: 01a58b04617b92492d99662c3837b33b
$

Because file externals appear in the working copy as versioned files, they can be modified and even committed if they reference a file at the HEAD revision. The committed changes will then appear in the external as well as the file referenced by the external. However, in our example, we pinned the external to an older revision, so attempting to commit the external fails:

$ svn status
M   X   www/green.html
$ svn commit -m "change the color" www/green.html
Sending        www/green.html
svn: Commit failed (details follow):
svn: File '/trunk/bikeshed/blue.html' is out of date
$

Keep this in mind when defining file externals. If you need the external to refer to a certain revision of a file you will not be able to modify the external. If you want to be able to modify the external, you cannot specify a revision other than the HEAD revision, which is implied if no revision is specified.

Unfortunately, the support which exists for externals definitions in Subversion remains less than ideal. Both file and directory externals have shortcomings. For either type of external, the local subdirectory part of the definition cannot contain .. parent directory indicators (such as ../../skins/myskin). File externals cannot refer to files from other repositories. A file external's URL must always be in the same repository as the URL that the file external will be inserted into. Also, file externals cannot be moved or deleted. The svn:externals property must be modified instead. However, file externals can be copied.

Perhaps most disappointingly, the working copies created via the externals definition support are still disconnected from the primary working copy (on whose versioned directories the svn:externals property was actually set). And Subversion still truly operates only on nondisjoint working copies. So, for example, if you want to commit changes that you've made in one or more of those external working copies, you must run svn commit explicitly on those working copies—committing on the primary working copy will not recurse into any external ones.

We've already mentioned some of the additional shortcomings of the old svn:externals format and how the newer Subversion 1.5 format improves upon it. But be careful when making use of the new format that you don't inadvertently introduce new problems. For example, while the latest clients will continue to recognize and support the original externals definition format, pre-1.5 clients will not be able to correctly parse the new format. If you change all your externals definitions to the newer format, you effectively force everyone who uses those externals to upgrade their Subversion clients to a version that can parse them. Also, be careful to avoid naively relocating the -rNNN portion of the definition—the older format uses that revision as a peg revision, but the newer format uses it as an operative revision (with a peg revision of HEAD unless otherwise specified; see 第 2 节 “Peg 和实施修订版本” for a full explanation of the distinction here).

[警告]警告

External working copies are still completely self-sufficient working copies. You can operate directly on them as you would any other working copy. This can be a handy feature, allowing you to examine an external working copy independently of any primary working copy whose svn:externals property caused its instantiation. Be careful, though, that you don't inadvertently modify your external working copy in subtle ways that cause problems. For example, while an externals definition might specify that the external working copy should be held at a particular revision number, if you run svn update directly on the external working copy, Subversion will oblige, and now your external working copy is out of sync with its declaration in the primary working copy. Using svn switch to directly switch the external working copy (or some portion thereof) to another URL could cause similar problems if the contents of the primary working copy are expecting particular contents in the external content.

Besides the svn checkout, svn update, svn switch, and svn export commands which actually manage the disjoint (or disconnected) subdirectories into which externals are checked out, the svn status command also recognizes externals definitions. It displays a status code of X for the disjoint external subdirectories, and then recurses into those subdirectories to display the status of the external items themselves. You can pass the --ignore-externals option to any of these subcommands to disable externals definition processing.

10. 修改列表

It is commonplace for a developer to find himself working at any given time on multiple different, distinct changes to a particular bit of source code. This isn't necessarily due to poor planning or some form of digital masochism. A software engineer often spots bugs in his peripheral vision while working on some nearby chunk of source code. Or perhaps he's halfway through some large change when he realizes the solution he's working on is best committed as several smaller logical units. Often, these logical units aren't nicely contained in some module, safely separated from other changes. The units might overlap, modifying different files in the same module, or even modifying different lines in the same file.

Developers can employ various work methodologies to keep these logical changes organized. Some use separate working copies of the same repository to hold each individual change in progress. Others might choose to create short-lived feature branches in the repository and use a single working copy that is constantly switched to point to one such branch or another. Still others use diff and patch tools to back up and restore uncommitted changes to and from patch files associated with each change. Each of these methods has its pros and cons, and to a large degree, the details of the changes being made heavily influence the methodology used to distinguish them.

Subversion provides a changelists feature that adds yet another method to the mix. Changelists are basically arbitrary labels (currently at most one per file) applied to working copy files for the express purpose of associating multiple files together. Users of many of Google's software offerings are familiar with this concept already. For example, Gmail doesn't provide the traditional folders-based email organization mechanism. In Gmail, you apply arbitrary labels to emails, and multiple emails can be said to be part of the same group if they happen to share a particular label. Viewing only a group of similarly labeled emails then becomes a simple user interface trick. Many other Web 2.0 sites have similar mechanisms—consider the tags used by sites such as YouTube and Flickr, categories applied to blog posts, and so on. Folks understand today that organization of data is critical, but that how that data is organized needs to be a flexible concept. The old files-and-folders paradigm is too rigid for some applications.

Subversion's changelist support allows you to create changelists by applying labels to files you want to be associated with that changelist, remove those labels, and limit the scope of the files on which its subcommands operate to only those bearing a particular label. In this section, we'll look in detail at how to do these things.

10.1. 创建和更新修改列表

You can create, modify, and delete changelists using the svn changelist command. More accurately, you use this command to set or unset the changelist association of a particular working copy file. A changelist is effectively created the first time you label a file with that changelist; it is deleted when you remove that label from the last file that had it. Let's examine a usage scenario that demonstrates these concepts.

Harry is fixing some bugs in the calculator application's mathematics logic. His work leads him to change a couple of files:

$ svn status
M       integer.c
M       mathops.c
$

While testing his bug fix, Harry notices that his changes bring to light a tangentially related bug in the user interface logic found in button.c. Harry decides that he'll go ahead and fix that bug, too, as a separate commit from his math fixes. Now, in a small working copy with only a handful of files and few logical changes, Harry can probably keep his two logical change groupings mentally organized without any problem. But today he's going to use Subversion's changelists feature as a special favor to the authors of this book.

Harry first creates a changelist and associates with it the two files he's already changed. He does this by using the svn changelist command to assign the same arbitrary changelist name to those files:

$ svn changelist math-fixes integer.c mathops.c
Path 'integer.c' is now a member of changelist 'math-fixes'.
Path 'mathops.c' is now a member of changelist 'math-fixes'.
$ svn status

--- Changelist 'math-fixes':
M       integer.c
M       mathops.c
$

就像你看到的,你的svn status反映了新的分组。

Harry now sets off to fix the secondary UI problem. Since he knows which file he'll be changing, he assigns that path to a changelist, too. Unfortunately, Harry carelessly assigns this third file to the same changelist as the previous two files:

$ svn changelist math-fixes button.c
Path 'button.c' is now a member of changelist 'math-fixes'.
$ svn status

--- Changelist 'math-fixes':
        button.c
M       integer.c
M       mathops.c
$

Fortunately, Harry catches his mistake. At this point, he has two options. He can remove the changelist association from button.c, and then assign a different changelist name:

$ svn changelist --remove button.c
Path 'button.c' is no longer a member of a changelist.
$ svn changelist ui-fix button.c
Path 'button.c' is now a member of changelist 'ui-fix'.
$

Or, he can skip the removal and just assign a new changelist name. In this case, Subversion will first warn Harry that button.c is being removed from the first changelist:

$ svn changelist ui-fix button.c
svn: warning: Removing 'button.c' from changelist 'math-fixes'.
Path 'button.c' is now a member of changelist 'ui-fix'.
$ svn status

--- Changelist 'ui-fix':
        button.c

--- Changelist 'math-fixes':
M       integer.c
M       mathops.c
$

Harry now has two distinct changelists present in his working copy, and svn status will group its output according to these changelist determinations. Notice that even though Harry hasn't yet modified button.c, it still shows up in the output of svn status as interesting because it has a changelist assignment. Changelists can be added to and removed from files at any time, regardless of whether they contain local modifications.

现在 Harry 开始修正 button.c 中的用户界面问题。

$ svn status

--- Changelist 'ui-fix':
M       button.c

--- Changelist 'math-fixes':
M       integer.c
M       mathops.c
$

10.2. 用修改列表作为操作过滤器

The visual grouping that Harry sees in the output of svn status as shown in our previous section is nice, but not entirely useful. The status command is but one of many operations that he might wish to perform on his working copy. Fortunately, many of Subversion's other operations understand how to operate on changelists via the use of the --changelist option.

When provided with a --changelist option, Subversion commands will limit the scope of their operation to only those files to which a particular changelist name is assigned. If Harry now wants to see the actual changes he's made to the files in his math-fixes changelist, he could explicitly list only the files that make up that changelist on the svn diff command line.

$ svn diff integer.c mathops.c
Index: integer.c
===================================================================
--- integer.c	(revision 1157)
+++ integer.c	(working copy)
…
Index: mathops.c
===================================================================
--- mathops.c	(revision 1157)
+++ mathops.c	(working copy)
…
$

That works okay for a few files, but what if Harry's change touched 20 or 30 files? That would be an annoyingly long list of explicitly named files. Now that he's using changelists, though, Harry can avoid explicitly listing the set of files in his changelist from now on, and instead provide just the changelist name:

$ svn diff --changelist math-fixes
Index: integer.c
===================================================================
--- integer.c	(revision 1157)
+++ integer.c	(working copy)
…
Index: mathops.c
===================================================================
--- mathops.c	(revision 1157)
+++ mathops.c	(working copy)
…
$

And when it's time to commit, Harry can again use the --changelist option to limit the scope of the commit to files in a certain changelist. He might commit his user interface fix by doing the following:

$ svn commit -m "Fix a UI bug found while working on math logic." \
      --changelist ui-fix
Sending        button.c
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 1158.
$

In fact, the svn commit command provides a second changelists-related option: --keep-changelists. Normally, changelist assignments are removed from files after they are committed. But if --keep-changelists is provided, Subversion will leave the changelist assignment on the committed (and now unmodified) files. In any case, committing files assigned to one changelist leaves other changelists undisturbed.

$ svn status

--- Changelist 'math-fixes':
M       integer.c
M       mathops.c
$
[注意]注意

The --changelist option acts only as a filter for Subversion command targets, and will not add targets to an operation. For example, on a commit operation specified as svn commit /path/to/dir, the target is the directory /path/to/dir and its children (to infinite depth). If you then add a changelist specifier to that command, only those files in and under /path/to/dir that are assigned that changelist name will be considered as targets of the commit—the commit will not include files located elsewhere (such as in /path/to/another-dir), regardless of their changelist assignment, even if they are part of the same working copy as the operation's target(s).

Even the svn changelist command accepts the --changelist option. This allows you to quickly and easily rename or remove a changelist:

$ svn changelist math-bugs --changelist math-fixes --depth infinity .
svn: warning: Removing 'integer.c' from changelist 'math-fixes'.
Path 'integer.c' is now a member of changelist 'math-bugs'.
svn: warning: Removing 'mathops.c' from changelist 'math-fixes'.
Path 'mathops.c' is now a member of changelist 'math-bugs'.
$ svn changelist --remove --changelist math-bugs --depth infinity .
Path 'integer.c' is no longer a member of a changelist.
Path 'mathops.c' is no longer a member of a changelist.
$

Finally, you can specify multiple instances of the --changelist option on a single command line. Doing so limits the operation you are performing to files found in any of the specified changesets.

10.3. 修改列表的限制

Subversion's changelist feature is a handy tool for grouping working copy files, but it does have a few limitations. Changelists are artifacts of a particular working copy, which means that changelist assignments cannot be propagated to the repository or otherwise shared with other users. Changelists can be assigned only to files—Subversion doesn't currently support the use of changelists with directories. Finally, you can have at most one changelist assignment on a given working copy file. Here is where the blog post category and photo service tag analogies break down—if you find yourself needing to assign a file to multiple changelists, you're out of luck.

11. 网络模型

At some point, you're going to need to understand how your Subversion client communicates with its server. Subversion's networking layer is abstracted, meaning that Subversion clients exhibit the same general behaviors no matter what sort of server they are operating against. Whether speaking the HTTP protocol (http://) with the Apache HTTP Server or speaking the custom Subversion protocol (svn://) with svnserve, the basic network model is the same. In this section, we'll explain the basics of that network model, including how Subversion manages authentication and authorization matters.

11.1. 请求和响应

The Subversion client spends most of its time managing working copies. When it needs information from a remote repository, however, it makes a network request, and the server responds with an appropriate answer. The details of the network protocol are hidden from the user—the client attempts to access a URL, and depending on the URL scheme, a particular protocol is used to contact the server (see 第 2.3 节 “版本库的地址”).

[提示]提示

Run svn --version to see which URL schemes and protocols the client knows how to use.

When the server process receives a client request, it often demands that the client identify itself. It issues an authentication challenge to the client, and the client responds by providing credentials back to the server. Once authentication is complete, the server responds with the original information that the client asked for. Notice that this system is different from systems such as CVS, where the client preemptively offers credentials (logs in) to the server before ever making a request. In Subversion, the server pulls credentials by challenging the client at the appropriate moment, rather than the client pushing them. This makes certain operations more elegant. For example, if a server is configured to allow anyone in the world to read a repository, the server will never issue an authentication challenge when a client attempts to svn checkout.

If the particular network requests issued by the client result in a new revision being created in the repository (e.g., svn commit), Subversion uses the authenticated username associated with those requests as the author of the revision. That is, the authenticated user's name is stored as the value of the svn:author property on the new revision (see 第 10 节 “Subversion 属性”). If the client was not authenticated (i.e., if the server never issued an authentication challenge), the revision's svn:author property is empty.

11.2. 客户端凭证

Many Subversion servers are configured to require authentication. Sometimes anonymous read operations are allowed, while write operations must be authenticated. In other cases, reads and writes alike require authentication. Subversion's different server options understand different authentication protocols, but from the user's point of view, authentication typically boils down to usernames and passwords. Subversion clients offer several different ways to retrieve and store a user's authentication credentials, from interactive prompting for usernames and passwords to encrypted and non-encrypted on-disk data caches.

The security-conscious reader will suspect immediately that there is reason for concern here. Caching passwords on disk? That's terrible! You should never do that! Don't worry—it's not as bad as it sounds. The following sections discuss the various types of credential caches that Subversion uses, when it uses them, and how to disable that functionality in whole or in part.

11.2.1. 缓存凭证

Subversion offers a remedy for the annoyance caused when users are forced to type their usernames and passwords over and over again. By default, whenever the command-line client successfully responds to a server's authentication challenge, credentials are cached on disk and keyed on a combination of the server's hostname, port, and authentication realm. This cache will then be automatically consulted in the future, avoiding the need for the user to re-type his or her authentication credentials. If seemingly suitable credentials are not present in the cache, or if the cached credentials ultimately fail to authenticate, the client will, by default, fall back to prompting the user for the necessary information.

The Subversion developers recognize that on-disk caches of authentication credentials can be a security risk. To offset this, Subversion works with available mechanisms provided by the operating system and environment to try to minimize the risk of leaking this information.

  • On Windows, the Subversion client stores passwords in the %APPDATA%/Subversion/auth/ directory. On Windows 2000 and later, the standard Windows cryptography services are used to encrypt the password on disk. Because the encryption key is managed by Windows and is tied to the user's own login credentials, only the user can decrypt the cached password. (Note that if the user's Windows account password is reset by an administrator, all of the cached passwords become undecipherable. The Subversion client will behave as though they don't exist, prompting for passwords when required.)

  • Similarly, on Mac OS X, the Subversion client stores all repository passwords in the login keyring (managed by the Keychain service), which is protected by the user's account password. User preference settings can impose additional policies, such as requiring that the user's account password be entered each time the Subversion password is used.

  • For other Unix-like operating systems, no single standard keychain service exists. However, the Subversion client knows how to store passwords securely using the GNOME Keyring and KDE Wallet services. Also, before storing unencrypted passwords in the ~/.subversion/auth/ caching area, the Subversion client will ask the user for permission to do so. Note that the auth/ caching area is still permission-protected so that only the user (owner) can read data from it, not the world at large. The operating system's own file permissions protect the passwords from other non-administrative users on the same system, provided they have no direct physical access to the storage media of the home directory, or backups thereof.

Of course, for the truly paranoid, none of these mechanisms meets the test of perfection. So for those folks willing to sacrifice convenience for the ultimate in security, Subversion provides various ways of disabling its credentials caching system altogether.

11.2.2. 禁用密码缓存

When you perform a Subversion operation that requires you to authenticate, by default Subversion tries to cache your authentication credentials on disk in encrypted form. On some systems, Subversion may be unable to encrypt your authentication data. In those situations, Subversion will ask whether you want to cache your credentials to disk in plaintext:

$ svn checkout https://host.example.com:443/svn/private-repo
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
ATTENTION!  Your password for authentication realm:

   <https://host.example.com:443> Subversion Repository

can only be stored to disk unencrypted!  You are advised to configure
your system so that Subversion can store passwords encrypted, if
possible.  See the documentation for details.

You can avoid future appearances of this warning by setting the value
of the 'store-plaintext-passwords' option to either 'yes' or 'no' in
'/tmp/servers'.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
Store password unencrypted (yes/no)? 

If you want the convenience of not having to continually reenter your password for future operations, you can answer yes to this prompt. If you're concerned about caching your Subversion passwords in plaintext and do not want to be asked about it again and again, you can disable caching of plaintext passwords either permanently, or on a server-per-server basis.

[警告]警告

When considering how to use Subversion's password caching system, you'll want to consult any governing policies that are in place for your client computer—many companies have strict rules about the ways that their employees' authentication credentials should be stored.

To permanently disable caching of passwords in plaintext, add the line store-plaintext-passwords = no to the [global] section in the servers configuration file on the local machine. To disable plaintext password caching for a particular server, use the same setting in the appropriate group section in the servers configuration file. (See 第 1.3 节 “配置选项” in 第 7 章 定制你的 Subversion 体验 for details.)

To disable password caching entirely for any single Subversion command-line operation, pass the --no-auth-cache option to that command line. To permanently disable caching entirely, add the line store-passwords = no to your local machine's Subversion configuration file.

11.2.3. 删除缓存的凭证

Sometimes users will want to remove specific credentials from the disk cache. To do this, you need to navigate into the auth/ area and manually delete the appropriate cache file. Credentials are cached in individual files; if you look inside each file, you will see keys and values. The svn:realmstring key describes the particular server realm that the file is associated with:

$ ls ~/.subversion/auth/svn.simple/
5671adf2865e267db74f09ba6f872c28
3893ed123b39500bca8a0b382839198e
5c3c22968347b390f349ff340196ed39

$ cat ~/.subversion/auth/svn.simple/5671adf2865e267db74f09ba6f872c28

K 8
username
V 3
joe
K 8
password
V 4
blah
K 15
svn:realmstring
V 45
<https://svn.domain.com:443> Joe's repository
END

一旦你定位了正确的缓存文件,只需要删除它。

11.2.4. 命令行认证

All Subversion command-line operations accept the --username and --password options, which allow you to specify your username and password, respectively, so that Subversion isn't forced to prompt you for that information. This is especially handy if you need to invoke Subversion from a script and cannot rely on Subversion being able to locate valid cached credentials for you. These options are also helpful when Subversion has already cached authentication credentials for you, but you know they aren't the ones you want it to use. Perhaps several system users share a login to the system, but each have distinct Subversion identities. You can omit the --password option from this pair if you wish Subversion to use only the provided username, but still prompt you for that username's password.

11.2.5. 认证总结

One last word about svn's authentication behavior, specifically regarding the --username and --password options. Many client subcommands accept these options, but it is important to understand that using these options does not automatically send credentials to the server. As discussed earlier, the server pulls credentials from the client when it deems necessary; the client cannot push them at will. If a username and/or password are passed as options, they will be presented to the server only if the server requests them. These options are typically used to authenticate as a different user than Subversion would have chosen by default (such as your system login name) or when trying to avoid interactive prompting (such as when calling svn from a script).

[注意]注意

A common mistake is to misconfigure a server so that it never issues an authentication challenge. When users pass --username and --password options to the client, they're surprised to see that they're never used; that is, new revisions still appear to have been committed anonymously!

这里是Subversion客户端在收到认证请求的时候的行为方式最终总结:

  1. First, the client checks whether the user specified any credentials as command-line options (--username and/or --password). If so, the client will try to use those credentials to authenticate against the server.

  2. If no command-line credentials were provided, or the provided ones were invalid, the client looks up the server's hostname, port, and realm in the runtime configuration's auth/ area, to see whether appropriate credentials are cached there. If so, it attempts to use those credentials to authenticate.

  3. 最终,如果前一种机制未能够为服务器成功认证用户,客户端返回并提示用户输入正确的凭证(除非使用--non-interactive选项或客户端对等的方式)。

如果客户端通过以上的任何一种方式成功认证,它会尝试在磁盘缓存凭证(除非用户已经关闭了这种行为方式,在前面提到过。)

12. 总结

After reading this chapter, you should have a firm grasp on some of Subversion's features that, while perhaps not used every time you interact with your version control system, are certainly handy to know about. But don't stop here! Read on to the following chapter, where you'll learn about branches, tags, and merging. Then you'll have nearly full mastery of the Subversion client. Though our lawyers won't allow us to promise you anything, this additional knowledge could make you measurably more cool.[22]




[10] You're not supposed to name it. Once you name it, you start getting attached to it.—Mike Wazowski

[11] 606 N. Main Street, Wheaton, Illinois, is the home of the Wheaton History Center. It seemed appropriate….

[12] If you're familiar with XML, this is pretty much the ASCII subset of the syntax for XML Name.

[13] 修正提交日志信息的拼写错误,文法错误和简单的错误--revprop选项最常见用例。

[14] 你认为那样过于粗狂?在同一个时代里,WordPerfect也使用.DOC作为它们私有文件格式的扩展名!

[15] Windows文件系统使用文件扩展名(如.EXE, .BAT.COM)来标示可执行文件。

[16] 这不是编译系统的基本功能吗?

[17] … 或者可能是本书的一节 …

[18] Safely, of course. As in other situations, Subversion will leave on disk any files you've modified or which aren't versioned.

[19] 对于Harry和Sally的好莱坞同名人来说交流也不是那么差的药,也是关于那一点。

[20] Subversion目前不允许锁定目录。

[21] 除非是,或许一个经典的火神精神融合。

[22] No purchase necessary. Certains terms and conditions apply. No guarantee of coolness—implicit or otherwise—exists. Mileage may vary.

第 4 章 分支与合并

 

君子务本

 
 --孔子

Branching, tagging, and merging are concepts common to almost all version control systems. If you're not familiar with these ideas, we provide a good introduction in this chapter. If you are familiar, hopefully you'll find it interesting to see how Subversion implements them.

Branching is a fundamental part of version control. If you're going to allow Subversion to manage your data, this is a feature you'll eventually come to depend on. This chapter assumes that you're already familiar with Subversion's basic concepts (第 1 章 基本概念).

1. 什么是分支?

Suppose it's your job to maintain a document for a division in your company—a handbook of some sort. One day a different division asks you for the same handbook, but with a few parts tweaked for them, since they do things slightly differently.

What do you do in this situation? You do the obvious: make a second copy of your document and begin maintaining the two copies separately. As each department asks you to make small changes, you incorporate them into one copy or the other.

You often want to make the same change to both copies. For example, if you discover a typo in the first copy, it's very likely that the same typo exists in the second copy. The two documents are almost the same, after all; they differ only in small, specific ways.

This is the basic concept of a branch—namely, a line of development that exists independently of another line, yet still shares a common history if you look far enough back in time. A branch always begins life as a copy of something, and moves on from there, generating its own history (see 图 4.1 “分支与开发”).

图 4.1. 分支与开发

分支与开发


Subversion has commands to help you maintain parallel branches of your files and directories. It allows you to create branches by copying your data, and remembers that the copies are related to one another. It also helps you duplicate changes from one branch to another. Finally, it can make portions of your working copy reflect different branches so that you can mix and match different lines of development in your daily work.

2. 使用分支

At this point, you should understand how each commit creates a new state of the filesystem tree (called a revision) in the repository. If you don't, go back and read about revisions in 第 2.2 节 “修订版本”.

For this chapter, we'll go back to the same example from 第 1 章 基本概念. Remember that you and your collaborator, Sally, are sharing a repository that contains two projects, paint and calc. Notice that in 图 4.2 “开始规划版本库”, however, each project directory now contains subdirectories named trunk and branches. The reason for this will soon become clear.

图 4.2. 开始规划版本库

开始规划版本库


As before, assume that Sally and you both have working copies of the calc project. Specifically, you each have a working copy of /calc/trunk. All the files for the project are in this subdirectory rather than in /calc itself, because your team has decided that /calc/trunk is where the main line of development is going to take place.

Let's say that you've been given the task of implementing a large software feature. It will take a long time to write, and will affect all the files in the project. The immediate problem is that you don't want to interfere with Sally, who is in the process of fixing small bugs here and there. She's depending on the fact that the latest version of the project (in /calc/trunk) is always usable. If you start committing your changes bit by bit, you'll surely break things for Sally (and other team members as well).

One strategy is to crawl into a hole: you and Sally can stop sharing information for a week or two. That is, start gutting and reorganizing all the files in your working copy, but don't commit or update until you're completely finished with the task. There are a number of problems with this, though. First, it's not very safe. Most people like to save their work to the repository frequently, should something bad accidentally happen to their working copy. Second, it's not very flexible. If you do your work on different computers (perhaps you have a working copy of /calc/trunk on two different machines), you'll need to manually copy your changes back and forth or just do all the work on a single computer. By that same token, it's difficult to share your changes in progress with anyone else. A common software development best practice is to allow your peers to review your work as you go. If nobody sees your intermediate commits, you lose potential feedback and may end up going down the wrong path for weeks before another person on your team notices. Finally, when you're finished with all your changes, you might find it very difficult to remerge your final work with the rest of the company's main body of code. Sally (or others) may have made many other changes in the repository that are difficult to incorporate into your working copy—especially if you run svn update after weeks of isolation.

The better solution is to create your own branch, or line of development, in the repository. This allows you to save your half-broken work frequently without interfering with others, yet you can still selectively share information with your collaborators. You'll see exactly how this works as we go.

2.1. 创建分支

Creating a branch is very simple—you make a copy of the project in the repository using the svn copy command. Subversion is able to copy not only single files, but whole directories as well. In this case, you want to make a copy of the /calc/trunk directory. Where should the new copy live? Wherever you wish—it's a matter of project policy. Let's say that your team has a policy of creating branches in the /calc/branches area of the repository, and you want to name your branch my-calc-branch. You'll want to create a new directory, /calc/branches/my-calc-branch, which begins its life as a copy of /calc/trunk.

You may already have seen svn copy used to copy one file to another within a working copy. But it can also be used to do a remote copy entirely within the repository. Just copy one URL to another:

$ svn copy http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/trunk \
           http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/branches/my-calc-branch \
      -m "Creating a private branch of /calc/trunk."

Committed revision 341.

This command causes a near-instantaneous commit in the repository, creating a new directory in revision 341. The new directory is a copy of /calc/trunk. This is shown in 图 4.3 “版本库与复制”.[23] While it's also possible to create a branch by using svn copy to duplicate a directory within the working copy, this technique isn't recommended. It can be quite slow, in fact! Copying a directory on the client side is a linear-time operation, in that it actually has to duplicate every file and subdirectory within that working copy directory on the local disk. Copying a directory on the server, however, is a constant-time operation, and it's the way most people create branches.

图 4.3. 版本库与复制

版本库与复制


2.2. 在分支上工作

现在你已经在项目里建立分支了,你可以取出一个新的工作副本来开始使用:

$ svn checkout http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/branches/my-calc-branch
A  my-calc-branch/Makefile
A  my-calc-branch/integer.c
A  my-calc-branch/button.c
Checked out revision 341.
$

There's nothing special about this working copy; it simply mirrors a different directory in the repository. When you commit changes, however, Sally won't see them when she updates, because her working copy is of /calc/trunk. (Be sure to read 第 5 节 “使用分支” later in this chapter: the svn switch command is an alternative way of creating a working copy of a branch.)

我们假定本周就要过去了,如下的提交发生:

  • 你修改了/calc/branches/my-calc-branch/button.c,生成修订版本342。

  • 你修改了/calc/branches/my-calc-branch/integer.c,生成修订版本343。

  • Sally修改了/calc/trunk/integer.c,生成了修订版本344。

Now two independent lines of development (shown in 图 4.4 “一个文件的分支历史”) are happening on integer.c.

图 4.4. 一个文件的分支历史

一个文件的分支历史


当你看到integer.c的改变时,你会发现很有趣:

$ pwd
/home/user/my-calc-branch

$ svn log -v integer.c
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r343 | user | 2002-11-07 15:27:56 -0600 (Thu, 07 Nov 2002) | 2 lines
Changed paths:
   M /calc/branches/my-calc-branch/integer.c

* integer.c:  frozzled the wazjub.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
r341 | user | 2002-11-03 15:27:56 -0600 (Thu, 07 Nov 2002) | 2 lines
Changed paths:
   A /calc/branches/my-calc-branch (from /calc/trunk:340)

Creating a private branch of /calc/trunk.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
r303 | sally | 2002-10-29 21:14:35 -0600 (Tue, 29 Oct 2002) | 2 lines
Changed paths:
   M /calc/trunk/integer.c

* integer.c:  changed a docstring.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
r98 | sally | 2002-02-22 15:35:29 -0600 (Fri, 22 Feb 2002) | 2 lines
Changed paths:
   A /calc/trunk/integer.c

* integer.c:  adding this file to the project.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Notice that Subversion is tracing the history of your branch's integer.c all the way back through time, even traversing the point where it was copied. It shows the creation of the branch as an event in the history, because integer.c was implicitly copied when all of /calc/trunk/ was copied. Now look at what happens when Sally runs the same command on her copy of the file:

$ pwd
/home/sally/calc

$ svn log -v integer.c
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r344 | sally | 2002-11-07 15:27:56 -0600 (Thu, 07 Nov 2002) | 2 lines
Changed paths:
   M /calc/trunk/integer.c

* integer.c:  fix a bunch of spelling errors.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
r303 | sally | 2002-10-29 21:14:35 -0600 (Tue, 29 Oct 2002) | 2 lines
Changed paths:
   M /calc/trunk/integer.c

* integer.c:  changed a docstring.

------------------------------------------------------------------------
r98 | sally | 2002-02-22 15:35:29 -0600 (Fri, 22 Feb 2002) | 2 lines
Changed paths:
   A /calc/trunk/integer.c

* integer.c:  adding this file to the project.

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sally sees her own revision 344 change, but not the change you made in revision 343. As far as Subversion is concerned, these two commits affected different files in different repository locations. However, Subversion does show that the two files share a common history. Before the branch copy was made in revision 341, the files used to be the same file. That's why you and Sally both see the changes made in revisions 303 and 98.

2.3. 分支背后的关键概念

You should remember two important lessons from this section. First, Subversion has no internal concept of a branch—it knows only how to make copies. When you copy a directory, the resultant directory is only a branch because you attach that meaning to it. You may think of the directory differently, or treat it differently, but to Subversion it's just an ordinary directory that happens to carry some extra historical information.

Second, because of this copy mechanism, Subversion's branches exist as normal filesystem directories in the repository. This is different from other version control systems, where branches are typically defined by adding extra-dimensional labels to collections of files. The location of your branch directory doesn't matter to Subversion. Most teams follow a convention of putting all branches into a /branches directory, but you're free to invent any policy you wish.

3. 基本合并

Now you and Sally are working on parallel branches of the project: you're working on a private branch, and Sally is working on the trunk, or main line of development.

For projects that have a large number of contributors, it's common for most people to have working copies of the trunk. Whenever someone needs to make a long-running change that is likely to disrupt the trunk, a standard procedure is to create a private branch and commit changes there until all the work is complete.

So, the good news is that you and Sally aren't interfering with each other. The bad news is that it's very easy to drift too far apart. Remember that one of the problems with the crawl in a hole strategy is that by the time you're finished with your branch, it may be near-impossible to merge your changes back into the trunk without a huge number of conflicts.

Instead, you and Sally might continue to share changes as you work. It's up to you to decide which changes are worth sharing; Subversion gives you the ability to selectively copy changes between branches. And when you're completely finished with your branch, your entire set of branch changes can be copied back into the trunk. In Subversion terminology, the general act of replicating changes from one branch to another is called merging, and it is performed using various invocations of the svn merge command.

In the examples that follow, we're assuming that both your Subversion client and server are running Subversion 1.5 (or later). If either client or server is older than version 1.5, things are more complicated: the system won't track changes automatically, and you'll have to use painful manual methods to achieve similar results. That is, you'll always need to use the detailed merge syntax to specify specific ranges of revisions to replicate (see 第 4.2 节 “合并的语法:完整的描述” later in this chapter), and take special care to keep track of what's already been merged and what hasn't. For this reason, we strongly recommend that you make sure your client and server are at least at version 1.5.

3.1. 变更集

Before we proceed further, we should warn you that there's going to be a lot of discussion of changes in the pages ahead. A lot of people experienced with version control systems use the terms change and changeset interchangeably, and we should clarify what Subversion understands as a changeset.

Everyone seems to have a slightly different definition of changeset, or at least a different expectation of what it means for a version control system to have one. For our purposes, let's say that a changeset is just a collection of changes with a unique name. The changes might include textual edits to file contents, modifications to tree structure, or tweaks to metadata. In more common speak, a changeset is just a patch with a name you can refer to.

In Subversion, a global revision number N names a tree in the repository: it's the way the repository looked after the Nth commit. It's also the name of an implicit changeset: if you compare tree N with tree N-1, you can derive the exact patch that was committed. For this reason, it's easy to think of revision N as not just a tree, but a changeset as well. If you use an issue tracker to manage bugs, you can use the revision numbers to refer to particular patches that fix bugs—for example, this issue was fixed by r9238. Somebody can then run svn log -r 9238 to read about the exact changeset that fixed the bug, and run svn diff -c 9238 to see the patch itself. And (as you'll see shortly) Subversion's svn merge command is able to use revision numbers. You can merge specific changesets from one branch to another by naming them in the merge arguments: passing -c 9238 to svn merge would merge changeset r9238 into your working copy.

3.2. 保持分支同步

Continuing with our running example, let's suppose that a week has passed since you started working on your private branch. Your new feature isn't finished yet, but at the same time you know that other people on your team have continued to make important changes in the project's /trunk. It's in your best interest to replicate those changes to your own branch, just to make sure they mesh well with your changes.

[提示]提示

Frequently keeping your branch in sync with the main development line helps prevent surprise conflicts when the time comes for you to fold your changes back into the trunk.

Subversion is aware of the history of your branch and knows when it divided away from the trunk. To replicate the latest, greatest trunk changes to your branch, first make sure your working copy of the branch is clean—that it has no local modifications reported by svn status. Then simply run:

$ pwd
/home/user/my-calc-branch

$ svn merge ^/calc/trunk
--- Merging r345 through r356 into '.':
U    button.c
U    integer.c
$

This basic syntax—svn merge URL—tells Subversion to merge all recent changes from the URL to the current working directory (which is typically the root of your working copy). Also notice that we're using the caret (^) syntax[24] to avoid having to type out the entire /trunk URL.

After running the prior example, your branch working copy now contains new local modifications, and these edits are duplications of all of the changes that have happened on the trunk since you first created your branch:

$ svn status
 M      .
M       button.c
M       integer.c
$

At this point, the wise thing to do is look at the changes carefully with svn diff, and then build and test your branch. Notice that the current working directory (.) has also been modified; the svn diff will show that its svn:mergeinfo property has been either created or modified. This is important merge-related metadata that you should not touch, since it will be needed by future svn merge commands. (We'll learn more about this metadata later in the chapter.)

After performing the merge, you might also need to resolve some conflicts (just as you do with svn update) or possibly make some small edits to get things working properly. (Remember, just because there are no syntactic conflicts doesn't mean there aren't any semantic conflicts!) If you encounter serious problems, you can always abort the local changes by running svn revert . -R (which will undo all local modifications) and start a long what's going on? discussion with your collaborators. If things look good, however, you can submit these changes into the repository:

$ svn commit -m "Merged latest trunk changes to my-calc-branch."
Sending        .
Sending        button.c
Sending        integer.c
Transmitting file data ..
Committed revision 357.
$

At this point, your private branch is now in sync with the trunk, so you can rest easier knowing that as you continue to work in isolation, you're not drifting too far away from what everyone else is doing.

Suppose that another week has passed. You've committed more changes to your branch, and your comrades have continued to improve the trunk as well. Once again, you'd like to replicate the latest trunk changes to your branch and bring yourself in sync. Just run the same merge command again!

$ svn merge ^/calc/trunk
--- Merging r357 through r380 into '.':
U    integer.c
U    Makefile
A    README
$

Subversion knows which trunk changes you've already replicated to your branch, so it carefully replicates only those changes you don't yet have. Once again, you'll have to build, test, and svn commit the local modifications to your branch.

3.3. 重新集成分支

What happens when you finally finish your work, though? Your new feature is done, and you're ready to merge your branch changes back to the trunk (so your team can enjoy the bounty of your labor). The process is simple. First, bring your branch in sync with the trunk again, just as you've been doing all along:

$ svn merge ^/calc/trunk
--- Merging r381 through r385 into '.':
U    button.c
U    README

$ # build, test, ...

$ svn commit -m "Final merge of trunk changes to my-calc-branch."
Sending        .
Sending        button.c
Sending        README
Transmitting file data ..
Committed revision 390.

Now, you use svn merge with the --reintegrate option to replicate your branch changes back into the trunk. You'll need a working copy of /trunk. You can do this by either doing an svn checkout, dredging up an old trunk working copy from somewhere on your disk, or using svn switch (see 第 5 节 “使用分支”). Your trunk working copy cannot have any local edits or be at mixed-revisions (see 第 2.4.3 节 “混合版本的工作副本”). While these are typically best practices for merging, they are required when using the --reintegrate option.

Once you have a clean working copy of the trunk, you're ready to merge your branch back into it:

$ pwd
/home/user/calc-trunk

$ svn update  # (make sure the working copy is up to date)
At revision 390.

$ svn merge --reintegrate ^/calc/branches/my-calc-branch
--- Merging differences between repository URLs into '.':
U    button.c
U    integer.c
U    Makefile
 U   .

$ # build, test, verify, ...

$ svn commit -m "Merge my-calc-branch back into trunk!"
Sending        .
Sending        button.c
Sending        integer.c
Sending        Makefile
Transmitting file data ..
Committed revision 391.

Congratulations, your branch has now been remerged back into the main line of development. Notice our use of the --reintegrate option this time around. The option is critical for reintegrating changes from a branch back into its original line of development—don't forget it! It's needed because this sort of merge back is a different sort of work than what you've been doing up until now. Previously, we had been asking svn merge to grab the next set of changes from one line of development (the trunk) and duplicate them to another (your branch). This is fairly straightforward, and each time Subversion knows how to pick up where it left off. In our prior examples, you can see that first it merges the ranges 345:356 from trunk to branch; later on, it continues by merging the next contiguously available range, 356:380. When doing the final sync, it merges the range 380:385.

When merging your branch back to the trunk, however, the underlying mathematics is quite different. Your feature branch is now a mishmash of both duplicated trunk changes and private branch changes, so there's no simple contiguous range of revisions to copy over. By specifying the --reintegrate option, you're asking Subversion to carefully replicate only those changes unique to your branch. (And in fact, it does this by comparing the latest trunk tree with the latest branch tree: the resulting difference is exactly your branch changes!)

Keep in mind that the --reintegrate option is quite specialized in contrast to the more general nature of most Subversion subcommand options. It supports the use case described above, but has little applicability outside of that. Because of this narrow focus, in addition to requiring an up-to-date working copy with no mixed-revisions, it will not function in combination with most of the other svn merge options. You'll get an error if you use any non-global options but these: --accept, --dry-run, --diff3-cmd, --extensions, or --quiet.

Now that your private branch is merged to trunk, you may wish to remove it from the repository:

$ svn delete ^/calc/branches/my-calc-branch \
      -m "Remove my-calc-branch, reintegrated with trunk in r391."
Committed revision 392.

But wait! Isn't the history of that branch valuable? What if somebody wants to audit the evolution of your feature someday and look at all of your branch changes? No need to worry. Remember that even though your branch is no longer visible in the /branches directory, its existence is still an immutable part of the repository's history. A simple svn log command on the /branches URL will show the entire history of your branch. Your branch can even be resurrected at some point, should you desire (see 第 3.6 节 “找回删除的项目”).

Once a --reintegrate merge is done from branch to trunk, the branch is no longer usable for further work. It's not able to correctly absorb new trunk changes, nor can it be properly reintegrated to trunk again. For this reason, if you want to keep working on your feature branch, we recommend destroying it and then re-creating it from the trunk:

$ svn delete http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/branches/my-calc-branch \
      -m "Remove my-calc-branch, reintegrated with trunk in r391."
Committed revision 392.

$ svn copy http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/trunk \
           http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/branches/my-calc-branch
      -m "Recreate my-calc-branch from trunk@HEAD."
Committed revision 393.

There is another way of making the branch usable again after reintegration, without deleting the branch. See 第 4.6 节 “Keeping a Reintegrated Branch Alive”.

3.4. 合并信息和预览

The basic mechanism Subversion uses to track changesets—that is, which changes have been merged to which branches—is by recording data in versioned properties. Specifically, merge data is tracked in the svn:mergeinfo property attached to files and directories. (If you're not familiar with Subversion properties, see 第 3 节 “属性”.)

你可以用与其它属性一样的方法,检查合并信息属性:

$ cd my-calc-branch
$ svn propget svn:mergeinfo .
/trunk:341-390
$
[警告]警告

While is possible to modify svn:mergeinfo just as you might any other versioned property, we strongly discourage doing so unless you really know what you're doing.

The svn:mergeinfo property is automatically maintained by Subversion whenever you run svn merge. Its value indicates which changes made to a given path have been replicated into the directory in question. In our previous example, the path which is the source of the merged changes is /trunk and the directory which has received the changes is /branches/my-calc-branch.

Subversion also provides a subcommand, svn mergeinfo, which can be helpful in seeing not only which changesets a directory has absorbed, but also which changesets it's still eligible to receive. This gives a sort of preview of which changes a subsequent svn merge operation would replicate to your branch.

$ cd my-calc-branch

# Which changes have already been merged from trunk to branch?
$ svn mergeinfo ^/calc/trunk
r341
r342
r343
…
r388
r389
r390

# Which changes are still eligible to merge from trunk to branch?
$ svn mergeinfo ^/calc/trunk --show-revs eligible
r391
r392
r393
r394
r395
$

The svn mergeinfo command requires a source URL (where the changes would be coming from), and takes an optional target URL (where the changes would be merged to). If no target URL is given, it assumes that the current working directory is the target. In the prior example, because we're querying our branch working copy, the command assumes we're interested in receiving changes to /branches/mybranch from the specified trunk URL.

Another way to get a more precise preview of a merge operation is to use the --dry-run option:

$ svn merge ^/calc/trunk --dry-run
U    integer.c

$ svn status
#  nothing printed, working copy is still unchanged.

The --dry-run option doesn't actually apply any local changes to the working copy. It shows only status codes that would be printed in a real merge. It's useful for getting a high-level preview of the potential merge, for those times when running svn diff gives too much detail.

[提示]提示

After performing a merge operation, but before committing the results of the merge, you can use svn diff --depth=empty /path/to/merge/target to see only the changes to the immediate target of your merge. If your merge target was a directory, only property differences will be displayed. This is a handy way to see the changes to the svn:mergeinfo property recorded by the merge operation, which will remind you about what you've just merged.

Of course, the best way to preview a merge operation is to just do it! Remember, running svn merge isn't an inherently risky thing (unless you've made local modifications to your working copy—but we've already stressed that you shouldn't be merging into such an environment). If you don't like the results of the merge, simply run svn revert . -R to revert the changes from your working copy and retry the command with different options. The merge isn't final until you actually svn commit the results.

[提示]提示

While it's perfectly fine to experiment with merges by running svn merge and svn revert over and over, you may run into some annoying (but easily bypassed) roadblocks. For example, if the merge operation adds a new file (i.e., schedules it for addition), svn revert won't actually remove the file; it simply unschedules the addition. You're left with an unversioned file. If you then attempt to run the merge again, you may get conflicts due to the unversioned file being in the way. Solution? After performing a revert, be sure to clean up the working copy and remove unversioned files and directories. The output of svn status should be as clean as possible, ideally showing no output.

3.5. 取消修改

An extremely common use for svn merge is to roll back a change that has already been committed. Suppose you're working away happily on a working copy of /calc/trunk, and you discover that the change made way back in revision 303, which changed integer.c, is completely wrong. It never should have been committed. You can use svn merge to undo the change in your working copy, and then commit the local modification to the repository. All you need to do is to specify a reverse difference. (You can do this by specifying --revision 303:302, or by an equivalent --change -303.)

$ svn merge -c -303 ^/calc/trunk
--- Reverse-merging r303 into 'integer.c':
U    integer.c

$ svn status
 M      .
M       integer.c

$ svn diff
…
# verify that the change is removed
…

$ svn commit -m "Undoing change committed in r303."
Sending        integer.c
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 350.

As we mentioned earlier, one way to think about a repository revision is as a specific changeset. By using the -r option, you can ask svn merge to apply a changeset, or a whole range of changesets, to your working copy. In our case of undoing a change, we're asking svn merge to apply changeset #303 to our working copy backward.

Keep in mind that rolling back a change like this is just like any other svn merge operation, so you should use svn status and svn diff to confirm that your work is in the state you want it to be in, and then use svn commit to send the final version to the repository. After committing, this particular changeset is no longer reflected in the HEAD revision.

Again, you may be thinking: well, that really didn't undo the commit, did it? The change still exists in revision 303. If somebody checks out a version of the calc project between revisions 303 and 349, she'll still see the bad change, right?

Yes, that's true. When we talk about removing a change, we're really talking about removing it from the HEAD revision. The original change still exists in the repository's history. For most situations, this is good enough. Most people are only interested in tracking the HEAD of a project anyway. There are special cases, however, where you really might want to destroy all evidence of the commit. (Perhaps somebody accidentally committed a confidential document.) This isn't so easy, it turns out, because Subversion was deliberately designed to never lose information. Revisions are immutable trees that build upon one another. Removing a revision from history would cause a domino effect, creating chaos in all subsequent revisions and possibly invalidating all working copies.[25]

3.6. 找回删除的项目

The great thing about version control systems is that information is never lost. Even when you delete a file or directory, it may be gone from the HEAD revision, but the object still exists in earlier revisions. One of the most common questions new users ask is, How do I get my old file or directory back?

The first step is to define exactly which item you're trying to resurrect. Here's a useful metaphor: you can think of every object in the repository as existing in a sort of two-dimensional coordinate system. The first coordinate is a particular revision tree, and the second coordinate is a path within that tree. So every version of your file or directory can be defined by a specific coordinate pair. (Remember the peg revision syntax—foo.c@224—mentioned back in 第 2 节 “Peg 和实施修订版本”.)

First, you might need to use svn log to discover the exact coordinate pair you wish to resurrect. A good strategy is to run svn log --verbose in a directory that used to contain your deleted item. The --verbose (-v) option shows a list of all changed items in each revision; all you need to do is find the revision in which you deleted the file or directory. You can do this visually, or by using another tool to examine the log output (via grep, or perhaps via an incremental search in an editor).

$ cd parent-dir
$ svn log -v
…
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r808 | joe | 2003-12-26 14:29:40 -0600 (Fri, 26 Dec 2003) | 3 lines
Changed paths:
   D /calc/trunk/real.c
   M /calc/trunk/integer.c

Added fast fourier transform functions to integer.c.
Removed real.c because code now in double.c.
…

In the example, we're assuming that you're looking for a deleted file real.c. By looking through the logs of a parent directory, you've spotted that this file was deleted in revision 808. Therefore, the last version of the file to exist was in the revision right before that. Conclusion: you want to resurrect the path /calc/trunk/real.c from revision 807.

That was the hard part—the research. Now that you know what you want to restore, you have two different choices.

One option is to use svn merge to apply revision 808 in reverse. (We already discussed how to undo changes in 第 3.5 节 “取消修改”.) This would have the effect of re-adding real.c as a local modification. The file would be scheduled for addition, and after a commit, the file would again exist in HEAD.

In this particular example, however, this is probably not the best strategy. Reverse-applying revision 808 would not only schedule real.c for addition, but the log message indicates that it would also undo certain changes to integer.c, which you don't want. Certainly, you could reverse-merge revision 808 and then svn revert the local modifications to integer.c, but this technique doesn't scale well. What if 90 files were changed in revision 808?

A second, more targeted strategy is not to use svn merge at all, but rather to use the svn copy command. Simply copy the exact revision and path coordinate pair from the repository to your working copy:

$ svn copy ^/calc/trunk/real.c@807 ./real.c

$ svn status
A  +    real.c

$ svn commit -m "Resurrected real.c from revision 807, /calc/trunk/real.c."
Adding         real.c
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 1390.

The plus sign in the status output indicates that the item isn't merely scheduled for addition, but scheduled for addition with history. Subversion remembers where it was copied from. In the future, running svn log on this file will traverse back through the file's resurrection and through all the history it had prior to revision 807. In other words, this new real.c isn't really new; it's a direct descendant of the original, deleted file. This is usually considered a good and useful thing. If, however, you wanted to resurrect the file without maintaining a historical link to the old file, this technique works just as well:

$ svn cat ^/calc/trunk/real.c@807 > ./real.c

$ svn add real.c
A         real.c

$ svn commit -m "Re-created real.c from revision 807."
Adding         real.c
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 1390.

Although our example shows us resurrecting a file, note that these same techniques work just as well for resurrecting deleted directories. Also note that a resurrection doesn't have to happen in your working copy—it can happen entirely in the repository:

$ svn copy ^/calc/trunk/real.c@807 ^/calc/trunk/ \
      -m "Resurrect real.c from revision 807."
Committed revision 1390.

$ svn update
A    real.c
Updated to revision 1390.

4. 高级合并

Here ends the automated magic. Sooner or later, once you get the hang of branching and merging, you're going to have to ask Subversion to merge specific changes from one place to another. To do this, you're going to have to start passing more complicated arguments to svn merge. The next section describes the fully expanded syntax of the command and discusses a number of common scenarios that require it.

4.1. 摘录合并

Just as the term changeset is often used in version control systems, so is the term cherrypicking. This word refers to the act of choosing one specific changeset from a branch and replicating it to another. Cherrypicking may also refer to the act of duplicating a particular set of (not necessarily contiguous!) changesets from one branch to another. This is in contrast to more typical merging scenarios, where the next contiguous range of revisions is duplicated automatically.

Why would people want to replicate just a single change? It comes up more often than you'd think. For example, let's go back in time and imagine that you haven't yet merged your private feature branch back to the trunk. At the water cooler, you get word that Sally made an interesting change to integer.c on the trunk. Looking over the history of commits to the trunk, you see that in revision 355 she fixed a critical bug that directly impacts the feature you're working on. You might not be ready to merge all the trunk changes to your branch just yet, but you certainly need that particular bug fix in order to continue your work.

$ svn diff -c 355 ^/calc/trunk

Index: integer.c
===================================================================
--- integer.c	(revision 354)
+++ integer.c	(revision 355)
@@ -147,7 +147,7 @@
     case 6:  sprintf(info->operating_system, "HPFS (OS/2 or NT)"); break;
     case 7:  sprintf(info->operating_system, "Macintosh"); break;
     case 8:  sprintf(info->operating_system, "Z-System"); break;
-    case 9:  sprintf(info->operating_system, "CP/MM");
+    case 9:  sprintf(info->operating_system, "CP/M"); break;
     case 10:  sprintf(info->operating_system, "TOPS-20"); break;
     case 11:  sprintf(info->operating_system, "NTFS (Windows NT)"); break;
     case 12:  sprintf(info->operating_system, "QDOS"); break;

Just as you used svn diff in the prior example to examine revision 355, you can pass the same option to svn merge:

$ svn merge -c 355 ^/calc/trunk
--- Merging r355 into '.':
U    integer.c

$ svn status
M       integer.c

You can now go through the usual testing procedures before committing this change to your branch. After the commit, Subversion marks r355 as having been merged to the branch so that future magic merges that synchronize your branch with the trunk know to skip over r355. (Merging the same change to the same branch almost always results in a conflict!)

$ cd my-calc-branch

$ svn propget svn:mergeinfo .
/trunk:341-349,355

# Notice that r355 isn't listed as "eligible" to merge, because
# it's already been merged.
$ svn mergeinfo ^/calc/trunk --show-revs eligible
r350
r351
r352
r353
r354
r356
r357
r358
r359
r360

$ svn merge ^/calc/trunk
--- Merging r350 through r354 into '.':
 U   .
U    integer.c
U    Makefile
--- Merging r356 through r360 into '.':
 U   .
U    integer.c
U    button.c

This use case of replicating (or backporting) bug fixes from one branch to another is perhaps the most popular reason for cherrypicking changes; it comes up all the time, for example, when a team is maintaining a release branch of software. (We discuss this pattern in 第 8.1 节 “发布分支”.)

[警告]警告

Did you notice how, in the last example, the merge invocation caused two distinct ranges of merges to be applied? The svn merge command applied two independent patches to your working copy to skip over changeset 355, which your branch already contained. There's nothing inherently wrong with this, except that it has the potential to make conflict resolution trickier. If the first range of changes creates conflicts, you must resolve them interactively for the merge process to continue and apply the second range of changes. If you postpone a conflict from the first wave of changes, the whole merge command will bail out with an error message.[26]

A word of warning: while svn diff and svn merge are very similar in concept, they do have different syntax in many cases. Be sure to read about them in 第 9 章 Subversion 完全参考 for details, or ask svn help. For example, svn merge requires a working copy path as a target, that is, a place where it should apply the generated patch. If the target isn't specified, it assumes you are trying to perform one of the following common operations:

  • 你希望合并目录修改到工作副本的当前目录。

  • 你希望合并修改到你的当前工作目录的相同文件名的文件。

If you are merging a directory and haven't specified a target path, svn merge assumes the first case and tries to apply the changes into your current directory. If you are merging a file, and that file (or a file by the same name) exists in your current working directory, svn merge assumes the second case and tries to apply the changes to a local file with the same name.

4.2. 合并的语法:完整的描述

You've now seen some examples of the svn merge command, and you're about to see several more. If you're feeling confused about exactly how merging works, you're not alone. Many users (especially those new to version control) are initially perplexed about the proper syntax of the command and about how and when the feature should be used. But fear not, this command is actually much simpler than you think! There's a very easy technique for understanding exactly how svn merge behaves.

The main source of confusion is the name of the command. The term merge somehow denotes that branches are combined together, or that some sort of mysterious blending of data is going on. That's not the case. A better name for the command might have been svn diff-and-apply, because that's all that happens: two repository trees are compared, and the differences are applied to a working copy.

If you're using svn merge to do basic copying of changes between branches, it will generally do the right thing automatically. For example, a command such as the following:

$ svn merge ^/calc/branches/some-branch

will attempt to duplicate any changes made on some-branch into your current working directory, which is presumably a working copy that shares some historical connection to the branch. The command is smart enough to only duplicate changes that your working copy doesn't yet have. If you repeat this command once a week, it will only duplicate the newest branch changes that happened since you last merged.

If you choose to use the svn merge command in all its full glory by giving it specific revision ranges to duplicate, the command takes three main arguments:

  1. 初始的版本树(通常叫做比较的左边),

  2. 最终的版本树(通常叫做比较的右边),

  3. 一个接收区别的工作副本(通常叫做合并的目标)。

Once these three arguments are specified, the two trees are compared, and the differences are applied to the target working copy as local modifications. When the command is done, the results are no different than if you had hand-edited the files or run various svn add or svn delete commands yourself. If you like the results, you can commit them. If you don't like the results, you can simply svn revert all of the changes.

The syntax of svn merge allows you to specify the three necessary arguments rather flexibly. Here are some examples:

$ svn merge http://svn.example.com/repos/branch1@150 \
            http://svn.example.com/repos/branch2@212 \
            my-working-copy

$ svn merge -r 100:200 http://svn.example.com/repos/trunk my-working-copy

$ svn merge -r 100:200 http://svn.example.com/repos/trunk

The first syntax lays out all three arguments explicitly, naming each tree in the form URL@REV and naming the working copy target. The second syntax can be used as a shorthand for situations when you're comparing two different revisions of the same URL. The last syntax shows how the working copy argument is optional; if omitted, it defaults to the current directory.

While the first example shows the full syntax of svn merge, it needs to be used very carefully; it can result in merges which do not record any svn:mergeinfo metadata at all. The next section talks a bit more about this.

4.3. 不使用合并信息的合并

Subversion tries to generate merge metadata whenever it can, to make future invocations of svn merge smarter. There are still situations, however, where svn:mergeinfo data is not created or changed. Remember to be a bit wary of these scenarios:

合并无关的源

If you ask svn merge to compare two URLs that aren't related to each other, a patch will still be generated and applied to your working copy, but no merging metadata will be created. There's no common history between the two sources, and future smart merges depend on that common history.

从外部版本库合并

While it's possible to run a command such as svn merge -r 100:200 http://svn.foreignproject.com/repos/trunk, the resultant patch will also lack any historical merge metadata. At time of this writing, Subversion has no way of representing different repository URLs within the svn:mergeinfo property.

使用 --ignore-ancestry

If this option is passed to svn merge, it causes the merging logic to mindlessly generate differences the same way that svn diff does, ignoring any historical relationships. We discuss this later in the chapter in 第 4.8 节 “关注还是忽视祖先”.

Applying reverse merges from a target's natural history

Earlier in this chapter (第 3.5 节 “取消修改”) we discussed how to use svn merge to apply a reverse patch as a way of rolling back changes. If this technique is used to undo a change to an object's personal history (e.g., commit r5 to the trunk, then immediately roll back r5 using svn merge . -c -5), this sort of merge doesn't affect the recorded mergeinfo.[27]

4.4. 合并冲突

Just like the svn update command, svn merge applies changes to your working copy. And therefore it's also capable of creating conflicts. The conflicts produced by svn merge, however, are sometimes different, and this section explains those differences.

To begin with, assume that your working copy has no local edits. When you svn update to a particular revision, the changes sent by the server will always apply cleanly to your working copy. The server produces the delta by comparing two trees: a virtual snapshot of your working copy, and the revision tree you're interested in. Because the left hand side of the comparison is exactly equal to what you already have, the delta is guaranteed to correctly convert your working copy into the right hand tree.

But svn merge has no such guarantees and can be much more chaotic: the advanced user can ask the server to compare any two trees at all, even ones that are unrelated to the working copy! This means there's large potential for human error. Users will sometimes compare the wrong two trees, creating a delta that doesn't apply cleanly. svn merge will do its best to apply as much of the delta as possible, but some parts may be impossible. Just as the Unix patch command sometimes complains about failed hunks, svn merge will similarly complain about skipped targets:

$ svn merge -r 1288:1351 http://svn.example.com/myrepos/branch
U    foo.c
U    bar.c
Skipped missing target: 'baz.c'
U    glub.c
U    sputter.h

Conflict discovered in 'glorb.h'.
Select: (p) postpone, (df) diff-full, (e) edit,
        (mc) mine-conflict, (tc) theirs-conflict,
        (s) show all options: 

In the previous example, it might be the case that baz.c exists in both snapshots of the branch being compared, and the resultant delta wants to change the file's contents, but the file doesn't exist in the working copy. Whatever the case, the skipped message means that the user is most likely comparing the wrong two trees; it's the classic sign of user error. When this happens, it's easy to recursively revert all the changes created by the merge (svn revert . --recursive), delete any unversioned files or directories left behind after the revert, and rerun svn merge with different arguments.

Also notice that the preceding example shows a conflict happening on glorb.h. We already stated that the working copy has no local edits: how can a conflict possibly happen? Again, because the user can use svn merge to define and apply any old delta to the working copy, that delta may contain textual changes that don't cleanly apply to a working file, even if the file has no local modifications.

Another small difference between svn update and svn merge is the names of the full-text files created when a conflict happens. In 第 4.5 节 “解决冲突”, we saw that an update produces files named filename.mine, filename.rOLDREV, and filename.rNEWREV. When svn merge produces a conflict, though, it creates three files named filename.working, filename.left, and filename.right. In this case, the terms left and right are describing which side of the double-tree comparison the file came from. In any case, these differing names will help you distinguish between conflicts that happened as a result of an update and ones that happened as a result of a merge.

4.5. 阻塞修改

Sometimes there's a particular changeset that you don't want to be automatically merged. For example, perhaps your team's policy is to do new development work on /trunk, but to be more conservative about backporting changes to a stable branch you use for releasing to the public. On one extreme, you can manually cherrypick single changesets from the trunk to the branch—just the changes that are stable enough to pass muster. Maybe things aren't quite that strict, though; perhaps most of the time you'd like to just let svn merge automatically merge most changes from trunk to branch. In this case, you'd like a way to mask a few specific changes out, that is, prevent them from ever being automatically merged.

In Subversion 1.6, the only way to block a changeset is to make the system believe that the change has already been merged. To do this, invoke a merge command with the --record-only option:

$ cd my-calc-branch

$ svn propget svn:mergeinfo .
/trunk:1680-3305

# Let's make the metadata list r3328 as already merged.
$ svn merge -c 3328 --record-only ^/calc/trunk

$ svn status
M       .

$ svn propget svn:mergeinfo .
/trunk:1680-3305,3328

$ svn commit -m "Block r3328 from being merged to the branch."
…

This technique works, but it's also a little bit dangerous. The main problem is that we're not clearly differentiating between the ideas of I already have this change and I don't have this change, but don't currently want it. We're effectively lying to the system, making it think that the change was previously merged. This puts the responsibility on you—the user—to remember that the change wasn't actually merged, it just wasn't wanted. There's no way to ask Subversion for a list of blocked changelists. If you want to track them (so that you can unblock them someday) you'll need to record them in a text file somewhere, or perhaps in an invented property.

4.6. Keeping a Reintegrated Branch Alive

There is an alternative to destroying and re-creating a branch after reintegration. To understand why it works you need to understand why the branch is initially unfit for further use after it has been reintegrated.

Let's assume you created your branch in revision A. While working on your branch, you created one or more revisions which made changes to the branch. Before reintegrating your branch into trunk, you made a final merge from trunk to your branch, and committed the result of this merge as revision B.

When reintegrating your branch into the trunk, you create a new revision X which changes the trunk. The changes made to trunk in this revision X are semantically equivalent to the changes you made to your branch between revisions A and B.

If you now try to merge outstanding changes from trunk to your branch, Subversion will consider changes made in revision X as eligible for being merged into the branch. However, since your branch already contains all the changes made in revision X, merging these changes can result in spurious conflicts! These conflicts are often tree conflicts, especially if renames were made on the branch or the trunk while the branch was in development.

So what can be done about this? We need to make sure that Subversion does not try to merge revision X into the branch. This can be done using the --record-only merge option, which was introduced in 第 4.5 节 “阻塞修改”.

To carry out the record-only merge, get a working copy of the branch which was just reintegrated in revision X, and merge just revision X from trunk into your branch, making sure to use the --record-only option.

This merge uses the cherry-picking merge syntax, which was introduced in 第 4.1 节 “摘录合并”. Continuing with the running example from 第 3.3 节 “重新集成分支”, where revision X was revision 391:

$ cd my-calc-branch
$ svn update
Updated to revision 393.
$ svn merge --record-only -c 391 ^/calc/trunk
$ svn commit -m "Block revision 391 from being merged into my-calc-branch."
Sending        .

Committed revision 394.

Now your branch is ready to soak up changes from the trunk again. After another sync of your branch to the trunk, you can even reintegrate the branch a second time. If necessary, you can do another record-only merge to keep the branch alive. Rinse and repeat.

It should now also be apparent why deleting the branch and re-creating it has the same effect as doing the above record-only merge. Because revision X is part of the natural history of the newly created branch, Subversion will never attempt to merge revision X into the branch, avoiding spurious conflicts.

4.7. 感知合并的日志和注解

One of the main features of any version control system is to keep track of who changed what, and when they did it. The svn log and svn blame commands are just the tools for this: when invoked on individual files, they show not only the history of changesets that affected the file, but also exactly which user wrote which line of code, and when she did it.

When changes start getting replicated between branches, however, things start to get complicated. For example, if you were to ask svn log about the history of your feature branch, it would show exactly every revision that ever affected the branch:

$ cd my-calc-branch
$ svn log -q
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r390 | user | 2002-11-22 11:01:57 -0600 (Fri, 22 Nov 2002) | 1 line
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r388 | user | 2002-11-21 05:20:00 -0600 (Thu, 21 Nov 2002) | 2 lines
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r381 | user | 2002-11-20 15:07:06 -0600 (Wed, 20 Nov 2002) | 2 lines
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r359 | user | 2002-11-19 19:19:20 -0600 (Tue, 19 Nov 2002) | 2 lines
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r357 | user | 2002-11-15 14:29:52 -0600 (Fri, 15 Nov 2002) | 2 lines
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r343 | user | 2002-11-07 13:50:10 -0600 (Thu, 07 Nov 2002) | 2 lines
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r341 | user | 2002-11-03 07:17:16 -0600 (Sun, 03 Nov 2002) | 2 lines
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r303 | sally | 2002-10-29 21:14:35 -0600 (Tue, 29 Oct 2002) | 2 lines
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r98 | sally | 2002-02-22 15:35:29 -0600 (Fri, 22 Feb 2002) | 2 lines
------------------------------------------------------------------------

But is this really an accurate picture of all the changes that happened on the branch? What's being left out here is the fact that revisions 390, 381, and 357 were actually the results of merging changes from the trunk. If you look at one of these logs in detail, the multiple trunk changesets that comprised the branch change are nowhere to be seen:

$ svn log -v -r 390
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r390 | user | 2002-11-22 11:01:57 -0600 (Fri, 22 Nov 2002) | 1 line
Changed paths:
   M /branches/my-calc-branch/button.c
   M /branches/my-calc-branch/README

Final merge of trunk changes to my-calc-branch.

We happen to know that this merge to the branch was nothing but a merge of trunk changes. How can we see those trunk changes as well? The answer is to use the --use-merge-history (-g) option. This option expands those child changes that were part of the merge.

$ svn log -v -r 390 -g
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r390 | user | 2002-11-22 11:01:57 -0600 (Fri, 22 Nov 2002) | 1 line
Changed paths:
   M /branches/my-calc-branch/button.c
   M /branches/my-calc-branch/README

Final merge of trunk changes to my-calc-branch.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r383 | sally | 2002-11-21 03:19:00 -0600 (Thu, 21 Nov 2002) | 2 lines
Changed paths:
   M /branches/my-calc-branch/button.c
Merged via: r390

Fix inverse graphic error on button.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r382 | sally | 2002-11-20 16:57:06 -0600 (Wed, 20 Nov 2002) | 2 lines
Changed paths:
   M /branches/my-calc-branch/README
Merged via: r390

Document my last fix in README.

By making the log operation use merge history, we see not just the revision we queried (r390), but also the two revisions that came along on the ride with it—a couple of changes made by Sally to the trunk. This is a much more complete picture of history!

The svn blame command also takes the --use-merge-history (-g) option. If this option is neglected, somebody looking at a line-by-line annotation of button.c may get the mistaken impression that you were responsible for the lines that fixed a certain error:

$ svn blame button.c
…
   390    user    retval = inverse_func(button, path);
   390    user    return retval;
   390    user    }
…

And while it's true that you did actually commit those three lines in revision 390, two of them were actually written by Sally back in revision 383:

$ svn blame button.c -g
…
G    383    sally   retval = inverse_func(button, path);
G    383    sally   return retval;
     390    user    }
…

Now we know who to really blame for those two lines of code!

4.8. 关注还是忽视祖先

当与 Subversion 开发者交谈时,你可能会听到提及术语祖先。这个词是用来描述版本库中两个对象的关系:如果它们互相关联,一个对象就是另一个的祖先,或者相反。

For example, suppose you commit revision 100, which includes a change to a file foo.c. Then foo.c@99 is an ancestor of foo.c@100. On the other hand, suppose you commit the deletion of foo.c in revision 101, and then add a new file by the same name in revision 102. In this case, foo.c@99 and foo.c@102 may appear to be related (they have the same path), but in fact are completely different objects in the repository. They share no history or ancestry.

The reason for bringing this up is to point out an important difference between svn diff and svn merge. The former command ignores ancestry, while the latter command is quite sensitive to it. For example, if you asked svn diff to compare revisions 99 and 102 of foo.c, you would see line-based diffs; the diff command is blindly comparing two paths. But if you asked svn merge to compare the same two objects, it would notice that they're unrelated and first attempt to delete the old file, then add the new file; the output would indicate a deletion followed by an add:

D    foo.c
A    foo.c

Most merges involve comparing trees that are ancestrally related to one another; therefore, svn merge defaults to this behavior. Occasionally, however, you may want the merge command to compare two unrelated trees. For example, you may have imported two source-code trees representing different vendor releases of a software project (see 第 9 节 “供方分支”). If you ask svn merge to compare the two trees, you'd see the entire first tree being deleted, followed by an add of the entire second tree! In these situations, you'll want svn merge to do a path-based comparison only, ignoring any relations between files and directories. Add the --ignore-ancestry option to your merge command, and it will behave just like svn diff. (And conversely, the --notice-ancestry option will cause svn diff to behave like the svn merge command.)

4.9. 合并和移动

A common desire is to refactor source code, especially in Java-based software projects. Files and directories are shuffled around and renamed, often causing great disruption to everyone working on the project. Sounds like a perfect case to use a branch, doesn't it? Just create a branch, shuffle things around, and then merge the branch back to the trunk, right?

唉,这个场景下这样并不正确,可以看作 Subversion 当前的弱点。这个问题是因为 Subversion 的 update 还不是足够强壮,特别是针对拷贝和移动操作。

When you use svn copy to duplicate a file, the repository remembers where the new file came from, but it fails to transmit that information to the client which is running svn update or svn merge. Instead of telling the client, Copy that file you already have to this new location, it sends down an entirely new file. This can lead to problems, especially because the same thing happens with renamed files. A lesser-known fact about Subversion is that it lacks true renames—the svn move command is nothing more than an aggregation of svn copy and svn delete.

For example, suppose that while working on your private branch, you rename integer.c to whole.c. Effectively you've created a new file in your branch that is a copy of the original file, and deleted the original file. Meanwhile, back on trunk, Sally has committed some improvements to integer.c. Now you decide to merge your branch to the trunk:

$ cd calc/trunk

$ svn merge --reintegrate ^/calc/branches/my-calc-branch
--- Merging differences between repository URLs into '.':
D   integer.c
A   whole.c
U   .

This doesn't look so bad at first glance, but it's also probably not what you or Sally expected. The merge operation has deleted the latest version of the integer.c file (the one containing Sally's latest changes), and blindly added your new whole.c file—which is a duplicate of the older version of integer.c. The net effect is that merging your rename to the trunk has removed Sally's recent changes from the latest revision!

This isn't true data loss. Sally's changes are still in the repository's history, but it may not be immediately obvious that this has happened. The moral of this story is that until Subversion improves, be very careful about merging copies and renames from one branch to another.

4.10. 阻塞不知道合并的客户端

If you've just upgraded your server to Subversion 1.5 or later, there's a significant risk that pre-1.5 Subversion clients can mess up your automated merge tracking. Why is this? When a pre-1.5 Subversion client performs svn merge, it doesn't modify the value of the svn:mergeinfo property at all. So the subsequent commit, despite being the result of a merge, doesn't tell the repository about the duplicated changes—that information is lost. Later on, when merge-aware clients attempt automatic merging, they're likely to run into all sorts of conflicts resulting from repeated merges.

If you and your team are relying on the merge-tracking features of Subversion, you may want to configure your repository to prevent older clients from committing changes. The easy way to do this is by inspecting the capabilities parameter in the start-commit hook script. If the client reports itself as having mergeinfo capabilities, the hook script can allow the commit to start. If the client doesn't report that capability, have the hook deny the commit. 例 4.1 “Merge-tracking gatekeeper start-commit hook script” gives an example of such a hook script:

例 4.1. Merge-tracking gatekeeper start-commit hook script

#!/usr/bin/env python
import sys

# The start-commit hook is invoked before a Subversion txn is created
# in the process of doing a commit.  Subversion runs this hook
# by invoking a program (script, executable, binary, etc.) named
# 'start-commit' (for which this file is a template)
# with the following ordered arguments:
#
#   [1] REPOS-PATH   (the path to this repository)
#   [2] USER         (the authenticated user attempting to commit)
#   [3] CAPABILITIES (a colon-separated list of capabilities reported
#                     by the client; see note below)

capabilities = sys.argv[3].split(':')
if "mergeinfo" not in capabilities:
  sys.stderr.write("Commits from merge-tracking-unaware clients are "
                   "not permitted.  Please upgrade to Subversion 1.5 "
                   "or newer.\n")
  sys.exit(1)
sys.exit(0)


For more information about hook scripts, see 第 3.2 节 “实现版本库钩子”.

4.11. 合并跟踪的最终信息

The bottom line is that Subversion's merge-tracking feature has an extremely complex internal implementation, and the svn:mergeinfo property is the only window the user has into the machinery. Because the feature is relatively new, a numbers of edge cases and possible unexpected behaviors may pop up.

Sometimes mergeinfo will appear on files that you didn't expect to be touched by an operation. Sometimes mergeinfo won't be generated at all, when you expect it to. Furthermore, the management of mergeinfo metadata has a whole set of taxonomies and behaviors around it, such as explicit versus implicit mergeinfo, operative versus inoperative revisions, specific mechanisms of mergeinfo elision, and even inheritance from parent to child directories.

We've chosen not to cover these detailed topics in this book for a couple of reasons. First, the level of detail is absolutely overwhelming for a typical user. Second, as Subversion continues to improve, we feel that a typical user shouldn't have to understand these concepts; they'll eventually fade into the background as pesky implementation details. All that said, if you enjoy this sort of thing, you can get a fantastic overview in a paper posted at CollabNet's website: http://www.collab.net/community/subversion/articles/merge-info.html.

For now, if you want to steer clear of bugs and odd behaviors in automatic merging, the CollabNet article recommends that you stick to these simple best practices:

  • For short-term feature branches, follow the simple procedure described throughout 第 3 节 “基本合并”.

  • For long-lived release branches (as described in 第 8 节 “常用分支模式”), perform merges only on the root of the branch, not on subdirectories.

  • Never merge into working copies with a mixture of working revision numbers, or with switched subdirectories (as described next in 第 5 节 “使用分支”). A merge target should be a working copy which represents a single location in the repository at a single point in time.

  • Don't ever edit the svn:mergeinfo property directly; use svn merge with the --record-only option to effect a desired change to the metadata (as demonstrated in 第 4.5 节 “阻塞修改”).

  • Always make sure you have complete read access to all of your merge sources, and that your target working copy has no sparse directories.

5. 使用分支

The svn switch command transforms an existing working copy to reflect a different branch. While this command isn't strictly necessary for working with branches, it provides a nice shortcut. In our earlier example, after creating your private branch, you checked out a fresh working copy of the new repository directory. Instead, you can simply ask Subversion to change your working copy of /calc/trunk to mirror the new branch location:

$ cd calc

$ svn info | grep URL
URL: http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/trunk

$ svn switch ^/calc/branches/my-calc-branch
U    integer.c
U    button.c
U    Makefile
Updated to revision 341.

$ svn info | grep URL
URL: http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/branches/my-calc-branch

Switching a working copy that has no local modifications to a different branch results in the working copy looking just as it would if you'd done a fresh checkout of the directory. It's usually more efficient to use this command, because often branches differ by only a small degree. The server sends only the minimal set of changes necessary to make your working copy reflect the branch directory.

svn switch命令也可以带--revision(-r)参数,所以你不需要一直移动你的工作副本到分支的HEAD

Of course, most projects are more complicated than our calc example, and contain multiple subdirectories. Subversion users often follow a specific algorithm when using branches:

  1. 拷贝整个项目的trunk目录到一个新的分支目录。

  2. 只是转换工作副本的部分目录到分支。

In other words, if a user knows that the branch work needs to happen on only a specific subdirectory, she uses svn switch to move only that subdirectory to the branch. (Or sometimes users will switch just a single working file to the branch!) That way, the user can continue to receive normal trunk updates to most of her working copy, but the switched portions will remain immune (unless someone commits a change to her branch). This feature adds a whole new dimension to the concept of a mixed working copy—not only can working copies contain a mixture of working revisions, but they can also contain a mixture of repository locations as well.

If your working copy contains a number of switched subtrees from different repository locations, it continues to function as normal. When you update, you'll receive patches to each subtree as appropriate. When you commit, your local changes will still be applied as a single, atomic change to the repository.

Note that while it's okay for your working copy to reflect a mixture of repository locations, these locations must all be within the same repository. Subversion repositories aren't yet able to communicate with one another; that feature is planned for the future.[28]

因为svn switchsvn update的一个变种,具有相同的行为,当新的数据到达时,任何工作副本的已经完成的本地修改会被保存。

[提示]提示

你是否发现你做出了复杂的修改(在/trunk的工作副本),并突然发现,这些修改必须在它们自己的分支?处理这个问题的技术可以总结为两步:

$ svn copy http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/trunk \
           http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/branches/newbranch \
      -m "Create branch 'newbranch'."
Committed revision 353.
$ svn switch ^/calc/branches/newbranch
At revision 353.

The svn switch command, like svn update, preserves your local edits. At this point, your working copy is now a reflection of the newly created branch, and your next svn commit invocation will send your changes there.

6. 标签

Another common version control concept is a tag. A tag is just a snapshot of a project in time. In Subversion, this idea already seems to be everywhere. Each repository revision is exactly that—a snapshot of the filesystem after each commit.

However, people often want to give more human-friendly names to tags, such as release-1.0. And they want to make snapshots of smaller subdirectories of the filesystem. After all, it's not so easy to remember that release 1.0 of a piece of software is a particular subdirectory of revision 4822.

6.1. 建立简单标签

Once again, svn copy comes to the rescue. If you want to create a snapshot of /calc/trunk exactly as it looks in the HEAD revision, make a copy of it:

$ svn copy http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/trunk \
           http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/tags/release-1.0 \
      -m "Tagging the 1.0 release of the 'calc' project."

Committed revision 902.

This example assumes that a /calc/tags directory already exists. (If it doesn't, you can create it using svn mkdir.) After the copy completes, the new release-1.0 directory is forever a snapshot of how the /trunk directory looked in the HEAD revision at the time you made the copy. Of course, you might want to be more precise about exactly which revision you copy, in case somebody else may have committed changes to the project when you weren't looking. So if you know that revision 901 of /calc/trunk is exactly the snapshot you want, you can specify it by passing -r 901 to the svn copy command.

But wait a moment: isn't this tag creation procedure the same procedure we used to create a branch? Yes, in fact, it is. In Subversion, there's no difference between a tag and a branch. Both are just ordinary directories that are created by copying. Just as with branches, the only reason a copied directory is a tag is because humans have decided to treat it that way: as long as nobody ever commits to the directory, it forever remains a snapshot. If people start committing to it, it becomes a branch.

If you are administering a repository, there are two approaches you can take to managing tags. The first approach is hands off: as a matter of project policy, decide where your tags will live, and make sure all users know how to treat the directories they copy. (That is, make sure they know not to commit to them.) The second approach is more paranoid: you can use one of the access control scripts provided with Subversion to prevent anyone from doing anything but creating new copies in the tags area (see 第 6 章 服务配置). The paranoid approach, however, isn't usually necessary. If a user accidentally commits a change to a tag directory, you can simply undo the change as discussed in the previous section. This is version control, after all!

6.2. 建立复杂标签

有时候你希望你的快照能够很复杂,而不只是一个单独修订版本的一个单独目录。

For example, pretend your project is much larger than our calc example: suppose it contains a number of subdirectories and many more files. In the course of your work, you may decide that you need to create a working copy that is designed to have specific features and bug fixes. You can accomplish this by selectively backdating files or directories to particular revisions (using svn update with the -r option liberally), by switching files and directories to particular branches (making use of svn switch), or even just by making a bunch of local changes. When you're done, your working copy is a hodgepodge of repository locations from different revisions. But after testing, you know it's the precise combination of data you need to tag.

Time to make a snapshot. Copying one URL to another won't work here. In this case, you want to make a snapshot of your exact working copy arrangement and store it in the repository. Luckily, svn copy actually has four different uses (which you can read about in 第 9 章 Subversion 完全参考), including the ability to copy a working copy tree to the repository:

$ ls
my-working-copy/

$ svn copy my-working-copy \
           http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/tags/mytag \
           -m "Tag my existing working copy state."

Committed revision 940.

Now there is a new directory in the repository, /calc/tags/mytag, which is an exact snapshot of your working copy—mixed revisions, URLs, local changes, and all.

Other users have found interesting uses for this feature. Sometimes there are situations where you have a bunch of local changes made to your working copy, and you'd like a collaborator to see them. Instead of running svn diff and sending a patch file (which won't capture directory, symlink, or property changes), you can use svn copy to upload your working copy to a private area of the repository. Your collaborator can then either check out a verbatim copy of your working copy or use svn merge to receive your exact changes.

While this is a nice method for uploading a quick snapshot of your working copy, note that this is not a good way to initially create a branch. Branch creation should be an event unto itself, and this method conflates the creation of a branch with extra changes to files, all within a single revision. This makes it very difficult (later on) to identify a single revision number as a branch point.

7. 维护分支

You may have noticed by now that Subversion is extremely flexible. Because it implements branches and tags with the same underlying mechanism (directory copies), and because branches and tags appear in normal filesystem space, many people find Subversion intimidating. It's almost too flexible. In this section, we'll offer some suggestions for arranging and managing your data over time.

7.1. 版本库布局

There are some standard, recommended ways to organize a repository. Most people create a trunk directory to hold the main line of development, a branches directory to contain branch copies, and a tags directory to contain tag copies. If a repository holds only one project, often people create these top-level directories:



/

   trunk/

   branches/

   tags/

If a repository contains multiple projects, admins typically index their layout by project. See 第 2.1 节 “规划你的版本库结构” to read more about project roots, but here's an example of such a layout:



/

   paint/

      trunk/

      branches/

      tags/

   calc/

      trunk/

      branches/

      tags/

Of course, you're free to ignore these common layouts. You can create any sort of variation, whatever works best for you or your team. Remember that whatever you choose, it's not a permanent commitment. You can reorganize your repository at any time. Because branches and tags are ordinary directories, the svn move command can move or rename them however you wish. Switching from one layout to another is just a matter of issuing a series of server-side moves; if you don't like the way things are organized in the repository, just juggle the directories around.

Remember, though, that while moving directories may be easy to do, you need to be considerate of your users as well. Your juggling can be disorienting to users with existing working copies. If a user has a working copy of a particular repository directory, your svn move operation might remove the path from the latest revision. When the user next runs svn update, she will be told that her working copy represents a path that no longer exists, and the user will be forced to svn switch to the new location.

7.2. 数据的生命周期

Another nice feature of Subversion's model is that branches and tags can have finite lifetimes, just like any other versioned item. For example, suppose you eventually finish all your work on your personal branch of the calc project. After merging all of your changes back into /calc/trunk, there's no need for your private branch directory to stick around anymore:

$ svn delete http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/branches/my-calc-branch \
             -m "Removing obsolete branch of calc project."

Committed revision 375.

And now your branch is gone. Of course, it's not really gone: the directory is simply missing from the HEAD revision, no longer distracting anyone. If you use svn checkout, svn switch, or svn list to examine an earlier revision, you'll still be able to see your old branch.

If browsing your deleted directory isn't enough, you can always bring it back. Resurrecting data is very easy in Subversion. If there's a deleted directory (or file) that you'd like to bring back into HEAD, simply use svn copy to copy it from the old revision:

$ svn copy http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/branches/my-calc-branch@374 \
           http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/branches/my-calc-branch \
           -m "Restore my-calc-branch."

Committed revision 376.

In our example, your personal branch had a relatively short lifetime: you may have created it to fix a bug or implement a new feature. When your task is done, so is the branch. In software development, though, it's also common to have two main branches running side by side for very long periods. For example, suppose it's time to release a stable version of the calc project to the public, and you know it's going to take a couple of months to shake bugs out of the software. You don't want people to add new features to the project, but you don't want to tell all developers to stop programming either. So instead, you create a stable branch of the software that won't change much:

$ svn copy http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/trunk \
           http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/branches/stable-1.0 \
           -m "Creating stable branch of calc project."

Committed revision 377.

And now developers are free to continue adding cutting-edge (or experimental) features to /calc/trunk, and you can declare a project policy that only bug fixes are to be committed to /calc/branches/stable-1.0. That is, as people continue to work on the trunk, a human selectively ports bug fixes over to the stable branch. Even after the stable branch has shipped, you'll probably continue to maintain the branch for a long time—that is, as long as you continue to support that release for customers. We'll discuss this more in the next section.

8. 常用分支模式

分支和svn merge有很多不同的用法,这个小节描述了最常见的用法。

Version control is most often used for software development, so here's a quick peek at two of the most common branching/merging patterns used by teams of programmers. If you're not using Subversion for software development, feel free to skip this section. If you're a software developer using version control for the first time, pay close attention, as these patterns are often considered best practices by experienced folk. These processes aren't specific to Subversion; they're applicable to any version control system. Still, it may help to see them described in Subversion terms.

8.1. 发布分支

Most software has a typical life cycle: code, test, release, repeat. There are two problems with this process. First, developers need to keep writing new features while quality assurance teams take time to test supposedly stable versions of the software. New work cannot halt while the software is tested. Second, the team almost always needs to support older, released versions of software; if a bug is discovered in the latest code, it most likely exists in released versions as well, and customers will want to get that bug fix without having to wait for a major new release.

这是版本控制可以帮助你的。典型的过程如下:

  1. Developers commit all new work to the trunk. Day-to-day changes are committed to /trunk: new features, bug fixes, and so on.

  2. The trunk is copied to a release branch. When the team thinks the software is ready for release (say, a 1.0 release), /trunk might be copied to /branches/1.0.

  3. Teams continue to work in parallel. One team begins rigorous testing of the release branch, while another team continues new work (say, for version 2.0) on /trunk. If bugs are discovered in either location, fixes are ported back and forth as necessary. At some point, however, even that process stops. The branch is frozen for final testing right before a release.

  4. The branch is tagged and released. When testing is complete, /branches/1.0 is copied to /tags/1.0.0 as a reference snapshot. The tag is packaged and released to customers.

  5. The branch is maintained over time. While work continues on /trunk for version 2.0, bug fixes continue to be ported from /trunk to /branches/1.0. When enough bug fixes have accumulated, management may decide to do a 1.0.1 release: /branches/1.0 is copied to /tags/1.0.1, and the tag is packaged and released.

This entire process repeats as the software matures: when the 2.0 work is complete, a new 2.0 release branch is created, tested, tagged, and eventually released. After some years, the repository ends up with a number of release branches in maintenance mode, and a number of tags representing final shipped versions.

8.2. 特性分支

A feature branch is the sort of branch that's been the dominant example in this chapter (the one you've been working on while Sally continues to work on /trunk). It's a temporary branch created to work on a complex change without interfering with the stability of /trunk. Unlike release branches (which may need to be supported forever), feature branches are born, used for a while, merged back to the trunk, and then ultimately deleted. They have a finite span of usefulness.

Again, project policies vary widely concerning exactly when it's appropriate to create a feature branch. Some projects never use feature branches at all: commits to /trunk are a free-for-all. The advantage to this system is that it's simple—nobody needs to learn about branching or merging. The disadvantage is that the trunk code is often unstable or unusable. Other projects use branches to an extreme: no change is ever committed to the trunk directly. Even the most trivial changes are created on a short-lived branch, carefully reviewed, and merged to the trunk. Then the branch is deleted. This system guarantees an exceptionally stable and usable trunk at all times, but at the cost of tremendous process overhead.

Most projects take a middle-of-the-road approach. They commonly insist that /trunk compile and pass regression tests at all times. A feature branch is required only when a change requires a large number of destabilizing commits. A good rule of thumb is to ask this question: if the developer worked for days in isolation and then committed the large change all at once (so that /trunk were never destabilized), would it be too large a change to review? If the answer to that question is yes, the change should be developed on a feature branch. As the developer commits incremental changes to the branch, they can be easily reviewed by peers.

Finally, there's the issue of how to best keep a feature branch in sync with the trunk as work progresses. As we mentioned earlier, there's a great risk to working on a branch for weeks or months; trunk changes may continue to pour in, to the point where the two lines of development differ so greatly that it may become a nightmare trying to merge the branch back to the trunk.

This situation is best avoided by regularly merging trunk changes to the branch. Make up a policy: once a week, merge the last week's worth of trunk changes to the branch.

At some point, you'll be ready to merge the synchronized feature branch back to the trunk. To do this, begin by doing a final merge of the latest trunk changes to the branch. When that's done, the latest versions of branch and trunk will be absolutely identical except for your branch changes. You would then merge back with the --reintegrate option:

$ cd trunk-working-copy

$ svn update
At revision 1910.

$ svn merge --reintegrate ^/calc/branches/mybranch
--- Merging differences between repository URLs into '.':
U    real.c
U    integer.c
A    newdirectory
A    newdirectory/newfile
 U   .
…

Another way of thinking about this pattern is that your weekly sync of trunk to branch is analogous to running svn update in a working copy, while the final merge step is analogous to running svn commit from a working copy. After all, what else is a working copy but a very shallow private branch? It's a branch that's capable of storing only one change at a time.

9. 供方分支

As is especially the case when developing software, the data that you maintain under version control is often closely related to, or perhaps dependent upon, someone else's data. Generally, the needs of your project will dictate that you stay as up to date as possible with the data provided by that external entity without sacrificing the stability of your own project. This scenario plays itself out all the time—anywhere that the information generated by one group of people has a direct effect on that which is generated by another group.

For example, software developers might be working on an application that makes use of a third-party library. Subversion has just such a relationship with the Apache Portable Runtime (APR) library (see 第 3.1 节 “Apache 可移植运行库”). The Subversion source code depends on the APR library for all its portability needs. In earlier stages of Subversion's development, the project closely tracked APR's changing API, always sticking to the bleeding edge of the library's code churn. Now that both APR and Subversion have matured, Subversion attempts to synchronize with APR's library API only at well-tested, stable release points.

Now, if your project depends on someone else's information, you could attempt to synchronize that information with your own in several ways. Most painfully, you could issue oral or written instructions to all the contributors of your project, telling them to make sure they have the specific versions of that third-party information that your project needs. If the third-party information is maintained in a Subversion repository, you could also use Subversion's externals definitions to effectively pin down specific versions of that information to some location in your own working copy directory (see 第 9 节 “外部定义”).

But sometimes you want to maintain custom modifications to third-party code in your own version control system. Returning to the software development example, programmers might need to make modifications to that third-party library for their own purposes. These modifications might include new functionality or bug fixes, maintained internally only until they become part of an official release of the third-party library. Or the changes might never be relayed back to the library maintainers, existing solely as custom tweaks to make the library further suit the needs of the software developers.

Now you face an interesting situation. Your project could house its custom modifications to the third-party data in some disjointed fashion, such as using patch files or full-fledged alternative versions of files and directories. But these quickly become maintenance headaches, requiring some mechanism by which to apply your custom changes to the third-party code and necessitating regeneration of those changes with each successive version of the third-party code that you track.

The solution to this problem is to use vendor branches. A vendor branch is a directory tree in your own version control system that contains information provided by a third-party entity, or vendor. Each version of the vendor's data that you decide to absorb into your project is called a vendor drop.

Vendor branches provide two benefits. First, by storing the currently supported vendor drop in your own version control system, you ensure that the members of your project never need to question whether they have the right version of the vendor's data. They simply receive that correct version as part of their regular working copy updates. Second, because the data lives in your own Subversion repository, you can store your custom changes to it in-place—you have no more need of an automated (or worse, manual) method for swapping in your customizations.

9.1. 常规的供方分支管理过程

Managing vendor branches generally works like this: first, you create a top-level directory (such as /vendor) to hold the vendor branches. Then you import the third-party code into a subdirectory of that top-level directory. You then copy that subdirectory into your main development branch (e.g., /trunk) at the appropriate location. You always make your local changes in the main development branch. With each new release of the code you are tracking, you bring it into the vendor branch and merge the changes into /trunk, resolving whatever conflicts occur between your local changes and the upstream changes.

An example will help to clarify this algorithm. We'll use a scenario where your development team is creating a calculator program that links against a third-party complex number arithmetic library, libcomplex. We'll begin with the initial creation of the vendor branch and the import of the first vendor drop. We'll call our vendor branch directory libcomplex, and our code drops will go into a subdirectory of our vendor branch called current. And since svn import creates all the intermediate parent directories it needs, we can actually accomplish both of these steps with a single command:

$ svn import /path/to/libcomplex-1.0 \
             http://svn.example.com/repos/vendor/libcomplex/current \
             -m "importing initial 1.0 vendor drop"
…

We now have the current version of the libcomplex source code in /vendor/libcomplex/current. Now, we tag that version (see 第 6 节 “标签”) and then copy it into the main development branch. Our copy will create a new directory called libcomplex in our existing calc project directory. It is in this copied version of the vendor data that we will make our customizations:

$ svn copy http://svn.example.com/repos/vendor/libcomplex/current  \
           http://svn.example.com/repos/vendor/libcomplex/1.0      \
           -m "tagging libcomplex-1.0"
…
$ svn copy http://svn.example.com/repos/vendor/libcomplex/1.0  \
           http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/libcomplex        \
           -m "bringing libcomplex-1.0 into the main branch"
…

We check out our project's main branch—which now includes a copy of the first vendor drop—and we get to work customizing the libcomplex code. Before we know it, our modified version of libcomplex is now completely integrated into our calculator program.[29]

A few weeks later, the developers of libcomplex release a new version of their library—version 1.1—which contains some features and functionality that we really want. We'd like to upgrade to this new version, but without losing the customizations we made to the existing version. What we essentially would like to do is to replace our current baseline version of libcomplex 1.0 with a copy of libcomplex 1.1, and then re-apply the custom modifications we previously made to that library to the new version. But we actually approach the problem from the other direction, applying the changes made to libcomplex between versions 1.0 and 1.1 to our modified copy of it.

To perform this upgrade, we check out a copy of our vendor branch and replace the code in the current directory with the new libcomplex 1.1 source code. We quite literally copy new files on top of existing files, perhaps exploding the libcomplex 1.1 release tarball atop our existing files and directories. The goal here is to make our current directory contain only the libcomplex 1.1 code and to ensure that all that code is under version control. Oh, and we want to do this with as little version control history disturbance as possible.

After replacing the 1.0 code with 1.1 code, svn status will show files with local modifications as well as, perhaps, some unversioned files. If we did what we were supposed to do, the unversioned files are only those new files introduced in the 1.1 release of libcomplex—we run svn add on those to get them under version control. If the 1.1 code no longer has certain files that were in the 1.0 tree, it may be hard to notice them; you'd have to compare the two trees with some external tool and then svn delete any files present in 1.0 but not in 1.1. (Although it might also be just fine to let these same files live on in unused obscurity!) Finally, once our current working copy contains only the libcomplex 1.1 code, we commit the changes we made to get it looking that way.

Our current branch now contains the new vendor drop. We tag the new version as 1.1 (in the same way we previously tagged the version 1.0 vendor drop), and then merge the differences between the tag of the previous version and the new current version into our main development branch:

$ cd working-copies/calc
$ svn merge ^/vendor/libcomplex/1.0      \
            ^/vendor/libcomplex/current  \
            libcomplex
… # resolve all the conflicts between their changes and our changes
$ svn commit -m "merging libcomplex-1.1 into the main branch"
…

In the trivial use case, the new version of our third-party tool would look, from a files-and-directories point of view, just like the previous version. None of the libcomplex source files would have been deleted, renamed, or moved to different locations—the new version would contain only textual modifications against the previous one. In a perfect world, our modifications would apply cleanly to the new version of the library, with absolutely no complications or conflicts.

But things aren't always that simple, and in fact it is quite common for source files to get moved around between releases of software. This complicates the process of ensuring that our modifications are still valid for the new version of code, and things can quickly degrade into a situation where we have to manually re-create our customizations in the new version. Once Subversion knows about the history of a given source file—including all its previous locations—the process of merging in the new version of the library is pretty simple. But we are responsible for telling Subversion how the source file layout changed from vendor drop to vendor drop.

9.2. svn_load_dirs.pl

Vendor drops that contain more than a few deletes, additions, and moves complicate the process of upgrading to each successive version of the third-party data. So Subversion supplies the svn_load_dirs.pl script to assist with this process. This script automates the importing steps we mentioned in the general vendor branch management procedure to make sure mistakes are minimized. You will still be responsible for using the merge commands to merge the new versions of the third-party data into your main development branch, but svn_load_dirs.pl can help you more quickly and easily arrive at that stage.

一句话,svn_load_dirs.pl是一个增强的svn import,具备了许多重要的特性:

  • 它可以在任何有一个存在的版本库目录与一个外部的目录匹配时执行,会执行所有必要的添加和删除并且可以选则执行移动。

  • It takes care of complicated series of operations between which Subversion requires an intermediate commit—such as before renaming a file or directory twice.

  • 它可以随意的为新导入目录打上标签。

  • 它可以随意为符合正则表达式的文件和目录添加任意的属性。

svn_load_dirs.pl takes three mandatory arguments. The first argument is the URL to the base Subversion directory to work in. This argument is followed by the URL—relative to the first argument—into which the current vendor drop will be imported. Finally, the third argument is the local directory to import. Using our previous example, a typical run of svn_load_dirs.pl might look like this:

$ svn_load_dirs.pl http://svn.example.com/repos/vendor/libcomplex \
                   current                                        \
                   /path/to/libcomplex-1.1
…

You can indicate that you'd like svn_load_dirs.pl to tag the new vendor drop by passing the -t command-line option and specifying a tag name. This tag is another URL relative to the first program argument.

$ svn_load_dirs.pl -t libcomplex-1.1                              \
                   http://svn.example.com/repos/vendor/libcomplex \
                   current                                        \
                   /path/to/libcomplex-1.1
…

When you run svn_load_dirs.pl, it examines the contents of your existing current vendor drop and compares them with the proposed new vendor drop. In the trivial case, no files will be in one version and not the other, and the script will perform the new import without incident. If, however, there are discrepancies in the file layouts between versions, svn_load_dirs.pl will ask you how to resolve those differences. For example, you will have the opportunity to tell the script that you know that the file math.c in version 1.0 of libcomplex was renamed to arithmetic.c in libcomplex 1.1. Any discrepancies not explained by moves are treated as regular additions and deletions.

The script also accepts a separate configuration file for setting properties on files and directories matching a regular expression that are added to the repository. This configuration file is specified to svn_load_dirs.pl using the -p command-line option. Each line of the configuration file is a whitespace-delimited set of two or four values: a Perl-style regular expression against which to match the added path, a control keyword (either break or cont), and then optionally a property name and value.

\.png$              break   svn:mime-type   image/png
\.jpe?g$            break   svn:mime-type   image/jpeg
\.m3u$              cont    svn:mime-type   audio/x-mpegurl
\.m3u$              break   svn:eol-style   LF
.*                  break   svn:eol-style   native

For each added path, the configured property changes whose regular expression matches the path are applied in order, unless the control specification is break (which means that no more property changes should be applied to that path). If the control specification is cont—an abbreviation for continue—matching will continue with the next line of the configuration file.

Any whitespace in the regular expression, property name, or property value must be surrounded by either single or double quotes. You can escape quotes that are not used for wrapping whitespace by preceding them with a backslash (\) character. The backslash escapes only quotes when parsing the configuration file, so do not protect any other characters beyond what is necessary for the regular expression.

10. 总结

We covered a lot of ground in this chapter. We discussed the concepts of tags and branches and demonstrated how Subversion implements these concepts by copying directories with the svn copy command. We showed how to use svn merge to copy changes from one branch to another or roll back bad changes. We went over the use of svn switch to create mixed-location working copies. And we talked about how one might manage the organization and lifetimes of branches in a repository.

Remember the Subversion mantra: branches and tags are cheap. So don't be afraid to use them when needed!

As a helpful reminder of all the operations we discussed, here is handy reference table you can consult as you begin to make use of branches.

表 4.1. 分支与合并命令

动作Command
创建一个分支或标签svn copy URL1 URL2
切换工作副本到分支或标签svn switch URL
将分支与主干同步svn merge trunkURL; svn commit
参见合并历史或适当的修改集svn mergeinfo SOURCE TARGET
合并分支到主干svn merge --reintegrate branchURL; svn commit
复制特定的修改svn merge -c REV URL; svn commit
合并一个范围的修改svn merge -r REV1:REV2 URL; svn commit
让自动合并跳过一个修改svn merge -c REV --record-only URL; svn commit
预览合并svn merge URL --dry-run
丢弃合并结果svn revert -R .
从历史复活某些事物svn copy URL@REV localPATH
撤销已经提交的修改svn merge -c -REV URL; svn commit
感知合并的检查历史svn log -g; svn blame -g
从工作副本创建一个标签svn copy . tagURL
重新整理分支或标签svn move URL1 URL2
删除分支或标签svn delete URL





[23] Subversion does not support copying between different repositories. When using URLs with svn copy or svn move, you can only copy items within the same repository.

[24] 这是 svn 1.6 新增的。

[25] The Subversion project has plans, however, to someday implement a command that would accomplish the task of permanently deleting information. In the meantime, see 第 4.1.3 节 “svndumpfilter” for a possible workaround.

[26] At least, this is true in Subversion 1.6 at the time of this writing. This behavior may improve in future versions of Subversion.

[27] Interestingly, after rolling back a revision like this, we wouldn't be able to reapply the revision using svn merge . -c 5, since the mergeinfo would already list r5 as being applied. We would have to use the --ignore-ancestry option to make the merge command ignore the existing mergeinfo!

[28] You can, however, use svn switch with the --relocate option if the URL of your server changes and you don't want to abandon an existing working copy. See svn switch (sw) for more information and an example.

[29] 而且当然完全没有 bug !

第 5 章 版本库管理

The Subversion repository is the central storehouse of all your versioned data. As such, it becomes an obvious candidate for all the love and attention an administrator can offer. While the repository is generally a low-maintenance item, it is important to understand how to properly configure and care for it so that potential problems are avoided, and so actual problems are safely resolved.

In this chapter, we'll discuss how to create and configure a Subversion repository. We'll also talk about repository maintenance, providing examples of how and when to use the svnlook and svnadmin tools provided with Subversion. We'll address some common questions and mistakes and give some suggestions on how to arrange the data in the repository.

If you plan to access a Subversion repository only in the role of a user whose data is under version control (i.e., via a Subversion client), you can skip this chapter altogether. However, if you are, or wish to become, a Subversion repository administrator,[30] this chapter is for you.

1. Subversion 版本库的定义

Before jumping into the broader topic of repository administration, let's further define what a repository is. How does it look? How does it feel? Does it take its tea hot or iced, sweetened, and with lemon? As an administrator, you'll be expected to understand the composition of a repository both from a literal, OS-level perspective—how a repository looks and acts with respect to non-Subversion tools—and from a logical perspective—dealing with how data is represented inside the repository.

Seen through the eyes of a typical file browser application (such as Windows Explorer) or command-line based filesystem navigation tools, the Subversion repository is just another directory full of stuff. There are some subdirectories with human-readable configuration files in them, some subdirectories with some not-so-human-readable data files, and so on. As in other areas of the Subversion design, modularity is given high regard, and hierarchical organization is preferred to cluttered chaos. So a shallow glance into a typical repository from a nuts-and-bolts perspective is sufficient to reveal the basic components of the repository:

$ ls repos
conf/  db/  format  hooks/  locks/  README.txt

Here's a quick fly-by overview of what exactly you're seeing in this directory listing. (Don't get bogged down in the terminology—detailed coverage of these components exists elsewhere in this and other chapters.)

conf

保存配置文件的目录

db

存储全部版本化数据的仓库

format

A file that contains a single integer that indicates the version number of the repository layout

hooks

A directory full of hook script templates (and hook scripts themselves, once you've installed some)

locks

A directory for Subversion's repository lock files, used for tracking accessors to the repository

README.txt

A file whose contents merely inform its readers that they are looking at a Subversion repository

[注意]注意

Prior to Subversion 1.5, the on-disk repository structure also always contained a dav subdirectory. mod_dav_svn used this directory to store information about WebDAV activities—mappings of high-level WebDAV protocol concepts to Subversion commit transactions. Subversion 1.5 changed that behavior, moving ownership of the activities directory, and the ability to configure its location, into mod_dav_svn itself. Now, new repositories will not necessarily have a dav subdirectory unless mod_dav_svn is in use and hasn't been configured to store its activities database elsewhere. See “指令”一节 for more information.

Of course, when accessed via the Subversion libraries, this otherwise unremarkable collection of files and directories suddenly becomes an implementation of a virtual, versioned filesystem, complete with customizable event triggers. This filesystem has its own notions of directories and files, very similar to the notions of such things held by real filesystems (such as NTFS, FAT32, ext3, etc.). But this is a special filesystem—it hangs these directories and files from revisions, keeping all the changes you've ever made to them safely stored and forever accessible. This is where the entirety of your versioned data lives.

2. 版本库开发策略

Due largely to the simplicity of the overall design of the Subversion repository and the technologies on which it relies, creating and configuring a repository are fairly straightforward tasks. There are a few preliminary decisions you'll want to make, but the actual work involved in any given setup of a Subversion repository is pretty basic, tending toward mindless repetition if you find yourself setting up multiples of these things.

下面是一些你需要预先考虑的事情:

  • 你的版本库将要存放什么数据(或多个版本库),这些数据如何组织?

  • 版本库存放在哪里,如何被访问?

  • 你需要什么类型的访问控制和版本库事件报告?

  • 你希望使用哪种数据存储方式?

在本节,我们要尝试帮你回答这些问题。

2.1. 规划你的版本库结构

While Subversion allows you to move around versioned files and directories without any loss of information, and even provides ways of moving whole sets of versioned history from one repository to another, doing so can greatly disrupt the workflow of those who access the repository often and come to expect things to be at certain locations. So before creating a new repository, try to peer into the future a bit; plan ahead before placing your data under version control. By conscientiously laying out your repository or repositories and their versioned contents ahead of time, you can prevent many future headaches.

Let's assume that as repository administrator, you will be responsible for supporting the version control system for several projects. Your first decision is whether to use a single repository for multiple projects, or to give each project its own repository, or some compromise of these two.

There are benefits to using a single repository for multiple projects, most obviously the lack of duplicated maintenance. A single repository means that there is one set of hook programs, one thing to routinely back up, one thing to dump and load if Subversion releases an incompatible new version, and so on. Also, you can move data between projects easily, without losing any historical versioning information.

The downside of using a single repository is that different projects may have different requirements in terms of the repository event triggers, such as needing to send commit notification emails to different mailing lists, or having different definitions about what does and does not constitute a legitimate commit. These aren't insurmountable problems, of course—it just means that all of your hook scripts have to be sensitive to the layout of your repository rather than assuming that the whole repository is associated with a single group of people. Also, remember that Subversion uses repository-global revision numbers. While those numbers don't have any particular magical powers, some folks still don't like the fact that even though no changes have been made to their project lately, the youngest revision number for the repository keeps climbing because other projects are actively adding new revisions.[31]

A middle-ground approach can be taken, too. For example, projects can be grouped by how well they relate to each other. You might have a few repositories with a handful of projects in each repository. That way, projects that are likely to want to share data can do so easily, and as new revisions are added to the repository, at least the developers know that those new revisions are at least remotely related to everyone who uses that repository.

After deciding how to organize your projects with respect to repositories, you'll probably want to think about directory hierarchies within the repositories themselves. Because Subversion uses regular directory copies for branching and tagging (see 第 4 章 分支与合并), the Subversion community recommends that you choose a repository location for each project root—the topmost directory that contains data related to that project—and then create three subdirectories beneath that root: trunk, meaning the directory under which the main project development occurs; branches, which is a directory in which to create various named branches of the main development line; and tags, which is a collection of tree snapshots that are created, and perhaps destroyed, but never changed.[32]

举个例子,你的版本库可能如下布局:

/
   calc/
      trunk/
      tags/
      branches/
   calendar/
      trunk/
      tags/
      branches/
   spreadsheet/
      trunk/
      tags/
      branches/
   …

Note that it doesn't matter where in your repository each project root is. If you have only one project per repository, the logical place to put each project root is at the root of that project's respective repository. If you have multiple projects, you might want to arrange them in groups inside the repository, perhaps putting projects with similar goals or shared code in the same subdirectory, or maybe just grouping them alphabetically. Such an arrangement might look like this:

/
   utils/
      calc/
         trunk/
         tags/
         branches/
      calendar/
         trunk/
         tags/
         branches/
      …
   office/
      spreadsheet/
         trunk/
         tags/
         branches/
      …

Lay out your repository in whatever way you see fit. Subversion does not expect or enforce a particular layout—in its eyes, a directory is a directory is a directory. Ultimately, you should choose the repository arrangement that meets the needs of the people who work on the projects that live there.

In the name of full disclosure, though, we'll mention another very common layout. In this layout, the trunk, tags, and branches directories live in the root directory of your repository, and your projects are in subdirectories beneath those, like so:

/
   trunk/
      calc/
      calendar/
      spreadsheet/
      …
   tags/
      calc/
      calendar/
      spreadsheet/
      …
   branches/
      calc/
      calendar/
      spreadsheet/
      …

There's nothing particularly incorrect about such a layout, but it may or may not seem as intuitive for your users. Especially in large, multiproject situations with many users, those users may tend to be familiar with only one or two of the projects in the repository. But the projects-as-branch-siblings approach tends to deemphasize project individuality and focus on the entire set of projects as a single entity. That's a social issue, though. We like our originally suggested arrangement for purely practical reasons—it's easier to ask about (or modify, or migrate elsewhere) the entire history of a single project when there's a single repository path that holds the entire history—past, present, tagged, and branched—for that project and that project alone.

2.2. 决定在哪里与如何部署你的版本库

Before creating your Subversion repository, an obvious question you'll need to answer is where the thing is going to live. This is strongly connected to myriad other questions involving how the repository will be accessed (via a Subversion server or directly), by whom (users behind your corporate firewall or the whole world out on the open Internet), what other services you'll be providing around Subversion (repository browsing interfaces, email-based commit notification, etc.), your data backup strategy, and so on.

We cover server choice and configuration in 第 6 章 服务配置, but the point we'd like to briefly make here is simply that the answers to some of these other questions might have implications that force your hand when deciding where your repository will live. For example, certain deployment scenarios might require accessing the repository via a remote filesystem from multiple computers, in which case (as you'll read in the next section) your choice of a repository backend data store turns out not to be a choice at all because only one of the available backends will work in this scenario.

Addressing each possible way to deploy Subversion is both impossible and outside the scope of this book. We simply encourage you to evaluate your options using these pages and other sources as your reference material and to plan ahead.

2.3. 选择数据存储格式

Subversion provides two options for the type of underlying data store—often referred to as the backend or, somewhat confusingly, the (versioned) filesystem—that each repository uses. One type of data store keeps everything in a Berkeley DB (or BDB) database environment; repositories that use this type are often referred to as being BDB-backed. The other type stores data in ordinary flat files, using a custom format. Subversion developers have adopted the habit of referring to this latter data storage mechanism as FSFS[33]—a versioned filesystem implementation that uses the native OS filesystem directly—rather than via a database library or some other abstraction layer—to store data.

表 5.1 “版本库数据存储对照表” gives a comparative overview of Berkeley DB and FSFS repositories.

表 5.1. 版本库数据存储对照表

分类特性Berkeley DBFSFS
可靠性数据完整性当正确部署时非常可靠;Berkeley DB 4.4 支持自动恢复较老的版本有较少被证实的数据毁坏 bug
对操作中断的敏感Very; crashes and permission problems can leave the database wedged, requiring journaled recovery procedures十分迟钝
可用性可只读加载
存储平台无关
可从网络文件系统访问通常,不
组访问权处理对于用户的 umask 设置十分敏感;最好只由一个用户访问umask 问题的解决方案
伸缩性版本库磁盘使用情况较大(特别是没有清除日志时)较小
修订版本树的数量数据库;没有问题Some older native filesystems don't scale well with thousands of entries in a single directory
有很多文件的目录较慢较快
性能检出最新的代码没有任何有意义的差异没有任何有意义的差异
大的提交整体较慢,但是在整个提交周期中消耗被分摊较快,但是最后较长的延时可能会导致客户端操作超时


There are advantages and disadvantages to each of these two backend types. Neither of them is more official than the other, though the newer FSFS is the default data store as of Subversion 1.2. Both are reliable enough to trust with your versioned data. But as you can see in 表 5.1 “版本库数据存储对照表”, the FSFS backend provides quite a bit more flexibility in terms of its supported deployment scenarios. More flexibility means you have to work a little harder to find ways to deploy it incorrectly. Those reasons—plus the fact that not using Berkeley DB means there's one fewer component in the system—largely explain why today almost everyone uses the FSFS backend when creating new repositories.

Fortunately, most programs that access Subversion repositories are blissfully ignorant of which backend data store is in use. And you aren't even necessarily stuck with your first choice of a data store—in the event that you change your mind later, Subversion provides ways of migrating your repository's data into another repository that uses a different backend data store. We talk more about that later in this chapter.

下面的小节提供了数据存储类型更加详细的介绍。

2.3.1. Berkeley DB

When the initial design phase of Subversion was in progress, the developers decided to use Berkeley DB for a variety of reasons, including its open source license, transaction support, reliability, performance, API simplicity, thread safety, support for cursors, and so on.

Berkeley DB provides real transaction support—perhaps its most powerful feature. Multiple processes accessing your Subversion repositories don't have to worry about accidentally clobbering each other's data. The isolation provided by the transaction system is such that for any given operation, the Subversion repository code sees a static view of the database—not a database that is constantly changing at the hand of some other process—and can make decisions based on that view. If the decision made happens to conflict with what another process is doing, the entire operation is rolled back as though it never happened, and Subversion gracefully retries the operation against a new, updated (and yet still static) view of the database.

Another great feature of Berkeley DB is hot backups—the ability to back up the database environment without taking it offline. We'll discuss how to back up your repository later in this chapter (in 第 4.8 节 “版本库备份”), but the benefits of being able to make fully functional copies of your repositories without any downtime should be obvious.

Berkeley DB is also a very reliable database system when properly used. Subversion uses Berkeley DB's logging facilities, which means that the database first writes to on-disk logfiles a description of any modifications it is about to make, and then makes the modification itself. This is to ensure that if anything goes wrong, the database system can back up to a previous checkpoint—a location in the logfiles known not to be corrupt—and replay transactions until the data is restored to a usable state. See 第 4.3 节 “管理磁盘空间” later in this chapter for more about Berkeley DB logfiles.

But every rose has its thorn, and so we must note some known limitations of Berkeley DB. First, Berkeley DB environments are not portable. You cannot simply copy a Subversion repository that was created on a Unix system onto a Windows system and expect it to work. While much of the Berkeley DB database format is architecture-independent, other aspects of the environment are not. Second, Subversion uses Berkeley DB in a way that will not operate on Windows 95/98 systems—if you need to house a BDB-backed repository on a Windows machine, stick with Windows 2000 or later.

While Berkeley DB promises to behave correctly on network shares that meet a particular set of specifications,[34] most networked filesystem types and appliances do not actually meet those requirements. And in no case can you allow a BDB-backed repository that resides on a network share to be accessed by multiple clients of that share at once (which quite often is the whole point of having the repository live on a network share in the first place).

[警告]警告

If you attempt to use Berkeley DB on a noncompliant remote filesystem, the results are unpredictable—you may see mysterious errors right away, or it may be months before you discover that your repository database is subtly corrupted. You should strongly consider using the FSFS data store for repositories that need to live on a network share.

Finally, because Berkeley DB is a library linked directly into Subversion, it's more sensitive to interruptions than a typical relational database system. Most SQL systems, for example, have a dedicated server process that mediates all access to tables. If a program accessing the database crashes for some reason, the database daemon notices the lost connection and cleans up any mess left behind. And because the database daemon is the only process accessing the tables, applications don't need to worry about permission conflicts. These things are not the case with Berkeley DB, however. Subversion (and programs using Subversion libraries) access the database tables directly, which means that a program crash can leave the database in a temporarily inconsistent, inaccessible state. When this happens, an administrator needs to ask Berkeley DB to restore to a checkpoint, which is a bit of an annoyance. Other things can cause a repository to wedge besides crashed processes, such as programs conflicting over ownership and permissions on the database files.

[注意]注意

Berkeley DB 4.4 brings (to Subversion 1.4 and later) the ability for Subversion to automatically and transparently recover Berkeley DB environments in need of such recovery. When a Subversion process attaches to a repository's Berkeley DB environment, it uses some process accounting mechanisms to detect any unclean disconnections by previous processes, performs any necessary recovery, and then continues on as though nothing happened. This doesn't completely eliminate instances of repository wedging, but it does drastically reduce the amount of human interaction required to recover from them.

So while a Berkeley DB repository is quite fast and scalable, it's best used by a single server process running as one user—such as Apache's httpd or svnserve (see 第 6 章 服务配置)—rather than accessing it as many different users via file:// or svn+ssh:// URLs. If you're accessing a Berkeley DB repository directly as multiple users, be sure to read 第 7 节 “支持多种版本库访问方法” later in this chapter.

2.3.2. FSFS

In mid-2004, a second type of repository storage system—one that doesn't use a database at all—came into being. An FSFS repository stores the changes associated with a revision in a single file, and so all of a repository's revisions can be found in a single subdirectory full of numbered files. Transactions are created in separate subdirectories as individual files. When complete, the transaction file is renamed and moved into the revisions directory, thus guaranteeing that commits are atomic. And because a revision file is permanent and unchanging, the repository also can be backed up while hot, just like a BDB-backed repository.

The FSFS revision files describe a revision's directory structure, file contents, and deltas against files in other revision trees. Unlike a Berkeley DB database, this storage format is portable across different operating systems and isn't sensitive to CPU architecture. Because no journaling or shared-memory files are being used, the repository can be safely accessed over a network filesystem and examined in a read-only environment. The lack of database overhead also means the overall repository size is a bit smaller.

FSFS has different performance characteristics, too. When committing a directory with a huge number of files, FSFS is able to more quickly append directory entries. On the other hand, FSFS has a longer delay when finalizing a commit while it performs tasks that the BDB backend amortizes across the lifetime of the commit, which could in extreme cases cause clients to time out while waiting for a response.

The most important distinction, however, is FSFS's imperviousness to wedging when something goes wrong. If a process using a Berkeley DB database runs into a permissions problem or suddenly crashes, the database can be left in an unusable state until an administrator recovers it. If the same scenarios happen to a process using an FSFS repository, the repository isn't affected at all. At worst, some transaction data is left behind.

3. 创建和配置你的版本库

Earlier in this chapter (in 第 2 节 “版本库开发策略”), we looked at some of the important decisions that should be made before creating and configuring your Subversion repository. Now, we finally get to get our hands dirty! In this section, we'll see how to actually create a Subversion repository and configure it to perform custom actions when special repository events occur.

3.1. 创建版本库

Subversion repository creation is an incredibly simple task. The svnadmin utility that comes with Subversion provides a subcommand (svnadmin create) for doing just that.

$ # Create a repository
$ svnadmin create /var/svn/repos
$

Assuming that the parent directory /var/svn exists and that you have sufficient permissions to modify that directory, the previous command creates a new repository in the directory /var/svn/repos, and with the default filesystem data store (FSFS). You can explicitly choose the filesystem type using the --fs-type argument, which accepts as a parameter either fsfs or bdb.

$ # Create an FSFS-backed repository
$ svnadmin create --fs-type fsfs /var/svn/repos
$
# Create a Berkeley-DB-backed repository
$ svnadmin create --fs-type bdb /var/svn/repos
$

After running this simple command, you have a Subversion repository. Depending on how users will access this new repository, you might need to fiddle with its filesystem permissions. But since basic system administration is rather outside the scope of this text, we'll leave further exploration of that topic as an exercise to the reader.

[提示]提示

The path argument to svnadmin is just a regular filesystem path and not a URL like the svn client program uses when referring to repositories. Both svnadmin and svnlook are considered server-side utilities—they are used on the machine where the repository resides to examine or modify aspects of the repository, and are in fact unable to perform tasks across a network. A common mistake made by Subversion newcomers is trying to pass URLs (even local file:// ones) to these two programs.

Present in the db/ subdirectory of your repository is the implementation of the versioned filesystem. Your new repository's versioned filesystem begins life at revision 0, which is defined to consist of nothing but the top-level root (/) directory. Initially, revision 0 also has a single revision property, svn:date, set to the time at which the repository was created.

现在你有了一个版本库,可以用户化了。

[警告]警告

While some parts of a Subversion repository—such as the configuration files and hook scripts—are meant to be examined and modified manually, you shouldn't (and shouldn't need to) tamper with the other parts of the repository by hand. The svnadmin tool should be sufficient for any changes necessary to your repository, or you can look to third-party tools (such as Berkeley DB's tool suite) for tweaking relevant subsections of the repository. Do not attempt manual manipulation of your version control history by poking and prodding around in your repository's data store files!

3.2. 实现版本库钩子

A hook is a program triggered by some repository event, such as the creation of a new revision or the modification of an unversioned property. Some hooks (the so-called pre hooks) run in advance of a repository operation and provide a means by which to both report what is about to happen and prevent it from happening at all. Other hooks (the post hooks) run after the completion of a repository event and are useful for performing tasks that examine—but don't modify—the repository. Each hook is handed enough information to tell what that event is (or was), the specific repository changes proposed (or completed), and the username of the person who triggered the event.

默认情况下,hooks子目录中包含各种版本库钩子模板。

$ ls repos/hooks/
post-commit.tmpl          post-unlock.tmpl  pre-revprop-change.tmpl
post-lock.tmpl            pre-commit.tmpl   pre-unlock.tmpl
post-revprop-change.tmpl  pre-lock.tmpl     start-commit.tmpl
$

There is one template for each hook that the Subversion repository supports; by examining the contents of those template scripts, you can see what triggers each script to run and what data is passed to that script. Also present in many of these templates are examples of how one might use that script, in conjunction with other Subversion-supplied programs, to perform common useful tasks. To actually install a working hook, you need only place some executable program or script into the repos/hooks directory, which can be executed as the name (such as start-commit or post-commit) of the hook.

On Unix platforms, this means supplying a script or program (which could be a shell script, a Python program, a compiled C binary, or any number of other things) named exactly like the name of the hook. Of course, the template files are present for more than just informational purposes—the easiest way to install a hook on Unix platforms is to simply copy the appropriate template file to a new file that lacks the .tmpl extension, customize the hook's contents, and ensure that the script is executable. Windows, however, uses file extensions to determine whether a program is executable, so you would need to supply a program whose basename is the name of the hook and whose extension is one of the special extensions recognized by Windows for executable programs, such as .exe for programs and .bat for batch files.

[提示]提示

For security reasons, the Subversion repository executes hook programs with an empty environment—that is, no environment variables are set at all, not even $PATH (or %PATH%, under Windows). Because of this, many administrators are baffled when their hook program runs fine by hand, but doesn't work when run by Subversion. Be sure to explicitly set any necessary environment variables in your hook program and/or use absolute paths to programs.

Subversion executes hooks as the same user who owns the process that is accessing the Subversion repository. In most cases, the repository is being accessed via a Subversion server, so this user is the same user as whom the server runs on the system. The hooks themselves will need to be configured with OS-level permissions that allow that user to execute them. Also, this means that any programs or files (including the Subversion repository) accessed directly or indirectly by the hook will be accessed as the same user. In other words, be alert to potential permission-related problems that could prevent the hook from performing the tasks it is designed to perform.

There are several hooks implemented by the Subversion repository, and you can get details about each of them in 第 11 节 “版本库钩子”. As a repository administrator, you'll need to decide which hooks you wish to implement (by way of providing an appropriately named and permissioned hook program), and how. When you make this decision, keep in mind the big picture of how your repository is deployed. For example, if you are using server configuration to determine which users are permitted to commit changes to your repository, you don't need to do this sort of access control via the hook system.

There is no shortage of Subversion hook programs and scripts that are freely available either from the Subversion community itself or elsewhere. These scripts cover a wide range of utility—basic access control, policy adherence checking, issue tracker integration, email- or syndication-based commit notification, and beyond. Or, if you wish to write your own, see 第 8 章 嵌入 Subversion.

[警告]警告

While hook scripts can do almost anything, there is one dimension in which hook script authors should show restraint: do not modify a commit transaction using hook scripts. While it might be tempting to use hook scripts to automatically correct errors, shortcomings, or policy violations present in the files being committed, doing so can cause problems. Subversion keeps client-side caches of certain bits of repository data, and if you change a commit transaction in this way, those caches become indetectably stale. This inconsistency can lead to surprising and unexpected behavior. Instead of modifying the transaction, you should simply validate the transaction in the pre-commit hook and reject the commit if it does not meet the desired requirements. As a bonus, your users will learn the value of careful, compliance-minded work habits.

3.3. Berkeley DB 配置

A Berkeley DB environment is an encapsulation of one or more databases, logfiles, region files, and configuration files. The Berkeley DB environment has its own set of default configuration values for things such as the number of database locks allowed to be taken out at any given time, the maximum size of the journaling logfiles, and so on. Subversion's filesystem logic additionally chooses default values for some of the Berkeley DB configuration options. However, sometimes your particular repository, with its unique collection of data and access patterns, might require a different set of configuration option values.

The producers of Berkeley DB understand that different applications and database environments have different requirements, so they have provided a mechanism for overriding at runtime many of the configuration values for the Berkeley DB environment. BDB checks for the presence of a file named DB_CONFIG in the environment directory (namely, the repository's db subdirectory), and parses the options found in that file. Subversion itself creates this file when it creates the rest of the repository. The file initially contains some default options, as well as pointers to the Berkeley DB online documentation so that you can read about what those options do. Of course, you are free to add any of the supported Berkeley DB options to your DB_CONFIG file. Just be aware that while Subversion never attempts to read or interpret the contents of the file and makes no direct use of the option settings in it, you'll want to avoid any configuration changes that may cause Berkeley DB to behave in a fashion that is at odds with what Subversion might expect. Also, changes made to DB_CONFIG won't take effect until you recover the database environment (using svnadmin recover).

3.4. FSFS 配置

As of Subversion 1.6, FSFS filesystems have several configurable parameters which an administrator can use to fine-tune the performance or disk usage of their repositories. You can find these options—and the documentation for them—in the db/fsfs.conf file in the repository.

4. 版本库维护

Maintaining a Subversion repository can be daunting, mostly due to the complexities inherent in systems that have a database backend. Doing the task well is all about knowing the tools—what they are, when to use them, and how. This section will introduce you to the repository administration tools provided by Subversion and discuss how to wield them to accomplish tasks such as repository data migration, upgrades, backups, and cleanups.

4.1. 管理员的工具箱

Subversion provides a handful of utilities useful for creating, inspecting, modifying, and repairing your repository. Let's look more closely at each of those tools. Afterward, we'll briefly examine some of the utilities included in the Berkeley DB distribution that provide functionality specific to your repository's database backend not otherwise provided by Subversion's own tools.

4.1.1. svnadmin

The svnadmin program is the repository administrator's best friend. Besides providing the ability to create Subversion repositories, this program allows you to perform several maintenance operations on those repositories. The syntax of svnadmin is similar to that of other Subversion command-line programs:

$ svnadmin help
general usage: svnadmin SUBCOMMAND REPOS_PATH  [ARGS & OPTIONS ...]
Type 'svnadmin help <subcommand>' for help on a specific subcommand.
Type 'svnadmin --version' to see the program version and FS modules.

Available subcommands:
   crashtest
   create
   deltify
…

Previously in this chapter (in 第 3.1 节 “创建版本库”), we were introduced to the svnadmin create subcommand. Most of the other svnadmin subcommands we will cover later in this chapter. And you can consult 第 2 节 “svnadmin—Subversion Repository Administration” for a full rundown of subcommands and what each of them offers.

4.1.2. svnlook

svnlook is a tool provided by Subversion for examining the various revisions and transactions (which are revisions in the making) in a repository. No part of this program attempts to change the repository. svnlook is typically used by the repository hooks for reporting the changes that are about to be committed (in the case of the pre-commit hook) or that were just committed (in the case of the post-commit hook) to the repository. A repository administrator may use this tool for diagnostic purposes.

svnlook的语法很直接:

$ svnlook help
general usage: svnlook SUBCOMMAND REPOS_PATH [ARGS & OPTIONS ...]
Note: any subcommand which takes the '--revision' and '--transaction'
      options will, if invoked without one of those options, act on
      the repository's youngest revision.
Type 'svnlook help <subcommand>' for help on a specific subcommand.
Type 'svnlook --version' to see the program version and FS modules.
…

Most of svnlook's subcommands can operate on either a revision or a transaction tree, printing information about the tree itself, or how it differs from the previous revision of the repository. You use the --revision (-r) and --transaction (-t) options to specify which revision or transaction, respectively, to examine. In the absence of both the --revision (-r) and --transaction (-t) options, svnlook will examine the youngest (or HEAD) revision in the repository. So the following two commands do exactly the same thing when 19 is the youngest revision in the repository located at /var/svn/repos:

$ svnlook info /var/svn/repos
$ svnlook info /var/svn/repos -r 19

这些子命令的唯一例外是svnlook youngest,它不需要任何选项,只会打印出版本库的最新修订版本号:

$ svnlook youngest /var/svn/repos
19
$
[注意]注意

Keep in mind that the only transactions you can browse are uncommitted ones. Most repositories will have no such transactions because transactions are usually either committed (in which case, you should access them as revision with the --revision (-r) option) or aborted and removed.

Output from svnlook is designed to be both human- and machine-parsable. Take, as an example, the output of the svnlook info subcommand:

$ svnlook info /var/svn/repos
sally
2002-11-04 09:29:13 -0600 (Mon, 04 Nov 2002)
27
Added the usual
Greek tree.
$

svnlook info的输出包含如下的内容,按照给定的顺序:

  1. 作者,后接换行

  2. 日期,后接换行

  3. 日志消息的字数,后接换行

  4. 日志信息本身, 后接换行

This output is human-readable, meaning items such as the datestamp are displayed using a textual representation instead of something more obscure (such as the number of nanoseconds since the Tastee Freez guy drove by). But the output is also machine-parsable—because the log message can contain multiple lines and be unbounded in length, svnlook provides the length of that message before the message itself. This allows scripts and other wrappers around this command to make intelligent decisions about the log message, such as how much memory to allocate for the message, or at least how many bytes to skip in the event that this output is not the last bit of data in the stream.

svnlook can perform a variety of other queries: displaying subsets of bits of information we've mentioned previously, recursively listing versioned directory trees, reporting which paths were modified in a given revision or transaction, showing textual and property differences made to files and directories, and so on. See 第 3 节 “svnlook—Subversion Repository Examination” for a full reference of svnlook's features.

4.1.3. svndumpfilter

While it won't be the most commonly used tool at the administrator's disposal, svndumpfilter provides a very particular brand of useful functionality—the ability to quickly and easily modify streams of Subversion repository history data by acting as a path-based filter.

svndumpfilter的语法如下:

$ svndumpfilter help
general usage: svndumpfilter SUBCOMMAND [ARGS & OPTIONS ...]
Type 'svndumpfilter help <subcommand>' for help on a specific subcommand.
Type 'svndumpfilter --version' to see the program version.
  
Available subcommands:
   exclude
   include
   help (?, h)

There are only two interesting subcommands: svndumpfilter exclude and svndumpfilter include. They allow you to make the choice between implicit or explicit inclusion of paths in the stream. You can learn more about these subcommands and svndumpfilter's unique purpose later in this chapter, in 第 4.6 节 “过滤版本库历史”.

4.1.4. svnsync

The svnsync program provides all the functionality required for maintaining a read-only mirror of a Subversion repository. The program really has one job—to transfer one repository's versioned history into another repository. And while there are few ways to do that, its primary strength is that it can operate remotely—the source and sink[35] repositories may be on different computers from each other and from svnsync itself.

就像你期望的,svnsync的语法与本节提到的其他命令非常类似。

$ svnsync help
general usage: svnsync SUBCOMMAND DEST_URL  [ARGS & OPTIONS ...]
Type 'svnsync help <subcommand>' for help on a specific subcommand.
Type 'svnsync --version' to see the program version and RA modules.

Available subcommands:
   initialize (init)
   synchronize (sync)
   copy-revprops
   info
   help (?, h)
$

We talk more about replicating repositories with svnsync later in this chapter (see 第 4.7 节 “版本库复制”).

4.1.5. fsfs-reshard.py

While not an official member of the Subversion toolchain, the fsfs-reshard.py script (found in the tools/server-side directory of the Subversion source distribution) is a useful performance tuning tool for administrators of FSFS-backed Subversion repositories. As described in the sidebar 版本文件与碎片, FSFS repositories use individual files to house information about each revision. Sometimes these files all live in a single directory; sometimes they are sharded across many directories. But the neat thing is that the number of directories used to house these files is configurable. That's where fsfs-reshard.py comes in.

fsfs-reshard.py reshuffles the repository's file structure into a new arrangement that reflects the requested number of sharding subdirectories and updates the repository configuration to preserve this change. When used in conjunction with the svnadmin upgrade command, this is especially useful for upgrading a pre-1.5 Subversion (unsharded) repository to the latest filesystem format and sharding its data files (which Subversion will not automatically do for you). This script can also be used for fine-tuning an already sharded repository.

4.1.6. Berkeley DB 工具

If you're using a Berkeley DB repository, all of your versioned filesystem's structure and data live in a set of database tables within the db/ subdirectory of your repository. This subdirectory is a regular Berkeley DB environment directory and can therefore be used in conjunction with any of the Berkeley database tools, typically provided as part of the Berkeley DB distribution.

For day-to-day Subversion use, these tools are unnecessary. Most of the functionality typically needed for Subversion repositories has been duplicated in the svnadmin tool. For example, svnadmin list-unused-dblogs and svnadmin list-dblogs perform a subset of what is provided by the Berkeley db_archive utility, and svnadmin recover reflects the common use cases of the db_recover utility.

However, there are still a few Berkeley DB utilities that you might find useful. The db_dump and db_load programs write and read, respectively, a custom file format that describes the keys and values in a Berkeley DB database. Since Berkeley databases are not portable across machine architectures, this format is a useful way to transfer those databases from machine to machine, irrespective of architecture or operating system. As we describe later in this chapter, you can also use svnadmin dump and svnadmin load for similar purposes, but db_dump and db_load can do certain jobs just as well and much faster. They can also be useful if the experienced Berkeley DB hacker needs to do in-place tweaking of the data in a BDB-backed repository for some reason, which is something Subversion's utilities won't allow. Also, the db_stat utility can provide useful information about the status of your Berkeley DB environment, including detailed statistics about the locking and storage subsystems.

For more information on the Berkeley DB tool chain, visit the documentation section of the Berkeley DB section of Oracle's web site, located at http://www.oracle.com/technology/documentation/berkeley-db/db/.

4.2. 修正提交消息

Sometimes a user will have an error in her log message (a misspelling or some misinformation, perhaps). If the repository is configured (using the pre-revprop-change hook; see 第 3.2 节 “实现版本库钩子”) to accept changes to this log message after the commit is finished, the user can fix her log message remotely using svn propset (see svn propset (pset, ps)). However, because of the potential to lose information forever, Subversion repositories are not, by default, configured to allow changes to unversioned properties—except by an administrator.

If a log message needs to be changed by an administrator, this can be done using svnadmin setlog. This command changes the log message (the svn:log property) on a given revision of a repository, reading the new value from a provided file.

$ echo "Here is the new, correct log message" > newlog.txt
$ svnadmin setlog myrepos newlog.txt -r 388

The svnadmin setlog command, by default, is still bound by the same protections against modifying unversioned properties as a remote client is—the pre-revprop-change and post-revprop-change hooks are still triggered, and therefore must be set up to accept changes of this nature. But an administrator can get around these protections by passing the --bypass-hooks option to the svnadmin setlog command.

[警告]警告

Remember, though, that by bypassing the hooks, you are likely avoiding such things as email notifications of property changes, backup systems that track unversioned property changes, and so on. In other words, be very careful about what you are changing, and how you change it.

4.3. 管理磁盘空间

While the cost of storage has dropped incredibly in the past few years, disk usage is still a valid concern for administrators seeking to version large amounts of data. Every bit of version history information stored in the live repository needs to be backed up elsewhere, perhaps multiple times as part of rotating backup schedules. It is useful to know what pieces of Subversion's repository data need to remain on the live site, which need to be backed up, and which can be safely removed.

4.3.1. 让 Subversion 节约磁盘空间

To keep the repository small, Subversion uses deltification (or delta-based storage) within the repository itself. Deltification involves encoding the representation of a chunk of data as a collection of differences against some other chunk of data. If the two pieces of data are very similar, this deltification results in storage savings for the deltified chunk—rather than taking up space equal to the size of the original data, it takes up only enough space to say, I look just like this other piece of data over here, except for the following couple of changes. The result is that most of the repository data that tends to be bulky—namely, the contents of versioned files—is stored at a much smaller size than the original full-text representation of that data.

While deltified storage has been a part of Subversion's design since the very beginning, there have been additional improvements made over the years. Subversion repositories created with Subversion 1.4 or later benefit from compression of the full-text representations of file contents. Repositories created with Subversion 1.6 or later further enjoy the disk space savings afforded by representation sharing, a feature which allows multiple files or file revisions with identical file content to refer to a single shared instance of that data rather than each having their own distinct copy thereof.

[注意]注意

Because all of the data that is subject to deltification in a BDB-backed repository is stored in a single Berkeley DB database file, reducing the size of the stored values will not immediately reduce the size of the database file itself. Berkeley DB will, however, keep internal records of unused areas of the database file and consume those areas first before growing the size of the database file. So while deltification doesn't produce immediate space savings, it can drastically slow future growth of the database.

4.3.2. 删除终止的事务

Though they are uncommon, there are circumstances in which a Subversion commit process might fail, leaving behind in the repository the remnants of the revision-to-be that wasn't—an uncommitted transaction and all the file and directory changes associated with it. This could happen for several reasons: perhaps the client operation was inelegantly terminated by the user, or a network failure occurred in the middle of an operation. Regardless of the reason, dead transactions can happen. They don't do any real harm, other than consuming disk space. A fastidious administrator may nonetheless wish to remove them.

可以使用svnadmin lstxns命令列出当前的事务名。

$ svnadmin lstxns myrepos
19
3a1
a45
$

Each item in the resultant output can then be used with svnlook (and its --transaction (-t) option) to determine who created the transaction, when it was created, what types of changes were made in the transaction—information that is helpful in determining whether the transaction is a safe candidate for removal! If you do indeed want to remove a transaction, its name can be passed to svnadmin rmtxns, which will perform the cleanup of the transaction. In fact, svnadmin rmtxns can take its input directly from the output of svnadmin lstxns!

$ svnadmin rmtxns myrepos `svnadmin lstxns myrepos`
$

If you use these two subcommands like this, you should consider making your repository temporarily inaccessible to clients. That way, no one can begin a legitimate transaction before you start your cleanup. 例 5.1 “txn-info.sh (报告异常事务)” contains a bit of shell-scripting that can quickly generate information about each outstanding transaction in your repository.

例 5.1. txn-info.sh (报告异常事务)

#!/bin/sh

### Generate informational output for all outstanding transactions in
### a Subversion repository.

REPOS="${1}"
if [ "x$REPOS" = x ] ; then
  echo "usage: $0 REPOS_PATH"
  exit
fi

for TXN in `svnadmin lstxns ${REPOS}`; do 
  echo "---[ Transaction ${TXN} ]-------------------------------------------"
  svnlook info "${REPOS}" -t "${TXN}"
done


The output of the script is basically a concatenation of several chunks of svnlook info output (see 第 4.1.2 节 “svnlook”) and will look something like this:

$ txn-info.sh myrepos
---[ Transaction 19 ]-------------------------------------------
sally
2001-09-04 11:57:19 -0500 (Tue, 04 Sep 2001)
0
---[ Transaction 3a1 ]-------------------------------------------
harry
2001-09-10 16:50:30 -0500 (Mon, 10 Sep 2001)
39
Trying to commit over a faulty network.
---[ Transaction a45 ]-------------------------------------------
sally
2001-09-12 11:09:28 -0500 (Wed, 12 Sep 2001)
0
$

A long-abandoned transaction usually represents some sort of failed or interrupted commit. A transaction's datestamp can provide interesting information—for example, how likely is it that an operation begun nine months ago is still active?

In short, transaction cleanup decisions need not be made unwisely. Various sources of information—including Apache's error and access logs, Subversion's operational logs, Subversion revision history, and so on—can be employed in the decision-making process. And of course, an administrator can often simply communicate with a seemingly dead transaction's owner (via email, e.g.) to verify that the transaction is, in fact, in a zombie state.

4.3.3. 删除不使用的 Berkeley DB 日志文件

Until recently, the largest offender of disk space usage with respect to BDB-backed Subversion repositories were the logfiles in which Berkeley DB performs its prewrites before modifying the actual database files. These files capture all the actions taken along the route of changing the database from one state to another—while the database files, at any given time, reflect a particular state, the logfiles contain all of the many changes along the way between states. Thus, they can grow and accumulate quite rapidly.

Fortunately, beginning with the 4.2 release of Berkeley DB, the database environment has the ability to remove its own unused logfiles automatically. Any repositories created using svnadmin when compiled against Berkeley DB version 4.2 or later will be configured for this automatic logfile removal. If you don't want this feature enabled, simply pass the --bdb-log-keep option to the svnadmin create command. If you forget to do this or change your mind at a later time, simply edit the DB_CONFIG file found in your repository's db directory, comment out the line that contains the set_flags DB_LOG_AUTOREMOVE directive, and then run svnadmin recover on your repository to force the configuration changes to take effect. See 第 3.3 节 “Berkeley DB 配置” for more information about database configuration.

Without some sort of automatic logfile removal in place, logfiles will accumulate as you use your repository. This is actually somewhat of a feature of the database system—you should be able to recreate your entire database using nothing but the logfiles, so these files can be useful for catastrophic database recovery. But typically, you'll want to archive the logfiles that are no longer in use by Berkeley DB, and then remove them from disk to conserve space. Use the svnadmin list-unused-dblogs command to list the unused logfiles:

$ svnadmin list-unused-dblogs /var/svn/repos
/var/svn/repos/log.0000000031
/var/svn/repos/log.0000000032
/var/svn/repos/log.0000000033
…
$ rm `svnadmin list-unused-dblogs /var/svn/repos`
## disk space reclaimed!
[警告]警告

BDB-backed repositories whose logfiles are used as part of a backup or disaster recovery plan should not make use of the logfile autoremoval feature. Reconstruction of a repository's data from logfiles can only be accomplished only when all the logfiles are available. If some of the logfiles are removed from disk before the backup system has a chance to copy them elsewhere, the incomplete set of backed-up logfiles is essentially useless.

4.3.4. 打包 FSFS 文件系统

As described in the sidebar 版本文件与碎片, FSFS-backed Subversion repositories create, by default, a new on-disk file for each revision added to the repository. Having thousands of these files present on your Subversion server—even when housed in separate shard directories—can lead to inefficiencies.

The first problem is that the operating system has to reference many different files over a short period of time. This leads to inefficient use of disk caches and, as a result, more time spent seeking across large disks. Because of this, Subversion pays a performance penalty when accessing your versioned data.

The second problem is a bit more subtle. Because of the ways that most filesystems allocate disk space, each file claims more space on the disk than it actually uses. The amount of extra space required to house a single file can average anywhere from 2 to 16 kilobytes per file, depending on the underlying filesystem in use. This translates directly into a per-revision disk usage penalty for FSFS-backed repositories. The effect is most pronounced in repositories which have many small revisions, since the overhead involved in storing the revision file quickly outgrows the size of the actual data being stored.

To solve these problems, Subversion 1.6 introduced the svnadmin pack command. By concatenating all the files of a completed shard into a single pack file and then removing the original per-revision files, svnadmin pack reduces the file count within a given shard down to just a single file. In doing so, it aids filesystem caches and reduces (to one) the number of times a file storage overhead penalty is paid.

Subversion can pack existing sharded repositories which have been upgraded to the 1.6 filesystem format (see svnadmin upgrade). To do so, just run svnadmin pack on the repository:

$ svnadmin pack /var/svn/repos
Packing shard 0...done.
Packing shard 1...done.
Packing shard 2...done.
…
Packing shard 34...done.
Packing shard 35...done.
Packing shard 36...done.
$

Because the packing process obtains the required locks before doing its work, you can run it on live repositories, or even as part of a post-commit hook. Repacking packed shards is legal, but will have no effect on the disk usage of the repository.

svnadmin pack has no effect on BDB-backed Subversion repositories.

4.4. Berkeley DB 恢复

As mentioned in 第 2.3.1 节 “Berkeley DB”, a Berkeley DB repository can sometimes be left in a frozen state if not closed properly. When this happens, an administrator needs to rewind the database back into a consistent state. This is unique to BDB-backed repositories, though—if you are using FSFS-backed ones instead, this won't apply to you. And for those of you using Subversion 1.4 with Berkeley DB 4.4 or later, you should find that Subversion has become much more resilient in these types of situations. Still, wedged Berkeley DB repositories do occur, and an administrator needs to know how to safely deal with this circumstance.

To protect the data in your repository, Berkeley DB uses a locking mechanism. This mechanism ensures that portions of the database are not simultaneously modified by multiple database accessors, and that each process sees the data in the correct state when that data is being read from the database. When a process needs to change something in the database, it first checks for the existence of a lock on the target data. If the data is not locked, the process locks the data, makes the change it wants to make, and then unlocks the data. Other processes are forced to wait until that lock is removed before they are permitted to continue accessing that section of the database. (This has nothing to do with the locks that you, as a user, can apply to versioned files within the repository; we try to clear up the confusion caused by this terminology collision in the sidebar 锁定的三种含义.)

In the course of using your Subversion repository, fatal errors or interruptions can prevent a process from having the chance to remove the locks it has placed in the database. The result is that the backend database system gets wedged. When this happens, any attempts to access the repository hang indefinitely (since each new accessor is waiting for a lock to go away—which isn't going to happen).

If this happens to your repository, don't panic. The Berkeley DB filesystem takes advantage of database transactions, checkpoints, and prewrite journaling to ensure that only the most catastrophic of events[36] can permanently destroy a database environment. A sufficiently paranoid repository administrator will have made off-site backups of the repository data in some fashion, but don't head off to the tape backup storage closet just yet.

然后,使用下面的方法试着恢复你的版本库:

  1. Make sure no processes are accessing (or attempting to access) the repository. For networked repositories, this also means shutting down the Apache HTTP Server or svnserve daemon.

  2. Become the user who owns and manages the repository. This is important, as recovering a repository while running as the wrong user can tweak the permissions of the repository's files in such a way that your repository will still be inaccessible even after it is unwedged.

  3. 运行命令 svnadmin recover /var/svn/repos。输出如下:

    Repository lock acquired.
    Please wait; recovering the repository may take some time...
    
    Recovery completed.
    The latest repos revision is 19.
    

    此命令可能需要数分钟才能完成。

  4. 重新启动服务进程。

This procedure fixes almost every case of repository wedging. Make sure that you run this command as the user that owns and manages the database, not just as root. Part of the recovery process might involve re-creating from scratch various database files (shared memory regions, e.g.). Recovering as root will create those files such that they are owned by root, which means that even after you restore connectivity to your repository, regular users will be unable to access it.

If the previous procedure, for some reason, does not successfully unwedge your repository, you should do two things. First, move your broken repository directory aside (perhaps by renaming it to something like repos.BROKEN) and then restore your latest backup of it. Then, send an email to the Subversion users mailing list (at ) describing your problem in detail. Data integrity is an extremely high priority to the Subversion developers.

4.5. 版本库数据的移植

A Subversion filesystem has its data spread throughout files in the repository, in a fashion generally understood by (and of interest to) only the Subversion developers themselves. However, circumstances may arise that call for all, or some subset, of that data to be copied or moved into another repository.

Subversion provides such functionality by way of repository dump streams. A repository dump stream (often referred to as a dump file when stored as a file on disk) is a portable, flat file format that describes the various revisions in your repository—what was changed, by whom, when, and so on. This dump stream is the primary mechanism used to marshal versioned history—in whole or in part, with or without modification—between repositories. And Subversion provides the tools necessary for creating and loading these dump streams: the svnadmin dump and svnadmin load subcommands, respectively.

[警告]警告

While the Subversion repository dump format contains human-readable portions and a familiar structure (it resembles an RFC 822 format, the same type of format used for most email), it is not a plain-text file format. It is a binary file format, highly sensitive to meddling. For example, many text editors will corrupt the file by automatically converting line endings.

有很多导出和加载 Subversion 版本库数据的理由。在 Subversion 的早期阶段,最主要的原因是 Subversion 本身的进化。随着 Subversion 的成熟,对于数据后端方案的改变会导致更多的兼容性问题,所以用户需要使用旧版本的 Subversion 将版本库数据导出,然后用新版的版本库加载内容到新建的版本库。目前,这种类型的方案修改从 Subversion 1.0 版本还没有发生,而且 Subversion 开发者也许诺不会强制用户在小版本(如 1.3 到 1.4)升级之间导入和导出版本库。但是也有一些其它导出和导入的原因,包括重新部署 Berkeley DB 版本库到新的 OS 或 CPU 架构,在 Berkeley DB 和 FSFS 后端之间切换,或者(我们会在第 4.6 节 “过滤版本库历史”覆盖)从版本库历史中清理文件。

[注意]注意

The Subversion repository dump format describes versioned repository changes only. It will not carry any information about uncommitted transactions, user locks on filesystem paths, repository or server configuration customizations (including hook scripts), and so on.

Whatever your reason for migrating repository history, using the svnadmin dump and svnadmin load subcommands is straightforward. svnadmin dump will output a range of repository revisions that are formatted using Subversion's custom filesystem dump format. The dump format is printed to the standard output stream, while informative messages are printed to the standard error stream. This allows you to redirect the output stream to a file while watching the status output in your terminal window. For example:

$ svnlook youngest myrepos
26
$ svnadmin dump myrepos > dumpfile
* Dumped revision 0.
* Dumped revision 1.
* Dumped revision 2.
…
* Dumped revision 25.
* Dumped revision 26.

At the end of the process, you will have a single file (dumpfile in the previous example) that contains all the data stored in your repository in the requested range of revisions. Note that svnadmin dump is reading revision trees from the repository just like any other reader process would (e.g., svn checkout), so it's safe to run this command at any time.

The other subcommand in the pair, svnadmin load, parses the standard input stream as a Subversion repository dump file and effectively replays those dumped revisions into the target repository for that operation. It also gives informative feedback, this time using the standard output stream:

$ svnadmin load newrepos < dumpfile
<<< Started new txn, based on original revision 1
     * adding path : A ... done.
     * adding path : A/B ... done.
     …
------- Committed new rev 1 (loaded from original rev 1) >>>

<<< Started new txn, based on original revision 2
     * editing path : A/mu ... done.
     * editing path : A/D/G/rho ... done.

------- Committed new rev 2 (loaded from original rev 2) >>>

…

<<< Started new txn, based on original revision 25
     * editing path : A/D/gamma ... done.

------- Committed new rev 25 (loaded from original rev 25) >>>

<<< Started new txn, based on original revision 26
     * adding path : A/Z/zeta ... done.
     * editing path : A/mu ... done.

------- Committed new rev 26 (loaded from original rev 26) >>>

The result of a load is new revisions added to a repository—the same thing you get by making commits against that repository from a regular Subversion client. Just as in a commit, you can use hook programs to perform actions before and after each of the commits made during a load process. By passing the --use-pre-commit-hook and --use-post-commit-hook options to svnadmin load, you can instruct Subversion to execute the pre-commit and post-commit hook programs, respectively, for each loaded revision. You might use these, for example, to ensure that loaded revisions pass through the same validation steps that regular commits pass through. Of course, you should use these options with care—if your post-commit hook sends emails to a mailing list for each new commit, you might not want to spew hundreds or thousands of commit emails in rapid succession at that list! You can read more about the use of hook scripts in 第 3.2 节 “实现版本库钩子”.

Note that because svnadmin uses standard input and output streams for the repository dump and load processes, people who are feeling especially saucy can try things such as this (perhaps even using different versions of svnadmin on each side of the pipe):

$ svnadmin create newrepos
$ svnadmin dump oldrepos | svnadmin load newrepos

By default, the dump file will be quite large—much larger than the repository itself. That's because by default every version of every file is expressed as a full text in the dump file. This is the fastest and simplest behavior, and it's nice if you're piping the dump data directly into some other process (such as a compression program, filtering program, or loading process). But if you're creating a dump file for longer-term storage, you'll likely want to save disk space by using the --deltas option. With this option, successive revisions of files will be output as compressed, binary differences—just as file revisions are stored in a repository. This option is slower, but it results in a dump file much closer in size to the original repository.

We mentioned previously that svnadmin dump outputs a range of revisions. Use the --revision (-r) option to specify a single revision, or a range of revisions, to dump. If you omit this option, all the existing repository revisions will be dumped.

$ svnadmin dump myrepos -r 23 > rev-23.dumpfile
$ svnadmin dump myrepos -r 100:200 > revs-100-200.dumpfile

As Subversion dumps each new revision, it outputs only enough information to allow a future loader to re-create that revision based on the previous one. In other words, for any given revision in the dump file, only the items that were changed in that revision will appear in the dump. The only exception to this rule is the first revision that is dumped with the current svnadmin dump command.

By default, Subversion will not express the first dumped revision as merely differences to be applied to the previous revision. For one thing, there is no previous revision in the dump file! And second, Subversion cannot know the state of the repository into which the dump data will be loaded (if it ever is). To ensure that the output of each execution of svnadmin dump is self-sufficient, the first dumped revision is, by default, a full representation of every directory, file, and property in that revision of the repository.

However, you can change this default behavior. If you add the --incremental option when you dump your repository, svnadmin will compare the first dumped revision against the previous revision in the repository—the same way it treats every other revision that gets dumped. It will then output the first revision exactly as it does the rest of the revisions in the dump range—mentioning only the changes that occurred in that revision. The benefit of this is that you can create several small dump files that can be loaded in succession, instead of one large one, like so:

$ svnadmin dump myrepos -r 0:1000 > dumpfile1
$ svnadmin dump myrepos -r 1001:2000 --incremental > dumpfile2
$ svnadmin dump myrepos -r 2001:3000 --incremental > dumpfile3

这些转储文件可以使用下列命令装载到一个新的版本库中:

$ svnadmin load newrepos < dumpfile1
$ svnadmin load newrepos < dumpfile2
$ svnadmin load newrepos < dumpfile3

Another neat trick you can perform with this --incremental option involves appending to an existing dump file a new range of dumped revisions. For example, you might have a post-commit hook that simply appends the repository dump of the single revision that triggered the hook. Or you might have a script that runs nightly to append dump file data for all the revisions that were added to the repository since the last time the script ran. Used like this, svnadmin dump can be one way to back up changes to your repository over time in case of a system crash or some other catastrophic event.

The dump format can also be used to merge the contents of several different repositories into a single repository. By using the --parent-dir option of svnadmin load, you can specify a new virtual root directory for the load process. That means if you have dump files for three repositories—say calc-dumpfile, cal-dumpfile, and ss-dumpfile—you can first create a new repository to hold them all:

$ svnadmin create /var/svn/projects
$

然后在版本库中创建三个目录分别保存来自三个不同版本库的数据:

$ svn mkdir -m "Initial project roots" \
      file:///var/svn/projects/calc \
      file:///var/svn/projects/calendar \
      file:///var/svn/projects/spreadsheet
Committed revision 1.
$ 

最后,将转储文件分别装载到各自的目录中:

$ svnadmin load /var/svn/projects --parent-dir calc < calc-dumpfile
…
$ svnadmin load /var/svn/projects --parent-dir calendar < cal-dumpfile
…
$ svnadmin load /var/svn/projects --parent-dir spreadsheet < ss-dumpfile
…
$

We'll mention one final way to use the Subversion repository dump format—conversion from a different storage mechanism or version control system altogether. Because the dump file format is, for the most part, human-readable, it should be relatively easy to describe generic sets of changes—each of which should be treated as a new revision—using this file format. In fact, the cvs2svn utility (see 第 11 节 “迁移 CVS 版本库到 Subversion”) uses the dump format to represent the contents of a CVS repository so that those contents can be copied into a Subversion repository.

4.6. 过滤版本库历史

Since Subversion stores your versioned history using, at the very least, binary differencing algorithms and data compression (optionally in a completely opaque database system), attempting manual tweaks is unwise if not quite difficult, and at any rate strongly discouraged. And once data has been stored in your repository, Subversion generally doesn't provide an easy way to remove that data.[37] But inevitably, there will be times when you would like to manipulate the history of your repository. You might need to strip out all instances of a file that was accidentally added to the repository (and shouldn't be there for whatever reason).[38] Or, perhaps you have multiple projects sharing a single repository, and you decide to split them up into their own repositories. To accomplish tasks such as these, administrators need a more manageable and malleable representation of the data in their repositories—the Subversion repository dump format.

As we described earlier in 第 4.5 节 “版本库数据的移植”, the Subversion repository dump format is a human-readable representation of the changes that you've made to your versioned data over time. Use the svnadmin dump command to generate the dump data, and svnadmin load to populate a new repository with it. The great thing about the human-readability aspect of the dump format is that, if you aren't careless about it, you can manually inspect and modify it. Of course, the downside is that if you have three years' worth of repository activity encapsulated in what is likely to be a very large dump file, it could take you a long, long time to manually inspect and modify it.

That's where svndumpfilter becomes useful. This program acts as a path-based filter for repository dump streams. Simply give it either a list of paths you wish to keep or a list of paths you wish to not keep, and then pipe your repository dump data through this filter. The result will be a modified stream of dump data that contains only the versioned paths you (explicitly or implicitly) requested.

Let's look at a realistic example of how you might use this program. Earlier in this chapter (see 第 2.1 节 “规划你的版本库结构”), we discussed the process of deciding how to choose a layout for the data in your repositories—using one repository per project or combining them, arranging stuff within your repository, and so on. But sometimes after new revisions start flying in, you rethink your layout and would like to make some changes. A common change is the decision to move multiple projects that are sharing a single repository into separate repositories for each project.

Our imaginary repository contains three projects: calc, calendar, and spreadsheet. They have been living side-by-side in a layout like this:



/

   calc/

      trunk/

      branches/

      tags/

   calendar/

      trunk/

      branches/

      tags/

   spreadsheet/

      trunk/

      branches/

      tags/

现在要把这三个项目转移到三个独立的版本库中。首先,转储整个版本库:

$ svnadmin dump /var/svn/repos > repos-dumpfile
* Dumped revision 0.
* Dumped revision 1.
* Dumped revision 2.
* Dumped revision 3.
…
$

Next, run that dump file through the filter, each time including only one of our top-level directories. This results in three new dump files:

$ svndumpfilter include calc < repos-dumpfile > calc-dumpfile
…
$ svndumpfilter include calendar < repos-dumpfile > cal-dumpfile
…
$ svndumpfilter include spreadsheet < repos-dumpfile > ss-dumpfile
…
$

At this point, you have to make a decision. Each of your dump files will create a valid repository, but will preserve the paths exactly as they were in the original repository. This means that even though you would have a repository solely for your calc project, that repository would still have a top-level directory named calc. If you want your trunk, tags, and branches directories to live in the root of your repository, you might wish to edit your dump files, tweaking the Node-path and Node-copyfrom-path headers so that they no longer have that first calc/ path component. Also, you'll want to remove the section of dump data that creates the calc directory. It will look something like the following:

Node-path: calc
Node-action: add
Node-kind: dir
Content-length: 0
  
[警告]警告

If you do plan on manually editing the dump file to remove a top-level directory, make sure your editor is not set to automatically convert end-of-line characters to the native format (e.g., \r\n to \n), as the content will then not agree with the metadata. This will render the dump file useless.

All that remains now is to create your three new repositories, and load each dump file into the right repository, ignoring the UUID found in the dump stream:

$ svnadmin create calc
$ svnadmin load --ignore-uuid calc < calc-dumpfile
<<< Started new transaction, based on original revision 1
     * adding path : Makefile ... done.
     * adding path : button.c ... done.
…
$ svnadmin create calendar
$ svnadmin load --ignore-uuid calendar < cal-dumpfile
<<< Started new transaction, based on original revision 1
     * adding path : Makefile ... done.
     * adding path : cal.c ... done.
…
$ svnadmin create spreadsheet
$ svnadmin load --ignore-uuid spreadsheet < ss-dumpfile
<<< Started new transaction, based on original revision 1
     * adding path : Makefile ... done.
     * adding path : ss.c ... done.
…
$

Both of svndumpfilter's subcommands accept options for deciding how to deal with empty revisions. If a given revision contains only changes to paths that were filtered out, that now-empty revision could be considered uninteresting or even unwanted. So to give the user control over what to do with those revisions, svndumpfilter provides the following command-line options:

--drop-empty-revs

根本不生成空版本—忽略它们。

--renumber-revs

如果空修订版本被剔除(通过使用--drop-empty-revs选项),依次修改其它修订版本的编号,确保编号序列是连续的。

--preserve-revprops

If empty revisions are not dropped, preserve the revision properties (log message, author, date, custom properties, etc.) for those empty revisions. Otherwise, empty revisions will contain only the original datestamp, and a generated log message that indicates that this revision was emptied by svndumpfilter.

While svndumpfilter can be very useful and a huge timesaver, there are unfortunately a couple of gotchas. First, this utility is overly sensitive to path semantics. Pay attention to whether paths in your dump file are specified with or without leading slashes. You'll want to look at the Node-path and Node-copyfrom-path headers.

…
Node-path: spreadsheet/Makefile
…

If the paths have leading slashes, you should include leading slashes in the paths you pass to svndumpfilter include and svndumpfilter exclude (and if they don't, you shouldn't). Further, if your dump file has an inconsistent usage of leading slashes for some reason,[39] you should probably normalize those paths so that they all have, or all lack, leading slashes.

Also, copied paths can give you some trouble. Subversion supports copy operations in the repository, where a new path is created by copying some already existing path. It is possible that at some point in the lifetime of your repository, you might have copied a file or directory from some location that svndumpfilter is excluding, to a location that it is including. To make the dump data self-sufficient, svndumpfilter needs to still show the addition of the new path—including the contents of any files created by the copy—and not represent that addition as a copy from a source that won't exist in your filtered dump data stream. But because the Subversion repository dump format shows only what was changed in each revision, the contents of the copy source might not be readily available. If you suspect that you have any copies of this sort in your repository, you might want to rethink your set of included/excluded paths, perhaps including the paths that served as sources of your troublesome copy operations, too.

Finally, svndumpfilter takes path filtering quite literally. If you are trying to copy the history of a project rooted at trunk/my-project and move it into a repository of its own, you would, of course, use the svndumpfilter include command to keep all the changes in and under trunk/my-project. But the resultant dump file makes no assumptions about the repository into which you plan to load this data. Specifically, the dump data might begin with the revision that added the trunk/my-project directory, but it will not contain directives that would create the trunk directory itself (because trunk doesn't match the include filter). You'll need to make sure that any directories that the new dump stream expects to exist actually do exist in the target repository before trying to load the stream into that repository.

4.7. 版本库复制

There are several scenarios in which it is quite handy to have a Subversion repository whose version history is exactly the same as some other repository's. Perhaps the most obvious one is the maintenance of a simple backup repository, used when the primary repository has become inaccessible due to a hardware failure, network outage, or other such annoyance. Other scenarios include deploying mirror repositories to distribute heavy Subversion load across multiple servers, use as a soft-upgrade mechanism, and so on.

Subversion provides a program for managing scenarios such as these—svnsync. This works by essentially asking the Subversion server to replay revisions, one at a time. It then uses that revision information to mimic a commit of the same to another repository. Neither repository needs to be locally accessible to the machine on which svnsync is running—its parameters are repository URLs, and it does all its work through Subversion's Repository Access (RA) interfaces. All it requires is read access to the source repository and read/write access to the destination repository.

[注意]注意

When using svnsync against a remote source repository, the Subversion server for that repository must be running Subversion version 1.4 or later.

Assuming you already have a source repository that you'd like to mirror, the next thing you need is an empty target repository that will actually serve as that mirror. This target repository can use either of the available filesystem data-store backends (see 第 2.3 节 “选择数据存储格式”), but it must not yet have any version history in it. The protocol that svnsync uses to communicate revision information is highly sensitive to mismatches between the versioned histories contained in the source and target repositories. For this reason, while svnsync cannot demand that the target repository be read-only,[40] allowing the revision history in the target repository to change by any mechanism other than the mirroring process is a recipe for disaster.

[警告]警告

Do not modify a mirror repository in such a way as to cause its version history to deviate from that of the repository it mirrors. The only commits and revision property modifications that ever occur on that mirror repository should be those performed by the svnsync tool.

Another requirement of the target repository is that the svnsync process be allowed to modify revision properties. Because svnsync works within the framework of that repository's hook system, the default state of the repository (which is to disallow revision property changes; see pre-revprop-change) is insufficient. You'll need to explicitly implement the pre-revprop-change hook, and your script must allow svnsync to set and change revision properties. With those provisions in place, you are ready to start mirroring repository revisions.

[提示]提示

实现授权措施允许复制进程的操作,同时防止其他用户修改镜像版本库内容是一个好主意。

Let's walk through the use of svnsync in a somewhat typical mirroring scenario. We'll pepper this discourse with practical recommendations, which you are free to disregard if they aren't required by or suitable for your environment.

We will be mirroring the public Subversion repository which houses the source code for this very book and exposing that mirror publicly on the Internet, hosted on a different machine than the one on which the original Subversion source code repository lives. This remote host has a global configuration that permits anonymous users to read the contents of repositories on the host, but requires users to authenticate to modify those repositories. (Please forgive us for glossing over the details of Subversion server configuration for the moment—those are covered thoroughly in 第 6 章 服务配置.) And for no other reason than that it makes for a more interesting example, we'll be driving the replication process from a third machine—the one that we currently find ourselves using.

First, we'll create the repository which will be our mirror. This and the next couple of steps do require shell access to the machine on which the mirror repository will live. Once the repository is all configured, though, we shouldn't need to touch it directly again.

$ ssh admin@svn.example.com "svnadmin create /var/svn/svn-mirror"
admin@svn.example.com's password: ********
$

At this point, we have our repository, and due to our server's configuration, that repository is now live on the Internet. Now, because we don't want anything modifying the repository except our replication process, we need a way to distinguish that process from other would-be committers. To do so, we use a dedicated username for our process. Only commits and revision property modifications performed by the special username syncuser will be allowed.

We'll use the repository's hook system both to allow the replication process to do what it needs to do and to enforce that only it is doing those things. We accomplish this by implementing two of the repository event hooks—pre-revprop-change and start-commit. Our pre-revprop-change hook script is found in 例 5.2 “镜像版本库的 pre-revprop-change 钩子”, and basically verifies that the user attempting the property changes is our syncuser user. If so, the change is allowed; otherwise, it is denied.

例 5.2. 镜像版本库的 pre-revprop-change 钩子

#!/bin/sh 

USER="$3"

if [ "$USER" = "syncuser" ]; then exit 0; fi

echo "Only the syncuser user may change revision properties" >&2
exit 1


That covers revision property changes. Now we need to ensure that only the syncuser user is permitted to commit new revisions to the repository. We do this using a start-commit hook script such as the one in 例 5.3 “镜像版本库的 start-commit 钩子”.

例 5.3. 镜像版本库的 start-commit 钩子

#!/bin/sh 

USER="$2"

if [ "$USER" = "syncuser" ]; then exit 0; fi

echo "Only the syncuser user may commit new revisions" >&2
exit 1


After installing our hook scripts and ensuring that they are executable by the Subversion server, we're finished with the setup of the mirror repository. Now, we get to actually do the mirroring.

The first thing we need to do with svnsync is to register in our target repository the fact that it will be a mirror of the source repository. We do this using the svnsync initialize subcommand. The URLs we provide point to the root directories of the target and source repositories, respectively. In Subversion 1.4, this is required—only full mirroring of repositories is permitted. Beginning with Subversion 1.5, though, you can use svnsync to mirror only some subtree of the repository, too.

$ svnsync help init
initialize (init): usage: svnsync initialize DEST_URL SOURCE_URL

Initialize a destination repository for synchronization from
another repository.
…
$ svnsync initialize http://svn.example.com/svn-mirror \
                     http://svnbook.googlecode.com/svn \
                     --sync-username syncuser --sync-password syncpass
Copied properties for revision 0 (svn:sync-* properties skipped).
NOTE: Normalized svn:* properties to LF line endings (1 rev-props, 0 node-props).
$

Our target repository will now remember that it is a mirror of the public Subversion source code repository. Notice that we provided a username and password as arguments to svnsync—that was required by the pre-revprop-change hook on our mirror repository.

[注意]注意

In Subversion 1.4, the values given to svnsync's --username and --password command-line options were used for authentication against both the source and destination repositories. This caused problems when a user's credentials weren't exactly the same for both repositories, especially when running in noninteractive mode (with the --non-interactive option). This was fixed in Subversion 1.5 with the introduction of two new pairs of options. Use --source-username and --source-password to provide authentication credentials for the source repository; use --sync-username and --sync-password to provide credentials for the destination repository. (The old --username and --password options still exist for compatibility, but we advise against using them.)

And now comes the fun part. With a single subcommand, we can tell svnsync to copy all the as-yet-unmirrored revisions from the source repository to the target.[41] The svnsync synchronize subcommand will peek into the special revision properties previously stored on the target repository, and determine both what repository it is mirroring as well as that the most recently mirrored revision was revision 0. Then it will query the source repository and determine what the latest revision in that repository is. Finally, it asks the source repository's server to start replaying all the revisions between 0 and that latest revision. As svnsync gets the resultant response from the source repository's server, it begins forwarding those revisions to the target repository's server as new commits.

$ svnsync help synchronize
synchronize (sync): usage: svnsync synchronize DEST_URL

Transfer all pending revisions to the destination from the source
with which it was initialized.
…
$ svnsync synchronize http://svn.example.com/svn-mirror
Committed revision 1.
Copied properties for revision 1.
Committed revision 2.
Copied properties for revision 2.
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 3.
Copied properties for revision 3.
…
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 4063.
Copied properties for revision 4063.
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 4064.
Copied properties for revision 4064.
Transmitting file data ....
Committed revision 4065.
Copied properties for revision 4065.
$

Of particular interest here is that for each mirrored revision, there is first a commit of that revision to the target repository, and then property changes follow. This two-phase replication is required because the initial commit is performed by (and attributed to) the user syncuser and is datestamped with the time as of that revision's creation. svnsync has to follow up with an immediate series of property modifications that copy into the target repository all the original revision properties found for that revision in the source repository, which also has the effect of fixing the author and datestamp of the revision to match that of the source repository.

Also noteworthy is that svnsync performs careful bookkeeping that allows it to be safely interrupted and restarted without ruining the integrity of the mirrored data. If a network glitch occurs while mirroring a repository, simply repeat the svnsync synchronize command, and it will happily pick up right where it left off. In fact, as new revisions appear in the source repository, this is exactly what you do to keep your mirror up to date.

There is, however, one bit of inelegance in the process. Because Subversion revision properties can be changed at any time throughout the lifetime of the repository, and because they don't leave an audit trail that indicates when they were changed, replication processes have to pay special attention to them. If you've already mirrored the first 15 revisions of a repository and someone then changes a revision property on revision 12, svnsync won't know to go back and patch up its copy of revision 12. You'll need to tell it to do so manually by using (or with some additional tooling around) the svnsync copy-revprops subcommand, which simply rereplicates all the revision properties for a particular revision or range thereof.

$ svnsync help copy-revprops
copy-revprops: usage: svnsync copy-revprops DEST_URL [REV[:REV2]]

Copy the revision properties in a given range of revisions to the
destination from the source with which it was initialized.
…
$ svnsync copy-revprops http://svn.example.com/svn-mirror 12
Copied properties for revision 12.
$

That's repository replication in a nutshell. You'll likely want some automation around such a process. For example, while our example was a pull-and-push setup, you might wish to have your primary repository push changes to one or more blessed mirrors as part of its post-commit and post-revprop-change hook implementations. This would enable the mirror to be up to date in as near to real time as is likely possible.

Also, while it isn't very commonplace to do so, svnsync does gracefully mirror repositories in which the user as whom it authenticates has only partial read access. It simply copies only the bits of the repository that it is permitted to see. Obviously, such a mirror is not useful as a backup solution.

In Subversion 1.5, svnsync grew the ability to also mirror a subset of a repository rather than the whole thing. The process of setting up and maintaining such a mirror is exactly the same as when mirroring a whole repository, except that instead of specifying the source repository's root URL when running svnsync init, you specify the URL of some subdirectory within that repository. Synchronization to that mirror will now copy only the bits that changed under that source repository subdirectory. There are some limitations to this support, though. First, you can't mirror multiple disjoint subdirectories of the source repository into a single mirror repository—you'd need to instead mirror some parent directory that is common to both. Second, the filtering logic is entirely path-based, so if the subdirectory you are mirroring was renamed at some point in the past, your mirror would contain only the revisions since the directory appeared at the URL you specified. And likewise, if the source subdirectory is renamed in the future, your synchronization processes will stop mirroring data at the point that the source URL you specified is no longer valid.

As far as user interaction with repositories and mirrors goes, it is possible to have a single working copy that interacts with both, but you'll have to jump through some hoops to make it happen. First, you need to ensure that both the primary and mirror repositories have the same repository UUID (which is not the case by default). See 第 4.9 节 “管理版本库的 UUID” later in this chapter for more about this.

Once the two repositories have the same UUID, you can use svn switch with the --relocate option to point your working copy to whichever of the repositories you wish to operate against, a process that is described in svn switch (sw). There is a possible danger here, though, in that if the primary and mirror repositories aren't in close synchronization, a working copy up to date with, and pointing to, the primary repository will, if relocated to point to an out-of-date mirror, become confused about the apparent sudden loss of revisions it fully expects to be present, and it will throw errors to that effect. If this occurs, you can relocate your working copy back to the primary repository and then either wait until the mirror repository is up to date, or backdate your working copy to a revision you know is present in the sync repository, and then retry the relocation.

Finally, be aware that the revision-based replication provided by svnsync is only that—replication of revisions. Only information carried by the Subversion repository dump file format is available for replication. As such, svnsync has the same sorts of limitations that the repository dump stream has, and does not include such things as the hook implementations, repository or server configuration data, uncommitted transactions, or information about user locks on repository paths.

4.8. 版本库备份

Despite numerous advances in technology since the birth of the modern computer, one thing unfortunately rings true with crystalline clarity—sometimes things go very, very awry. Power outages, network connectivity dropouts, corrupt RAM, and crashed hard drives are but a taste of the evil that Fate is poised to unleash on even the most conscientious administrator. And so we arrive at a very important topic—how to make backup copies of your repository data.

There are two types of backup methods available for Subversion repository administrators—full and incremental. A full backup of the repository involves squirreling away in one sweeping action all the information required to fully reconstruct that repository in the event of a catastrophe. Usually, it means, quite literally, the duplication of the entire repository directory (which includes either a Berkeley DB or FSFS environment). Incremental backups are lesser things: backups of only the portion of the repository data that has changed since the previous backup.

As far as full backups go, the naïve approach might seem like a sane one, but unless you temporarily disable all other access to your repository, simply doing a recursive directory copy runs the risk of generating a faulty backup. In the case of Berkeley DB, the documentation describes a certain order in which database files can be copied that will guarantee a valid backup copy. A similar ordering exists for FSFS data. But you don't have to implement these algorithms yourself, because the Subversion development team has already done so. The svnadmin hotcopy command takes care of the minutia involved in making a hot backup of your repository. And its invocation is as trivial as the Unix cp or Windows copy operations:

$ svnadmin hotcopy /var/svn/repos /var/svn/repos-backup

The resultant backup is a fully functional Subversion repository, able to be dropped in as a replacement for your live repository should something go horribly wrong.

When making copies of a Berkeley DB repository, you can even instruct svnadmin hotcopy to purge any unused Berkeley DB logfiles (see 第 4.3.3 节 “删除不使用的 Berkeley DB 日志文件”) from the original repository upon completion of the copy. Simply provide the --clean-logs option on the command line.

$ svnadmin hotcopy --clean-logs /var/svn/bdb-repos /var/svn/bdb-repos-backup

Additional tooling around this command is available, too. The tools/backup/ directory of the Subversion source distribution holds the hot-backup.py script. This script adds a bit of backup management atop svnadmin hotcopy, allowing you to keep only the most recent configured number of backups of each repository. It will automatically manage the names of the backed-up repository directories to avoid collisions with previous backups and will rotate off older backups, deleting them so that only the most recent ones remain. Even if you also have an incremental backup, you might want to run this program on a regular basis. For example, you might consider using hot-backup.py from a program scheduler (such as cron on Unix systems), which can cause it to run nightly (or at whatever granularity of time you deem safe).

Some administrators use a different backup mechanism built around generating and storing repository dump data. We described in 第 4.5 节 “版本库数据的移植” how to use svnadmin dump with the --incremental option to perform an incremental backup of a given revision or range of revisions. And of course, you can achieve a full backup variation of this by omitting the --incremental option to that command. There is some value in these methods, in that the format of your backed-up information is flexible—it's not tied to a particular platform, versioned filesystem type, or release of Subversion or Berkeley DB. But that flexibility comes at a cost, namely that restoring that data can take a long time—longer with each new revision committed to your repository. Also, as is the case with so many of the various backup methods, revision property changes that are made to already backed-up revisions won't get picked up by a nonoverlapping, incremental dump generation. For these reasons, we recommend against relying solely on dump-based backup approaches.

As you can see, each of the various backup types and methods has its advantages and disadvantages. The easiest is by far the full hot backup, which will always result in a perfect working replica of your repository. Should something bad happen to your live repository, you can restore from the backup with a simple recursive directory copy. Unfortunately, if you are maintaining multiple backups of your repository, these full copies will each eat up just as much disk space as your live repository. Incremental backups, by contrast, tend to be quicker to generate and smaller to store. But the restoration process can be a pain, often involving applying multiple incremental backups. And other methods have their own peculiarities. Administrators need to find the balance between the cost of making the backup and the cost of restoring it.

The svnsync program (see 第 4.7 节 “版本库复制”) actually provides a rather handy middle-ground approach. If you are regularly synchronizing a read-only mirror with your main repository, in a pinch your read-only mirror is probably a good candidate for replacing that main repository if it falls over. The primary disadvantage of this method is that only the versioned repository data gets synchronized—repository configuration files, user-specified repository path locks, and other items that might live in the physical repository directory but not inside the repository's virtual versioned filesystem are not handled by svnsync.

In any backup scenario, repository administrators need to be aware of how modifications to unversioned revision properties affect their backups. Since these changes do not themselves generate new revisions, they will not trigger post-commit hooks, and may not even trigger the pre-revprop-change and post-revprop-change hooks.[42] And since you can change revision properties without respect to chronological order—you can change any revision's properties at any time—an incremental backup of the latest few revisions might not catch a property modification to a revision that was included as part of a previous backup.

Generally speaking, only the truly paranoid would need to back up their entire repository, say, every time a commit occurred. However, assuming that a given repository has some other redundancy mechanism in place with relatively fine granularity (such as per-commit emails or incremental dumps), a hot backup of the database might be something that a repository administrator would want to include as part of a system-wide nightly backup. It's your data—protect it as much as you'd like.

Often, the best approach to repository backups is a diversified one that leverages combinations of the methods described here. The Subversion developers, for example, back up the Subversion source code repository nightly using hot-backup.py and an off-site rsync of those full backups; keep multiple archives of all the commit and property change notification emails; and have repository mirrors maintained by various volunteers using svnsync. Your solution might be similar, but should be catered to your needs and that delicate balance of convenience with paranoia. And whatever you do, validate your backups from time to time—what good is a spare tire that has a hole in it? While all of this might not save your hardware from the iron fist of Fate,[43] it should certainly help you recover from those trying times.

4.9. 管理版本库的 UUID

Subversion repositories have a universally unique identifier (UUID) associated with them. This is used by Subversion clients to verify the identity of a repository when other forms of verification aren't good enough (such as checking the repository URL, which can change over time). Most Subversion repository administrators rarely, if ever, need to think about repository UUIDs as anything more than a trivial implementation detail of Subversion. Sometimes, however, there is cause for attention to this detail.

As a general rule, you want the UUIDs of your live repositories to be unique. That is, after all, the point of having UUIDs. But there are times when you want the repository UUIDs of two repositories to be exactly the same. For example, if you make a copy of a repository for backup purposes, you want the backup to be a perfect replica of the original so that, in the event that you have to restore that backup and replace the live repository, users don't suddenly see what looks like a different repository. When dumping and loading repository history (as described earlier in 第 4.5 节 “版本库数据的移植”), you get to decide whether to apply the UUID encapsulated in the data dump stream to the repository in which you are loading the data. The particular circumstance will dictate the correct behavior.

There are a couple of ways to set (or reset) a repository's UUID, should you need to. As of Subversion 1.5, this is as simple as using the svnadmin setuuid command. If you provide this subcommand with an explicit UUID, it will validate that the UUID is well-formed and then set the repository UUID to that value. If you omit the UUID, a brand-new UUID will be generated for your repository.

$ svnlook uuid /var/svn/repos
cf2b9d22-acb5-11dc-bc8c-05e83ce5dbec
$ svnadmin setuuid /var/svn/repos   # generate a new UUID
$ svnlook uuid /var/svn/repos
3c3c38fe-acc0-11dc-acbc-1b37ff1c8e7c
$ svnadmin setuuid /var/svn/repos \
           cf2b9d22-acb5-11dc-bc8c-05e83ce5dbec  # restore the old UUID
$ svnlook uuid /var/svn/repos
cf2b9d22-acb5-11dc-bc8c-05e83ce5dbec
$

For folks using versions of Subversion earlier than 1.5, these tasks are a little more complicated. You can explicitly set a repository's UUID by piping a repository dump file stub that carries the new UUID specification through svnadmin load --force-uuid REPOS-PATH.

$ svnadmin load --force-uuid /var/svn/repos <<EOF
SVN-fs-dump-format-version: 2

UUID: cf2b9d22-acb5-11dc-bc8c-05e83ce5dbec
EOF
$ svnlook uuid /var/svn/repos
cf2b9d22-acb5-11dc-bc8c-05e83ce5dbec
$

Having older versions of Subversion generate a brand-new UUID is not quite as simple to do, though. Your best bet here is to find some other way to generate a UUID, and then explicitly set the repository's UUID to that value.

5. 移动和删除版本库

Subversion repository data is wholly contained within the repository directory. As such, you can move a Subversion repository to some other location on disk, rename a repository, copy a repository, or delete a repository altogether using the tools provided by your operating system for manipulating directories—mv, cp -a, and rm -r on Unix platforms; copy, move, and rmdir /s /q on Windows; vast numbers of mouse and menu gyrations in various graphical file explorer applications, and so on.

Of course, there's often still more to be done when trying to cleanly affect changes such as this. For example, you might need to update your Subversion server configuration to point to the new location of a relocated repository or to remove configuration bits for a now-deleted repository. If you have automated processes that publish information from or about your repositories, they may need to be updated. Hook scripts might need to be reconfigured. Users may need to be notified. The list can go on indefinitely, or at least to the extent that you've built processes and procedures around your Subversion repository.

In the case of a copied repository, you should also consider the fact that Subversion uses repository UUIDs to distinguish repositories. If you copy a Subversion repository using a typical shell recursive copy command, you'll wind up with two repositories that are identical in every way—including their UUIDs. In some circumstances, this might be desirable. But in the instances where it is not, you'll need to generate a new UUID for one of these identical repositories. See 第 4.9 节 “管理版本库的 UUID” for more about managing repository UUIDs.

6. 总结

By now you should have a basic understanding of how to create, configure, and maintain Subversion repositories. We introduced you to the various tools that will assist you with this task. Throughout the chapter, we noted common administration pitfalls and offered suggestions for avoiding them.

All that remains is for you to decide what exciting data to store in your repository, and finally, how to make it available over a network. The next chapter is all about networking.




[30] 这可能听起来很崇高, 但我们所指的只是那些对管理别人工作副本数据之外的神秘领域感兴趣的人。

[31] 无论是在忽略情况下建立或很少考虑过如何产生正确的软件开发矩阵,都不应该愚蠢的担心全局的修订版本号码,这不应该成为安排项目和版本库的理由。

[32] The trunk, tags, and branches trio is sometimes referred to as the TTB directories.

[33] Often pronounced fuzz-fuzz, if Jack Repenning has anything to say about it. (This book, however, assumes that the reader is thinking eff-ess-eff-ess.)

[34] Berkeley DB需要底层的文件系统实现严格的POSIX锁定语法,更重要的是,将文件直接映射到内存的能力。

[35] 或者是, sync

[36] 比如:硬盘 + 大号电磁铁 = 毁灭。

[37] 那就是你是用版本控制的原因,对吗?

[38] 谨慎小心的删除部分版本化数据确实是真实的需求。这就是为什么永久删除特性是 Subversion 要求最多的一个特性,也是 Subversion 开发者希望立刻提供的。

[39] 尽管svnadmin dump对是否以斜线作为路径的开头有统一的规定—这个规定就是不以斜线作为路径的开头—其它生成转储文件的程序不一定会遵守这个规定。

[40] 实际上,它不是真的完全只读,或者svnsync本身有时间将版本库历史拷入。

[41] 要预先警告一下,尽管对于普通读者只需要几秒钟就可以理解下面的输出,而对于整个镜像过程花费的时间可能会非常长。

[42] svnadmin setlog可以被绕过钩子程序被调用。

[43] 你知道的—只是对各种变化莫测的问题的统称。

第 6 章 服务配置

A Subversion repository can be accessed simultaneously by clients running on the same machine on which the repository resides using URLs carrying the file:// scheme. But the typical Subversion setup involves a single server machine being accessed from clients on computers all over the office—or, perhaps, all over the world.

This chapter describes how to get your Subversion repository exposed outside its host machine for use by remote clients. We will cover Subversion's currently available server mechanisms, discussing the configuration and use of each. After reading this chapter, you should be able to decide which networking setup is right for your needs, as well as understand how to enable such a setup on your host computer.

1. 概述

Subversion was designed with an abstract repository access layer. This means that a repository can be programmatically accessed by any sort of server process, and the client repository access API allows programmers to write plug-ins that speak relevant network protocols. In theory, Subversion can use an infinite number of network implementations. In practice, there are only two Subversion servers in widespread use today.

Apache is an extremely popular web server; using the mod_dav_svn module, Apache can access a repository and make it available to clients via the WebDAV/DeltaV protocol, which is an extension of HTTP. Because Apache is an extremely extensible server, it provides a number of features for free, such as encrypted SSL communication, logging, integration with a number of third-party authentication systems, and limited built-in web browsing of repositories.

In the other corner is svnserve: a small, lightweight server program that speaks a custom protocol with clients. Because its protocol is explicitly designed for Subversion and is stateful (unlike HTTP), it provides significantly faster network operations—but at the cost of some features as well. While it can use SASL to provide a variety of authentication and encryption options, it has no logging or built-in web browsing. It is, however, extremely easy to set up and is often the best option for small teams just starting out with Subversion.

The network protocol which svnserve speaks may also be tunneled over an SSH connection. This deployment option for svnserve differs quite a bit in features from a traditional svnserve deployment. SSH is used to encrypt all communication. SSH is also used exclusively to authenticate, so real system accounts are required on the server host (unlike vanilla svnserve, which has its own private user accounts). Finally, because this setup requires that each user spawn a private, temporary svnserve process, it's equivalent (from a permissions point of view) to allowing a group of local users to all access the repository via file:// URLs. Path-based access control has no meaning, since each user is accessing the repository database files directly.

表 6.1 “Subversion 服务器选项比较”是三种典型服务器部署的总结。

表 6.1. Subversion 服务器选项比较

特性Apache + mod_dav_svnsvnserve穿越 SSH 隧道的 svnserve 服务器
认证选项HTTP Basic or Digest auth, X.509 certificates, LDAP, NTLM, or any other mechanism available to Apache httpd缺省是 CRAM-MD5;LDAP, NTLM 或任何 SASL 支持的机制。SSH
用户帐号选项Private users file, or other mechanisms available to Apache httpd (LDAP, SQL, etc.)Private users file, or other mechanisms available to SASL (LDAP, SQL, etc.)系统帐号
授权选项可以授予整个版本库的读/写权限,也可以为每个路径指定可以授予整个版本库的读/写权限,也可以为每个路径指定只能对整个版本库授予读/写权限
加密Available via optional SSL (https)通过可选的 SASL 特性继承 SSH 连接
日志High-level operational logging of Subversion operations plus detailed logging at the per-HTTP-request levelHigh-level operational logging onlyHigh-level operational logging only
交互性可以被其它 WebDAV 客户端访问只同 svn 客户端通讯只同 svn 客户端通讯
Web 浏览能力有限的内置支持,或者通过第三方工具,如 ViewVC只有通过第三方工具,如 ViewVC只有通过第三方工具,如 ViewVC
主从服务器复制从服务器透明代理写到主服务器只能创建只读从服务器只能创建只读从服务器
速度有些慢快一点快一点
初始设置有些复杂极为简单相对简单


2. 选择一个服务器配置

那你应该用什么服务器?什么最好?

显然,对这个问题没有正确的答案。每个团队都有不同的需要,不同的服务器都有各自的代价。Subversion 项目没有更加认可哪种服务,或认为哪个服务更加正式一点。

下面是你选择或者不选择某一个部署方式的原因。

2.1. svnserve 服务器

为什么你会希望使用它:
  • 设置快速简单。

  • 网络协议是有状态的,比WebDAV快很多。

  • 不需要在服务器创建系统帐号。

  • 不会在网络传输密码。

为什么你会希望避免它:
  • By default, only one authentication method is available, the network protocol is not encrypted, and the server stores clear text passwords. (All these things can be changed by configuring SASL, but it's a bit more work to do.)

  • No advanced logging facilities.

  • 没有内置的 WEB 浏览 (你必须自己单独安装 WEB 服务器,以及版本库浏览软件,来增加此功能)。

2.2. 穿越 SSH 隧道的 svnserve 服务器

为什么你会希望使用它:
  • 网络协议是有状态的,比 WebDAV 快很多。

  • 你可以利用现有的SSH帐号和用户基础。

  • 所有网络传输是加密的。

为什么你会希望避免它:
  • 只有一个认证方法可以选择。

  • No advanced logging facilities.

  • 需要用户在同一个系统组,或者使用共享 SSH 密钥。

  • 如果使用不正确,会导致文件权限问题。

2.3. Apache 的 HTTP 服务器

为什么你会希望使用它:
  • 允许 Subversion 使用已经集成到 Apache 的多种用户认证系统。

  • 不需要在服务器创建系统帐号。

  • 完全的 Apache 日志。

  • 网络传输可以通过SSL加密。

  • HTTP(S) 通常可以穿越公司防火墙。

  • 内置通过浏览器访问版本库。

  • 版本库可以作为网络磁盘加载,实现透明的版本控制(参见 第 2 节 “自动版本化”)。

为什么你会希望避免它:
  • svnserve慢很多,因为HTTP是无状态的协议,需要更多的传递。

  • 初始设置可能复杂

2.4. 推荐

In general, the authors of this book recommend a vanilla svnserve installation for small teams just trying to get started with a Subversion server; it's the simplest to set up and has the fewest maintenance issues. You can always switch to a more complex server deployment as your needs change.

下面是一些常见的建议和小技巧,基于多年对用户的支持:

  • If you're trying to set up the simplest possible server for your group, a vanilla svnserve installation is the easiest, fastest route. Note, however, that your repository data will be transmitted in the clear over the network. If your deployment is entirely within your company's LAN or VPN, this isn't an issue. If the repository is exposed to the wide-open Internet, you might want to make sure that either the repository's contents aren't sensitive (e.g., it contains only open source code), or that you go the extra mile in configuring SASL to encrypt network communications.

  • If you need to integrate with existing legacy identity systems (LDAP, Active Directory, NTLM, X.509, etc.), you must use either the Apache-based server or svnserve configured with SASL.

  • If you've decided to use either Apache or stock svnserve, create a single svn user on your system and run the server process as that user. Be sure to make the repository directory wholly owned by the svn user as well. From a security point of view, this keeps the repository data nicely siloed and protected by operating system filesystem permissions, changeable by only the Subversion server process itself.

  • If you have an existing infrastructure that is heavily based on SSH accounts, and if your users already have system accounts on your server machine, it makes sense to deploy an svnserve-over-SSH solution. Otherwise, we don't widely recommend this option to the public. It's generally considered safer to have your users access the repository via (imaginary) accounts managed by svnserve or Apache, rather than by full-blown system accounts. If your deep desire for encrypted communication still draws you to this option, we recommend using Apache with SSL or svnserve with SASL encryption instead.

  • Do not be seduced by the simple idea of having all of your users access a repository directly via file:// URLs. Even if the repository is readily available to everyone via a network share, this is a bad idea. It removes any layers of protection between the users and the repository: users can accidentally (or intentionally) corrupt the repository database, it becomes hard to take the repository offline for inspection or upgrade, and it can lead to a mess of file permission problems (see 第 7 节 “支持多种版本库访问方法”). Note that this is also one of the reasons we warn against accessing repositories via svn+ssh:// URLs—from a security standpoint, it's effectively the same as local users accessing via file://, and it can entail all the same problems if the administrator isn't careful.

3. svnserve - 定制的服务器

The svnserve program is a lightweight server, capable of speaking to clients over TCP/IP using a custom, stateful protocol. Clients contact an svnserve server by using URLs that begin with the svn:// or svn+ssh:// scheme. This section will explain the different ways of running svnserve, how clients authenticate themselves to the server, and how to configure appropriate access control to your repositories.

3.1. 调用服务器

有许多不同方法运行svnserve

  • 作为一个独立守护进程启动svnserve,监听请求。

  • 当特定端口收到一个请求,就会使UNIX的inetd守护进程临时调用svnserve处理。

  • 使用SSH在加密通道发起临时svnserve服务。

  • 以Windows service服务方式运行svnserve

  • Run svnserve as a launchd job.

The following sections will cover in detail these various deployment options for svnserve.

3.1.1. svnserve 与守护进程

The easiest option is to run svnserve as a standalone daemon process. Use the -d option for this:

$ svnserve -d
$               # svnserve is now running, listening on port 3690

When running svnserve in daemon mode, you can use the --listen-port and --listen-host options to customize the exact port and hostname to bind to.

Once we successfully start svnserve as explained previously, it makes every repository on your system available to the network. A client needs to specify an absolute path in the repository URL. For example, if a repository is located at /var/svn/project1, a client would reach it via svn://host.example.com/var/svn/project1. To increase security, you can pass the -r option to svnserve, which restricts it to exporting only repositories below that path. For example:

$ svnserve -d -r /var/svn
…

Using the -r option effectively modifies the location that the program treats as the root of the remote filesystem space. Clients then use URLs that have that path portion removed from them, leaving much shorter (and much less revealing) URLs:

$ svn checkout svn://host.example.com/project1
…

3.1.2. 通过 inetd 调用 svnserve

If you want inetd to launch the process, you need to pass the -i (--inetd) option. In the following example, we've shown the output from running svnserve -i at the command line, but note that this isn't how you actually start the daemon; see the paragraphs following the example for how to configure inetd to start svnserve.

$ svnserve -i
( success ( 2 2 ( ) ( edit-pipeline svndiff1 absent-entries commit-revprops d\
epth log-revprops partial-replay ) ) )

When invoked with the --inetd option, svnserve attempts to speak with a Subversion client via stdin and stdout using a custom protocol. This is the standard behavior for a program being run via inetd. The IANA has reserved port 3690 for the Subversion protocol, so on a Unix-like system you can add lines to /etc/services such as these (if they don't already exist):

svn           3690/tcp   # Subversion
svn           3690/udp   # Subversion

如果系统是使用经典的类Unix的inetd守护进程,你可以在/etc/inetd.conf添加这几行:

svn stream tcp nowait svnowner /usr/bin/svnserve svnserve -i

Make sure svnowner is a user that has appropriate permissions to access your repositories. Now, when a client connection comes into your server on port 3690, inetd will spawn an svnserve process to service it. Of course, you may also want to add -r to the configuration line as well, to restrict which repositories are exported.

3.1.3. 通过隧道调用 svnserve

Another way to invoke svnserve is in tunnel mode, using the -t option. This mode assumes that a remote-service program such as rsh or ssh has successfully authenticated a user and is now invoking a private svnserve process as that user. (Note that you, the user, will rarely, if ever, have reason to invoke svnserve with the -t at the command line; instead, the SSH daemon does so for you.) The svnserve program behaves normally (communicating via stdin and stdout) and assumes that the traffic is being automatically redirected over some sort of tunnel back to the client. When svnserve is invoked by a tunnel agent like this, be sure that the authenticated user has full read and write access to the repository database files. It's essentially the same as a local user accessing the repository via file:// URLs.

这个选项将在第 3.4 节 “穿越 SSH 隧道”详细讨论。

3.1.4. svnserve as a Windows service

If your Windows system is a descendant of Windows NT (Windows 2000 or newer), you can run svnserve as a standard Windows service. This is typically a much nicer experience than running it as a standalone daemon with the --daemon (-d) option. Using daemon mode requires launching a console, typing a command, and then leaving the console window running indefinitely. A Windows service, however, runs in the background, can start at boot time automatically, and can be started and stopped using the same consistent administration interface as other Windows services.

You'll need to define the new service using the command-line tool SC.EXE. Much like the inetd configuration line, you must specify an exact invocation of svnserve for Windows to run at startup time:

C:\> sc create svn
        binpath= "C:\svn\bin\svnserve.exe --service -r C:\repos"
        displayname= "Subversion Server"
        depend= Tcpip
        start= auto

This defines a new Windows service named svn which executes a particular svnserve.exe command when started (in this case, rooted at C:\repos). There are a number of caveats in the prior example, however.

First, notice that the svnserve.exe program must always be invoked with the --service option. Any other options to svnserve must then be specified on the same line, but you cannot add conflicting options such as --daemon (-d), --tunnel, or --inetd (-i). Options such as -r or --listen-port are fine, though. Second, be careful about spaces when invoking the SC.EXE command: the key= value patterns must have no spaces between key= and must have exactly one space before the value. Lastly, be careful about spaces in your command line to be invoked. If a directory name contains spaces (or other characters that need escaping), place the entire inner value of binpath in double quotes, by escaping them:

C:\> sc create svn
        binpath= "\"C:\program files\svn\bin\svnserve.exe\" --service -r C:\repos"
        displayname= "Subversion Server"
        depend= Tcpip
        start= auto

Also note that the word binpath is misleading—its value is a command line, not the path to an executable. That's why you need to surround it with quotes if it contains embedded spaces.

一旦定义了服务,就可以使用标准GUI工具(服务管理控制面板)进行停止, 启动和查询,或者是通过命令行:

C:\> net stop svn
C:\> net start svn

The service can also be uninstalled (i.e., undefined) by deleting its definition: sc delete svn. Just be sure to stop the service first! The SC.EXE program has many other subcommands and options; run sc /? to learn more about it.

3.1.5. svnserve as a launchd job

Mac OS X (10.4 and higher) uses launchd to manage processes (including daemons) both system-wide and per-user. A launchd job is specified by parameters in an XML property list file, and the launchctl command is used to manage the lifecycle of those jobs.

When configured to run as a launchd job, svnserve is automatically launched on demand whenever incoming Subversion svn:// network traffic needs to be handled. This is far more convenient than a configuration which requires you to manually invoke svnserve as a long-running background process.

To configure svnserve as a launchd job, first create a job definition file named /Library/LaunchDaemons/org.apache.subversion.svnserve.plist. 例 6.1 “A sample svnserve launchd job definition” provides an example of such a file.

例 6.1. A sample svnserve launchd job definition

<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<!DOCTYPE plist PUBLIC "-//Apple//DTD PLIST 1.0//EN"
    "http://www.apple.com/DTDs/PropertyList-1.0.dtd">
<plist version="1.0">
    <dict>
        <key>Label</key>
        <string>org.apache.subversion.svnserve</string>
        <key>ServiceDescription</key>
        <string>Host Subversion repositories using svn:// scheme</string>
        <key>ProgramArguments</key>
        <array>
            <string>/usr/bin/svnserve</string>
            <string>--inetd</string>
            <string>--root=/var/svn</string>
        </array>
        <key>UserName</key>
        <string>svn</string>
        <key>GroupName</key>
        <string>svn</string>
        <key>inetdCompatibility</key>
        <dict>
            <key>Wait</key>
            <false/>
        </dict>
        <key>Sockets</key>
        <dict>
            <key>Listeners</key>
            <array>
                <dict>
                    <key>SockServiceName</key>
                    <string>svn</string>
                    <key>Bonjour</key>
                    <true/>
                </dict>
            </array>
        </dict>
    </dict>
</plist>


[警告]警告

The launchd system can be somewhat challenging to learn. Fortunately, documentation exists for the commands described in this section. For example, run man launchd from the command line to see the manual page for launchd itself, man launchd.plist to read about the job definition format, etc.

Once your job definition file is created, you can activate the job using launchctl load:

$ sudo launchctl load \
       -w /Library/LaunchDaemons/org.apache.subversion.svnserve.plist

To be clear, this action doesn't actually launch svnserve yet. It simply tells launchd how to fire up svnserve when incoming networking traffic arrives on the svn network port; it will be terminated it after the traffic has been handled.

[注意]注意

Because we want svnserve to be a system-wide daemon process, we need to use sudo to manage this job as an administrator. Note also that the UserName and GroupName keys in the definition file are optional—if omitted, the job will run as the user who loaded the job.

Deactivating the job is just as easy to do—use launchctl unload:

$ sudo launchctl unload \
       -w /Library/LaunchDaemons/org.apache.subversion.svnserve.plist

launchctl also provides a way for you to query the status of jobs. If the job is loaded, there will be line which matches the Label specified in the job definition file:

$ sudo launchctl list | grep org.apache.subversion.svnserve
-       0       org.apache.subversion.svnserve
$

3.2. 内置的认证和授权

如果一个客户端连接到svnserve进程,如下事情会发生:

  • 客户端选择特定的版本库。

  • 服务器处理版本库的conf/svnserve.conf文件,并且执行里面定义的所有认证和授权政策。

  • 取决于已定义的策略,可能发生下列事情:

    • 如果没有收到认证请求,客户端可能被允许匿名访问。

    • 客户端可以在任何认证时被要求。

    • 如果操作在通道模式,客户端会宣布自己已经在外部得到认证(通常通过SSH)。

The svnserve server, by default, knows only how to send a CRAM-MD5[44] authentication challenge. In essence, the server sends a small amount of data to the client. The client uses the MD5 hash algorithm to create a fingerprint of the data and password combined, and then sends the fingerprint as a response. The server performs the same computation with the stored password to verify that the result is identical. At no point does the actual password travel over the network.

If your svnserve server was built with SASL support, it not only knows how to send CRAM-MD5 challenges, but also likely knows a whole host of other authentication mechanisms. See 第 3.3 节 “让 svnserve 使用 SASL” later in this chapter to learn how to configure SASL authentication and encryption.

It's also possible, of course, for the client to be externally authenticated via a tunnel agent, such as ssh. In that case, the server simply examines the user it's running as, and uses this name as the authenticated username. For more on this, see the later section, 第 3.4 节 “穿越 SSH 隧道”.

As you've already guessed, a repository's svnserve.conf file is the central mechanism for controlling authentication and authorization policies. The file has the same format as other configuration files (see 第 1 节 “运行配置区”): section names are marked by square brackets ([ and ]), comments begin with hashes (#), and each section contains specific variables that can be set (variable = value). Let's walk through these files and learn how to use them.

3.2.1. 创建一个用户文件和认证域

For now, the [general] section of svnserve.conf has all the variables you need. Begin by changing the values of those variables: choose a name for a file that will contain your usernames and passwords and choose an authentication realm:

[general]
password-db = userfile
realm = example realm

The realm is a name that you define. It tells clients which sort of authentication namespace they're connecting to; the Subversion client displays it in the authentication prompt and uses it as a key (along with the server's hostname and port) for caching credentials on disk (see 第 11.2.1 节 “缓存凭证”). The password-db variable points to a separate file that contains a list of usernames and passwords, using the same familiar format. For example:

[users]
harry = foopassword
sally = barpassword

The value of password-db can be an absolute or relative path to the users file. For many admins, it's easy to keep the file right in the conf/ area of the repository, alongside svnserve.conf. On the other hand, it's possible you may want to have two or more repositories share the same users file; in that case, the file should probably live in a more public place. The repositories sharing the users file should also be configured to have the same realm, since the list of users essentially defines an authentication realm. Wherever the file lives, be sure to set the file's read and write permissions appropriately. If you know which user(s) svnserve will run as, restrict read access to the users file as necessary.

3.2.2. 设置访问控制

There are two more variables to set in the svnserve.conf file: they determine what unauthenticated (anonymous) and authenticated users are allowed to do. The variables anon-access and auth-access can be set to the value none, read, or write. Setting the value to none prohibits both reading and writing; read allows read-only access to the repository, and write allows complete read/write access to the repository. For example:

[general]
password-db = userfile
realm = example realm

# anonymous users can only read the repository
anon-access = read

# authenticated users can both read and write
auth-access = write

The example settings are, in fact, the default values of the variables, should you forget to define them. If you want to be even more conservative, you can block anonymous access completely:

[general]
password-db = userfile
realm = example realm

# anonymous users aren't allowed
anon-access = none

# authenticated users can both read and write
auth-access = write

The server process understands not only these blanket access controls to the repository, but also finer-grained access restrictions placed on specific files and directories within the repository. To make use of this feature, you need to define a file containing more detailed rules, and then set the authz-db variable to point to it:

[general]
password-db = userfile
realm = example realm

# Specific access rules for specific locations
authz-db = authzfile

We discuss the syntax of the authzfile file in detail later in this chapter, in 第 5 节 “基于路径的授权”. Note that the authz-db variable isn't mutually exclusive with the anon-access and auth-access variables; if all the variables are defined at once, all of the rules must be satisfied before access is allowed.

3.3. 让 svnserve 使用 SASL

For many teams, the built-in CRAM-MD5 authentication is all they need from svnserve. However, if your server (and your Subversion clients) were built with the Cyrus Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL) library, you have a number of authentication and encryption options available to you.

Normally, when a subversion client connects to svnserve, the server sends a greeting that advertises a list of the capabilities it supports, and the client responds with a similar list of capabilities. If the server is configured to require authentication, it then sends a challenge that lists the authentication mechanisms available; the client responds by choosing one of the mechanisms, and then authentication is carried out in some number of round-trip messages. Even when SASL capabilities aren't present, the client and server inherently know how to use the CRAM-MD5 and ANONYMOUS mechanisms (see 第 3.2 节 “内置的认证和授权”). If server and client were linked against SASL, a number of other authentication mechanisms may also be available. However, you'll need to explicitly configure SASL on the server side to advertise them.

3.3.1. 使用 SASL 认证

To activate specific SASL mechanisms on the server, you'll need to do two things. First, create a [sasl] section in your repository's svnserve.conf file with an initial key-value pair:

          [sasl]
          use-sasl = true

Second, create a main SASL configuration file called svn.conf in a place where the SASL library can find it—typically in the directory where SASL plug-ins are located. You'll have to locate the plug-in directory on your particular system, such as /usr/lib/sasl2/ or /etc/sasl2/. (Note that this is not the svnserve.conf file that lives within a repository!)

On a Windows server, you'll also have to edit the system registry (using a tool such as regedit) to tell SASL where to find things. Create a registry key named [HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Carnegie Mellon\Project Cyrus\SASL Library], and place two keys inside it: a key called SearchPath (whose value is a path to the directory containing the SASL sasl*.dll plug-in libraries), and a key called ConfFile (whose value is a path to the parent directory containing the svn.conf file you created).

Because SASL provides so many different kinds of authentication mechanisms, it would be foolish (and far beyond the scope of this book) to try to describe every possible server-side configuration. Instead, we recommend that you read the documentation supplied in the doc/ subdirectory of the SASL source code. It goes into great detail about every mechanism and how to configure the server appropriately for each. For the purposes of this discussion, we'll just demonstrate a simple example of configuring the DIGEST-MD5 mechanism. For example, if your subversion.conf (or svn.conf) file contains the following:

pwcheck_method: auxprop
auxprop_plugin: sasldb
sasldb_path: /etc/my_sasldb
mech_list: DIGEST-MD5

you've told SASL to advertise the DIGEST-MD5 mechanism to clients and to check user passwords against a private password database located at /etc/my_sasldb. A system administrator can then use the saslpasswd2 program to add or modify usernames and passwords in the database:

$ saslpasswd2 -c -f /etc/my_sasldb -u realm username

A few words of warning: first, make sure the realm argument to saslpasswd2 matches the same realm you've defined in your repository's svnserve.conf file; if they don't match, authentication will fail. Also, due to a shortcoming in SASL, the common realm must be a string with no space characters. Finally, if you decide to go with the standard SASL password database, make sure the svnserve program has read access to the file (and possibly write access as well, if you're using a mechanism such as OTP).

This is just one simple way of configuring SASL. Many other authentication mechanisms are available, and passwords can be stored in other places such as in LDAP or a SQL database. Consult the full SASL documentation for details.

Remember that if you configure your server to only allow certain SASL authentication mechanisms, this forces all connecting clients to have SASL support as well. Any Subversion client built without SASL support (which includes all pre-1.5 clients) will be unable to authenticate. On the one hand, this sort of restriction may be exactly what you want (My clients must all use Kerberos!). However, if you still want non-SASL clients to be able to authenticate, be sure to advertise the CRAM-MD5 mechanism as an option. All clients are able to use CRAM-MD5, whether they have SASL capabilities or not.

3.3.2. SASL 加密

SASL is also able to perform data encryption if a particular mechanism supports it. The built-in CRAM-MD5 mechanism doesn't support encryption, but DIGEST-MD5 does, and mechanisms such as SRP actually require use of the OpenSSL library. To enable or disable different levels of encryption, you can set two values in your repository's svnserve.conf file:

[sasl]
use-sasl = true
min-encryption = 128
max-encryption = 256

The min-encryption and max-encryption variables control the level of encryption demanded by the server. To disable encryption completely, set both values to 0. To enable simple checksumming of data (i.e., prevent tampering and guarantee data integrity without encryption), set both values to 1. If you wish to allow—but not require—encryption, set the minimum value to 0, and the maximum value to some bit length. To require encryption unconditionally, set both values to numbers greater than 1. In our previous example, we require clients to do at least 128-bit encryption, but no more than 256-bit encryption.

3.4. 穿越 SSH 隧道

svnserve's built-in authentication (and SASL support) can be very handy, because it avoids the need to create real system accounts. On the other hand, some administrators already have well-established SSH authentication frameworks in place. In these situations, all of the project's users already have system accounts and the ability to SSH into the server machine.

It's easy to use SSH in conjunction with svnserve. The client simply uses the svn+ssh:// URL scheme to connect:

$ whoami
harry

$ svn list svn+ssh://host.example.com/repos/project
harryssh@host.example.com's password:  *****

foo
bar
baz
…

In this example, the Subversion client is invoking a local ssh process, connecting to host.example.com, authenticating as the user harryssh (according to SSH user configuration), then spawning a private svnserve process on the remote machine running as the user harryssh. The svnserve command is being invoked in tunnel mode (-t), and its network protocol is being tunneled over the encrypted connection by ssh, the tunnel agent. If the client performs a commit, the authenticated username harryssh will be used as the author of the new revision.

The important thing to understand here is that the Subversion client is not connecting to a running svnserve daemon. This method of access doesn't require a daemon, nor does it notice one if present. It relies wholly on the ability of ssh to spawn a temporary svnserve process, which then terminates when the network connection is closed.

When using svn+ssh:// URLs to access a repository, remember that it's the ssh program prompting for authentication, and not the svn client program. That means there's no automatic password-caching going on (see 第 11.2.1 节 “缓存凭证”). The Subversion client often makes multiple connections to the repository, though users don't normally notice this due to the password caching feature. When using svn+ssh:// URLs, however, users may be annoyed by ssh repeatedly asking for a password for every outbound connection. The solution is to use a separate SSH password-caching tool such as ssh-agent on a Unix-like system, or pageant on Windows.

When running over a tunnel, authorization is primarily controlled by operating system permissions to the repository's database files; it's very much the same as if Harry were accessing the repository directly via a file:// URL. If multiple system users are going to be accessing the repository directly, you may want to place them into a common group, and you'll need to be careful about umasks (be sure to read 第 7 节 “支持多种版本库访问方法” later in this chapter). But even in the case of tunneling, you can still use the svnserve.conf file to block access, by simply setting auth-access = read or auth-access = none.[45]

You'd think that the story of SSH tunneling would end here, but it doesn't. Subversion allows you to create custom tunnel behaviors in your runtime config file (see 第 1 节 “运行配置区”). For example, suppose you want to use RSH instead of SSH.[46] In the [tunnels] section of your config file, simply define it like this:

[tunnels]
rsh = rsh

And now, you can use this new tunnel definition by using a URL scheme that matches the name of your new variable: svn+rsh://host/path. When using the new URL scheme, the Subversion client will actually be running the command rsh host svnserve -t behind the scenes. If you include a username in the URL (e.g., svn+rsh://username@host/path), the client will also include that in its command (rsh username@host svnserve -t). But you can define new tunneling schemes to be much more clever than that:

[tunnels]
joessh = $JOESSH /opt/alternate/ssh -p 29934

This example demonstrates a couple of things. First, it shows how to make the Subversion client launch a very specific tunneling binary (the one located at /opt/alternate/ssh) with specific options. In this case, accessing an svn+joessh:// URL would invoke the particular SSH binary with -p 29934 as arguments—useful if you want the tunnel program to connect to a nonstandard port.

Second, it shows how to define a custom environment variable that can override the name of the tunneling program. Setting the SVN_SSH environment variable is a convenient way to override the default SSH tunnel agent. But if you need to have several different overrides for different servers, each perhaps contacting a different port or passing a different set of options to SSH, you can use the mechanism demonstrated in this example. Now if we were to set the JOESSH environment variable, its value would override the entire value of the tunnel variable—$JOESSH would be executed instead of /opt/alternate/ssh -p 29934.

3.5. SSH Configuration Tricks

It's possible to control not only the way in which the client invokes ssh, but also to control the behavior of sshd on your server machine. In this section, we'll show how to control the exact svnserve command executed by sshd, as well as how to have multiple users share a single system account.

3.5.1. 初始设置

To begin, locate the home directory of the account you'll be using to launch svnserve. Make sure the account has an SSH public/private keypair installed, and that the user can log in via public-key authentication. Password authentication will not work, since all of the following SSH tricks revolve around using the SSH authorized_keys file.

If it doesn't already exist, create the authorized_keys file (on Unix, typically ~/.ssh/authorized_keys). Each line in this file describes a public key that is allowed to connect. The lines are typically of the form:

  ssh-dsa AAAABtce9euch… user@example.com

The first field describes the type of key, the second field is the base64-encoded key itself, and the third field is a comment. However, it's a lesser known fact that the entire line can be preceded by a command field:

  command="program" ssh-dsa AAAABtce9euch… user@example.com

When the command field is set, the SSH daemon will run the named program instead of the typical tunnel-mode svnserve invocation that the Subversion client asks for. This opens the door to a number of server-side tricks. In the following examples, we abbreviate the lines of the file as:

  command="program" TYPE KEY COMMENT

3.5.2. 控制调用的命令

因为我们可以指定服务器端执行的命令,我们很容易来选择运行一个特定的svnserve程序来并且传递给它额外的参数:

  command="/path/to/svnserve -t -r /virtual/root" TYPE KEY COMMENT

In this example, /path/to/svnserve might be a custom wrapper script around svnserve which sets the umask (see 第 7 节 “支持多种版本库访问方法”). It also shows how to anchor svnserve in a virtual root directory, just as one often does when running svnserve as a daemon process. This might be done either to restrict access to parts of the system, or simply to relieve the user of having to type an absolute path in the svn+ssh:// URL.

It's also possible to have multiple users share a single account. Instead of creating a separate system account for each user, generate a public/private key pair for each person. Then place each public key into the authorized_keys file, one per line, and use the --tunnel-user option:

  command="svnserve -t --tunnel-user=harry" TYPE1 KEY1 harry@example.com
  command="svnserve -t --tunnel-user=sally" TYPE2 KEY2 sally@example.com

This example allows both Harry and Sally to connect to the same account via public key authentication. Each of them has a custom command that will be executed; the --tunnel-user option tells svnserve to assume that the named argument is the authenticated user. Without --tunnel-user, it would appear as though all commits were coming from the one shared system account.

A final word of caution: giving a user access to the server via public-key in a shared account might still allow other forms of SSH access, even if you've set the command value in authorized_keys. For example, the user may still get shell access through SSH or be able to perform X11 or general port forwarding through your server. To give the user as little permission as possible, you may want to specify a number of restrictive options immediately after the command:

  command="svnserve -t --tunnel-user=harry",no-port-forwarding,no-agent-forw
arding,no-X11-forwarding,no-pty TYPE1 KEY1 harry@example.com

Note that this all must be on one line—truly on one line—since SSH authorized_keys files do not even allow the conventional backslash character (\) for line continuation. The only reason we've shown it with a line break is to fit it on the physical page of a book.

4. httpd - Apache 的 HTTP 服务器

The Apache HTTP Server is a heavy-duty network server that Subversion can leverage. Via a custom module, httpd makes Subversion repositories available to clients via the WebDAV/DeltaV[47] protocol, which is an extension to HTTP 1.1. This protocol takes the ubiquitous HTTP protocol that is the core of the World Wide Web, and adds writing—specifically, versioned writing—capabilities. The result is a standardized, robust system that is conveniently packaged as part of the Apache 2.0 software, supported by numerous operating systems and third-party products, and doesn't require network administrators to open up yet another custom port.[48] While an Apache-Subversion server has more features than svnserve, it's also a bit more difficult to set up. With flexibility often comes more complexity.

Much of the following discussion includes references to Apache configuration directives. While some examples are given of the use of these directives, describing them in full is outside the scope of this chapter. The Apache team maintains excellent documentation, publicly available on their web site at http://httpd.apache.org. For example, a general reference for the configuration directives is located at http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/mod/directives.html.

Also, as you make changes to your Apache setup, it is likely that somewhere along the way a mistake will be made. If you are not already familiar with Apache's logging subsystem, you should become aware of it. In your httpd.conf file are directives that specify the on-disk locations of the access and error logs generated by Apache (the CustomLog and ErrorLog directives, respectively). Subversion's mod_dav_svn uses Apache's error logging interface as well. You can always browse the contents of those files for information that might reveal the source of a problem that is not clearly noticeable otherwise.

4.1. 先决条件

To network your repository over HTTP, you basically need four components, available in two packages. You'll need Apache httpd 2.0 or newer, the mod_dav DAV module that comes with it, Subversion, and the mod_dav_svn filesystem provider module distributed with Subversion. Once you have all of those components, the process of networking your repository is as simple as:

  • Getting httpd up and running with the mod_dav module

  • mod_dav 安装 mod_dav_svn 后端,它会使用 Subversion 库访问版本库

  • 配置你的httpd.conf来输出(或者说暴露)版本库

You can accomplish the first two items either by compiling httpd and Subversion from source code or by installing prebuilt binary packages of them on your system. For the most up-to-date information on how to compile Subversion for use with the Apache HTTP Server, as well as how to compile and configure Apache itself for this purpose, see the INSTALL file in the top level of the Subversion source code tree.

4.2. 基本的 Apache 配置

Once you have all the necessary components installed on your system, all that remains is the configuration of Apache via its httpd.conf file. Instruct Apache to load the mod_dav_svn module using the LoadModule directive. This directive must precede any other Subversion-related configuration items. If your Apache was installed using the default layout, your mod_dav_svn module should have been installed in the modules subdirectory of the Apache install location (often /usr/local/apache2). The LoadModule directive has a simple syntax, mapping a named module to the location of a shared library on disk:

LoadModule dav_svn_module     modules/mod_dav_svn.so

Apache interprets the LoadModule configuration item's library path as relative to its own server root. If configured as previously shown, Apache will look for the Subversion DAV module shared library in its own modules/ subdirectory. Depending on how Subversion was installed on your system, you might need to specify a different path for this library altogether, perhaps even an absolute path such as in the following example:

LoadModule dav_svn_module     C:/Subversion/lib/mod_dav_svn.so

Note that if mod_dav was compiled as a shared object (instead of statically linked directly to the httpd binary), you'll need a similar LoadModule statement for it, too. Be sure that it comes before the mod_dav_svn line:

LoadModule dav_module         modules/mod_dav.so
LoadModule dav_svn_module     modules/mod_dav_svn.so

At a later location in your configuration file, you now need to tell Apache where you keep your Subversion repository (or repositories). The Location directive has an XML-like notation, starting with an opening tag and ending with a closing tag, with various other configuration directives in the middle. The purpose of the Location directive is to instruct Apache to do something special when handling requests that are directed at a given URL or one of its children. In the case of Subversion, you want Apache to simply hand off support for URLs that point at versioned resources to the DAV layer. You can instruct Apache to delegate the handling of all URLs whose path portions (the part of the URL that follows the server's name and the optional port number) begin with /repos/ to a DAV provider whose repository is located at /var/svn/repository using the following httpd.conf syntax:

<Location /repos>
  DAV svn
  SVNPath /var/svn/repository
</Location>

If you plan to support multiple Subversion repositories that will reside in the same parent directory on your local disk, you can use an alternative directive—SVNParentPath—to indicate that common parent directory. For example, if you know you will be creating multiple Subversion repositories in a directory /var/svn that would be accessed via URLs such as http://my.server.com/svn/repos1, http://my.server.com/svn/repos2, and so on, you could use the httpd.conf configuration syntax in the following example:

<Location /svn>
  DAV svn

  # Automatically map any "/svn/foo" URL to repository /var/svn/foo
  SVNParentPath /var/svn
</Location>

Using this syntax, Apache will delegate the handling of all URLs whose path portions begin with /svn/ to the Subversion DAV provider, which will then assume that any items in the directory specified by the SVNParentPath directive are actually Subversion repositories. This is a particularly convenient syntax in that, unlike the use of the SVNPath directive, you don't have to restart Apache to add or remove hosted repositories.

Be sure that when you define your new Location, it doesn't overlap with other exported locations. For example, if your main DocumentRoot is exported to /www, do not export a Subversion repository in <Location /www/repos>. If a request comes in for the URI /www/repos/foo.c, Apache won't know whether to look for a file repos/foo.c in the DocumentRoot, or whether to delegate mod_dav_svn to return foo.c from the Subversion repository. The result is often an error from the server of the form 301 Moved Permanently.

At this stage, you should strongly consider the question of permissions. If you've been running Apache for some time now as your regular web server, you probably already have a collection of content—web pages, scripts, and such. These items have already been configured with a set of permissions that allows them to work with Apache, or more appropriately, that allows Apache to work with those files. Apache, when used as a Subversion server, will also need the correct permissions to read and write to your Subversion repository.

You will need to determine a permission system setup that satisfies Subversion's requirements without messing up any previously existing web page or script installations. This might mean changing the permissions on your Subversion repository to match those in use by other things that Apache serves for you, or it could mean using the User and Group directives in httpd.conf to specify that Apache should run as the user and group that owns your Subversion repository. There is no single correct way to set up your permissions, and each administrator will have different reasons for doing things a certain way. Just be aware that permission-related problems are perhaps the most common oversight when configuring a Subversion repository for use with Apache.

4.3. 认证选项

此时,如果你配置的 httpd.conf 包含了如下内容:

<Location /svn>
  DAV svn
  SVNParentPath /var/svn
</Location>

your repository is anonymously accessible to the world. Until you configure some authentication and authorization policies, the Subversion repositories that you make available via the Location directive will be generally accessible to everyone. In other words:

  • 任何人可以使用Subversion客户端来从版本库URL取出一个工作副本(或者是它的子目录)。

  • 任何人可以在浏览器输入版本库URL交互浏览的方式来查看版本库的最新修订版本。

  • 任何人可以提交到版本库。

Of course, you might have already set up a pre-commit hook script to prevent commits (see 第 3.2 节 “实现版本库钩子”). But as you read on, you'll see that it's also possible to use Apache's built-in methods to restrict access in specific ways.

[提示]提示

Requiring authentication defends against invalid users directly accessing the repository, but does not guard the privacy of valid users' network activity. See 第 4.5 节 “Protecting network traffic with SSL” for how to configure your server to support SSL encryption, which can provide that extra layer of protection.

4.3.1. Basic authentication

The easiest way to authenticate a client is via the HTTP Basic authentication mechanism, which simply uses a username and password to verify a user's identity. Apache provides the htpasswd utility[49] for managing files containing usernames and passwords.

[警告]警告

Basic authentication is extremely insecure, because it sends passwords over the network in very nearly plain text. See 第 4.3.2 节 “Digest authentication” for details on using the much safer Digest mechanism.

First, create a password file and grant access to users Harry and Sally:

$ ### First time: use -c to create the file
$ ### Use -m to use MD5 encryption of the password, which is more secure
$ htpasswd -c -m /etc/svn-auth.htpasswd harry
New password: *****
Re-type new password: *****
Adding password for user harry
$ htpasswd -m /etc/svn-auth.htpasswd sally
New password: *******
Re-type new password: *******
Adding password for user sally
$

Next, ensure that Apache has access to the modules which provide the Basic authentication and related functionality: mod_auth_basic, mod_authn_file, and mod_authz_user. In many cases, these modules are compiled into httpd itself, but if not, you might need to explicitly load one or more of them using the LoadModule directive:

LoadModule auth_basic_module   modules/mod_auth_basic.so
LoadModule authn_file_module   modules/mod_authn_file.so
LoadModule authz_user_module   moduels/mod_authz_user.so

After ensuring the Apache has access to the required functionality, you'll need to add some more directives inside the <Location> block to tell Apache what type of authentication you wish to use, and just how to to so:

<Location /svn>
  DAV svn
  SVNParentPath /var/svn

  # Authentication: Basic
  AuthName "Subversion repository"
  AuthType Basic
  AuthBasicProvider file
  AuthUserFile /etc/svn-auth.htpasswd
</Location>

These directives work as follows:

  • AuthName is an arbitrary name that you choose for the authentication domain. Most browsers display this name in the dialog box when prompting for username and password.

  • AuthType specifies the type of authentication to use.

  • AuthBasicProvider specifies the Basic authentication provider to use for the location. In our example, we wish to consult a local password file.

  • AuthUserFile specifies the location of the password file to use.

However, this <Location> block doesn't yet do anything useful. It merely tells Apache that if authorization were required, it should challenge the Subversion client for a username and password. (When authorization is required, Apache requires authentication as well.) What's missing here, however, are directives that tell Apache which sorts of client requests require authorization; currently, none do. The simplest thing is to specify that all requests require authorization by adding Require valid-user to the block:

<Location /svn>
  DAV svn
  SVNParentPath /var/svn

  # Authentication: Basic
  AuthName "Subversion repository"
  AuthType Basic
  AuthBasicProvider file
  AuthUserFile /etc/svn-auth.htpasswd

  # Authorization: Authenticated users only
  Require valid-user
</Location>

Refer to 第 4.4 节 “授权选项” for more detail on the Require directive and other ways to set authorization policies.

[注意]注意

The default value of the AuthBasicProvider option is file, so we won't bother including it in future examples. Just know that if in a broader context you've set this value to something else, you'll need to explicitly reset it to file within your Subversion <Location> block in order to get that behavior.

4.3.2. Digest authentication

Digest authentication is an improvement on Basic authentication which allows the server to verify a client's identity without sending the password over the network unprotected. Both client and server create a non-reversible MD5 hash of the username, password, requested URI, and a nonce (number used once) provided by the server and changed each time authentication is required. The client sends its hash to the server, and the server then verifies that the hashes match.

Configuring Apache to use Digest authentication is straightforward. You'll need to ensure that the mod_auth_digest module is available (instead of mod_auth_basic), and then make a few small variations on our prior example:

<Location /svn>
  DAV svn
  SVNParentPath /var/svn

  # Authentication: Digest
  AuthName "Subversion repository"
  AuthType Digest
  AuthDigestProvider file
  AuthUserFile /etc/svn-auth.htdigest

  # Authorization: Authenticated users only
  Require valid-user
</Location>

Notice that AuthType is now set to Digest, and we specify a different path for AuthUserFile. Digest authentication uses a different file format than Basic authentication, created and managed using Apache's htdigest utility[50] rather than htpasswd. Digest authentication also has the additional concept of a realm, which must match the value of the AuthName directive.

[注意]注意

For digest authentication, the authentication provider is selected using the AuthDigestProvider as shown in the previous example. As was the case with the AuthBasicProvider directive, file is the default value of the AuthDigestProvider option, so this line is not strictly required unless you need to override a different value thereof inherited from a broader configuration context.

The password file can be created as follows:

$ ### First time: use -c to create the file
$ htdigest -c /etc/svn-auth.htdigest "Subversion repository" harry
Adding password for harry in realm Subversion repository.
New password: *****
Re-type new password: *****
$ htdigest /etc/svn-auth.htdigest "Subversion repository" sally
Adding user sally in realm Subversion repository
New password: *******
Re-type new password: *******
$

4.4. 授权选项

At this point, you've configured authentication, but not authorization. Apache is able to challenge clients and confirm identities, but it has not been told how to allow or restrict access to the clients bearing those identities. This section describes two strategies for controlling access to your repositories.

4.4.1. 整体访问控制

最简单的访问控制形式是授权特定用户为只读版本库访问或者是读/写访问版本库。

You can restrict access on all repository operations by adding Require valid-user directly inside the <Location> block. The example from 第 4.3.2 节 “Digest authentication” allows only clients that successfully authenticate to do anything with the Subversion repository:

<Location /svn>
  DAV svn
  SVNParentPath /var/svn

  # Authentication: Digest
  AuthName "Subversion repository"
  AuthType Digest
  AuthUserFile /etc/svn-auth.htdigest

  # Authorization: Authenticated users only
  Require valid-user
</Location>

Sometimes you don't need to run such a tight ship. For example, Subversion's own source code repository at http://svn.collab.net/repos/svn allows anyone in the world to perform read-only repository tasks (such as checking out working copies and browsing the repository), but restricts write operations to authenticated users. The Limit and LimitExcept directives allow for this type of selective restriction. Like the Location directive, these blocks have starting and ending tags, and you would nest them inside your <Location> block.

The parameters present on the Limit and LimitExcept directives are HTTP request types that are affected by that block. For example, to allow anonymous read-only operations, you would use the LimitExcept directive (passing the GET, PROPFIND, OPTIONS, and REPORT request type parameters) and place the previously mentioned Require valid-user directive inside the <LimitExcept> block instead of just inside the <Location> block.

<Location /svn>
  DAV svn
  SVNParentPath /var/svn

  # Authentication: Digest
  AuthName "Subversion repository"
  AuthType Digest
  AuthUserFile /etc/svn-auth.htdigest

  # Authorization: Authenticated users only for non-read-only
  #                (write) operations; allow anonymous reads
  <LimitExcept GET PROPFIND OPTIONS REPORT>
    Require valid-user
  </LimitExcept>
</Location>

These are only a few simple examples. For more in-depth information about Apache access control and the Require directive, take a look at the Security section of the Apache documentation's tutorials collection at http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/misc/tutorials.html.

4.4.2. 每目录访问控制

It's possible to set up finer-grained permissions using mod_authz_svn. This Apache module grabs the various opaque URLs passing from client to server, asks mod_dav_svn to decode them, and then possibly vetoes requests based on access policies defined in a configuration file.

If you've built Subversion from source code, mod_authz_svn is automatically built and installed alongside mod_dav_svn. Many binary distributions install it automatically as well. To verify that it's installed correctly, make sure it comes right after mod_dav_svn's LoadModule directive in httpd.conf:

LoadModule dav_module         modules/mod_dav.so
LoadModule dav_svn_module     modules/mod_dav_svn.so
LoadModule authz_svn_module   modules/mod_authz_svn.so

To activate this module, you need to configure your <Location> block to use the AuthzSVNAccessFile directive, which specifies a file containing the permissions policy for paths within your repositories. (In a moment, we'll discuss the format of that file.)

Apache is flexible, so you have the option to configure your block in one of three general patterns. To begin, choose one of these basic configuration patterns. (The following examples are very simple; look at Apache's own documentation for much more detail on Apache authentication and authorization options.)

The most open approach is to allow access to everyone. This means Apache never sends authentication challenges, and all users are treated as anonymous. (See 例 6.2 “匿名访问的配置样例”.)

例 6.2. 匿名访问的配置样例

<Location /repos>
  DAV svn
  SVNParentPath /var/svn

  # Authentication: None

  # Authorization: Path-based access control
  AuthzSVNAccessFile /path/to/access/file
</Location>


On the opposite end of the paranoia scale, you can configure Apache to authenticate all clients. This block unconditionally requires authentication via the Require valid-user directive, and defines a means to authenticate valid users. (See 例 6.3 “认证访问的配置样例”.)

例 6.3. 认证访问的配置样例

<Location /repos>
  DAV svn
  SVNParentPath /var/svn

  # Authentication: Digest
  AuthName "Subversion repository"
  AuthType Digest
  AuthUserFile /etc/svn-auth.htdigest

  # Authorization: Path-based access control; authenticated users only
  AuthzSVNAccessFile /path/to/access/file
  Require valid-user
</Location>


A third very popular pattern is to allow a combination of authenticated and anonymous access. For example, many administrators want to allow anonymous users to read certain repository directories, but restrict access to more sensitive areas to authenticated users. In this setup, all users start out accessing the repository anonymously. If your access control policy demands a real username at any point, Apache will demand authentication from the client. To do this, use both the Satisfy Any and Require valid-user directives. (See 例 6.4 “混合认证/匿名访问的配置样例”.)

例 6.4. 混合认证/匿名访问的配置样例

<Location /repos>
  DAV svn
  SVNParentPath /var/svn

  # Authentication: Digest
  AuthName "Subversion repository"
  AuthType Digest
  AuthUserFile /etc/svn-auth.htdigest

  # Authorization: Path-based access control; try anonymous access
  #                first, but authenticate if necessary
  AuthzSVNAccessFile /path/to/access/file
  Satisfy Any
  Require valid-user
</Location>


The next step is to create the authorization file containing access rules for particular paths within the repository. We describe how later in this chapter, in 第 5 节 “基于路径的授权”.

4.4.3. 禁用基于路径的检查

The mod_dav_svn module goes through a lot of work to make sure that data you've marked unreadable doesn't get accidentally leaked. This means it needs to closely monitor all of the paths and file-contents returned by commands such as svn checkout and svn update. If these commands encounter a path that isn't readable according to some authorization policy, the path is typically omitted altogether. In the case of history or rename tracing—for example, running a command such as svn cat -r OLD foo.c on a file that was renamed long ago—the rename tracking will simply halt if one of the object's former names is determined to be read-restricted.

All of this path checking can sometimes be quite expensive, especially in the case of svn log. When retrieving a list of revisions, the server looks at every changed path in each revision and checks it for readability. If an unreadable path is discovered, it's omitted from the list of the revision's changed paths (normally seen with the --verbose (-v) option), and the whole log message is suppressed. Needless to say, this can be time-consuming on revisions that affect a large number of files. This is the cost of security: even if you haven't configured a module such as mod_authz_svn at all, the mod_dav_svn module is still asking Apache httpd to run authorization checks on every path. The mod_dav_svn module has no idea what authorization modules have been installed, so all it can do is ask Apache to invoke whatever might be present.

On the other hand, there's also an escape hatch of sorts, which allows you to trade security features for speed. If you're not enforcing any sort of per-directory authorization (i.e., not using mod_authz_svn or similar module), you can disable all of this path checking. In your httpd.conf file, use the SVNPathAuthz directive as shown in 例 6.5 “禁用所有的路径检查”.

例 6.5. 禁用所有的路径检查

<Location /repos>
  DAV svn
  SVNParentPath /var/svn

  SVNPathAuthz off
</Location>


The SVNPathAuthz directive is on by default. When set to off, all path-based authorization checking is disabled; mod_dav_svn stops invoking authorization checks on every path it discovers.

4.5. Protecting network traffic with SSL

Connecting to a repository via http:// means that all Subversion activity is sent across the network in the clear. This means that actions such as checkouts, commits, and updates could potentially be intercepted by an unauthorized party sniffing network traffic. Encrypting traffic using SSL is a good way to protect potentially sensitive information over the network.

If a Subversion client is compiled to use OpenSSL, it gains the ability to speak to an Apache server via https:// URLs, so all traffic is encrypted with a per-connection session key. The WebDAV library used by the Subversion client is not only able to verify server certificates, but can also supply client certificates when challenged by the server.

4.5.1. Subversion server SSL certificate configuration

It's beyond the scope of this book to describe how to generate client and server SSL certificates and how to configure Apache to use them. Many other references, including Apache's own documentation, describe the process.

[提示]提示

SSL certificates from well-known entities generally cost money, but at a bare minimum, you can configure Apache to use a self-signed certificate generated with a tool such as OpenSSL (http://openssl.org).[51]

4.5.2. Subversion client SSL certificate management

When connecting to Apache via https://, a Subversion client can receive two different types of responses:

  • 一个服务器证书

  • A challenge for a client certificate

4.5.2.1. Server certificate

When the client receives a server certificate, it needs to verify that the server is who it claims to be. OpenSSL does this by examining the signer of the server certificate, or certificate authority (CA). If OpenSSL is unable to automatically trust the CA, or if some other problem occurs (such as an expired certificate or hostname mismatch), the Subversion command-line client will ask you whether you want to trust the server certificate anyway:

$ svn list https://host.example.com/repos/project

Error validating server certificate for 'https://host.example.com:443':
 - The certificate is not issued by a trusted authority.  Use the
   fingerprint to validate the certificate manually!
Certificate information:
 - Hostname: host.example.com
 - Valid: from Jan 30 19:23:56 2004 GMT until Jan 30 19:23:56 2006 GMT
 - Issuer: CA, example.com, Sometown, California, US
 - Fingerprint: 7d:e1:a9:34:33:39:ba:6a:e9:a5:c4:22:98:7b:76:5c:92:a0:9c:7b

(R)eject, accept (t)emporarily or accept (p)ermanently?

This dialogue is essentially the same question you may have seen coming from your web browser (which is just another HTTP client like Subversion). If you choose the (p)ermanent option, Subversion will cache the server certificate in your private runtime auth/ area, just as your username and password are cached (see 第 11.2.1 节 “缓存凭证”), and will automatically trust the certificate in the future.

Your runtime servers file also gives you the ability to make your Subversion client automatically trust specific CAs, either globally or on a per-host basis. Simply set the ssl-authority-files variable to a semicolon-separated list of PEM-encoded CA certificates:

[global]
ssl-authority-files = /path/to/CAcert1.pem;/path/to/CAcert2.pem

Many OpenSSL installations also have a predefined set of default CAs that are nearly universally trusted. To make the Subversion client automatically trust these standard authorities, set the ssl-trust-default-ca variable to true.

4.5.2.2. Client certificate challenge

If the client receives a challenge for a certificate, the server is asking the client to prove its identity. The client must send back a certificate signed by a CA that the server trusts, along with a challenge response which proves that the client owns the private key associated with the certificate. The private key and certificate are usually stored in an encrypted format on disk, protected by a passphrase. When Subversion receives this challenge, it will ask you for the path to the encrypted file and the passphrase that protects it:

$ svn list https://host.example.com/repos/project

Authentication realm: https://host.example.com:443
Client certificate filename: /path/to/my/cert.p12
Passphrase for '/path/to/my/cert.p12':  ********

Notice that the client credentials are stored in a .p12 file. To use a client certificate with Subversion, it must be in PKCS#12 format, which is a portable standard. Most web browsers are able to import and export certificates in that format. Another option is to use the OpenSSL command-line tools to convert existing certificates into PKCS#12.

The runtime servers file also allows you to automate this challenge on a per-host basis. If you set the ssl-client-cert-file and ssl-client-cert-password variables, Subversion can automatically respond to a client certificate challenge without prompting you:

[groups]
examplehost = host.example.com

[examplehost]
ssl-client-cert-file = /path/to/my/cert.p12
ssl-client-cert-password = somepassword

More security-conscious folk might want to exclude ssl-client-cert-password to avoid storing the passphrase in the clear on disk.

4.6. 额外的糖果

We've covered most of the authentication and authorization options for Apache and mod_dav_svn. But there are a few other nice features that Apache provides.

4.6.1. 版本库浏览

One of the most useful benefits of an Apache/WebDAV configuration for your Subversion repository is that your versioned files and directories are immediately available for viewing via a regular web browser. Since Subversion uses URLs to identify versioned resources, those URLs used for HTTP-based repository access can be typed directly into a web browser. Your browser will issue an HTTP GET request for that URL; based on whether that URL represents a versioned directory or file, mod_dav_svn will respond with a directory listing or with file contents.

4.6.1.1. URL 语法

If the URLs do not contain any information about which version of the resource you wish to see, mod_dav_svn will answer with the youngest version. This functionality has the wonderful side effect that you can pass around Subversion URLs to your peers as references to documents, and those URLs will always point at the latest manifestation of that document. Of course, you can even use the URLs as hyperlinks from other web sites, too.

As of Subversion 1.6, mod_dav_svn supports a public URI syntax for examining older revisions of both files and directories. The syntax uses the query string portion of the URL to specify either or both of a peg revision and operative revision, which Subversion will then use to determine which version of the file or directory to display to your web browser. Add the query string name/value pair p=PEGREV, where PEGREV is a revision number, to specify the peg revision you wish to apply to the request. Use r=REV, where REV is a revision number, to specify an operative revision.

For example, if you wish to see the latest version of a README.txt file located in your project's /trunk, point your web browser to that file's repository URL, which might look something like the following:

http://host.example.com/repos/project/trunk/README.txt

If you now wish to see some older version of that file, add an operative revision to the URL's query string:

http://host.example.com/repos/project/trunk/README.txt?r=1234

What if the thing you're trying to view no longer exists in the youngest revision of the repository? That's where a peg revision is handy:

http://host.example.com/repos/project/trunk/deleted-thing.txt?p=321

And of course, you can combine peg revision and operative revision specifiers to fine-tune the exact item you wish to view:

http://host.example.com/repos/project/trunk/renamed-thing.txt?p=123&r=21

The previous URL would display revision 21 of the object which, in revision 123, was located at /trunk/renamed-thing.txt in the repository. See 第 2 节 “Peg 和实施修订版本” for a detailed explanation of these peg revision and operative revision concepts. They can be a bit tricky to wrap your head around.

As a reminder, this feature of mod_dav_svn offers only a limited repository browsing experience. You can see directory listings and file contents, but no revision properties (such as commit log messages) or file/directory properties. For folks who require more extensive browsing of repositories and their history, there are several third-party software packages which offer this. Some examples include ViewVC (http://viewvc.tigris.org), Trac (http://trac.edgewall.org) and WebSVN (http://websvn.info). These third-party tools don't affect mod_dav_svn's built-in browseability, and generally offer a much wider set of features, including the display of the aforementioned property sets, display of content differences between file revisions, and so on.

4.6.1.2. 正确的 MIME 类型

When browsing a Subversion repository, the web browser gets a clue about how to render a file's contents by looking at the Content-Type: header returned in Apache's response to the HTTP GET request. The value of this header is some sort of MIME type. By default, Apache will tell the web browsers that all repository files are of the default MIME type, typically text/plain. This can be frustrating, however, if a user wishes repository files to render as something more meaningful—for example, it might be nice to have a foo.html file in the repository actually render as HTML when browsing.

To make this happen, you need only to make sure that your files have the proper svn:mime-type set. We discuss this in more detail in 第 4.1 节 “文件内容类型”, and you can even configure your client to automatically attach proper svn:mime-type properties to files entering the repository for the first time; see 第 3.4 节 “自动设置属性”.

Continuing our example, if one were to set the svn:mime-type property to text/html on file foo.html, Apache would properly tell your web browser to render the file as HTML. One could also attach proper image/* MIME-type properties to image files and ultimately get an entire web site to be viewable directly from a repository! There's generally no problem with this, as long as the web site doesn't contain any dynamically generated content.

4.6.1.3. 定制外观

You generally will get more use out of URLs to versioned files—after all, that's where the interesting content tends to lie. But you might have occasion to browse a Subversion directory listing, where you'll quickly note that the generated HTML used to display that listing is very basic, and certainly not intended to be aesthetically pleasing (or even interesting). To enable customization of these directory displays, Subversion provides an XML index feature. A single SVNIndexXSLT directive in your repository's Location block of httpd.conf will instruct mod_dav_svn to generate XML output when displaying a directory listing, and to reference the XSLT stylesheet of your choice:

<Location /svn>
  DAV svn
  SVNParentPath /var/svn
  SVNIndexXSLT "/svnindex.xsl"
  …
</Location>

Using the SVNIndexXSLT directive and a creative XSLT stylesheet, you can make your directory listings match the color schemes and imagery used in other parts of your web site. Or, if you'd prefer, you can use the sample stylesheets provided in the Subversion source distribution's tools/xslt/ directory. Keep in mind that the path provided to the SVNIndexXSLT directory is actually a URL path—browsers need to be able to read your stylesheets to make use of them!

4.6.1.4. 列出版本库

If you're serving a collection of repositories from a single URL via the SVNParentPath directive, then it's also possible to have Apache display all available repositories to a web browser. Just activate the SVNListParentPath directive:

<Location /svn>
  DAV svn
  SVNParentPath /var/svn
  SVNListParentPath on
  …
</Location>

If a user now points her web browser to the URL http://host.example.com/svn/, she'll see a list of all Subversion repositories sitting in /var/svn. Obviously, this can be a security problem, so this feature is turned off by default.

4.6.2. Apache 日志

Because Apache is an HTTP server at heart, it contains fantastically flexible logging features. It's beyond the scope of this book to discuss all of the ways logging can be configured, but we should point out that even the most generic httpd.conf file will cause Apache to produce two logs: error_log and access_log. These logs may appear in different places, but are typically created in the logging area of your Apache installation. (On Unix, they often live in /usr/local/apache2/logs/.)

The error_log describes any internal errors that Apache runs into as it works. The access_log file records every incoming HTTP request received by Apache. This makes it easy to see, for example, which IP addresses Subversion clients are coming from, how often particular clients use the server, which users are authenticating properly, and which requests succeed or fail.

Unfortunately, because HTTP is a stateless protocol, even the simplest Subversion client operation generates multiple network requests. It's very difficult to look at the access_log and deduce what the client was doing—most operations look like a series of cryptic PROPPATCH, GET, PUT, and REPORT requests. To make things worse, many client operations send nearly identical series of requests, so it's even harder to tell them apart.

mod_dav_svn, however, can come to your aid. By activating an operational logging feature, you can ask mod_dav_svn to create a separate log file describing what sort of high-level operations your clients are performing.

To do this, you need to make use of Apache's CustomLog directive (which is explained in more detail in Apache's own documentation). Be sure to invoke this directive outside your Subversion Location block:

<Location /svn>
  DAV svn
  …
</Location>

CustomLog logs/svn_logfile "%t %u %{SVN-ACTION}e" env=SVN-ACTION

In this example, we're asking Apache to create a special logfile, svn_logfile, in the standard Apache logs directory. The %t and %u variables are replaced by the time and username of the request, respectively. The really important parts are the two instances of SVN-ACTION. When Apache sees that variable, it substitutes the value of the SVN-ACTION environment variable, which is automatically set by mod_dav_svn whenever it detects a high-level client action.

So, instead of having to interpret a traditional access_log like this:

[26/Jan/2007:22:25:29 -0600] "PROPFIND /svn/calc/!svn/vcc/default HTTP/1.1" 207 398
[26/Jan/2007:22:25:29 -0600] "PROPFIND /svn/calc/!svn/bln/59 HTTP/1.1" 207 449
[26/Jan/2007:22:25:29 -0600] "PROPFIND /svn/calc HTTP/1.1" 207 647
[26/Jan/2007:22:25:29 -0600] "REPORT /svn/calc/!svn/vcc/default HTTP/1.1" 200 607
[26/Jan/2007:22:25:31 -0600] "OPTIONS /svn/calc HTTP/1.1" 200 188
[26/Jan/2007:22:25:31 -0600] "MKACTIVITY /svn/calc/!svn/act/e6035ef7-5df0-4ac0-b811-4be7c823f998 HTTP/1.1" 201 227
…

你可以细读一个更加智能的 svn_logfile 文件:

[26/Jan/2007:22:24:20 -0600] - get-dir /tags r1729 props
[26/Jan/2007:22:24:27 -0600] - update /trunk r1729 depth=infinity
[26/Jan/2007:22:25:29 -0600] - status /trunk/foo r1729 depth=infinity
[26/Jan/2007:22:25:31 -0600] sally commit r1730

In addition to the SVN-ACTION environment variable, mod_dav_svn also populates the SVN-REPOS and SVN-REPOS-NAME variables, which carry the filesystem path to the repository and the basename thereof, respectively. You might wish to include references to one or both of these variables in your CustomLog format string, too, especially if you are combining usage information from multiple repositories into a single log file.

For an exhaustive list of all actions logged, see 第 6 节 “High-level Logging”.

4.6.3. 通过代理写

One of the nice advantages of using Apache as a Subversion server is that it can be set up for simple replication. For example, suppose that your team is distributed across four offices around the globe. The Subversion repository can exist only in one of those offices, which means the other three offices will not enjoy accessing it—they're likely to experience significantly slower traffic and response times when updating and committing code. A powerful solution is to set up a system consisting of one master Apache server and several slave Apache servers. If you place a slave server in each office, users can check out a working copy from whichever slave is closest to them. All read requests go to their local slave. Write requests get automatically routed to the single master server. When the commit completes, the master then automatically pushes the new revision to each slave server using the svnsync replication tool.

This configuration creates a huge perceptual speed increase for your users, because Subversion client traffic is typically 80–90% read requests. And if those requests are coming from a local server, it's a huge win.

In this section, we'll walk you through a standard setup of this single-master/multiple-slave system. However, keep in mind that your servers must be running at least Apache 2.2.0 (with mod_proxy loaded) and Subversion 1.5 (mod_dav_svn).

4.6.3.1. 配置服务器

First, configure your master server's httpd.conf file in the usual way. Make the repository available at a certain URI location, and configure authentication and authorization however you'd like. After that's done, configure each of your slave servers in the exact same way, but add the special SVNMasterURI directive to the block:

<Location /svn>
  DAV svn
  SVNPath /var/svn/repos
  SVNMasterURI http://master.example.com/svn
  …
</Location>

This new directive tells a slave server to redirect all write requests to the master. (This is done automatically via Apache's mod_proxy module.) Ordinary read requests, however, are still serviced by the slaves. Be sure that your master and slave servers all have matching authentication and authorization configurations; if they fall out of sync, it can lead to big headaches.

Next, we need to deal with the problem of infinite recursion. With the current configuration, imagine what will happen when a Subversion client performs a commit to the master server. After the commit completes, the server uses svnsync to replicate the new revision to each slave. But because svnsync appears to be just another Subversion client performing a commit, the slave will immediately attempt to proxy the incoming write request back to the master! Hilarity ensues.

The solution to this problem is to have the master push revisions to a different <Location> on the slaves. This location is configured to not proxy write requests at all, but to accept normal commits from (and only from) the master's IP address:

<Location /svn-proxy-sync>
  DAV svn
  SVNPath /var/svn/repos
  Order deny,allow
  Deny from all
  # Only let the server's IP address access this Location:
  Allow from 10.20.30.40
  …
</Location>
4.6.3.2. 设置复制

Now that you've configured your Location blocks on master and slaves, you need to configure the master to replicate to the slaves. This is done the usual way— using svnsync. If you're not familiar with this tool, see 第 4.7 节 “版本库复制” for details.

First, make sure that each slave repository has a pre-revprop-change hook script which allows remote revision property changes. (This is standard procedure for being on the receiving end of svnsync.) Then log into the master server and configure each of the slave repository URIs to receive data from the master repository on the local disk:

$ svnsync init http://slave1.example.com/svn-proxy-sync file:///var/svn/repos
Copied properties for revision 0.
$ svnsync init http://slave2.example.com/svn-proxy-sync file:///var/svn/repos
Copied properties for revision 0.
$ svnsync init http://slave3.example.com/svn-proxy-sync file:///var/svn/repos
Copied properties for revision 0.

# Perform the initial replication

$ svnsync sync http://slave1.example.com/svn-proxy-sync
Transmitting file data ....
Committed revision 1.
Copied properties for revision 1.
Transmitting file data .......
Committed revision 2.
Copied properties for revision 2.
…

$ svnsync sync http://slave2.example.com/svn-proxy-sync
Transmitting file data ....
Committed revision 1.
Copied properties for revision 1.
Transmitting file data .......
Committed revision 2.
Copied properties for revision 2.
…

$ svnsync sync http://slave3.example.com/svn-proxy-sync
Transmitting file data ....
Committed revision 1.
Copied properties for revision 1.
Transmitting file data .......
Committed revision 2.
Copied properties for revision 2.
…

After this is done, we configure the master server's post-commit hook script to invoke svnsync on each slave server:

#!/bin/sh
# Post-commit script to replicate newly committed revision to slaves

svnsync sync http://slave1.example.com/svn-proxy-sync > /dev/null 2>&1 &
svnsync sync http://slave2.example.com/svn-proxy-sync > /dev/null 2>&1 &
svnsync sync http://slave3.example.com/svn-proxy-sync > /dev/null 2>&1 &

The extra bits on the end of each line aren't necessary, but they're a sneaky way to allow the sync commands to run in the background so that the Subversion client isn't left waiting forever for the commit to finish. In addition to this post-commit hook, you'll need a post-revprop-change hook as well so that when a user, say, modifies a log message, the slave servers get that change also:

#!/bin/sh
# Post-revprop-change script to replicate revprop-changes to slaves

REV=${2}
svnsync copy-revprops http://slave1.example.com/svn-proxy-sync ${REV} > /dev/null 2>&1 &
svnsync copy-revprops http://slave2.example.com/svn-proxy-sync ${REV} > /dev/null 2>&1 &
svnsync copy-revprops http://slave3.example.com/svn-proxy-sync ${REV} > /dev/null 2>&1 &

The only thing we've left out here is what to do about user-level locks (of the svn lock variety). Locks are enforced by the master server during commit operations; but all the information about locks is distributed during read operations such as svn update and svn status by the slave server. As such, a fully functioning proxy setup needs to perfectly replicate lock information from the master server to the slave servers. Unfortunately, most of the mechanisms that one might employ to accomplish this replication fall short in one way or another[52]. Many teams don't use Subversion's locking features at all, so this may be a nonissue for you. Sadly, for those teams which do use locks, we have no recommendations on how to gracefully work around this shortcoming.

4.6.3.3. 告诫

Your master/slave replication system should now be ready to use. A couple of words of warning are in order, however. Remember that this replication isn't entirely robust in the face of computer or network crashes. For example, if one of the automated svnsync commands fails to complete for some reason, the slaves will begin to fall behind. For example, your remote users will see that they've committed revision 100, but then when they run svn update, their local server will tell them that revision 100 doesn't yet exist! Of course, the problem will be automatically fixed the next time another commit happens and the subsequent svnsync is successful—the sync will replicate all waiting revisions. But still, you may want to set up some sort of out-of-band monitoring to notice synchronization failures and force svnsync to run when things go wrong.

4.6.4. 其它的 Apache 特性

Several of the features already provided by Apache in its role as a robust web server can be leveraged for increased functionality or security in Subversion as well. The Subversion client is able to use SSL (the Secure Sockets Layer, discussed earlier). If your Subversion client is built to support SSL, it can access your Apache server using https:// and enjoy a high-quality encrypted network session.

同样有用的是Apache和Subversion关系的一些特性,像可以指定自定义的端口(而不是缺省的HTTP的80)或者是一个Subversion可以被访问的虚拟主机名,或者是通过HTTP代理服务器访问的能力,这些特性都是Neon所支持的,所以Subversion轻易得到这些支持。

Finally, because mod_dav_svn is speaking a subset of the WebDAV/DeltaV protocol, it's possible to access the repository via third-party DAV clients. Most modern operating systems (Win32, OS X, and Linux) have the built-in ability to mount a DAV server as a standard network shared folder. This is a complicated topic, but also wondrous when implemented. For details, read 附录 C, WebDAV 和自动版本.

Note that there are a number of other small tweaks one can make to mod_dav_svn that are too obscure to mention in this chapter. For a complete list of all httpd.conf directives that mod_dav_svn responds to, see “指令”一节.

5. 基于路径的授权

Both Apache and svnserve are capable of granting (or denying) permissions to users. Typically this is done over the entire repository: a user can read the repository (or not), and she can write to the repository (or not). It's also possible, however, to define finer-grained access rules. One set of users may have permission to write to a certain directory in the repository, but not others; another directory might not even be readable by all but a few special people. As files are paths, too, it's even possible to restrict access on a per file basis.

Both servers use a common file format to describe these path-based access rules. In the case of Apache, one needs to load the mod_authz_svn module and then add the AuthzSVNAccessFile directive (within the httpd.conf file) pointing to your own access rules file. (For a full explanation, see 第 4.4.2 节 “每目录访问控制”.) If you're using svnserve, you need to make the authz-db variable (within svnserve.conf) point to your access rules file.

Once your server knows where to find your access file, it's time to define the rules.

The syntax of the file is the same familiar one used by svnserve.conf and the runtime configuration files. Lines that start with a hash (#) are ignored. In its simplest form, each section names a repository and path within it, as well as the authenticated usernames are the option names within each section. The value of each option describes the user's level of access to the repository path: either r (read-only) or rw (read/write). If the user is not mentioned at all, no access is allowed.

To be more specific: the value of the section names is either of the form [repos-name:path] or of the form [path].

[警告]警告

Subversion treats repository names and paths in a case-insensitive fashion for the purposes of access control, converting them to lower case internally before comparing them against the contents of your access file. Use lower case for the contents of the section headers in your access file.

If you're using the SVNParentPath directive, it's important to specify the repository names in your sections. If you omit them, a section such as [/some/dir] will match the path /some/dir in every repository. If you're using the SVNPath directive, however, it's fine to only define paths in your sections—after all, there's only one repository.

[calc:/branches/calc/bug-142]
harry = rw
sally = r

In this first example, the user harry has full read and write access on the /branches/calc/bug-142 directory in the calc repository, but the user sally has read-only access. Any other users are blocked from accessing this directory.

[警告]警告

mod_dav_svn offers a directive, SVNReposName, which allows administrators to define a more human-friendly name, of sorts, for a repository:

<Location /svn/calc>
  SVNPath /var/svn/calc
  SVNReposName "Calculator Application"
…

This allows mod_dav_svn to identify the repository by something other than merely its server directory basename—calc, in the previous example—when providing directory listings of repository content. Be aware, however, that when consulting the access file for authorization rules, Subversion uses this repository basename for comparison, not any configured human-friendly name.

Of course, permissions are inherited from parent to child directory. That means we can specify a subdirectory with a different access policy for Sally:

[calc:/branches/calc/bug-142]
harry = rw
sally = r

# give sally write access only to the 'testing' subdir
[calc:/branches/calc/bug-142/testing]
sally = rw

Now Sally can write to the testing subdirectory of the branch, but can still only read other parts. Harry, meanwhile, continues to have complete read/write access to the whole branch.

也可以通过继承规则明确的的拒绝某人的访问,只需要设置用户名参数为空:

[calc:/branches/calc/bug-142]
harry = rw
sally = r

[calc:/branches/calc/bug-142/secret]
harry =

In this example, Harry has read/write access to the entire bug-142 tree, but has absolutely no access at all to the secret subdirectory within it.

[提示]提示

The thing to remember is that the most specific path always matches first. The server tries to match the path itself, and then the parent of the path, then the parent of that, and so on. The net effect is that mentioning a specific path in the access file will always override any permissions inherited from parent directories.

By default, nobody has any access to the repository at all. That means that if you're starting with an empty file, you'll probably want to give at least read permission to all users at the root of the repository. You can do this by using the asterisk variable (*), which means all users:

[/]
* = r

This is a common setup; notice that no repository name is mentioned in the section name. This makes all repositories world-readable to all users. Once all users have read access to the repositories, you can give explicit rw permission to certain users on specific subdirectories within specific repositories.

访问文件也允许你定义一组的用户,很像Unix的/etc/group文件:

[groups]
calc-developers = harry, sally, joe
paint-developers = frank, sally, jane
everyone = harry, sally, joe, frank, jane

Groups can be granted access control just like users. Distinguish them with an at (@) prefix:

[calc:/projects/calc]
@calc-developers = rw

[paint:/projects/paint]
jane = r
@paint-developers = rw

Another important fact is that group permissions are not overridden by individual user permissions. Rather, the combination of all matching permissions is granted. In the prior example, Jane is a member of the paint-developers group, which has read/write access. Combined with the jane = r rule, this still gives Jane read/write access. Permissions for group members can only be extended beyond the permissions the group already has. Restricting users who are part of a group to less than their group's permissions is impossible.

组中也可以定义为包含其它的组:

[groups]
calc-developers = harry, sally, joe
paint-developers = frank, sally, jane
everyone = @calc-developers, @paint-developers

Subversion 1.5 brought several useful features to the access file syntax—username aliases, authentication class tokens, and a new rule exclusion mechanism—all of which further simplify the maintenance of the access file. We'll describe first the username aliases feature.

Some authentication systems expect and carry relatively short usernames of the sorts we've been describing here—harry, sally, joe, and so on. But other authentication systems—such as those which use LDAP stores or SSL client certificates—may carry much more complex usernames. For example, Harry's username in an LDAP-protected system might be CN=Harold Hacker,OU=Engineers,DC=red-bean,DC=com. With usernames like that, the access file can become quite bloated with long or obscure usernames that are easy to mistype. Fortunately, username aliases allow you to have to type the correct complex username only once, in a statement which assigns to it a more easily digestable alias.

[aliases]
harry = CN=Harold Hacker,OU=Engineers,DC=red-bean,DC=com
sally = CN=Sally Swatterbug,OU=Engineers,DC=red-bean,DC=com
joe = CN=Gerald I. Joseph,OU=Engineers,DC=red-bean,DC=com
…

Once you've defined a set of aliases, you can refer to the users elsewhere in the access file via their aliases in all the same places you could have instead used their actual usernames. Simply prepend an ampersand to the alias to distinguish it from a regular username:

[groups]
calc-developers = &harry, &sally, &joe
paint-developers = &frank, &sally, &jane
everyone = @calc-developers, @paint-developers

You might also choose to use aliases if your users' usernames change frequently. Doing so allows you to need to update only the aliases table when these username changes occur, instead of doing global-search-and-replace operations on the whole access file.

Subversion also supports some magic tokens for helping you to make rule assignments based on the user's authentication class. One such token is the $authenticated token. Use this token where you would otherwise specify a username, alias, or group name in your authorization rules to declare the permissions granted to any user who has authenticated with any username at all. Similarly employed is the $anonymous token, except that it matches everyone who has not authenticated with a username.

[calendar:/projects/calendar]
$anonymous = r
$authenticated = rw

Finally, another handy bit of access file syntax magic is the use of the tilde (~) character as an exclusion marker. In your authorization rules, prefixing a username, alias, group name, or authentication class token with a tilde character will cause Subversion to apply the rule to users who do not match the rule. Though somewhat unnecessarily obfuscated, the following block is equivalent to the one in the previous example:

[calendar:/projects/calendar]
~$authenticated = r
~$anonymous = rw

A less obvious example might be as follows:

[groups]
calc-developers = &harry, &sally, &joe
calc-owners = &hewlett, &packard
calc = @calc-developers, @calc-owners

# Any calc participant has read-write access...
[calc:/projects/calc]
@calc = rw

# ...but only allow the owners to make and modify release tags.
[calc:/projects/calc/tags]
~@calc-owners = r

All of the above examples use directories, because defining access rules on them is the most common case. But is similarly able to restrict access on file paths, too.

[calendar:/projects/calendar/manager.ics]
harry = rw
sally = r

6. High-level Logging

Both the Apache httpd and svnserve Subversion servers provide support for high-level logging of Subversion operations. Configuring each of the server options to provide this level of logging is done differently, of course, but the output from each is designed to conform to a uniform syntax.

To enable high-level logging in svnserve, you need only use the --log-file command-line option when starting the server, passing as the value to the option the file to which svnserve should write its log output.

$ svnserve -d -r /path/to/repositories --log-file /var/log/svn.log

Enabling the same in Apache is a bit more involved, but is essentially an extension of Apache's stock log output configuration mechanisms—see 第 4.6.2 节 “Apache 日志” for details.

The following is a list of Subversion action log messages produced by its high-level logging mechanism, followed by one or more examples of the log message as it appears in the log output.

检出或导出
checkout-or-export /path r62 depth=infinity
Commit
commit harry r100
Diffs
diff /path r15:20 depth=infinity ignore-ancestry
diff /path1@15 /path2@20 depth=infinity ignore-ancestry
获取目录
get-dir /trunk r17 text
获取文件
get-file /path r20 props
获取文件版本
get-file-revs /path r12:15 include-merged-revisions
获取合并信息
get-mergeinfo (/path1 /path2)
Lock
lock /path steal
Log
log (/path1,/path2,/path3) r20:90 discover-changed-paths revprops=()
版本重演 (svnsync)
replay /path r19
修订版本属性修改
change-rev-prop r50 propertyname
修订版本属性列表
rev-proplist r34
状态
status /path r62 depth=infinity
Switch
switch /pathA /pathB@50 depth=infinity
Unlock
unlock /path break
更新
update /path r17 send-copyfrom-args

As a convenience to administrators who wish to post-process their Subversion high-level logging output (perhaps for reporting or analysis purposes), Subversion source code distributions provide a Python module (located at tools/server-side/svn_server_log_parse.py) which can be used to parse Subversion's log output.

7. 支持多种版本库访问方法

You've seen how a repository can be accessed in many different ways. But is it possible—or safe—for your repository to be accessed by multiple methods simultaneously? The answer is yes, provided you use a bit of foresight.

在任何给定的时间,这些进程会要求读或者写访问你的版本库:

  • 常规的系统用户使用Subversion客户端(客户端程序本身)通过file://URL直接访问版本库

  • 常规的系统用户连接使用SSH调用的访问版本库的svnserve进程(就像它们自己运行一样);

  • An svnserve process—either a daemon or one launched by inetd—running as a particular fixed user

  • 一个Apache httpd进程,以一个固定用户运行

The most common problem administrators run into is repository ownership and permissions. Does every process (or user) in the preceding list have the rights to read and write the repository's underlying data files? Assuming you have a Unix-like operating system, a straightforward approach might be to place every potential repository user into a new svn group, and make the repository wholly owned by that group. But even that's not enough, because a process may write to the database files using an unfriendly umask—one that prevents access by other users.

So the next step beyond setting up a common group for repository users is to force every repository-accessing process to use a sane umask. For users accessing the repository directly, you can make the svn program into a wrapper script that first runs umask 002 and then runs the real svn client program. You can write a similar wrapper script for the svnserve program, and add a umask 002 command to Apache's own startup script, apachectl. For example:

$ cat /usr/bin/svn

#!/bin/sh

umask 002
/usr/bin/svn-real "$@"

Another common problem is often encountered on Unix-like systems. If your repository is backed by Berkeley DB, for example, it occasionally creates new log files to journal its actions. Even if the Berkeley DB repository is wholly owned by the svn group, these newly created log files won't necessarily be owned by that same group, which then creates more permissions problems for your users. A good workaround is to set the group SUID bit on the repository's db directory. This causes all newly created log files to have the same group owner as the parent directory.

Once you've jumped through these hoops, your repository should be accessible by all the necessary processes. It may seem a bit messy and complicated, but the problems of having multiple users sharing write access to common files are classic ones that are not often elegantly solved.

Fortunately, most repository administrators will never need to have such a complex configuration. Users who wish to access repositories that live on the same machine are not limited to using file:// access URLs—they can typically contact the Apache HTTP server or svnserve using localhost for the server name in their http:// or svn:// URL. And maintaining multiple server processes for your Subversion repositories is likely to be more of a headache than necessary. We recommend that you choose a single server that best meets your needs and stick with it!




[44] 见RFC 2195。

[45] 请注意,使用svnserve的访问控制进行权限控制将会失去意义,因为用户已经直接访问到了版本库数据。

[46] 我们实际上不支持这个,因为RSH在安全性上显著不如SSH。

[48] 他们讨厌这样做。

[51] While self-signed certificates are still vulnerable to a man-in-the-middle attack, such an attack is much more difficult for a casual observer to pull off, compared to sniffing unprotected passwords.

[53] 本书的共同主题!

第 7 章 定制你的 Subversion 体验

Version control can be a complex subject, as much art as science, that offers myriad ways of getting stuff done. Throughout this book, you've read of the various Subversion command-line client subcommands and the options that modify their behavior. In this chapter, we'll look into still more ways to customize the way Subversion works for you—setting up the Subversion runtime configuration, using external helper applications, Subversion's interaction with the operating system's configured locale, and so on.

1. 运行配置区

Subversion provides many optional behaviors that the user can control. Many of these options are of the kind that a user would wish to apply to all Subversion operations. So, rather than forcing users to remember command-line arguments for specifying these options and to use them for every operation they perform, Subversion uses configuration files, segregated into a Subversion configuration area.

The Subversion configuration area is a two-tiered hierarchy of option names and their values. Usually, this boils down to a special directory that contains configuration files (the first tier), which are just text files in standard INI format where sections provide the second tier. You can easily edit these files using your favorite text editor (such as Emacs or vi), and they contain directives read by the client to determine which of several optional behaviors the user prefers.

1.1. 配置区布局

The first time the svn command-line client is executed, it creates a per-user configuration area. On Unix-like systems, this area appears as a directory named .subversion in the user's home directory. On Win32 systems, Subversion creates a folder named Subversion, typically inside the Application Data area of the user's profile directory (which, by the way, is usually a hidden directory). However, on this platform, the exact location differs from system to system and is dictated by the Windows Registry.[54] We will refer to the per-user configuration area using its Unix name, .subversion.

In addition to the per-user configuration area, Subversion also recognizes the existence of a system-wide configuration area. This gives system administrators the ability to establish defaults for all users on a given machine. Note that the system-wide configuration area alone does not dictate mandatory policy—the settings in the per-user configuration area override those in the system-wide one, and command-line arguments supplied to the svn program have the final word on behavior. On Unix-like platforms, the system-wide configuration area is expected to be the /etc/subversion directory; on Windows machines, it looks for a Subversion directory inside the common Application Data location (again, as specified by the Windows Registry). Unlike the per-user case, the svn program does not attempt to create the system-wide configuration area.

The per-user configuration area currently contains three files—two configuration files (config and servers), and a README.txt file, which describes the INI format. At the time of their creation, the files contain default values for each of the supported Subversion options, mostly commented out and grouped with textual descriptions about how the values for the key affect Subversion's behavior. To change a certain behavior, you need only to load the appropriate configuration file into a text editor, and to modify the desired option's value. If at any time you wish to have the default configuration settings restored, you can simply remove (or rename) your configuration directory and then run some innocuous svn command, such as svn --version. A new configuration directory with the default contents will be created.

Subversion also allows you to override individual configuration option values at the command line via the --config-option option, which is especially useful if you need to make a (very) temporary change in behavior. For more about this option's proper usage, see 第 1.1 节 “svn 选项”.

The per-user configuration area also contains a cache of authentication data. The auth directory holds a set of subdirectories that contain pieces of cached information used by Subversion's various supported authentication methods. This directory is created in such a way that only the user herself has permission to read its contents.

1.2. 配置和 Windows 注册表

In addition to the usual INI-based configuration area, Subversion clients running on Windows platforms may also use the Windows Registry to hold the configuration data. The option names and their values are the same as in the INI files. The file/section hierarchy is preserved as well, though addressed in a slightly different fashion—in this schema, files and sections are just levels in the Registry key tree.

Subversion looks for system-wide configuration values under the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Tigris.org\Subversion key. For example, the global-ignores option, which is in the miscellany section of the config file, would be found at HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Tigris.org\Subversion\Config\Miscellany\global-ignores. Per-user configuration values should be stored under HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Tigris.org\Subversion.

Registry-based configuration options are parsed before their file-based counterparts, so they are overridden by values found in the configuration files. In other words, Subversion looks for configuration information in the following locations on a Windows system; lower-numbered locations take precedence over higher-numbered locations:

  1. 命令行选项

  2. 用户INI配置文件

  3. 用户注册表值

  4. 系统INI配置文件

  5. 系统注册表值

Also, the Windows Registry doesn't really support the notion of something being commented out. However, Subversion will ignore any option key whose name begins with a hash (#) character. This allows you to effectively comment out a Subversion option without deleting the entire key from the Registry, obviously simplifying the process of restoring that option.

The svn command-line client never attempts to write to the Windows Registry and will not attempt to create a default configuration area there. You can create the keys you need using the REGEDIT program. Alternatively, you can create a .reg file (such as the one in 例 7.1 “注册表条目(.reg)文件样例”), and then double-click on that file's icon in the Explorer shell, which will cause the data to be merged into your Registry.

例 7.1. 注册表条目(.reg)文件样例

REGEDIT4

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Tigris.org\Subversion\Servers\groups]

[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Tigris.org\Subversion\Servers\global]
"#http-auth-types"="basic;digest;negotiate"
"#http-compression"="yes"
"#http-library"=""
"#http-proxy-exceptions"=""
"#http-proxy-host"=""
"#http-proxy-password"=""
"#http-proxy-port"=""
"#http-proxy-username"=""
"#http-timeout"="0"
"#neon-debug-mask"=""
"#ssl-authority-files"=""
"#ssl-client-cert-file"=""
"#ssl-client-cert-password"=""
"#ssl-pkcs11-provider"=""
"#ssl-trust-default-ca"=""
"#store-auth-creds"="yes"
"#store-passwords"="yes"
"#store-plaintext-passwords"="ask"
"#store-ssl-client-cert-pp"="yes"
"#store-ssl-client-cert-pp-plaintext"="ask"
"#username"=""

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Tigris.org\Subversion\Config\auth]
"#password-stores"="windows-cryptoapi"

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Tigris.org\Subversion\Config\helpers]
"#diff-cmd"=""
"#diff3-cmd"=""
"#diff3-has-program-arg"=""
"#editor-cmd"="notepad"
"#merge-tool-cmd"=""

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Tigris.org\Subversion\Config\tunnels]

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Tigris.org\Subversion\Config\miscellany]
"#enable-auto-props"="no"
"#global-ignores"="*.o *.lo *.la *.al .libs *.so *.so.[0-9]* *.a *.pyc *.pyo *.rej *~ #*# .#* .*.swp .DS_Store"
"#interactive-conflicts"="yes"
"#log-encoding"=""
"#mime-types-file"=""
"#no-unlock"="no"
"#preserved-conflict-file-exts"="doc ppt xls od?"
"#use-commit-times"="no"

[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Tigris.org\Subversion\Config\auto-props]


例 7.1 “注册表条目(.reg)文件样例” shows the contents of a .reg file, which contains some of the most commonly used configuration options and their default values. Note the presence of both system-wide (for network proxy-related options) and per-user settings (editor programs and password storage, among others). Also note that all the options are effectively commented out. You need only to remove the hash (#) character from the beginning of the option names and set the values as you desire.

1.3. 配置选项

In this section, we will discuss the specific runtime configuration options that Subversion currently supports.

1.3.1. 服务器

The servers file contains Subversion configuration options related to the network layers. There are two special sections in this file—[groups] and [global]. The [groups] section is essentially a cross-reference table. The keys in this section are the names of other sections in the file; their values are globs—textual tokens that possibly contain wildcard characters—that are compared against the hostnames of the machine to which Subversion requests are sent.

[groups]
beanie-babies = *.red-bean.com
collabnet = svn.collab.net

[beanie-babies]
…

[collabnet]
…

When Subversion is used over a network, it attempts to match the name of the server it is trying to reach with a group name under the [groups] section. If a match is made, Subversion then looks for a section in the servers file whose name is the matched group's name. From that section, it reads the actual network configuration settings.

The [global] section contains the settings that are meant for all of the servers not matched by one of the globs under the [groups] section. The options available in this section are exactly the same as those that are valid for the other server sections in the file (except, of course, the special [groups] section), and are as follows:

http-auth-types

This is a semicolon-delimited list of HTTP authentication types which the client will deem acceptable. Valid types are basic, digest, and negotiate, with the default behavior being acceptance of any these authentication types. A client which insists on not transmitting authentication credentials in cleartext might, for example, be configured such that the value of this option is digest;negotiate—omitting basic from the list. (Note that this setting is only honored by Subversion's Neon-based HTTP provider module.)

http-compression

This specifies whether Subversion should attempt to compress network requests made to DAV-ready servers. The default value is yes (though compression will occur only if that capability is compiled into the network layer). Set this to no to disable compression, such as when debugging network transmissions.

http-library

Subversion provides a pair of repository access modules that understand its WebDAV network protocol. The original one, which shipped with Subversion 1.0, is libsvn_ra_neon (though back then it was called libsvn_ra_dav). Newer Subversion versions also provide libsvn_ra_serf, which uses a different underlying implementation and aims to support some of the newer HTTP concepts.

At this point, libsvn_ra_serf is still considered experimental, though it appears to work in the common cases quite well. To encourage experimentation, Subversion provides the http-library runtime configuration option to allow users to specify (generally, or in a per-server-group fashion) which WebDAV access module they'd prefer to use—neon or serf.

http-proxy-exceptions

This specifies a comma-separated list of patterns for repository hostnames that should be accessed directly, without using the proxy machine. The pattern syntax is the same as is used in the Unix shell for filenames. A repository hostname matching any of these patterns will not be proxied.

http-proxy-host

This specifies the hostname of the proxy computer through which your HTTP-based Subversion requests must pass. It defaults to an empty value, which means that Subversion will not attempt to route HTTP requests through a proxy computer, and will instead attempt to contact the destination machine directly.

http-proxy-password

指定代理服务器的密码。缺省为空。

http-proxy-port

指定代理服务器的端口。缺省值为空。

http-proxy-username

指定代理服务器的用户名。缺省值为空。

http-timeout

This specifies the amount of time, in seconds, to wait for a server response. If you experience problems with a slow network connection causing Subversion operations to time out, you should increase the value of this option. The default value is 0, which instructs the underlying HTTP library, Neon, to use its default timeout setting.

neon-debug-mask

This is an integer mask that the underlying HTTP library, Neon, uses for choosing what type of debugging output to yield. The default value is 0, which will silence all debugging output. For more information about how Subversion makes use of Neon, see 第 8 章 嵌入 Subversion.

ssl-authority-files

这是一个分号分割的路径和文件列表,这些文件包含了Subversion客户端在用HTTPS访问时可以接受的认证授权(或者CA)证书。

ssl-client-cert-file

If a host (or set of hosts) requires an SSL client certificate, you'll normally be prompted for a path to your certificate. By setting this variable to that same path, Subversion will be able to find your client certificate automatically without prompting you. There's no standard place to store your certificate on disk; Subversion will grab it from any path you specify.

ssl-client-cert-password

If your SSL client certificate file is encrypted by a passphrase, Subversion will prompt you for the passphrase whenever the certificate is used. If you find this annoying (and don't mind storing the password in the servers file), you can set this variable to the certificate's passphrase. You won't be prompted anymore.

ssl-pkcs11-provider

The value of this option is the name of the PKCS#11 provider from which an SSL client certificate will be drawn (if the server asks for one). This setting is only honored by Subversion's Neon-based HTTP provider module.

ssl-trust-default-ca

如果你希望Subversion可以自动相信OpenSSL携带的缺省的CA,可以设置为yes

store-auth-creds

This setting is the same as store-passwords, except that it enables or disables on-disk caching of all authentication information: usernames, passwords, server certificates, and any other types of cacheable credentials.

store-passwords

This instructs Subversion to cache, or not to cache, passwords that are supplied by the user in response to server authentication challenges. The default value is yes. Set this to no to disable this on-disk password caching. You can override this option for a single instance of the svn command using the --no-auth-cache command-line parameter (for those subcommands that support it). For more information regarding that, see 第 11.2.1 节 “缓存凭证”. Note that regardless of how this option is configured, Subversion will not store passwords in plaintext unless the store-plaintext-passwords option is also set to yes.

store-plaintext-passwords

This variable is only important on UNIX-like systems. It controls what the Subversion client does in case the password for the current authentication realm can only be cached on disk in unencrypted form, in the ~/.subversion/auth/ caching area. You can set it to yes or no to enable or disable caching of passwords in unencrypted form, respectively. The default setting is ask, which causes the Subversion client to ask you each time a new password is about to be added to the ~/.subversion/auth/ caching area.

store-ssl-client-cert-pp

This option controls whether Subversion will cache SSL client certificate passphrases provided by the user. Its value defaults to yes. Set this to no to disable this passphrase caching.

store-ssl-client-cert-pp-plaintext

This option controls whether Subversion, when attempting to cache an SSL client certificate passphrase, will be allowed to do so using its on-disk plaintext storage mechanism. The default value of this option is ask, which causes the Subversion client to ask you each time a new client certificate passphrase is about to be added to the ~/.subversion/auth/ caching area. Set this option's value to yes or no to indicate your preference and avoid related prompts.

1.3.2. 配置

The config file contains the rest of the currently available Subversion runtime options—those not related to networking. There are only a few options in use as of this writing, but they are again grouped into sections in expectation of future additions.

The [auth] section contains settings related to Subversion's authentication and authorization against the repository. It contains the following:

password-stores

This comma-delimited list specifies which (if any) system-provided password stores Subversion should attempt to use when saving and retrieving cached authentication credentials, and in what order Subversion should prefer them. The default value is gnome-keyring, kwallet, keychain, windows-crypto-api, representing the GNOME Keyring, KDE Wallet, Mac OS X Keychain, and Microsoft Windows cryptography API, respectively. Listed stores which are not available on the system are ignored.

store-passwords

This option has been deprecated from the config file. It now lives as a per-server configuration item in the servers configuration area. See 第 1.3.1 节 “服务器” for details.

store-auth-creds

This option has been deprecated from the config file. It now lives as a per-server configuration item in the servers configuration area. See 第 1.3.1 节 “服务器” for details.

The [helpers] section controls which external applications Subversion uses to accomplish its tasks. Valid options in this section are:

diff-cmd

This specifies the absolute path of a differencing program, used when Subversion generates diff output (such as when using the svn diff command). By default, Subversion uses an internal differencing library—setting this option will cause it to perform this task using an external program. See 第 4 节 “使用外置比较与合并工具” for more details on using such programs.

diff3-cmd

This specifies the absolute path of a three-way differencing program. Subversion uses this program to merge changes made by the user with those received from the repository. By default, Subversion uses an internal differencing library—setting this option will cause it to perform this task using an external program. See 第 4 节 “使用外置比较与合并工具” for more details on using such programs.

diff3-has-program-arg

如果diff3-cmd选项设置的程序接受一个--diff-program命令行参数,这个标记必须设置为true

editor-cmd

This specifies the program Subversion will use to query the user for certain types of textual metadata or when interactively resolving conflicts. See 第 3 节 “使用外置编辑器” for more details on using external text editors with Subversion.

merge-tool-cmd

This specifies the program that Subversion will use to perform three-way merge operations on your versioned files. See 第 4 节 “使用外置比较与合并工具” for more details on using such programs.

The [tunnels] section allows you to define new tunnel schemes for use with svnserve and svn:// client connections. For more details, see 第 3.4 节 “穿越 SSH 隧道”.

The miscellany section is where everything that doesn't belong elsewhere winds up.[55] In this section, you can find:

enable-auto-props

This instructs Subversion to automatically set properties on newly added or imported files. The default value is no, so set this to yes to enable this feature. The [auto-props] section of this file specifies which properties are to be set on which files.

global-ignores

When running the svn status command, Subversion lists unversioned files and directories along with the versioned ones, annotating them with a ? character (see 第 4.3.1 节 “查看你的修改概况”). Sometimes it can be annoying to see uninteresting, unversioned items—for example, object files that result from a program's compilation—in this display. The global-ignores option is a list of whitespace-delimited globs that describe the names of files and directories that Subversion should not display unless they are versioned. The default value is *.o *.lo *.la *.al .libs *.so *.so.[0-9]* *.a *.pyc *.pyo *.rej *~ #*# .#* .*.swp .DS_Store.

As well as svn status, the svn add and svn import commands also ignore files that match the list when they are scanning a directory. You can override this behavior for a single instance of any of these commands by explicitly specifying the filename, or by using the --no-ignore command-line flag.

For information on finer-grained control of ignored items, see 第 5 节 “忽略未版本控制的条目”.

interactive-conflicts

This is a Boolean option that specifies whether Subversion should try to resolve conflicts interactively. If its value is yes (which is the default value), Subversion will prompt the user for how to handle conflicts in the manner demonstrated in 第 4.5 节 “解决冲突”. Otherwise, it will simply flag the conflict and continue its operation, postponing resolution to a later time.

log-encoding

This variable sets the default character set encoding for commit log messages. It's a permanent form of the --encoding option (see 第 1.1 节 “svn 选项”). The Subversion repository stores log messages in UTF-8 and assumes that your log message is written using your operating system's native locale. You should specify a different encoding if your commit messages are written in any other encoding.

mime-types-file

This option, new to Subversion 1.5, specifies the path of a MIME types mapping file, such as the mime.types file provided by the Apache HTTP Server. Subversion uses this file to assign MIME types to newly added or imported files. See 第 3.4 节 “自动设置属性” and 第 4.1 节 “文件内容类型” for more about Subversion's detection and use of file content types.

no-unlock

This Boolean option corresponds to svn commit's --no-unlock option, which tells Subversion not to release locks on files you've just committed. If this runtime option is set to yes, Subversion will never release locks automatically, leaving you to run svn unlock explicitly. It defaults to no.

preserved-conflict-file-exts

The value of this option is a space-delimited list of file extensions that Subversion should preserve when generating conflict filenames. By default, the list is empty. This option is new to Subversion 1.5.

When Subversion detects conflicting file content changes, it defers resolution of those conflicts to the user. To assist in the resolution, Subversion keeps pristine copies of the various competing versions of the file in the working copy. By default, those conflict files have names constructed by appending to the original filename a custom extension such as .mine or .REV (where REV is a revision number). A mild annoyance with this naming scheme is that on operating systems where a file's extension determines the default application used to open and edit that file, appending a custom extension prevents the file from being easily opened by its native application. For example, if the file ReleaseNotes.pdf was conflicted, the conflict files might be named ReleaseNotes.pdf.mine or ReleaseNotes.pdf.r4231. While your system might be configured to use Adobe's Acrobat Reader to open files whose extensions are .pdf, there probably isn't an application configured on your system to open all files whose extensions are .r4231.

You can fix this annoyance by using this configuration option, though. For files with one of the specified extensions, Subversion will append to the conflict file names the custom extension just as before, but then also reappend the file's original extension. Using the previous example, and assuming that pdf is one of the extensions configured in this list thereof, the conflict files generated for ReleaseNotes.pdf would instead be named ReleaseNotes.pdf.mine.pdf and ReleaseNotes.pdf.r4231.pdf. Because each file ends in .pdf, the correct default application will be used to view them.

use-commit-times

Normally your working copy files have timestamps that reflect the last time they were touched by any process, whether your own editor or some svn subcommand. This is generally convenient for people developing software, because build systems often look at timestamps as a way of deciding which files need to be recompiled.

In other situations, however, it's sometimes nice for the working copy files to have timestamps that reflect the last time they were changed in the repository. The svn export command always places these last-commit timestamps on trees that it produces. By setting this config variable to yes, the svn checkout, svn update, svn switch, and svn revert commands will also set last-commit timestamps on files that they touch.

The [auto-props] section controls the Subversion client's ability to automatically set properties on files when they are added or imported. It contains any number of key-value pairs in the format PATTERN = PROPNAME=VALUE[;PROPNAME=VALUE ...], where PATTERN is a file pattern that matches one or more filenames and the rest of the line is a semicolon-delimited set of property assignments. Multiple matches on a file will result in multiple propsets for that file; however, there is no guarantee that auto-props will be applied in the order in which they are listed in the config file, so you can't have one rule override another. You can find several examples of auto-props usage in the config file. Lastly, don't forget to set enable-auto-props to yes in the miscellany section if you want to enable auto-props.

2. 本地化

Localization is the act of making programs behave in a region-specific way. When a program formats numbers or dates in a way specific to your part of the world or prints messages (or accepts input) in your native language, the program is said to be localized. This section describes steps Subversion has made toward localization.

2.1. 理解区域设置

Most modern operating systems have a notion of the current locale—that is, the region or country whose localization conventions are honored. These conventions—typically chosen by some runtime configuration mechanism on the computer—affect the way in which programs present data to the user, as well as the way in which they accept user input.

在类Unix的系统,你可以运行locale命令来检查本地关联的运行配置的选项值:

$ locale
LANG=
LC_COLLATE="C"
LC_CTYPE="C"
LC_MESSAGES="C"
LC_MONETARY="C"
LC_NUMERIC="C"
LC_TIME="C"
LC_ALL="C"
$

The output is a list of locale-related environment variables and their current values. In this example, the variables are all set to the default C locale, but users can set these variables to specific country/language code combinations. For example, if one were to set the LC_TIME variable to fr_CA, programs would know to present time and date information formatted according to a French-speaking Canadian's expectations. And if one were to set the LC_MESSAGES variable to zh_TW, programs would know to present human-readable messages in Traditional Chinese. Setting the LC_ALL variable has the effect of changing every locale variable to the same value. The value of LANG is used as a default value for any locale variable that is unset. To see the list of available locales on a Unix system, run the command locale -a.

On Windows, locale configuration is done via the Regional and Language Options control panel item. There you can view and select the values of individual settings from the available locales, and even customize (at a sickening level of detail) several of the display formatting conventions.

2.2. Subversion 对区域设置的使用

The Subversion client, svn, honors the current locale configuration in two ways. First, it notices the value of the LC_MESSAGES variable and attempts to print all messages in the specified language. For example:

$ export LC_MESSAGES=de_DE
$ svn help cat
cat: Gibt den Inhalt der angegebenen Dateien oder URLs aus.
Aufruf: cat ZIEL[@REV]...
…

This behavior works identically on both Unix and Windows systems. Note, though, that while your operating system might have support for a certain locale, the Subversion client still may not be able to speak the particular language. In order to produce localized messages, human volunteers must provide translations for each language. The translations are written using the GNU gettext package, which results in translation modules that end with the .mo filename extension. For example, the German translation file is named de.mo. These translation files are installed somewhere on your system. On Unix, they typically live in /usr/share/locale/, while on Windows they're often found in the share\locale\ folder in Subversion's installation area. Once installed, a module is named after the program for which it provides translations. For example, the de.mo file may ultimately end up installed as /usr/share/locale/de/LC_MESSAGES/subversion.mo. By browsing the installed .mo files, you can see which languages the Subversion client is able to speak.

The second way in which the locale is honored involves how svn interprets your input. The repository stores all paths, filenames, and log messages in Unicode, encoded as UTF-8. In that sense, the repository is internationalized—that is, the repository is ready to accept input in any human language. This means, however, that the Subversion client is responsible for sending only UTF-8 filenames and log messages into the repository. To do this, it must convert the data from the native locale into UTF-8.

For example, suppose you create a file named caffè.txt, and then when committing the file, you write the log message as Adesso il caffè è più forte. Both the filename and the log message contain non-ASCII characters, but because your locale is set to it_IT, the Subversion client knows to interpret them as Italian. It uses an Italian character set to convert the data to UTF-8 before sending it off to the repository.

Note that while the repository demands UTF-8 filenames and log messages, it does not pay attention to file contents. Subversion treats file contents as opaque strings of bytes, and neither client nor server makes an attempt to understand the character set or encoding of the contents.

3. 使用外置编辑器

The most obvious way to get data into Subversion is through the addition of files to version control, committing changes to those files, and so on. But other pieces of information besides merely versioned file data live in your Subversion repository. Some of these bits of information—commit log messages, lock comments, and some property values—tend to be textual in nature and are provided explicitly by users. Most of this information can be provided to the Subversion command-line client using the --message (-m) and --file (-F) options with the appropriate subcommands.

Each of these options has its pros and cons. For example, when performing a commit, --file (-F) works well if you've already prepared a text file that holds your commit log message. If you didn't, though, you can use --message (-m) to provide a log message on the command line. Unfortunately, it can be tricky to compose anything more than a simple one-line message on the command line. Users want more flexibility—multiline, free-form log message editing on demand.

Subversion supports this by allowing you to specify an external text editor that it will launch as necessary to give you a more powerful input mechanism for this textual metadata. There are several ways to tell Subversion which editor you'd like use. Subversion checks the following things, in the order specified, when it wants to launch such an editor:

  1. 命令行选项--editor-cmd

  2. SVN_EDITOR environment variable

  3. editor-cmd runtime configuration option

  4. VISUAL environment variable

  5. EDITOR environment variable

  6. 也有可能Subversion会有一个内置的缺省值(官方编译版本不是如此)

The value of any of these options or variables is the beginning of a command line to be executed by the shell. Subversion appends to that command line a space and the pathname of a temporary file to be edited. So, to be used with Subversion, the configured or specified editor needs to support an invocation in which its last command-line parameter is a file to be edited, and it should be able to save the file in place and return a zero exit code to indicate success.

As noted, external editors can be used to provide commit log messages to any of the committing subcommands (such as svn commit or import, svn mkdir or delete when provided a URL target, etc.), and Subversion will try to launch the editor automatically if you don't specify either of the --message (-m) or --file (-F) options. The svn propedit command is built almost entirely around the use of an external editor. And beginning in version 1.5, Subversion will also use the configured external text editor when the user asks it to launch an editor during interactive conflict resolution. Oddly, there doesn't appear to be a way to use external editors to interactively provide lock comments.

4. 使用外置比较与合并工具

The interface between Subversion and external two- and three-way differencing tools harkens back to a time when Subversion's only contextual differencing capabilities were built around invocations of the GNU diffutils toolchain, specifically the diff and diff3 utilities. To get the kind of behavior Subversion needed, it called these utilities with more than a handful of options and parameters, most of which were quite specific to the utilities. Some time later, Subversion grew its own internal differencing library, and as a failover mechanism, the --diff-cmd and --diff3-cmd options were added to the Subversion command-line client so that users could more easily indicate that they preferred to use the GNU diff and diff3 utilities instead of the newfangled internal diff library. If those options were used, Subversion would simply ignore the internal diff library, and fall back to running those external programs, lengthy argument lists and all. And that's where things remain today.

It didn't take long for folks to realize that having such easy configuration mechanisms for specifying that Subversion should use the external GNU diff and diff3 utilities located at a particular place on the system could be applied toward the use of other differencing tools, too. After all, Subversion didn't actually verify that the things it was being told to run were members of the GNU diffutils toolchain. But the only configurable aspect of using those external tools is their location on the system—not the option set, parameter order, and so on. Subversion continues to throw all those GNU utility options at your external diff tool regardless of whether that program can understand those options. And that's where things get unintuitive for most users.

[注意]注意

The decision on when to fire off a contextual two- or three-way diff as part of a larger Subversion operation is made entirely by Subversion and is affected by, among other things, whether the files being operated on are human-readable as determined by their svn:mime-type property. This means, for example, that even if you had the niftiest Microsoft Word-aware differencing or merging tool in the universe, it would never be invoked by Subversion as long as your versioned Word documents had a configured MIME type that denoted that they were not human-readable (such as application/msword). For more about MIME type settings, see 第 4.1 节 “文件内容类型”

Much later, Subversion 1.5 introduced interactive resolution of conflicts (described in 第 4.5 节 “解决冲突”). One of the options that this feature provides to users is the ability to interactively launch a third-party merge tool. If this action is taken, Subversion will check to see if the user has specified such a tool for use in this way. Subversion will first check the SVN_MERGE environment variable for the name of an external merge tool. If that variable is not set, it will look for the same information in the value of the merge-tool-cmd runtime configuration option. Upon finding a configured external merge tool, it will invoke that tool.

[注意]注意

While the general purposes of the three-way differencing and merge tools are roughly the same (finding a way to make separate-but-overlapping file changes live in harmony), Subversion exercises each of these options at different times and for different reasons. The internal three-way differencing engine and its optional external replacement are used when interaction with the user is not expected. In fact, significant delay introduced by such a tool can actually result in the failure of some time-sensitive Subversion operations. It's the external merge tool that is intended to be invoked interactively.

Now, while the interface between Subversion and an external merge tool is significantly less convoluted than that between Subversion and the diff and diff3 tools, the likelihood of finding such a tool whose calling conventions exactly match what Subversion expects is still quite low. The key to using external differencing and merge tools with Subversion is to use wrapper scripts, which convert the input from Subversion into something that your specific differencing tool can understand, and then convert the output of your tool back into a format that Subversion expects. The following sections cover the specifics of those expectations.

4.1. 外置 diff

Subversion calls external diff programs with parameters suitable for the GNU diff utility, and expects only that the external program will return with a successful error code per the GNU diff definition thereof. For most alternative diff programs, only the sixth and seventh arguments—the paths of the files that represent the left and right sides of the diff, respectively—are of interest. Note that Subversion runs the diff program once per modified file covered by the Subversion operation, so if your program runs in an asynchronous fashion (or is backgrounded), you might have several instances of it all running simultaneously. Finally, Subversion expects that your program return an error code of 1 if your program detected differences, or 0 if it did not—any other error code is considered a fatal error.[56]

例 7.2 “diffwrap.py” and 例 7.3 “diffwrap.bat” are templates for external diff tool wrappers in the Python and Windows batch scripting languages, respectively.

例 7.2. diffwrap.py

#!/usr/bin/env python
import sys
import os

# Configure your favorite diff program here.
DIFF = "/usr/local/bin/my-diff-tool"

# Subversion provides the paths we need as the last two parameters.
LEFT  = sys.argv[-2]
RIGHT = sys.argv[-1]

# Call the diff command (change the following line to make sense for
# your diff program).
cmd = [DIFF, '--left', LEFT, '--right', RIGHT]
os.execv(cmd[0], cmd)

# Return an errorcode of 0 if no differences were detected, 1 if some were.
# Any other errorcode will be treated as fatal.


例 7.3. diffwrap.bat

@ECHO OFF

REM Configure your favorite diff program here.
SET DIFF="C:\Program Files\Funky Stuff\My Diff Tool.exe"

REM Subversion provides the paths we need as the last two parameters.
REM These are parameters 6 and 7 (unless you use svn diff -x, in
REM which case, all bets are off).
SET LEFT=%6
SET RIGHT=%7

REM Call the diff command (change the following line to make sense for
REM your diff program).
%DIFF% --left %LEFT% --right %RIGHT%

REM Return an errorcode of 0 if no differences were detected, 1 if some were.
REM Any other errorcode will be treated as fatal.


4.2. 外置 diff3

Subversion invokes three-way differencing programs to perform non-interactive merges. When configured to use an external three-way differencing program, it executes that program with parameters suitable for the GNU diff3 utility, expecting that the external program will return with a successful error code and that the full file contents that result from the completed merge operation are printed on the standard output stream (so that Subversion can redirect them into the appropriate version-controlled file). For most alternative merge programs, only the ninth, tenth, and eleventh arguments, the paths of the files which represent the mine, older, and yours inputs, respectively, are of interest. Note that because Subversion depends on the output of your merge program, your wrapper script must not exit before that output has been delivered to Subversion. When it finally does exit, it should return an error code of 0 if the merge was successful, or 1 if unresolved conflicts remain in the output—any other error code is considered a fatal error.

例 7.4 “diff3wrap.py” and 例 7.5 “diff3wrap.bat” are templates for external three-way differencing tool wrappers in the Python and Windows batch scripting languages, respectively.

例 7.4. diff3wrap.py

#!/usr/bin/env python
import sys
import os

# Configure your favorite three-way diff program here.
DIFF3 = "/usr/local/bin/my-diff3-tool"

# Subversion provides the paths we need as the last three parameters.
MINE  = sys.argv[-3]
OLDER = sys.argv[-2]
YOURS = sys.argv[-1]

# Call the three-way diff command (change the following line to make
# sense for your three-way diff program).
cmd = [DIFF3, '--older', OLDER, '--mine', MINE, '--yours', YOURS]
os.execv(cmd[0], cmd)

# After performing the merge, this script needs to print the contents
# of the merged file to stdout.  Do that in whatever way you see fit.
# Return an errorcode of 0 on successful merge, 1 if unresolved conflicts
# remain in the result.  Any other errorcode will be treated as fatal.


例 7.5. diff3wrap.bat

@ECHO OFF

REM Configure your favorite three-way diff program here.
SET DIFF3="C:\Program Files\Funky Stuff\My Diff3 Tool.exe"

REM Subversion provides the paths we need as the last three parameters.
REM These are parameters 9, 10, and 11.  But we have access to only
REM nine parameters at a time, so we shift our nine-parameter window
REM twice to let us get to what we need.
SHIFT
SHIFT
SET MINE=%7
SET OLDER=%8
SET YOURS=%9

REM Call the three-way diff command (change the following line to make
REM sense for your three-way diff program).
%DIFF3% --older %OLDER% --mine %MINE% --yours %YOURS%

REM After performing the merge, this script needs to print the contents
REM of the merged file to stdout.  Do that in whatever way you see fit.
REM Return an errorcode of 0 on successful merge, 1 if unresolved conflicts
REM remain in the result.  Any other errorcode will be treated as fatal.


4.3. External merge

Subversion optionally invokes an external merge tool as part of its support for interactive conflict resolution. It provides as arguments to the merge tool the following: the path of the unmodified base file, the path of the theirs file (which contains upstream changes), the path of the mine file (which contains local modifications), the path of the file into which the final resolved contents should be stored by the merge tool, and the working copy path of the conflicted file (relative to the original target of the merge operation). The merge tool is expected to return an error code of 0 to indicate success, or 1 to indicate failure.

例 7.6 “mergewrap.py” and 例 7.7 “mergewrap.bat” are templates for external merge tool wrappers in the Python and Windows batch scripting languages, respectively.

例 7.6. mergewrap.py

#!/usr/bin/env python
import sys
import os

# Configure your favorite merge program here.
MERGE = "/usr/local/bin/my-merge-tool"

# Get the paths provided by Subversion.
BASE   = sys.argv[1]
THEIRS = sys.argv[2]
MINE   = sys.argv[3]
MERGED = sys.argv[4]
WCPATH = sys.argv[5]

# Call the merge command (change the following line to make sense for
# your merge program).
cmd = [MERGE, '--base', BASE, '--mine', MINE, '--theirs', THEIRS,
              '--outfile', MERGED]
os.execv(cmd[0], cmd)

# Return an errorcode of 0 if the conflict was resolved; 1 otherwise.
# Any other errorcode will be treated as fatal.


例 7.7. mergewrap.bat

@ECHO OFF

REM Configure your favorite merge program here.
SET MERGE="C:\Program Files\Funky Stuff\My Merge Tool.exe"

REM Get the paths provided by Subversion.
SET BASE=%1
SET THEIRS=%2
SET MINE=%3
SET MERGED=%4
SET WCPATH=%5

REM Call the merge command (change the following line to make sense for
REM your merge program).
%MERGE% --base %BASE% --mine %MINE% --theirs %THEIRS% --outfile %MERGED%

REM Return an errorcode of 0 if the conflict was resolved; 1 otherwise.
REM Any other errorcode will be treated as fatal.


5. 总结

Sometimes there's a single right way to do things; sometimes there are many. Subversion's developers understand that while the majority of its exact behaviors are acceptable to most of its users, there are some corners of its functionality where such a universally pleasing approach doesn't exist. In those places, Subversion offers users the opportunity to tell it how they want it to behave.

In this chapter, we explored Subversion's runtime configuration system and other mechanisms by which users can control those configurable behaviors. If you are a developer, though, the next chapter will take you one step further. It describes how you can further customize your Subversion experience by writing your own software against Subversion's libraries.




[54] APPDATA环境变量指向Application Data目录,所以你可以通过%APPDATA%\Subversion引用用户配置区目录。

[55] 就是一个大杂烩?

[56] GNU的diff手册这样说的:返回0意味着没有区别,1是有有区别,其它值意味着出现问题。

第 8 章 嵌入 Subversion

Subversion has a modular design: it's implemented as a collection of libraries written in C. Each library has a well-defined purpose and application programming interface (API), and that interface is available not only for Subversion itself to use, but for any software that wishes to embed or otherwise programmatically control Subversion. Additionally, Subversion's API is available not only to other C programs, but also to programs written in higher-level languages such as Python, Perl, Java, and Ruby.

This chapter is for those who wish to interact with Subversion through its public API or its various language bindings. If you wish to write robust wrapper scripts around Subversion functionality to simplify your own life, are trying to develop more complex integrations between Subversion and other pieces of software, or just have an interest in Subversion's various library modules and what they offer, this chapter is for you. If, however, you don't foresee yourself participating with Subversion at such a level, feel free to skip this chapter with the confidence that your experience as a Subversion user will not be affected.

1. 分层的库设计

Each of Subversion's core libraries can be said to exist in one of three main layers—the Repository layer, the Repository Access (RA) layer, or the Client layer (see 图 1 “Subversion 的架构” in the Preface). We will examine these layers shortly, but first, let's briefly summarize Subversion's various libraries. For the sake of consistency, we will refer to the libraries by their extensionless Unix library names (libsvn_fs, libsvn_wc, mod_dav_svn, etc.).

libsvn_client

客户端程序的主要接口

libsvn_delta

目录树和文本区别程序

libsvn_diff

上下文区别和合并例程

libsvn_fs

Subversion文件系统库和模块加载器

libsvn_fs_base

Berkeley DB文件系统后端

libsvn_fs_fs

本地文件系统(FSFS)后端

libsvn_ra

版本库访问通用组件和模块装载器

libsvn_ra_local

本地版本库访问模块

libsvn_ra_neon

WebDAV版本库访问模块

libsvn_ra_serf

另一个(实验性的) WebDAV 版本库访问模块

libsvn_ra_svn

一个自定义版本库访问模块

libsvn_repos

版本库接口

libsvn_subr

各色各样的有用的子程序

libsvn_wc

工作副本管理库

mod_authz_svn

使用WebDAV访问Subversion版本库的Apache授权模块

mod_dav_svn

影射WebDAV操作为Subversion操作的Apache模块

The fact that the word miscellaneous appears only once in the previous list is a good sign. The Subversion development team is serious about making sure that functionality lives in the right layer and libraries. Perhaps the greatest advantage of the modular design is its lack of complexity from a developer's point of view. As a developer, you can quickly formulate that kind of big picture that allows you to pinpoint the location of certain pieces of functionality with relative ease.

Another benefit of modularity is the ability to replace a given module with a whole new library that implements the same API without affecting the rest of the code base. In some sense, this happens within Subversion already. The libsvn_ra_local, libsvn_ra_neon, libsvn_ra_serf, and libsvn_ra_svn libraries each implement the same interface, all working as plug-ins to libsvn_ra. And all four communicate with the Repository layer—libsvn_ra_local connects to the repository directly; the other three do so over a network. The libsvn_fs_base and libsvn_fs_fs libraries are another pair of libraries that implement the same functionality in different ways—both are plug-ins to the common libsvn_fs library.

The client itself also highlights the benefits of modularity in the Subversion design. Subversion's libsvn_client library is a one-stop shop for most of the functionality necessary for designing a working Subversion client (see 第 1.3 节 “客户端层”). So while the Subversion distribution provides only the svn command-line client program, several third-party programs provide various forms of graphical client UIs. These GUIs use the same APIs that the stock command-line client does. This type of modularity has played a large role in the proliferation of available Subversion clients and IDE integrations and, by extension, to the tremendous adoption rate of Subversion itself.

1.1. 版本库层

When referring to Subversion's Repository layer, we're generally talking about two basic concepts—the versioned filesystem implementation (accessed via libsvn_fs, and supported by its libsvn_fs_base and libsvn_fs_fs plug-ins), and the repository logic that wraps it (as implemented in libsvn_repos). These libraries provide the storage and reporting mechanisms for the various revisions of your version-controlled data. This layer is connected to the Client layer via the Repository Access layer, and is, from the perspective of the Subversion user, the stuff at the other end of the line.

The Subversion filesystem is not a kernel-level filesystem that one would install in an operating system (such as the Linux ext2 or NTFS), but instead is a virtual filesystem. Rather than storing files and directories as real files and directories (the kind you can navigate through using your favorite shell program), it uses one of two available abstract storage backends—either a Berkeley DB database environment or a flat-file representation. (To learn more about the two repository backends, see 第 2.3 节 “选择数据存储格式”.) There has even been considerable interest by the development community in giving future releases of Subversion the ability to use other backend database systems, perhaps through a mechanism such as Open Database Connectivity (ODBC). In fact, Google did something similar to this before launching the Google Code Project Hosting service: they announced in mid-2006 that members of its open source team had written a new proprietary Subversion filesystem plug-in that used Google's ultra-scalable Bigtable database for its storage.

The filesystem API exported by libsvn_fs contains the kinds of functionality you would expect from any other filesystem API—you can create and remove files and directories, copy and move them around, modify file contents, and so on. It also has features that are not quite as common, such as the ability to add, modify, and remove metadata (properties) on each file or directory. Furthermore, the Subversion filesystem is a versioning filesystem, which means that as you make changes to your directory tree, Subversion remembers what your tree looked like before those changes. And before the previous changes. And the previous ones. And so on, all the way back through versioning time to (and just beyond) the moment you first started adding things to the filesystem.

All the modifications you make to your tree are done within the context of a Subversion commit transaction. The following is a simplified general routine for modifying your filesystem:

  1. 开始 Subversion 的提交事务。

  2. 作出修改(添加, 删除, 属性修改等等。)。

  3. 提交事务。

Once you have committed your transaction, your filesystem modifications are permanently stored as historical artifacts. Each of these cycles generates a single new revision of your tree, and each revision is forever accessible as an immutable snapshot of the way things were.

Most of the functionality the filesystem interface provides deals with actions that occur on individual filesystem paths. That is, from outside the filesystem, the primary mechanism for describing and accessing the individual revisions of files and directories comes through the use of path strings such as /foo/bar, just as though you were addressing files and directories through your favorite shell program. You add new files and directories by passing their paths-to-be to the right API functions. You query for information about them by the same mechanism.

Unlike most filesystems, though, a path alone is not enough information to identify a file or directory in Subversion. Think of a directory tree as a two-dimensional system, where a node's siblings represent a sort of left-and-right motion, and navigating into the node's subdirectories represents a downward motion. 图 8.1 “二维的文件和目录” shows a typical representation of a tree as exactly that.

图 8.1. 二维的文件和目录

二维的文件和目录


The difference here is that the Subversion filesystem has a nifty third dimension that most filesystems do not have—Time![57] In the filesystem interface, nearly every function that has a path argument also expects a root argument. This svn_fs_root_t argument describes either a revision or a Subversion transaction (which is simply a revision in the making) and provides that third dimension of context needed to understand the difference between /foo/bar in revision 32, and the same path as it exists in revision 98. 图 8.2 “版本时间 - 第三维!” shows revision history as an added dimension to the Subversion filesystem universe.

图 8.2. 版本时间 - 第三维!

版本时间 - 第三维!


As we mentioned earlier, the libsvn_fs API looks and feels like any other filesystem, except that it has this wonderful versioning capability. It was designed to be usable by any program interested in a versioning filesystem. Not coincidentally, Subversion itself is interested in that functionality. But while the filesystem API should be sufficient for basic file and directory versioning support, Subversion wants more—and that is where libsvn_repos comes in.

The Subversion repository library (libsvn_repos) sits (logically speaking) atop the libsvn_fs API, providing additional functionality beyond that of the underlying versioned filesystem logic. It does not completely wrap each and every filesystem function—only certain major steps in the general cycle of filesystem activity are wrapped by the repository interface. Some of these include the creation and commit of Subversion transactions and the modification of revision properties. These particular events are wrapped by the repository layer because they have hooks associated with them. A repository hook system is not strictly related to implementing a versioning filesystem, so it lives in the repository wrapper library.

The hooks mechanism is but one of the reasons for the abstraction of a separate repository library from the rest of the filesystem code. The libsvn_repos API provides several other important utilities to Subversion. These include the abilities to:

  • 在Subversion版本库和版本库包括的文件系统的上创建, 打开, 销毁和执行恢复步骤。

  • 描述两个文件系统树的区别。

  • 关于所有(或者部分)修订版本中的文件系统中的一组文件的提交日志信息的查询

  • Generate a human-readable dump of the filesystem—a complete representation of the revisions in the filesystem.

  • 解析导出格式,加载导出的版本到一个不同的Subversion版本库。

伴随着Subversion的发展,版本库库会随着文件系统提供更多的功能和配置选项而不断成长。

1.2. 版本库访问层

If the Subversion Repository layer is at the other end of the line, the Repository Access (RA) layer is the line itself. Charged with marshaling data between the client libraries and the repository, this layer includes the libsvn_ra module loader library, the RA modules themselves (which currently includes libsvn_ra_neon, libsvn_ra_local, libsvn_ra_serf, and libsvn_ra_svn), and any additional libraries needed by one or more of those RA modules (such as the mod_dav_svn Apache module or libsvn_ra_svn's server, svnserve).

Since Subversion uses URLs to identify its repository resources, the protocol portion of the URL scheme (usually file://, http://, https://, svn://, or svn+ssh://) is used to determine which RA module will handle the communications. Each module registers a list of the protocols it knows how to speak so that the RA loader can, at runtime, determine which module to use for the task at hand. You can determine which RA modules are available to the Subversion command-line client, and what protocols they claim to support, by running svn --version:

$ svn --version
svn, version 1.6.0
   compiled Mar 21 2009, 17:27:36

Copyright (C) 2000-2009 CollabNet.
Subversion is open source software, see http://subversion.apache.org/
This product includes software developed by CollabNet (http://www.Collab.Net/).

The following repository access (RA) modules are available:

* ra_neon : Module for accessing a repository via WebDAV protocol using Neon.
  - handles 'http' scheme
  - handles 'https' scheme
* ra_svn : Module for accessing a repository using the svn network protocol.
  - with Cyrus SASL authentication
  - handles 'svn' scheme
* ra_local : Module for accessing a repository on local disk.
  - handles 'file' scheme
* ra_serf : Module for accessing a repository via WebDAV protocol using serf.
  - handles 'http' scheme
  - handles 'https' scheme

$

The public API exported by the RA layer contains functionality necessary for sending and receiving versioned data to and from the repository. And each of the available RA plug-ins is able to perform that task using a specific protocol—libsvn_ra_neon and libsvn_ra_serf speak HTTP/WebDAV (optionally using SSL encryption) with an Apache HTTP Server that is running the mod_dav_svn Subversion server module; libsvn_ra_svn speaks a custom network protocol with the svnserve program; and so on.

For those who wish to access a Subversion repository using still another protocol, that is precisely why the Repository Access layer is modularized! Developers can simply write a new library that implements the RA interface on one side and communicates with the repository on the other. Your new library can use existing network protocols or you can invent your own. You could use interprocess communication (IPC) calls, or—let's get crazy, shall we?—you could even implement an email-based protocol. Subversion supplies the APIs; you supply the creativity.

1.3. 客户端层

On the client side, the Subversion working copy is where all the action takes place. The bulk of functionality implemented by the client-side libraries exists for the sole purpose of managing working copies—directories full of files and other subdirectories that serve as a sort of local, editable reflection of one or more repository locations—and propagating changes to and from the Repository Access layer.

Subversion's working copy library, libsvn_wc, is directly responsible for managing the data in the working copies. To accomplish this, the library stores administrative information about each working copy directory within a special subdirectory. This subdirectory, named .svn, is present in each working copy directory and contains various other files and directories that record state and provide a private workspace for administrative action. For those familiar with CVS, this .svn subdirectory is similar in purpose to the CVS administrative directories found in CVS working copies. For more information about the .svn administrative area, see 第 2 节 “进入工作副本的管理区” later in this chapter.

The Subversion client library, libsvn_client, has the broadest responsibility; its job is to mingle the functionality of the working copy library with that of the Repository Access layer, and then to provide the highest-level API to any application that wishes to perform general revision control actions. For example, the function svn_client_checkout() takes a URL as an argument. It passes this URL to the RA layer and opens an authenticated session with a particular repository. It then asks the repository for a certain tree, and sends this tree into the working copy library, which then writes a full working copy to disk (.svn directories and all).

The client library is designed to be used by any application. While the Subversion source code includes a standard command-line client, it should be very easy to write any number of GUI clients on top of the client library. New GUIs (or any new client, really) for Subversion need not be clunky wrappers around the included command-line client—they have full access via the libsvn_client API to the same functionality, data, and callback mechanisms that the command-line client uses. In fact, the Subversion source code tree contains a small C program (which you can find at tools/examples/minimal_client.c) that exemplifies how to wield the Subversion API to create a simple client program.

2. 进入工作副本的管理区

像我们前面提到的,每个 Subversion 工作副本包含了一个特别的子目录叫做 .svn,这个目录包含了关于工作副本目录的管理数据。Subversion 使用 .svn 中的信息来追踪如下的数据:

  • 工作副本中展示的目录和文件在版本库中的位置

  • 工作副本中当前展示的文件和目录的版本、

  • 所有可能附加在文件和目录上的用户定义的属性。

  • 工作副本文件的原始(未编辑)的版本。

The Subversion working copy administration area's layout and contents are considered implementation details not really intended for human consumption. Developers are encouraged to use Subversion's public APIs, or the tools that Subversion provides, to access and manipulate the working copy data, instead of directly reading or modifying those files. The file formats employed by the working copy library for its administrative data do change from time to time—a fact that the public APIs do a great job of hiding from the average user. In this section, we expose some of these implementation details sheerly to appease your overwhelming curiosity.

2.1. 条目文件

Perhaps the single most important file in the .svn directory is the entries file. It contains the bulk of the administrative information about the versioned items in a working copy directory. This one file tracks the repository URLs, pristine revision, file checksums, pristine text and property timestamps, scheduling and conflict state information, last-known commit information (author, revision, timestamp), local copy history—practically everything that a Subversion client is interested in knowing about a versioned (or to-be-versioned) resource!

熟悉CVS管理目录的人可能会发现,Subversion的.svn/entries实现了CVS的CVS/Entries, CVS/RootCVS/Repository的功能。

The format of the .svn/entries file has changed over time. Originally an XML file, it now uses a custom—though still human-readable—file format. While XML was a great choice for early developers of Subversion who were frequently debugging the file's contents (and Subversion's behavior in light of them), the need for easy developer debugging has diminished as Subversion has matured and has been replaced by the user's need for snappier performance. Be aware that Subversion's working copy library automatically upgrades working copies from one format to another—it reads the old formats and writes the new—which saves you the hassle of checking out a new working copy, but can also complicate situations where different versions of Subversion might be trying to use the same working copy.

2.2. 原始副本和属性文件

As mentioned before, the .svn directory also holds the pristine text-base versions of files. You can find those in .svn/text-base. The benefits of these pristine copies are multiple—network-free checks for local modifications and difference reporting, network-free reversion of modified or missing files, more efficient transmission of changes to the server—but they come at the cost of having each versioned file stored at least twice on disk. These days, this seems to be a negligible penalty for most files. However, the situation gets uglier as the size of your versioned files grows. Some attention is being given to making the presence of the text-base an option. Ironically, though, it is as your versioned files' sizes get larger that the existence of the text-base becomes more crucial—who wants to transmit a huge file across a network just because she wants to commit a tiny change to it?

Similar in purpose to the text-base files are the property files and their pristine prop-base copies, located in .svn/props and .svn/prop-base, respectively. Since directories can have properties too, there are also .svn/dir-props and .svn/dir-prop-base files.

3. 使用 API

使用 Subversion 的 API 开发应用看起来相当的直接。所有的公共头文件(.h)放在源文件的 subversion/include 目录。从源代码编译和安装 Subversion,这些头文件会被复制到系统目录(例如 /usr/local/include)。这些头文件包括了所有 Subversion 库的用户可以访问的功能和类型。Subversion 开发者社区仔细的确保所有的公共 API 有完好的文档—直接引用头文件的文档。

When examining the public header files, the first thing you might notice is that Subversion's datatypes and functions are namespace-protected. That is, every public Subversion symbol name begins with svn_, followed by a short code for the library in which the symbol is defined (such as wc, client, fs, etc.), followed by a single underscore (_), and then the rest of the symbol name. Semipublic functions (used among source files of a given library but not by code outside that library, and found inside the library directories themselves) differ from this naming scheme in that instead of a single underscore after the library code, they use a double underscore (_ _). Functions that are private to a given source file have no special prefixing and are declared static. Of course, a compiler isn't interested in these naming conventions, but they help to clarify the scope of a given function or datatype.

Another good source of information about programming against the Subversion APIs is the project's own hacking guidelines, which you can find at http://subversion.apache.org/docs/community-guide/. This document contains useful information, which, while aimed at developers and would-be developers of Subversion itself, is equally applicable to folks developing against Subversion as a set of third-party libraries.[58]

3.1. Apache 可移植运行库

伴随 Subversion 自己的数据类型,你会看到许多 apr 开头的数据类型引用—来自 Apache 可移植运行库(APR)的对象。APR 是 Apache 可移植运行库,源自为了服务器代码的多平台性,尝试将不同的操作系统特定代码与操作系统无关代码隔离。结果就提供了一个基础 API 库,只有一些适度区别—或者是广泛的—来自各个操作系统。Apache HTTP 服务器很明显是 APR 的第一个用户,Subversion 开发者立刻发现了使用 APR 的价值。意味着 Subversion 没有操作系统特定的代码,也意味着 Subversion 客户端可以在 Apache HTTP 服务器存在的平台编译和运行。当前这个列表包括,各种类型的 Unix, Win32, BeOS, OS/2 和 Mac OS X。

In addition to providing consistent implementations of system calls that differ across operating systems,[59] APR gives Subversion immediate access to many custom datatypes, such as dynamic arrays and hash tables. Subversion uses these types extensively. But perhaps the most pervasive APR datatype, found in nearly every Subversion API prototype, is the apr_pool_t—the APR memory pool. Subversion uses pools internally for all its memory allocation needs (unless an external library requires a different memory management mechanism for data passed through its API),[60] and while a person coding against the Subversion APIs is not required to do the same, she is required to provide pools to the API functions that need them. This means that users of the Subversion API must also link against APR, must call apr_initialize() to initialize the APR subsystem, and then must create and manage pools for use with Subversion API calls, typically by using svn_pool_create(), svn_pool_clear(), and svn_pool_destroy().

3.2. Functions and Batons

To facilitate streamy (asynchronous) behavior and provide consumers of the Subversion C API with hooks for handling information in customizable ways, many functions in the API accept pairs of parameters: a pointer to a callback function, and a pointer to a blob of memory called a baton that carries context information for that callback function. Batons are typically C structures with additional information that the callback function needs but which is not given directly to the callback function by the driving API function.

3.3. URL 和路径需求

With remote version control operation as the whole point of Subversion's existence, it makes sense that some attention has been paid to internationalization (i18n) support. After all, while remote might mean across the office, it could just as well mean across the globe. To facilitate this, all of Subversion's public interfaces that accept path arguments expect those paths to be canonicalized—which is most easily accomplished by passing them through the svn_path_canonicalize() function—and encoded in UTF-8. This means, for example, that any new client binary that drives the libsvn_client interface needs to first convert paths from the locale-specific encoding to UTF-8 before passing those paths to the Subversion libraries, and then reconvert any resultant output paths from Subversion back into the locale's encoding before using those paths for non-Subversion purposes. Fortunately, Subversion provides a suite of functions (see subversion/include/svn_utf.h) that any program can use to do these conversions.

Also, Subversion APIs require all URL parameters to be properly URI-encoded. So, instead of passing file:///home/username/My File.txt as the URL of a file named My File.txt, you need to pass file:///home/username/My%20File.txt. Again, Subversion supplies helper functions that your application can use—svn_path_uri_encode() and svn_path_uri_decode(), for URI encoding and decoding, respectively.

3.4. 使用 C 和 C++ 以外的语言

If you are interested in using the Subversion libraries in conjunction with something other than a C program—say, a Python or Perl script—Subversion has some support for this via the Simplified Wrapper and Interface Generator (SWIG). The SWIG bindings for Subversion are located in subversion/bindings/swig. They are still maturing, but they are usable. These bindings allow you to call Subversion API functions indirectly, using wrappers that translate the datatypes native to your scripting language into the datatypes needed by Subversion's C libraries.

Significant efforts have been made toward creating functional SWIG-generated bindings for Python, Perl, and Ruby. To some extent, the work done preparing the SWIG interface files for these languages is reusable in efforts to generate bindings for other languages supported by SWIG (which include versions of C#, Guile, Java, MzScheme, OCaml, PHP, and Tcl, among others). However, some extra programming is required to compensate for complex APIs that SWIG needs some help translating between languages. For more information on SWIG itself, see the project's web site at http://www.swig.org/.

Subversion also has language bindings for Java. The javahl bindings (located in subversion/bindings/java in the Subversion source tree) aren't SWIG-based, but are instead a mixture of Java and hand-coded JNI. Javahl covers most Subversion client-side APIs and is specifically targeted at implementors of Java-based Subversion clients and IDE integrations.

Subversion's language bindings tend to lack the level of developer attention given to the core Subversion modules, but can generally be trusted as production-ready. A number of scripts and applications, alternative Subversion GUI clients, and other third-party tools are successfully using Subversion's language bindings today to accomplish their Subversion integrations.

It's worth noting here that there are other options for interfacing with Subversion using other languages: alternative bindings for Subversion that aren't provided by the Subversion development community at all. There are a couple of popular ones we feel are especially noteworthy. First, Barry Scott's PySVN bindings (http://pysvn.tigris.org/) are a popular option for binding with Python. PySVN boasts of a more Pythonic interface than the more C-like APIs provided by Subversion's own Python bindings. And if you're looking for a pure Java implementation of Subversion, check out SVNKit (http://svnkit.com/), which is Subversion rewritten from the ground up in Java.

3.5. 代码样例

例 8.1 “Using the repository layer” contains a code segment (written in C) that illustrates some of the concepts we've been discussing. It uses both the repository and filesystem interfaces (as can be determined by the prefixes svn_repos_ and svn_fs_ of the function names, respectively) to create a new revision in which a directory is added. You can see the use of an APR pool, which is passed around for memory allocation purposes. Also, the code reveals a somewhat obscure fact about Subversion error handling—all Subversion errors must be explicitly handled to avoid memory leakage (and in some cases, application failure).

例 8.1. Using the repository layer

/* Convert a Subversion error into a simple boolean error code.
 *
 * NOTE:  Subversion errors must be cleared (using svn_error_clear())
 *        because they are allocated from the global pool, else memory
 *        leaking occurs.
 */
#define INT_ERR(expr)                           \
  do {                                          \
    svn_error_t *__temperr = (expr);            \
    if (__temperr)                              \
      {                                         \
        svn_error_clear(__temperr);             \
        return 1;                               \
      }                                         \
    return 0;                                   \
  } while (0)

/* Create a new directory at the path NEW_DIRECTORY in the Subversion
 * repository located at REPOS_PATH.  Perform all memory allocation in
 * POOL.  This function will create a new revision for the addition of
 * NEW_DIRECTORY.  Return zero if the operation completes
 * successfully, nonzero otherwise.
 */
static int
make_new_directory(const char *repos_path,
                   const char *new_directory,
                   apr_pool_t *pool)
{
  svn_error_t *err;
  svn_repos_t *repos;
  svn_fs_t *fs;
  svn_revnum_t youngest_rev;
  svn_fs_txn_t *txn;
  svn_fs_root_t *txn_root;
  const char *conflict_str;

  /* Open the repository located at REPOS_PATH. 
   */
  INT_ERR(svn_repos_open(&repos, repos_path, pool));

  /* Get a pointer to the filesystem object that is stored in REPOS. 
   */
  fs = svn_repos_fs(repos);

  /* Ask the filesystem to tell us the youngest revision that
   * currently exists. 
   */
  INT_ERR(svn_fs_youngest_rev(&youngest_rev, fs, pool));

  /* Begin a new transaction that is based on YOUNGEST_REV.  We are
   * less likely to have our later commit rejected as conflicting if we
   * always try to make our changes against a copy of the latest snapshot
   * of the filesystem tree. 
   */
  INT_ERR(svn_repos_fs_begin_txn_for_commit2(&txn, repos, youngest_rev,
                                             apr_hash_make(pool), pool));

  /* Now that we have started a new Subversion transaction, get a root
   * object that represents that transaction. 
   */
  INT_ERR(svn_fs_txn_root(&txn_root, txn, pool));
  
  /* Create our new directory under the transaction root, at the path
   * NEW_DIRECTORY. 
   */
  INT_ERR(svn_fs_make_dir(txn_root, new_directory, pool));

  /* Commit the transaction, creating a new revision of the filesystem
   * which includes our added directory path.
   */
  err = svn_repos_fs_commit_txn(&conflict_str, repos, 
                                &youngest_rev, txn, pool);
  if (! err)
    {
      /* No error?  Excellent!  Print a brief report of our success.
       */
      printf("Directory '%s' was successfully added as new revision "
             "'%ld'.\n", new_directory, youngest_rev);
    }
  else if (err->apr_err == SVN_ERR_FS_CONFLICT)
    {
      /* Uh-oh.  Our commit failed as the result of a conflict
       * (someone else seems to have made changes to the same area 
       * of the filesystem that we tried to modify).  Print an error
       * message.
       */
      printf("A conflict occurred at path '%s' while attempting "
             "to add directory '%s' to the repository at '%s'.\n", 
             conflict_str, new_directory, repos_path);
    }
  else
    {
      /* Some other error has occurred.  Print an error message.
       */
      printf("An error occurred while attempting to add directory '%s' "
             "to the repository at '%s'.\n", 
             new_directory, repos_path);
    }

  INT_ERR(err);
} 


Note that in 例 8.1 “Using the repository layer”, the code could just as easily have committed the transaction using svn_fs_commit_txn(). But the filesystem API knows nothing about the repository library's hook mechanism. If you want your Subversion repository to automatically perform some set of non-Subversion tasks every time you commit a transaction (e.g., sending an email that describes all the changes made in that transaction to your developer mailing list), you need to use the libsvn_repos-wrapped version of that function, which adds the hook triggering functionality—in this case, svn_repos_fs_commit_txn(). (For more information regarding Subversion's repository hooks, see 第 3.2 节 “实现版本库钩子”.)

Now let's switch languages. 例 8.2 “Using the repository layer with Python” is a sample program that uses Subversion's SWIG Python bindings to recursively crawl the youngest repository revision, and to print the various paths reached during the crawl.

例 8.2. Using the repository layer with Python

#!/usr/bin/python

"""Crawl a repository, printing versioned object path names."""

import sys
import os.path
import svn.fs, svn.core, svn.repos

def crawl_filesystem_dir(root, directory):
    """Recursively crawl DIRECTORY under ROOT in the filesystem, and return
    a list of all the paths at or below DIRECTORY."""

    # Print the name of this path.
    print directory + "/"
    
    # Get the directory entries for DIRECTORY.
    entries = svn.fs.svn_fs_dir_entries(root, directory)

    # Loop over the entries.
    names = entries.keys()
    for name in names:
        # Calculate the entry's full path.
        full_path = directory + '/' + name

        # If the entry is a directory, recurse.  The recursion will return
        # a list with the entry and all its children, which we will add to
        # our running list of paths.
        if svn.fs.svn_fs_is_dir(root, full_path):
            crawl_filesystem_dir(root, full_path)
        else:
            # Else it's a file, so print its path here.
            print full_path

def crawl_youngest(repos_path):
    """Open the repository at REPOS_PATH, and recursively crawl its
    youngest revision."""
    
    # Open the repository at REPOS_PATH, and get a reference to its
    # versioning filesystem.
    repos_obj = svn.repos.svn_repos_open(repos_path)
    fs_obj = svn.repos.svn_repos_fs(repos_obj)

    # Query the current youngest revision.
    youngest_rev = svn.fs.svn_fs_youngest_rev(fs_obj)
    
    # Open a root object representing the youngest (HEAD) revision.
    root_obj = svn.fs.svn_fs_revision_root(fs_obj, youngest_rev)

    # Do the recursive crawl.
    crawl_filesystem_dir(root_obj, "")
    
if __name__ == "__main__":
    # Check for sane usage.
    if len(sys.argv) != 2:
        sys.stderr.write("Usage: %s REPOS_PATH\n"
                         % (os.path.basename(sys.argv[0])))
        sys.exit(1)

    # Canonicalize the repository path.
    repos_path = svn.core.svn_path_canonicalize(sys.argv[1])

    # Do the real work.
    crawl_youngest(repos_path)


This same program in C would need to deal with APR's memory pool system. But Python handles memory usage automatically, and Subversion's Python bindings adhere to that convention. In C, you'd be working with custom datatypes (such as those provided by the APR library) for representing the hash of entries and the list of paths, but Python has hashes (called dictionaries) and lists as built-in datatypes, and it provides a rich collection of functions for operating on those types. So SWIG (with the help of some customizations in Subversion's language bindings layer) takes care of mapping those custom datatypes into the native datatypes of the target language. This provides a more intuitive interface for users of that language.

The Subversion Python bindings can be used for working copy operations, too. In the previous section of this chapter, we mentioned the libsvn_client interface and how it exists for the sole purpose of simplifying the process of writing a Subversion client. 例 8.3 “一个 Python 状态爬虫” is a brief example of how that library can be accessed via the SWIG Python bindings to re-create a scaled-down version of the svn status command.

例 8.3. 一个 Python 状态爬虫

#!/usr/bin/env python

"""Crawl a working copy directory, printing status information."""

import sys
import os.path
import getopt
import svn.core, svn.client, svn.wc

def generate_status_code(status):
    """Translate a status value into a single-character status code,
    using the same logic as the Subversion command-line client."""
    code_map = { svn.wc.svn_wc_status_none        : ' ',
                 svn.wc.svn_wc_status_normal      : ' ',
                 svn.wc.svn_wc_status_added       : 'A',
                 svn.wc.svn_wc_status_missing     : '!',
                 svn.wc.svn_wc_status_incomplete  : '!',
                 svn.wc.svn_wc_status_deleted     : 'D',
                 svn.wc.svn_wc_status_replaced    : 'R',
                 svn.wc.svn_wc_status_modified    : 'M',
                 svn.wc.svn_wc_status_conflicted  : 'C',
                 svn.wc.svn_wc_status_obstructed  : '~',
                 svn.wc.svn_wc_status_ignored     : 'I',
                 svn.wc.svn_wc_status_external    : 'X',
                 svn.wc.svn_wc_status_unversioned : '?',
               }
    return code_map.get(status, '?')

def do_status(wc_path, verbose, prefix):
    # Build a client context baton.
    ctx = svn.client.svn_client_create_context()

    def _status_callback(path, status):
        """A callback function for svn_client_status."""

        # Print the path, minus the bit that overlaps with the root of
        # the status crawl
        text_status = generate_status_code(status.text_status)
        prop_status = generate_status_code(status.prop_status)
        prefix_text = ''
        if prefix is not None:
            prefix_text = prefix + " "
        print '%s%s%s  %s' % (prefix_text, text_status, prop_status, path)
        
    # Do the status crawl, using _status_callback() as our callback function.
    revision = svn.core.svn_opt_revision_t()
    revision.type = svn.core.svn_opt_revision_head
    svn.client.svn_client_status2(wc_path, revision, _status_callback,
                                  svn.core.svn_depth_infinity, verbose,
                                  0, 0, 1, ctx)

def usage_and_exit(errorcode):
    """Print usage message, and exit with ERRORCODE."""
    stream = errorcode and sys.stderr or sys.stdout
    stream.write("""Usage: %s OPTIONS WC-PATH

  Print working copy status, optionally with a bit of prefix text.

Options:
  --help, -h    : Show this usage message
  --prefix ARG  : Print ARG, followed by a space, before each line of output
  --verbose, -v : Show all statuses, even uninteresting ones
""" % (os.path.basename(sys.argv[0])))
    sys.exit(errorcode)
    
if __name__ == '__main__':
    # Parse command-line options.
    try:
        opts, args = getopt.getopt(sys.argv[1:], "hv",
                                   ["help", "prefix=", "verbose"])
    except getopt.GetoptError:
        usage_and_exit(1)
    verbose = 0
    prefix = None
    for opt, arg in opts:
        if opt in ("-h", "--help"):
            usage_and_exit(0)
        if opt in ("--prefix"):
            prefix = arg
        if opt in ("-v", "--verbose"):
            verbose = 1
    if len(args) != 1:
        usage_and_exit(2)
            
    # Canonicalize the repository path.
    wc_path = svn.core.svn_path_canonicalize(args[0])

    # Do the real work.
    try:
        do_status(wc_path, verbose, prefix)
    except svn.core.SubversionException, e:
        sys.stderr.write("Error (%d): %s\n" % (e.apr_err, e.message))
        sys.exit(1)


As was the case in 例 8.2 “Using the repository layer with Python”, this program is pool-free and uses, for the most part, normal Python datatypes.

[警告]警告

Run user-provided paths through svn_path_canonicalize() before passing them to other API functions. Failure to do so can trigger assertions in the underlying Subversion C library which translate into rather immediate and unceremonious program abortion.

Of particular interest to users of the Python flavor of Subversion's API is the implementation of callback functions. As previously mentioned, Subversion's C API makes liberal use of the callback function/baton paradigm. API functions which in C accept a function and baton pair only accept a callback function parameter in Python. How, then, does the caller pass arbitrary context information to the callback function? In Python, this is done by taking advantage of Python's scoping rules and default argument values. You can see this in action in 例 8.3 “一个 Python 状态爬虫”. The svn_client_status2() function is given a callback function (_status_callback()) but no baton—_status_callback() gets access to the user-provided prefix string because that variable falls into the scope of the function automatically.

4. 总结

One of Subversion's greatest features isn't something you get from running its command-line client or other tools. It's the fact that Subversion was designed modularly and provides a stable, public API so that others—like yourself, perhaps—can write custom software that drives Subversion's core logic.

In this chapter, we took a closer look at Subversion's architecture, examining its logical layers and describing that public API, the very same API that Subversion's own layers use to communicate with each other. Many developers have found interesting uses for the Subversion API, from simple repository hook scripts, to integrations between Subversion and some other application, to completely different version control systems. What unique itch will you scratch with it?




[57] 我们理解这一定会给科幻小说迷带来一个震撼,他们认为时间是第四维的,我们要为提出这样一个不同理论的断言而伤害了他们的作出道歉。

[58] 当然,Subversion使用Subversion的API。

[59] Subversion使用尽可能多ANSI系统调用和数据类型。

[60] Neon和Berkeley DB就是这种库的例子。

[61] Redistributions in any form must be accompanied by information on how to obtain complete source code for the software that uses SVNKit and any accompanying software that uses the software that uses SVNKit. See http://svnkit.com/license.html for details.

第 9 章 Subversion 完全参考

目录

1. svn—Subversion Command-Line Client
1.1. svn 选项
1.2. svn 子命令
svn add
svn blame (praise, annotate, ann)
svn cat
svn changelist (cl)
svn checkout (co)
svn cleanup
svn commit (ci)
svn copy (cp)
svn delete (del, remove, rm)
svn diff (di)
svn export
svn help (h, ?)
svn import
svn info
svn list (ls)
svn lock
svn log
svn merge
svn mergeinfo
svn mkdir
svn move (mv)
svn propdel (pdel, pd)
svn propedit (pedit, pe)
svn propget (pget, pg)
svn proplist (plist, pl)
svn propset (pset, ps)
svn resolve
svn resolved
svn revert
svn status (stat, st)
svn switch (sw)
svn unlock
svn update (up)
2. svnadmin—Subversion Repository Administration
2.1. svnadmin 选项
2.2. svnadmin 子命令
svnadmin crashtest
svnadmin create
svnadmin deltify
svnadmin dump
svnadmin help (h, ?)
svnadmin hotcopy
svnadmin list-dblogs
svnadmin list-unused-dblogs
svnadmin load
svnadmin lslocks
svnadmin lstxns
svnadmin pack
svnadmin recover
svnadmin rmlocks
svnadmin rmtxns
svnadmin setlog
svnadmin setrevprop
svnadmin setuuid
svnadmin upgrade
svnadmin verify
3. svnlook—Subversion Repository Examination
3.1. svnlook 选项
3.2. svnlook 子命令
svnlook author
svnlook cat
svnlook changed
svnlook date
svnlook diff
svnlook dirs-changed
svnlook help (h, ?)
svnlook history
svnlook info
svnlook lock
svnlook log
svnlook propget (pget, pg)
svnlook proplist (plist, pl)
svnlook tree
svnlook uuid
svnlook youngest
4. svnsync—Subversion Repository Mirroring
4.1. svnsync 选项
4.2. svnsync 子命令
svnsync copy-revprops
svnsync help
svnsync info
svnsync initialize (init)
svnsync synchronize (sync)
5. svnserve—Custom Subversion Server
5.1. svnserve 选项
6. svndumpfilter—Subversion History Filtering
6.1. svndumpfilter 选项
6.2. svndumpfilter 子命令
svndumpfilter exclude
svndumpfilter include
svndumpfilter help
7. svnversion—Subversion Working Copy Version Info
svnversion
8. mod_dav_svn—Subversion Apache HTTP Server Module
mod_dav_svn 配置指令
9. mod_authz_svn—Subversion Apache HTTP Authorization Module
mod_authz_svn 配置指令
10. Subversion 属性
10.1. 版本控制的属性
10.2. 未版本控制的属性
11. 版本库钩子
start-commit
pre-commit
post-commit
pre-revprop-change
post-revprop-change
pre-lock
post-lock
pre-unlock
post-unlock

This chapter is intended to be a complete reference to using Subversion. It includes command summaries and examples for all the command-line tools provided as part of the stock Subversion distribution, configuration information for the Subversion server modules, and other information that lends itself to a reference format.

1. svn—Subversion Command-Line Client

svn is the official command-line client of Subversion. It offers no small number of subcommands and options. Subcommands and other non-option arguments must appear in a specified order on the command line used to invoke svn. Options, on the other hand, may appear anywhere on the command line (after the program name, of course), and in general, their order is irrelevant. For example, all of the following are valid ways to use svn status, and are interpreted in exactly the same way:

$ svn -vq status myfile
$ svn status -v -q myfile
$ svn -q status -v myfile
$ svn status -vq myfile
$ svn status myfile -qv

1.1. svn 选项

While Subversion has different options for its subcommands, all options exist in a single namespace—that is, each option is guaranteed to mean the same thing regardless of the subcommand you use it with. For example, --verbose (-v) always means verbose output, regardless of the subcommand you use it with.

The svn command-line client usually exits quickly with an error if you pass it an option which does not apply to the specified subcommand. But as of Subversion 1.5, several of the options which apply to all—or nearly all—of the subcommands have been deemed acceptable by all subcommands, even if they have no effect on some of them. They appear grouped together in the command-line client's usage messages as global options. This was done to assist folks who write scripts which wrap the command-line client. These global options are as follows:

--config-dir DIR

指导Subversion从指定目录而不是默认位置(用户主目录的.subversion)读取配置信息。

--config-option FILE:SECTION:OPTION=[VALUE]

Sets, for the duration of the command, the value of a runtime configuration option. FILE and SECTION are the runtime configuration file (either config or servers) and the section thereof, respectively, which contain the option whose value you wish to change. OPTION is, of course, the option itself, and VALUE the value (if any) you wish to assign to the option. For example, to temporarily disable the use of the automatic property setting feature, use --config-option=config:miscellany:enable-auto-props=no. You can use this option multiple times to change multiple option values simultaneously.

--no-auth-cache

Prevents caching of authentication information (e.g., username and password) in the Subversion runtime configuration directories.

--non-interactive

Disables all interactive prompting. Some examples of interactive prompting include requests for authentication credentials and conflict resolution decisions. This is useful if you're running Subversion inside an automated script and it's more appropriate to have Subversion fail than to prompt for more information.

--password PASSWD

Specifies the password to use when authenticating against a Subversion server. If not provided, or if incorrect, Subversion will prompt you for this information as needed.

--trust-server-cert

When used with --non-interactive, instructs Subversion to accept SSL server certificates issued by unknown certificate authorities without first prompting the user. For security's sake, you should use this option only when the integrity of the remote server and the network path between it and your client is known to be trustworthy.

--username NAME

Specifies the username to use when authenticating against a Subversion server. If not provided, or if incorrect, Subversion will prompt you for this information as needed.

The rest of the options apply and are accepted by only a subset of the subcommand. They are as follows:

--accept ACTION

Specifies an action for automatic conflict resolution. Possible actions are postpone, base, mine-full, theirs-full, edit, and launch.

--auto-props

开启auto-props,覆盖config文件中的enable-auto-props指示。

--change (-c) ARG

Used as a means to refer to a specific change (a.k.a. a revision). This option is syntactic sugar for -r ARG-1:ARG.

--changelist ARG

Instructs Subversion to operate only on members of the changelist named ARG. You can use this option multiple times to specify sets of changelists.

--cl ARG

选项 --changelist 的别名。

--depth ARG

Instructs Subversion to limit the scope of an operation to a particular tree depth. ARG is one of empty (only the target itself), files (the target and any immediate file children thereof), immediates (the target and any immediate children thereof), or infinity (the target and all of its descendants—full recursion).

--diff-cmd CMD

Specifies an external program to use to show differences between files. When svn diff is invoked without this option, it uses Subversion's internal diff engine, which provides unified diffs by default. If you want to use an external diff program, use --diff-cmd. You can pass options to the diff program with the --extensions (-x) option (more on that later in this section).

--diff3-cmd CMD

指定一个外置程序用来合并文件。

--dry-run

Goes through all the motions of running a command, but makes no actual changes—either on disk or in the repository.

--editor-cmd CMD

Specifies an external program to use to edit a log message or a property value. See the editor-cmd section in 第 1.3.2 节 “配置” for ways to specify a default editor.

--encoding ENC

Tells Subversion that your commit message is encoded in the charset provided. The default is your operating system's native locale, and you should specify the encoding if your commit message is in any other encoding.

--extensions (-x) ARG

Specifies customizations which Subversion should make when performing difference calculations. Valid extensions include:

--ignore-space-change (-b)

Ignore changes in the amount of white space.

--ignore-all-space (-w)

Ignore all white space.

--ignore-eol-style

Ignore changes in EOL (end-of-line) style.

--show-c-function (-p)

Show C function names in the diff output.

--unified (-u)

Show three lines of unified diff context.

The default value of ARG is -u. If you wish to pass multiple arguments, you must enclose all of them in quotes.

Note that when Subversion is configured to invoke an external diff command, the value of the --extension (-x) option isn't restricted to the previously mentioned options, but may be any additional arguments which Subversion should pass to that command.

--file (-F) FILENAME

Uses the contents of the named file for the specified subcommand, though different subcommands do different things with this content. For example, svn commit uses the content as a commit log, whereas svn propset uses it as a property value.

--force

Forces a particular command or operation to run. Subversion will prevent you from performing some operations in normal usage, but you can pass the force option to tell Subversion I know what I'm doing as well as the possible repercussions of doing it, so let me at 'em. This option is the programmatic equivalent of doing your own electrical work with the power on—if you don't know what you're doing, you're likely to get a nasty shock.

--force-log

Forces a suspicious parameter passed to the --message (-m) or --file (-F) option to be accepted as valid. By default, Subversion will produce an error if parameters to these options look like they might instead be targets of the subcommand. For example, if you pass a versioned file's path to the --file (-F) option, Subversion will assume you've made a mistake, that the path was instead intended as the target of the operation, and that you simply failed to provide some other—unversioned—file as the source of your log message. To assert your intent and override these types of errors, pass the --force-log option to subcommands that accept log messages.

--help (-h or -?)

If used with one or more subcommands, shows the built-in help text for each. If used alone, it displays the general client help text.

--ignore-ancestry

告诉Subversion在计算区别(只依赖于路径内容)时忽略祖先。

--ignore-externals

Tells Subversion to ignore externals definitions and the external working copies managed by them.

--incremental

打印适合串联的输出格式。

--keep-changelists

告诉 Subversion 在提交后不要删除修改集。

--keep-local

保留文件或目录的版本版本 (用于命令 svn delete)。

--limit (-l) NUM

Shows only the first NUM log messages.

--message (-m) MESSAGE

Indicates that you will specify either a log message or a lock comment on the command line, following this option. For example:

$ svn commit -m "They don't make Sunday."
--native-eol ARG

Causes svn export to use a specific end-of-line sequence as if it was the native sequence for the client platform. ARG may be one of CR, LF, or CRLF.

--new ARG

使用ARG作为新的目标(结合svn diff使用)。

--no-auto-props

关闭auto-props,覆盖config文件中的enable-auto-props指示。

--no-diff-deleted

Prevents Subversion from printing differences for deleted files. The default behavior when you remove a file is for svn diff to print the same differences that you would see if you had left the file but removed all the content.

--no-ignore

Shows files in the status listing that would normally be omitted since they match a pattern in the global-ignores configuration option or the svn:ignore property. See 第 1.3.2 节 “配置” and 第 5 节 “忽略未版本控制的条目” for more information.

--no-unlock

Tells Subversion not to automatically unlock files (the default commit behavior is to unlock all files listed as part of the commit). See 第 8 节 “锁定” for more information.

--non-recursive (-N)

Deprecated. Stops a subcommand from recursing into subdirectories. Most subcommands recurse by default, but some do not. Users should avoid this option and use the more precise --depth option instead. For most subcommands, specifying --non-recursive produces behavior which is the same as if you'd specified --depth=files, but there are exceptions: non-recursive svn status operates at the immediates depth, and the non-recursive forms of svn revert, svn add, and svn commit operate at an empty depth.

--notice-ancestry

在计算差异时关注祖先。

--old ARG

使用ARG作为旧的目标(结合svn diff使用)。

--parents

Creates and adds nonexistent or nonversioned parent subdirectories to the working copy or repository as part of an operation. This is useful for automatically creating multiple subdirectories where none currently exist. If performed on a URL, all the directories will be created in a single commit.

--quiet (-q)

请求客户端在执行操作时只显示重要信息。

--record-only

Marks revisions as merged, for use with --revision (-r).

--recursive (-R)

让子命令递归子目录,大多数子命令缺省是递归的。

--reintegrate

Used with the svn merge subcommand, merges all of the source URL's changes into the working copy. See 第 3.2 节 “保持分支同步” for details.

--relocate FROM TO [PATH...]

Used with the svn switch subcommand, changes the location of the repository that your working copy references. This is useful if the location of your repository changes and you have an existing working copy that you'd like to continue to use. See svn switch (sw) for more details and an example.

--remove ARG

从变更列表 ARG 清除

--revision (-r) REV

Indicates that you're going to supply a revision (or range of revisions) for a particular operation. You can provide revision numbers, keywords, or dates (in curly braces) as arguments to the revision option. If you wish to offer a range of revisions, you can provide two revisions separated by a colon. For example:

$ svn log -r 1729
$ svn log -r 1729:HEAD
$ svn log -r 1729:1744
$ svn log -r {2001-12-04}:{2002-02-17}
$ svn log -r 1729:{2002-02-17}

第 1.1 节 “修订版本关键字”查看更多信息。

--revprop

Operates on a revision property instead of a property specific to a file or directory. This option requires that you also pass a revision with the --revision (-r) option.

--set-depth ARG

Sets the sticky depth on a directory in a working copy to one of exclude, empty, files, immediates, or infinity. For detailed coverage of what these mean and how to use this option, see 第 7 节 “稀疏目录”.

--show-revs ARG

Used to make svn mergeinfo display either merged or eligible revisions.

--show-updates (-u)

Causes the client to display information about which files in your working copy are out of date. This doesn't actually update any of your files—it just shows you which files will be updated if you then use svn update.

--stop-on-copy

Causes a Subversion subcommand that traverses the history of a versioned resource to stop harvesting that historical information when a copy—that is, a location in history where that resource was copied from another location in the repository—is encountered.

--strict

导致Subversion使用严格的语法,就是明确使用特定而不是含糊的子命令(也就是,svn propget)。

--summarize

Display only high-level summary notifications about the operation instead of its detailed output.

--targets FILENAME

Tells Subversion to read additional target paths for the operation from FILENAME. FILENAME should contain one path per line, with each path expected to use the same encoding and formatting that it would if you had specified it directly as an argument on the command line.

--use-merge-history (-g)

从合并历史使用或显示额外的信息。

--verbose (-v)

Requests that the client print out as much information as it can while running any subcommand. This may result in Subversion printing out additional fields, detailed information about every file, or additional information regarding its actions.

--version

Prints the client version info. This information includes not only the version number of the client, but also a listing of all repository access modules that the client can use to access a Subversion repository. With --quiet (-q) it prints only the version number in a compact form.

--with-all-revprops

Used with the --xml option to svn log, instructs Subversion to retrieve and display all revision properties—the standard ones used internally by Subversion as well as any user-defined ones—in the log output.

--with-no-revprops

Used with the --xml option to svn log, instructs Subversion to omit all revision properties—including the standard log message, author, and revision datestamp—from the log output.

--with-revprop ARG

When used with any command that writes to the repository, sets the revision property, using the NAME=VALUE format, NAME to VALUE. When used with svn log in --xml mode, this displays the value of ARG in the log output.

--xml

使用XML格式打印输出。

1.2. svn 子命令

Here are the various subcommands for the svn program. For the sake of brevity, we omit the global options (described in 第 1.1 节 “svn 选项”) from the subcommand descriptions which follow.

名称

svn add — 添加文件, 目录或符号链。

概要

svn add PATH...

描述

Schedule files, directories, or symbolic links in your working copy for addition to the repository. They will be uploaded and added to the repository on your next commit. If you add something and change your mind before committing, you can unschedule the addition using svn revert.

选项

--auto-props
--depth ARG
--force
--no-auto-props
--no-ignore
--parents
--quiet (-q)
--targets FILENAME

例子

添加一个文件到工作副本:

$ svn add foo.c 
A         foo.c

当添加一个目录,svn add缺省的行为方式是递归的:

$ svn add testdir
A         testdir
A         testdir/a
A         testdir/b
A         testdir/c
A         testdir/d

你可以只添加一个目录而不包括其内容:

$ svn add --depth=empty otherdir
A         otherdir

Normally, the command svn add * will skip over any directories that are already under version control. Sometimes, however, you may want to add every unversioned object in your working copy, including those hiding deeper. Passing the --force option makes svn add recurse into versioned directories:

$ svn add * --force
A         foo.c
A         somedir/bar.c
A  (bin)  otherdir/docs/baz.doc
…

名称

svn blame (praise, annotate, ann) — 显示特定文件和URL内嵌的作者和修订版本信息。

概要

svn blame TARGET[@REV]...

描述

Show author and revision information inline for the specified files or URLs. Each line of text is annotated at the beginning with the author (username) and the revision number for the last change to that line.

选项

--extensions (-x) ARG
--force
--incremental
--revision (-r) REV
--use-merge-history (-g)
--verbose (-v)
--xml

例子

If you want to see blame-annotated source for readme.txt in your test repository:

$ svn blame http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/readme.txt
     3      sally This is a README file.
     5      harry You should read this.

Even if svn blame says that Harry last modified readme.txt in revision 5, you'll have to examine exactly what the revision changed to be sure that Harry changed the context of the line—he may have adjusted just the whitespace.

If you use the --xml option, you can get XML output describing the blame annotations, but not the contents of the lines themselves:

$ svn blame --xml http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/readme.txt
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<blame>
<target
   path="readme.txt">
<entry
   line-number="1">
<commit
   revision="3">
<author>sally</author>
<date>2008-05-25T19:12:31.428953Z</date>
</commit>
</entry>
<entry
   line-number="2">
<commit
   revision="5">
<author>harry</author>
<date>2008-05-29T03:26:12.293121Z</date>
</commit>
</entry>
</target>
</blame>

名称

svn cat — 输出特定文件或URL的内容。

概要

svn cat TARGET[@REV]...

描述

输出特定文件或 URL 的内容。列出目录的内容可以使用 svn list

选项

--revision (-r) REV

例子

如果你希望不检出而察看版本库的readme.txt的内容:

$ svn cat http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/readme.txt
This is a README file.
You should read this.
$
[提示]提示

If your working copy is out of date (or you have local modifications) and you want to see the HEAD revision of a file in your working copy, svn cat -r HEAD FILENAME will automatically fetch the HEAD revision of the specified path:

$ cat foo.c
This file is in my local working copy 
and has changes that I've made.
$ svn cat -r HEAD foo.c
Latest revision fresh from the repository!
$

名称

svn changelist (cl) — 关联(解耦)本地路径到修改列表。

概要

changelist CLNAME TARGET...

changelist --remove TARGET...

描述

Used for dividing files in a working copy into a changelist (logical named grouping) in order to allow users to easily work on multiple file collections within a single working copy.

选项

--changelist ARG
--depth ARG
--quiet (-q)
--recursive (-R)
--remove
--targets FILENAME

例子

Edit three files, add them to a changelist, then commit only files in that changelist:

$ svn changelist issue1729 foo.c bar.c baz.c
Path 'foo.c' is now a member of changelist 'issue1729'.
Path 'bar.c' is now a member of changelist 'issue1729'.
Path 'baz.c' is now a member of changelist 'issue1729'.
$ svn status
A       someotherfile.c
A       test/sometest.c

--- Changelist 'issue1729':
A       foo.c
A       bar.c
A       baz.c
$ svn commit --changelist issue1729 -m "Fixing Issue 1729."
Adding         bar.c
Adding         baz.c
Adding         foo.c
Transmitting file data ...
Committed revision 2.
$ svn status
A       someotherfile.c
A       test/sometest.c
$

Note that in the previous example, only the files in changelist issue1729 were committed.


名称

svn checkout (co) — 从版本库取出一个工作副本。

概要

svn checkout URL[@REV]... [PATH]

描述

Check out a working copy from a repository. If PATH is omitted, the basename of the URL will be used as the destination. If multiple URLs are given, each will be checked out into a subdirectory of PATH, with the name of the subdirectory being the basename of the URL.

选项

--depth ARG
--force
--ignore-externals
--quiet (-q)
--revision (-r) REV

例子

取出一个工作副本到mine目录:

$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos/test mine
A    mine/a
A    mine/b
A    mine/c
A    mine/d
Checked out revision 20.
$ ls
mine
$

检出两个目录到两个单独的工作副本:

$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos/test \
               file:///var/svn/repos/quiz
A    test/a
A    test/b
A    test/c
A    test/d
Checked out revision 20.
A    quiz/l
A    quiz/m
Checked out revision 13.
$ ls
quiz  test
$

检出两个目录到两个单独的工作副本,但是将两个目录都放到working-copies

$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos/test \
               file:///var/svn/repos/quiz \
               working-copies
A    working-copies/test/a
A    working-copies/test/b
A    working-copies/test/c
A    working-copies/test/d
Checked out revision 20.
A    working-copies/quiz/l
A    working-copies/quiz/m
Checked out revision 13.
$ ls
working-copies

如果你打断一个检出(或其它打断检出的事情,如连接失败。),你可以使用同样的命令重新开始或者是更新不完整的工作副本:

$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos/test mine
A    mine/a
A    mine/b
^C
svn: The operation was interrupted
svn: caught SIGINT
$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos/test mine
A    mine/c
^C
svn: The operation was interrupted
svn: caught SIGINT
$ svn update mine
A    mine/d
Updated to revision 20.
$

If you wish to check out some revision other than the most recent one, you can do so by providing the --revision (-r) option to the svn checkout command:

$ svn checkout -r 2 file:///var/svn/repos/test mine
A    mine/a
Checked out revision 2.
$

Subversion will complain by default if you try to check out a directory atop an existing directory which contains files or subdirectories that the checkout itself would have created. Use the --force option to override this safeguard. When you check out with the --force option, any unversioned file in the checkout target tree which ordinarily would obstruct the checkout will still become versioned, but Subversion will preserve its contents as-is. If those contents differ from the repository file at that path (which was downloaded as part of the checkout), the file will appear to have local modifications—the changes required to transform the versioned file you checked out into the unversioned file you had before checking out—when the checkout completes.

$ mkdir project
$ mkdir project/lib
$ touch project/lib/file.c
$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos/project/trunk project
svn: Failed to add directory 'project/lib': an unversioned directory of the sa
me name already exists
$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos/project/trunk project --force
E    project/lib
A    project/lib/subdir
E    project/lib/file.c
A    project/lib/anotherfile.c
A    project/include/header.h
Checked out revision 21.
$ svn status wc
M       project/lib/file.c
$ svn diff wc
Index: project/lib/file.c
===================================================================
--- project/lib/file.c	(revision 1)
+++ project/lib/file.c	(working copy)
@@ -3 +0,0 @@
-/* file.c: Code for acting file-ishly. */
-#include <stdio.h>
-/* Not feeling particularly creative today. */

$

As in another other working copy, you have the choices typically available: reverting some or all of those local modifications, committing them, or continuing to modify your working copy.

This feature is especially useful for performing in-place imports of unversioned directory trees. By first importing the tree into the repository, and then checking out new repository location atop the unversioned tree with the --force option, you effectively transform the unversioned tree into a working copy.

$ svn mkdir -m "Create newproject project root." \
      file://var/svn/repos/newproject
$ svn import -m "Import initial newproject codebase." newproject \
      file://var/svn/repos/newproject/trunk
Adding         newproject/include
Adding         newproject/include/newproject.h
Adding         newproject/lib
Adding         newproject/lib/helpers.c
Adding         newproject/lib/base.c
Adding         newproject/notes
Adding         newproject/notes/README

Committed revision 22.
$ svn checkout file://`pwd`/repos-1.6/newproject/trunk newproject --force
E    newproject/include
E    newproject/include/newproject.h
E    newproject/lib
E    newproject/lib/helpers.c
E    newproject/lib/base.c
E    newproject/notes
E    newproject/notes/README
Checked out revision 2.
$ svn status newproject
$

名称

svn cleanup — 递归清理工作副本

概要

svn cleanup [PATH...]

描述

Recursively clean up the working copy, removing working copy locks and resuming unfinished operations. If you ever get a working copy locked error, run this command to remove stale locks and get your working copy into a usable state again.

If, for some reason, an svn update fails due to a problem running an external diff program (e.g., user input or network failure), pass the --diff3-cmd to allow the cleanup process to complete any required merging using your external diff program. You can also specify any configuration directory with the --config-dir option, but you should need these options extremely infrequently.

选项

--diff3-cmd CMD

例子

Well, there's not much to the examples here, as svn cleanup generates no output. If you pass no PATH, then . is used:

$ svn cleanup
$ svn cleanup /var/svn/working-copy

名称

svn commit (ci) — 将修改从工作副本发送到版本库。

概要

svn commit [PATH...]

描述

Send changes from your working copy to the repository. If you do not supply a log message with your commit by using either the --file (-F) or --message (-m) option, svn will launch your editor for you to compose a commit message. See the editor-cmd list entry in 第 1.3.2 节 “配置”.

svn commit will send any lock tokens that it finds and will release locks on all PATHs committed (recursively) unless --no-unlock is passed.

[提示]提示

If you begin a commit and Subversion launches your editor to compose the commit message, you can still abort without committing your changes. If you want to cancel your commit, just quit your editor without saving your commit message and Subversion will prompt you to either abort the commit, continue with no message, or edit the message again.

选项

--changelist ARG
--depth ARG
--editor-cmd CMD
--encoding ENC
--file (-F) FILENAME
--force-log
--keep-changelists
--message (-m) MESSAGE
--no-unlock
--quiet (-q)
--targets FILENAME
--with-revprop ARG

例子

使用命令行提交一个包含日志信息的文件修改,当前目录(.)是没有说明的目标路径:

$ svn commit -m "added howto section."
Sending        a
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 3.

Commit a modification to the file foo.c (explicitly specified on the command line) with the commit message in a file named msg:

$ svn commit -F msg foo.c
Sending        foo.c
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 5.

If you want to use a file that's under version control for your commit message with --file (-F), you need to pass the --force-log option:

$ svn commit -F file_under_vc.txt foo.c
svn: The log message file is under version control
svn: Log message file is a versioned file; use '--force-log' to override

$ svn commit --force-log -F file_under_vc.txt foo.c
Sending        foo.c
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 6.

提交一个已经预定要删除的文件:

$ svn commit -m "removed file 'c'."
Deleting       c

Committed revision 7.

名称

svn copy (cp) — 拷贝工作副本的一个文件或目录到版本库。

概要

svn copy SRC[@REV]... DST

描述

Copy one or more files in a working copy or in the repository. SRC and DST can each be either a working copy (WC) path or URL. When copying multiple sources, add the copies as immediate children of DST (which, of course, must be a directory).

WC → WC

拷贝并且预定一个添加的项目(包含历史)。

WC → URL

将WC或URL的拷贝立即提交。

URL → WC

检出URL到WC,并且加入到添加计划。

URL → URL

Complete server-side copy. This is usually used to branch and tag.

If no peg revision (i.e., @REV) is supplied, by default the BASE revision will be used for files copied from the working copy, while the HEAD revision will be used for files copied from a URL.

[注意]注意

You can only copy files within a single repository. Subversion does not support cross-repository copying.

选项

--editor-cmd CMD
--encoding ENC
--file (-F) FILENAME
--force-log
--ignore-externals
--message (-m) MESSAGE
--parents
--quiet (-q)
--revision (-r) REV
--with-revprop ARG

例子

Copy an item within your working copy (this schedules the copy—nothing goes into the repository until you commit):

$ svn copy foo.txt bar.txt
A         bar.txt
$ svn status
A  +    bar.txt

拷贝工作副本的一个文件或目录到版本库:

$ svn copy bat.c baz.c qux.c src
A         src/bat.c
A         src/baz.c
A         src/qux.c

Copy revision 8 of bat.c into your working copy under a different name:

$ svn copy -r 8 bat.c ya-old-bat.c
A         ya-old-bat.c

Copy an item in your working copy to a URL in the repository (this is an immediate commit, so you must supply a commit message):

$ svn copy near.txt file:///var/svn/repos/test/far-away.txt -m "Remote copy."

Committed revision 8.

Copy an item from the repository to your working copy (this just schedules the copy—nothing goes into the repository until you commit):

$ svn copy file:///var/svn/repos/test/far-away -r 6 near-here
A         near-here
[提示]提示

这是恢复死掉文件的推荐方式!

最后,是在URL之间拷贝:

$ svn copy file:///var/svn/repos/test/far-away \
           file:///var/svn/repos/test/over-there -m "remote copy."

Committed revision 9.
$ svn copy file:///var/svn/repos/test/trunk \
           file:///var/svn/repos/test/tags/0.6.32-prerelease -m "tag tree"

Committed revision 12.
[提示]提示

This is the easiest way to tag a revision in your repository—just svn copy that revision (usually HEAD) into your tags directory.

And don't worry if you forgot to tag—you can always specify an older revision and tag anytime:

$ svn copy -r 11 file:///var/svn/repos/test/trunk \
           file:///var/svn/repos/test/tags/0.6.32-prerelease \
           -m "Forgot to tag at rev 11"

Committed revision 13.

名称

svn delete (del, remove, rm) — 从工作副本或版本库删除一个项目。

概要

svn delete PATH...

svn delete URL...

描述

Items specified by PATH are scheduled for deletion upon the next commit. Files (and directories that have not been committed) are immediately removed from the working copy unless the --keep-local option is given. The command will not remove any unversioned or modified items; use the --force option to override this behavior.

Items specified by URL are deleted from the repository via an immediate commit. Multiple URLs are committed atomically.

选项

--editor-cmd CMD
--encoding ENC
--file (-F) FILENAME
--force
--force-log
--keep-local
--message (-m) MESSAGE
--quiet (-q)
--targets FILENAME
--with-revprop ARG

例子

Using svn to delete a file from your working copy deletes your local copy of the file, but it merely schedules the file to be deleted from the repository. When you commit, the file is deleted in the repository.

$ svn delete myfile
D         myfile

$ svn commit -m "Deleted file 'myfile'."
Deleting       myfile
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 14.

然而直接删除一个URL,你需要提供一个日志信息:

$ svn delete -m "Deleting file 'yourfile'" \
             file:///var/svn/repos/test/yourfile

Committed revision 15.

如下是强制删除本地已修改文件的例子:

$ svn delete over-there 
svn: Attempting restricted operation for modified resource
svn: Use --force to override this restriction
svn: 'over-there' has local modifications

$ svn delete --force over-there 
D         over-there

Use the --keep-local option to override the default svn delete behavior of also removing the target file that was scheduled for versioned deletion. This is helpful when you realize that you've accidentally committed the addition of a file that you need to keep around in your working copy, but which shouldn't have been added to version control.

$ svn delete --keep-local conf/program.conf
D         conf/program.conf

$ svn commit -m "Remove accidentally-added configuration file."
Deleting       conf/program.conf
Transmitting file data .
Committed revision 21.
$ svn status
?       conf/program.conf
$

名称

svn diff (di) — 显示两个版本或路径的差异。

概要

diff [-c M | -r N[:M]] [TARGET[@REV]...]

diff [-r N[:M]] --old=OLD-TGT[@OLDREV] [--new=NEW-TGT[@NEWREV]] [PATH...]

diff OLD-URL[@OLDREV] NEW-URL[@NEWREV]

描述

Display the differences between two paths. You can use svn diff in the following ways:

  • Use just svn diff to display local modifications in a working copy.

  • Display the changes made to TARGETs as they are seen in REV between two revisions. TARGETs may be all working copy paths or all URLs. If TARGETs are working copy paths, N defaults to BASE and M to the working copy; if TARGETs are URLs, N must be specified and M defaults to HEAD. The -c M option is equivalent to -r N:M where N = M-1. Using -c -M does the reverse: -r M:N where N = M-1.

  • Display the differences between OLD-TGT as it was seen in OLDREV and NEW-TGT as it was seen in NEWREV. PATHs, if given, are relative to OLD-TGT and NEW-TGT and restrict the output to differences for those paths. OLD-TGT and NEW-TGT may be working copy paths or URL[@REV]. NEW-TGT defaults to OLD-TGT if not specified. -r N makes OLDREV default to N; -r N:M makes OLDREV default to N and NEWREV default to M.

svn diff OLD-URL[@OLDREV] NEW-URL[@NEWREV] is shorthand for svn diff --old=OLD-URL[@OLDREV] --new=NEW-URL[@NEWREV].

svn diff -r N:M URL is shorthand for svn diff -r N:M --old=URL --new=URL.

svn diff [-r N[:M]] URL1[@N] URL2[@M] is shorthand for svn diff [-r N[:M]] --old=URL1 --new=URL2.

If TARGET is a URL, then revs N and M can be given either via the --revision (-r) option or by using the @ notation as described earlier.

If TARGET is a working copy path, the default behavior (when no --revision (-r) option is provided) is to display the differences between the base and working copies of TARGET. If a --revision (-r) option is specified in this scenario, though, it means:

--revision N:M

服务器比较 TARGET@NTARGET@M

--revision N

The client compares TARGET@N against the working copy.

If the alternate syntax is used, the server compares URL1 and URL2 at revisions N and M, respectively. If either N or M is omitted, a value of HEAD is assumed.

By default, svn diff ignores the ancestry of files and merely compares the contents of the two files being compared. If you use --notice-ancestry, the ancestry of the paths in question will be taken into consideration when comparing revisions (i.e., if you run svn diff on two files with identical contents but different ancestry, you will see the entire contents of the file as having been removed and added again).

选项

--change (-c) ARG
--changelist ARG
--depth ARG
--diff-cmd CMD
--extensions (-x) ARG
--force
--new ARG
--no-diff-deleted
--notice-ancestry
--old ARG
--revision (-r) ARG
--summarize
--xml

例子

比较BASE和你的工作副本(svn diff最经常的用法):

$ svn diff COMMITTERS 
Index: COMMITTERS
===================================================================
--- COMMITTERS	(revision 4404)
+++ COMMITTERS	(working copy)

See what changed in the file COMMITTERS revision 9115:

$ svn diff -c 9115 COMMITTERS 
Index: COMMITTERS
===================================================================
--- COMMITTERS	(revision 3900)
+++ COMMITTERS	(working copy)

察看你的工作副本对旧的修订版本的修改:

$ svn diff -r 3900 COMMITTERS 
Index: COMMITTERS
===================================================================
--- COMMITTERS	(revision 3900)
+++ COMMITTERS	(working copy)

使用@语法与修订版本3000和35000比较:

$ svn diff http://svn.collab.net/repos/svn/trunk/COMMITTERS@3000 \
           http://svn.collab.net/repos/svn/trunk/COMMITTERS@3500
Index: COMMITTERS
===================================================================
--- COMMITTERS	(revision 3000)
+++ COMMITTERS	(revision 3500)
…

使用范围符号来比较修订版本3000和3500(在这种情况下只能传递一个URL):

$ svn diff -r 3000:3500 http://svn.collab.net/repos/svn/trunk/COMMITTERS
Index: COMMITTERS
===================================================================
--- COMMITTERS	(revision 3000)
+++ COMMITTERS	(revision 3500)

使用范围符号比较修订版本3000和3500trunk中的所有文件:

$ svn diff -r 3000:3500 http://svn.collab.net/repos/svn/trunk
          

使用范围符号比较修订版本3000和3500trunk中的三个文件:

$ svn diff -r 3000:3500 --old http://svn.collab.net/repos/svn/trunk \
           COMMITTERS README HACKING
          

如果你有工作副本,你不必输入这么长的URL:

$ svn diff -r 3000:3500 COMMITTERS 
Index: COMMITTERS
===================================================================
--- COMMITTERS	(revision 3000)
+++ COMMITTERS	(revision 3500)

Use --diff-cmd CMD --extensions (-x) to pass arguments directly to the external diff program:

$ svn diff --diff-cmd /usr/bin/diff -x "-i -b" COMMITTERS 
Index: COMMITTERS
===================================================================
0a1,2
> This is a test
> 

Lastly, you can use the --xml option along with the --summarize option to view XML describing the changes that occurred between revisions, but not the contents of the diff itself:

$ svn diff --summarize --xml http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test@r2 \
           http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<diff>
<paths>
<path
   props="none"
   kind="file"
   item="modified">http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/sandwich.txt</path>
<path
   props="none"
   kind="file"
   item="deleted">http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/burrito.txt</path>
<path
   props="none"
   kind="dir"
   item="added">http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/snacks</path>
</paths>
</diff>

名称

svn export — 导出一个干净的目录树。

概要

svn export [-r REV] URL[@PEGREV] [PATH]

svn export [-r REV] PATH1[@PEGREV] [PATH2]

描述

The first form exports a clean directory tree from the repository specified by URL—at revision REV if it is given; otherwise, at HEAD, into PATH. If PATH is omitted, the last component of the URL is used for the local directory name.

The second form exports a clean directory tree from the working copy specified by PATH1 into PATH2. All local changes will be preserved, but files not under version control will not be copied.

选项

--depth ARG
--force
--ignore-externals
--native-eol EOL
--quiet (-q)
--revision (-r) REV

例子

从你的工作副本导出(不会打印每一个文件和目录):

$ svn export a-wc my-export
Export complete.

从版本库导出目录(打印所有的文件和目录):

$ svn export file:///var/svn/repos my-export
A    my-export/test
A    my-export/quiz
…
Exported revision 15.

When rolling operating-system-specific release packages, it can be useful to export a tree that uses a specific EOL character for line endings. The --native-eol option will do this, but it affects only files that have svn:eol-style = native properties attached to them. For example, to export a tree with all CRLF line endings (possibly for a Windows .zip file distribution):

$ svn export file:///var/svn/repos my-export --native-eol CRLF
A    my-export/test
A    my-export/quiz
…
Exported revision 15.

你可以为--native-eol选项指定LR, CRCRLF作为行结束符。


名称

svn help (h, ?) — 求助!

概要

svn help [SUBCOMMAND...]

描述

当手边没有这本书时,这是你使用Subversion最好的朋友!

选项


名称

svn import — 递归提交一个路径的拷贝到版本库。

概要

svn import [PATH] URL

描述

Recursively commit a copy of PATH to URL. If PATH is omitted, . is assumed. Parent directories are created in the repository as necessary. Unversionable items such as device files and pipes are ignored even if --force is specified.

选项

--auto-props
--depth ARG
--editor-cmd CMD
--encoding ENC
--file (-F) FILENAME
--force
--force-log
--message (-m) MESSAGE
--no-auto-props
--no-ignore
--quiet (-q)
--with-revprop ARG

例子

This imports the local directory myproj into trunk/misc in your repository. The directory trunk/misc need not exist before you import into it—svn import will recursively create directories for you.

$ svn import -m "New import" myproj \
             http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/trunk/misc
Adding         myproj/sample.txt
…
Transmitting file data .........
Committed revision 16.

Be aware that this will not create a directory named myproj in the repository. If that's what you want, simply add myproj to the end of the URL:

$ svn import -m "New import" myproj \
            http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/trunk/misc/myproj
Adding         myproj/sample.txt
…
Transmitting file data .........
Committed revision 16.

After importing data, note that the original tree is not under version control. To start working, you still need to svn checkout a fresh working copy of the tree.


名称

svn info — 显示本地或远程条目的信息。

概要

svn info [TARGET[@REV]...]

描述

Print information about the working copy paths or URLs specified. The information displayed for each path may include (as pertinent to the object at that path):

  • information about the repository in which the object is versioned

  • the most recent commit made to the specified version of the object

  • any user-level locks held on the object

  • local scheduling information (added, deleted, copied, etc.)

  • local conflict information

选项

--changelist ARG
--depth ARG
--incremental
--recursive (-R)
--revision (-r) REV
--targets FILENAME
--xml

例子

svn info 会展示工作副本所有项目的所有有用信息,它会显示文件的信息:

$ svn info foo.c
Path: foo.c
Name: foo.c
URL: http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/foo.c
Repository Root: http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test
Repository UUID: 5e7d134a-54fb-0310-bd04-b611643e5c25
Revision: 4417
Node Kind: file
Schedule: normal
Last Changed Author: sally
Last Changed Rev: 20
Last Changed Date: 2003-01-13 16:43:13 -0600 (Mon, 13 Jan 2003)
Text Last Updated: 2003-01-16 21:18:16 -0600 (Thu, 16 Jan 2003)
Properties Last Updated: 2003-01-13 21:50:19 -0600 (Mon, 13 Jan 2003)
Checksum: d6aeb60b0662ccceb6bce4bac344cb66

它也会展示目录的信息:

$ svn info vendors
Path: vendors
URL: http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/vendors
Repository Root: http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test
Repository UUID: 5e7d134a-54fb-0310-bd04-b611643e5c25
Revision: 19
Node Kind: directory
Schedule: normal
Last Changed Author: harry
Last Changed Rev: 19
Last Changed Date: 2003-01-16 23:21:19 -0600 (Thu, 16 Jan 2003)
Properties Last Updated: 2003-01-16 23:39:02 -0600 (Thu, 16 Jan 2003)

svn info也可以针对URL操作(另外,可以注意一下例子中的readme.doc文件已经被锁定,所以也会显示锁定信息):

$ svn info http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/readme.doc
Path: readme.doc
Name: readme.doc
URL: http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/readme.doc
Repository Root: http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test
Repository UUID: 5e7d134a-54fb-0310-bd04-b611643e5c25
Revision: 1
Node Kind: file
Schedule: normal
Last Changed Author: sally
Last Changed Rev: 42
Last Changed Date: 2003-01-14 23:21:19 -0600 (Tue, 14 Jan 2003)
Lock Token: opaquelocktoken:14011d4b-54fb-0310-8541-dbd16bd471b2
Lock Owner: harry
Lock Created: 2003-01-15 17:35:12 -0600 (Wed, 15 Jan 2003)
Lock Comment (1 line):
My test lock comment

Lastly, svn info output is available in XML format by passing the --xml option:

$ svn info --xml http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<info>
<entry
   kind="dir"
   path="."
   revision="1">
<url>http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test</url>
<repository>
<root>http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test</root>
<uuid>5e7d134a-54fb-0310-bd04-b611643e5c25</uuid>
</repository>
<wc-info>
<schedule>normal</schedule>
<depth>infinity</depth>
</wc-info>
<commit
   revision="1">
<author>sally</author>
<date>2003-01-15T23:35:12.847647Z</date>
</commit>
</entry>
</info>

名称

svn list (ls) — 列出版本库目录的条目。

概要

svn list [TARGET[@REV]...]

描述

列出版本库中每一个 TARGET 文件和 TARGET 目录的内容。如果 TARGET 是工作副本路径,会使用对应的版本库 URL。

缺省的TARGET.,意味着当前工作副本的版本库URL。

With --verbose (-v), svn list shows the following fields for each item:

  • 最后一次提交的修订版本号

  • 最后一次提交的作者

  • If locked, the letter O (see the preceding section on svn info for details).

  • 大小(单位字节)

  • 最后提交的日期时间

With --xml, output is in XML format (with a header and an enclosing document element unless --incremental is also specified). All of the information is present; the --verbose (-v) option is not accepted.

选项

--depth ARG
--incremental
--recursive (-R)
--revision (-r) REV
--verbose (-v)
--xml

例子

如果你希望在没有下载工作副本时查看版本库有哪些文件,svn list会非常有用:

$ svn list http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/support
README.txt
INSTALL
examples/
…

You can pass the --verbose (-v) option for additional information, rather like the Unix command ls -l:

$ svn list -v file:///var/svn/repos
     16 sally         28361 Jan 16 23:18 README.txt
     27 sally             0 Jan 18 15:27 INSTALL
     24 harry               Jan 18 11:27 examples/

You can also get svn list output in XML format with the --xml option:

$ svn list --xml http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<lists>
<list
   path="http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test">
<entry
   kind="dir">
<name>examples</name>
<size>0</size>
<commit
   revision="24">
<author>harry</author>
<date>2008-01-18T06:35:53.048870Z</date>
</commit>
</entry>
...
</list>
</lists>

更多细节见第 5.3.2 节 “svn list”


名称

svn lock — Lock working copy paths or URLs in the repository so that no other user can commit changes to them.

概要

svn lock TARGET...

描述

Lock each TARGET. If any TARGET is already locked by another user, print a warning and continue locking the rest of the TARGETs. Use --force to steal a lock from another user or working copy.

选项

--encoding ENC
--file (-F) FILENAME
--force
--force-log
--message (-m) MESSAGE
--targets FILENAME

例子

在工作副本锁定两个文件:

$ svn lock tree.jpg house.jpg
'tree.jpg' locked by user 'harry'.
'house.jpg' locked by user 'harry'.

锁定工作副本的一个被其它用户锁定的文件:

$ svn lock tree.jpg
svn: warning: Path '/tree.jpg is already locked by user 'sally in \
     filesystem '/var/svn/repos/db'

$ svn lock --force tree.jpg
'tree.jpg' locked by user 'harry'.

没有工作副本的情况下锁定文件:

$ svn lock http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/tree.jpg
'tree.jpg' locked by user 'harry'.

更多细节见第 8 节 “锁定”


名称

svn log — 显示提交日志信息。

概要

svn log [PATH]

svn log URL[@REV] [PATH...]

描述

Shows log messages from the repository. If no arguments are supplied, svn log shows the log messages for all files and directories inside (and including) the current working directory of your working copy. You can refine the results by specifying a path, one or more revisions, or any combination of the two. The default revision range for a local path is BASE:1.

If you specify a URL alone, it prints log messages for everything the URL contains. If you add paths past the URL, only messages for those paths under that URL will be printed. The default revision range for a URL is HEAD:1.

With --verbose (-v), svn log will also print all affected paths with each log message. With --quiet (-q), svn log will not print the log message body itself, this is compatible with --verbose (-v).

Each log message is printed just once, even if more than one of the affected paths for that revision were explicitly requested. Logs follow copy history by default. Use --stop-on-copy to disable this behavior, which can be useful for determining branch points.

选项

--change (-c) ARG
--incremental
--limit (-l) NUM
--quiet (-q)
--revision (-r) REV
--stop-on-copy
--targets FILENAME
--use-merge-history (-g)
--verbose (-v)
--with-all-revprops
--with-no-revprops
--with-revprop ARG
--xml

例子

You can see the log messages for all the paths that changed in your working copy by running svn log from the top:

$ svn log
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r20 | harry | 2003-01-17 22:56:19 -0600 (Fri, 17 Jan 2003) | 1 line

Tweak.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r17 | sally | 2003-01-16 23:21:19 -0600 (Thu, 16 Jan 2003) | 2 lines
…

检验一个特定文件所有的日志信息:

$ svn log foo.c
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r32 | sally | 2003-01-13 00:43:13 -0600 (Mon, 13 Jan 2003) | 1 line

Added defines.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r28 | sally | 2003-01-07 21:48:33 -0600 (Tue, 07 Jan 2003) | 3 lines
…

如果你手边没有工作副本,你可以查看一个URL的日志:

$ svn log http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/foo.c
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r32 | sally | 2003-01-13 00:43:13 -0600 (Mon, 13 Jan 2003) | 1 line

Added defines.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r28 | sally | 2003-01-07 21:48:33 -0600 (Tue, 07 Jan 2003) | 3 lines
…

如果你希望查看某个URL下面不同的多个路径,你可以使用URL [PATH...]语法。

$ svn log http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/ foo.c bar.c
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r32 | sally | 2003-01-13 00:43:13 -0600 (Mon, 13 Jan 2003) | 1 line

Added defines.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r31 | harry | 2003-01-10 12:25:08 -0600 (Fri, 10 Jan 2003) | 1 line

Added new file bar.c
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r28 | sally | 2003-01-07 21:48:33 -0600 (Tue, 07 Jan 2003) | 3 lines
…

The --verbose (-v) option causes svn log to include information about the paths that were changed in each displayed revision. These paths appear, one path per line of output, with action codes that indicate what type of change was made to the path.

$ svn log -v http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/ foo.c bar.c
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r32 | sally | 2003-01-13 00:43:13 -0600 (Mon, 13 Jan 2003) | 1 line
Changed paths:
   M /foo.c

Added defines.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r31 | harry | 2003-01-10 12:25:08 -0600 (Fri, 10 Jan 2003) | 1 line
Changed paths:
   A /bar.c

Added new file bar.c
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r28 | sally | 2003-01-07 21:48:33 -0600 (Tue, 07 Jan 2003) | 3 lines
…

svn log uses just a handful of action codes, and they are similar to the ones the svn update command uses:

A

项目已增加。

D

项目已删除。

M

条目属性改变了,注意开头的空格。

R

在同样的位置,项目被代替。

In addition to the action codes which precede the changed paths, svn log with the --verbose (-v) option will note whether a path was added or replaced as the result of a copy operation. It does so by printing (from COPY-FROM-PATH:COPY-FROM-REV) after such paths.

When you're concatenating the results of multiple calls to the log command, you may want to use the --incremental option. svn log normally prints out a dashed line at the beginning of a log message, after each subsequent log message, and following the final log message. If you ran svn log on a range of two revisions, you would get this:

$ svn log -r 14:15
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r14 | …

------------------------------------------------------------------------
r15 | …

------------------------------------------------------------------------

然而,如果你希望收集两个不连续的日志信息到一个文件,你会这样做:

$ svn log -r 14 > mylog
$ svn log -r 19 >> mylog
$ svn log -r 27 >> mylog
$ cat mylog
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r14 | …

------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r19 | …

------------------------------------------------------------------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r27 | …

------------------------------------------------------------------------

你可以使用incremental选项来避免两行虚线带来的混乱:

$ svn log --incremental -r 14 > mylog
$ svn log --incremental -r 19 >> mylog
$ svn log --incremental -r 27 >> mylog
$ cat mylog
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r14 | …

------------------------------------------------------------------------
r19 | …

------------------------------------------------------------------------
r27 | …

--incremental选项为--xml提供了一个相似的输出控制。

$ svn log --xml --incremental -r 1 sandwich.txt
<logentry
   revision="1">
<author>harry</author>
<date>2008-06-03T06:35:53.048870Z</date>
<msg>Initial Import.</msg>
</logentry>
[提示]提示

Sometimes when you run svn log on a specific path and a specific revision, you see no log information output at all, as in the following:

$ svn log -r 20 http://svn.red-bean.com/untouched.txt
------------------------------------------------------------------------

That just means the path wasn't modified in that revision. To get log information for that revision, either run the log operation against the repository's root URL, or specify a path that you happen to know was changed in that revision:

$ svn log -r 20 touched.txt 
------------------------------------------------------------------------
r20 | sally | 2003-01-17 22:56:19 -0600 (Fri, 17 Jan 2003) | 1 line

Made a change.
------------------------------------------------------------------------

名称

svn merge — 应用两组源文件的差别到工作副本路径。

概要

svn merge sourceURL1[@N] sourceURL2[@M] [WCPATH]

svn merge sourceWCPATH1@N sourceWCPATH2@M [WCPATH]

svn merge [[-c M]... | [-r N:M]...] [SOURCE[@REV] [WCPATH]]

描述

In the first form, the source URLs are specified at revisions N and M. These are the two sources to be compared. The revisions default to HEAD if omitted.

In the second form, the URLs corresponding to the source working copy paths define the sources to be compared. The revisions must be specified.

In the third form, SOURCE can be either a URL or a working copy path (in which case its corresponding URL is used). If not specified, SOURCE will be the same as WCPATH. SOURCE in revision REV is compared as it existed between revisions N and M for each revision range provided. If REV is not specified, HEAD is assumed.

-c M is equivalent to -r <M-1>:M, and -c -M does the reverse: -r M:<M-1>. If no revision ranges are specified, the default range of 1:HEAD is used. Multiple -c and/or -r instances may be specified, and mixing of forward and reverse ranges is allowed—the ranges are internally compacted to their minimum representation before merging begins (which may result in no-op).

WCPATH is the working copy path that will receive the changes. If WCPATH is omitted, a default value of . is assumed, unless the sources have identical basenames that match a file within .. In this case, the differences will be applied to that file.

Subversion will internally track metadata about the merge operation only if the two sources are ancestrally related—if the first source is an ancestor of the second or vice versa. This is guaranteed to be the case when using the third form. Unlike svn diff, the merge command takes the ancestry of a file into consideration when performing a merge operation. This is very important when you're merging changes from one branch into another and you've renamed a file on one branch but not the other.

选项

--accept ACTION
--change (-c) REV
--depth ARG
--diff3-cmd CMD
--dry-run
--extensions (-x) ARG
--force
--ignore-ancestry
--quiet (-q)
--record-only
--reintegrate
--revision (-r) REV

例子

Merge a branch back into the trunk (assuming that you have an up-to-date working copy of the trunk):

$ svn merge --reintegrate \
            http://svn.example.com/repos/calc/branches/my-calc-branch
--- Merging differences between repository URLs into '.':
U    button.c
U    integer.c
U    Makefile
 U   .

$ # build, test, verify, ...

$ svn commit -m "Merge my-calc-branch back into trunk!"
Sending        .
Sending        button.c
Sending        integer.c
Sending        Makefile
Transmitting file data ..
Committed revision 391.

合并一个单独文件的修改:

$ cd myproj
$ svn merge -r 30:31 thhgttg.txt 
U  thhgttg.txt

名称

svn mergeinfo — Query merge-related information. See 第 3.4 节 “合并信息和预览” for details.

概要

svn mergeinfo SOURCE_URL[@REV] [TARGET[@REV]]

描述

Query information related to merges (or potential merges) between SOURCE-URL and TARGET. If the --show-revs option is not provided, display revisions which have been merged from SOURCE-URL to TARGET. Otherwise, display either merged or eligible revisions as specified by the --show-revs option.

选项

--revision (-r) REV
--show-revs ARG

例子

Find out which changesets your have been merged from your trunk directory into your test branch:

$ svn propget svn:mergeinfo ^/branches/test
/branches/other:3-4
/trunk:11-13,14,16
$ svn mergeinfo --show-revs merged ^/trunk ^/branches/test
r11
r12
r13
r14
r16
$ 

Note that the default output from the svn mergeinfo command is to display merged revisions, so the --show-revs option shown in the command line of the previous example is not strictly required.

Find out which changesets from your trunk directory have not yet been merged into your test branch:

$ svn mergeinfo --show-revs eligible ^/trunk ^/branches/test
r15
r17
r20
r21
r22
$ 

名称

svn mkdir — 创建一个纳入版本控制的新目录。

概要

svn mkdir PATH...

svn mkdir URL...

描述

Create a directory with a name given by the final component of the PATH or URL. A directory specified by a working copy PATH is scheduled for addition in the working copy. A directory specified by a URL is created in the repository via an immediate commit. Multiple directory URLs are committed atomically. In both cases, all the intermediate directories must already exist unless the --parents option is used.

选项

--editor-cmd CMD
--encoding ENC
--file (-F) FILENAME
--force-log
--message (-m) MESSAGE
--parents
--quiet (-q)
--with-revprop ARG

例子

在工作副本创建一个目录:

$ svn mkdir newdir
A         newdir

在版本库创建一个目录(立即提交,所以需要日志信息):

$ svn mkdir -m "Making a new dir." http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/newdir

Committed revision 26.

名称

svn move (mv) — 移动一个文件或目录。

概要

svn move SRC... DST

描述

这个命令移动文件或目录到你的工作副本或者是版本库。

[提示]提示

这个命令同svn copy加一个svn delete等同。

When moving multiple sources, they will be added as children of DST, which must be a directory.

[注意]注意

Subversion does not support moving between working copies and URLs. In addition, you can only move files within a single repository—Subversion does not support cross-repository moving. Subversion supports the following types of moves within a single repository:

WC → WC

移动和预订一个文件或目录将要添加(包含历史)。

URL → URL

完全服务器端的重命名。

选项

--editor-cmd CMD
--encoding ENC
--file (-F) FILENAME
--force
--force-log
--message (-m) MESSAGE
--parents
--quiet (-q)
--revision (-r) REV
--with-revprop ARG

例子

移动工作拷bede一个文件:

$ svn move foo.c bar.c
A         bar.c
D         foo.c

移动工作副本的一些文件到子目录:

$ svn move baz.c bat.c qux.c src
A         src/baz.c
D         baz.c
A         src/bat.c
D         bat.c
A         src/qux.c
D         qux.c

移动版本库中的文件(立即提交,所以需要提交信息):

$ svn move -m "Move a file" http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/foo.c \
                            http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/bar.c

Committed revision 27.

名称

svn propdel (pdel, pd) — 删除一个项目的一个属性。

概要

svn propdel PROPNAME [PATH...]

svn propdel PROPNAME --revprop -r REV [TARGET]

描述

This removes properties from files, directories, or revisions. The first form removes versioned properties in your working copy, and the second removes unversioned remote properties on a repository revision (TARGET determines only which repository to access).

选项

--changelist ARG
--depth ARG
--quiet (-q)
--recursive (-R)
--revision (-r) REV
--revprop

例子

删除你的工作副本中一个文件的一个属性

$ svn propdel svn:mime-type some-script
property 'svn:mime-type' deleted from 'some-script'.

删除一个修订版本的属性:

$ svn propdel --revprop -r 26 release-date 
property 'release-date' deleted from repository revision '26'

名称

svn propedit (pedit, pe) — Edit the property of one or more items under version control. See svn propset (pset, ps) later in this chapter.

概要

svn propedit PROPNAME TARGET...

svn propedit PROPNAME --revprop -r REV [TARGET]

描述

Edit one or more properties using your favorite editor. The first form edits versioned properties in your working copy, and the second edits unversioned remote properties on a repository revision (TARGET determines only which repository to access).

选项

--editor-cmd CMD
--encoding ENC
--file (-F) FILENAME
--force
--force-log
--message (-m) MESSAGE
--revision (-r) REV
--revprop
--with-revprop ARG

例子

svn propedit对修改多个值的属性非常简单:

$ svn propedit svn:keywords foo.c 

    # svn will open in your favorite text editor a temporary file
    # containing the current contents of the svn:keywords property.  You
    # can add multiple values to a property easily here by entering one
    # value per line.  When you save the temporary file and exit,
    # Subversion will re-read the temporary file and use its updated
    # contents as the new value of the property.

Set new value for property 'svn:keywords' on 'foo.c'
$

名称

svn propget (pget, pg) — 打印一个属性的值。

概要

svn propget PROPNAME [TARGET[@REV]...]

svn propget PROPNAME --revprop -r REV [URL]

描述

Print the value of a property on files, directories, or revisions. The first form prints the versioned property of an item or items in your working copy, and the second prints unversioned remote properties on a repository revision. See 第 3 节 “属性” for more information on properties.

选项

--changelist ARG
--depth ARG
--recursive (-R)
--revision (-r) REV
--revprop
--strict
--verbose (-v)
--xml

例子

检查工作副本的一个文件的一个属性:

$ svn propget svn:keywords foo.c
Author
Date
Rev

对于修订版本属性相同:

$ svn propget svn:log --revprop -r 20 
Began journal.

For a more structured display of properties, use the --verbose (-v) option:

$ svn propget svn:keywords foo.c --verbose
Properties on 'foo.c':
  svn:keywords
    Author
    Date
    Rev

By default, svn propget will append a trailing end-of-line sequence to the property value it prints. Most of the time, this is a desirable feature that has a positive effect on the printed output. But there are times when you might wish to capture the precise property value, perhaps because that value is not textual in nature, but of some binary format (such as a JPEG thumbnail stored as a property value, for example). To disable pretty-printing of property values, use the --strict option.

Lastly, you can get svn propget output in XML format with the --xml option:

$ svn propget --xml svn:ignore .
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<properties>
<target
   path="">
<property
   name="svn:ignore">*.o
</property>
</target>
</properties>

名称

svn proplist (plist, pl) — 列出所有的属性。

概要

svn proplist [TARGET[@REV]...]

svn proplist --revprop -r REV [TARGET]

描述

List all properties on files, directories, or revisions. The first form lists versioned properties in your working copy, and the second lists unversioned remote properties on a repository revision (TARGET determines only which repository to access).

选项

--changelist ARG
--depth ARG
--quiet (-q)
--recursive (-R)
--revision (-r) REV
--revprop
--verbose (-v)
--xml

例子

你可以使用 proplist 察看你的工作副本的一个项目属性:

$ svn proplist foo.c
Properties on 'foo.c':
  svn:mime-type
  svn:keywords
  owner

But with the --verbose (-v) flag, svn proplist is extremely handy as it also shows you the values for the properties:

$ svn proplist -v foo.c
Properties on 'foo.c':
  svn:mime-type
    text/plain
  svn:keywords
    Author Date Rev
  owner
    sally

Lastly, you can get svn proplist output in xml format with the --xml option:

$ svn proplist --xml 
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<properties>
<target
   path=".">
<property
   name="svn:ignore"/>
</target>
</properties>

名称

svn propset (pset, ps) — Set PROPNAME to PROPVAL on files, directories, or revisions.

概要

svn propset PROPNAME [PROPVAL | -F VALFILE] PATH...

svn propset PROPNAME --revprop -r REV [PROPVAL | -F VALFILE] [TARGET]

描述

Set PROPNAME to PROPVAL on files, directories, or revisions. The first example creates a versioned, local property change in the working copy, and the second creates an unversioned, remote property change on a repository revision (TARGET determines only which repository to access).

[提示]提示

Subversion has a number of special properties that affect its behavior. See 第 10 节 “Subversion 属性” later in this chapter for more on these properties.

选项

--changelist ARG
--depth ARG
--encoding ENC
--file (-F) FILENAME
--force
--quiet (-q)
--recursive (-R)
--revision (-r) REV
--revprop
--targets FILENAME

例子

设置文件的 MIME 类型:

$ svn propset svn:mime-type image/jpeg foo.jpg 
property 'svn:mime-type' set on 'foo.jpg'

在UNIX系统,如果你希望一个文件设置执行权限:

$ svn propset svn:executable ON somescript
property 'svn:executable' set on 'somescript'

或许为了合作者的利益你有一个内部的属性设置:

$ svn propset owner sally foo.c
property 'owner' set on 'foo.c'

如果你在特定修订版本的日志信息里有一些错误,并且希望修改,可以使用--revprop设置svn:log为新的日志信息:

$ svn propset --revprop -r 25 svn:log "Journaled about trip to New York."
property 'svn:log' set on repository revision '25'

或者,你没有工作副本,你可以提供一个URL:

$ svn propset --revprop -r 26 svn:log "Document nap." \
              http://svn.red-bean.com/repos
property 'svn:log' set on repository revision '25'

Lastly, you can tell propset to take its input from a file. You could even use this to set the contents of a property to something binary:

$ svn propset owner-pic -F sally.jpg moo.c 
property 'owner-pic' set on 'moo.c'
[注意]注意

By default, you cannot modify revision properties in a Subversion repository. Your repository administrator must explicitly enable revision property modifications by creating a hook named pre-revprop-change. See 第 3.2 节 “实现版本库钩子” for more information on hook scripts.


名称

svn resolve — 解决工作副本文件或目录的冲突。

概要

svn resolve PATH...

描述

Resolve conflicted state on working copy files or directories. This routine does not semantically resolve conflict markers; however, it replaces PATH with the version specified by the --accept argument and then removes conflict-related artifact files. This allows PATH to be committed again—that is, it tells Subversion that the conflicts have been resolved.. You can pass the following arguments to the --accept command depending on your desired resolution:

base

Choose the file that was the BASE revision before you updated your working copy. That is, the file that you checked out before you made your latest edits.

working

Assuming that you've manually handled the conflict resolution, choose the version of the file as it currently stands in your working copy.

mine-full

Resolve all conflicted files with copies of the files as they stood immediately before you ran svn update.

theirs-full

Resolve all conflicted files with copies of the files that were fetched from the server when you ran svn update.

关于解决冲突的深入介绍可以看第 4.5 节 “解决冲突”

选项

--accept ACTION
--depth ARG
--quiet (-q)
--recursive (-R)
--targets FILENAME

例子

Here's an example where, after a postponed conflict resolution during update, svn resolve replaces the all conflicts in file foo.c with your edits:

$ svn update
Conflict discovered in 'foo.c'.
Select: (p) postpone, (df) diff-full, (e) edit,
        (mc) mine-conflict, (tc) theirs-conflict,
        (s) show all options: p
C    foo.c
Updated to revision 5.
Summary of conflicts:
  Text conflicts: 1
$ svn resolve --accept mine-full foo.c
Resolved conflicted state of 'foo.c'
$

名称

svn resolved — Deprecated. Remove conflicted state on working copy files or directories.

概要

svn resolved PATH...

描述

This command has been deprecated in favor of running svn resolve --accept working PATH. See svn resolve in the preceding section for details.

Remove conflicted state on working copy files or directories. This routine does not semantically resolve conflict markers; it merely removes conflict-related artifact files and allows PATH to be committed again; that is, it tells Subversion that the conflicts have been resolved. See 第 4.5 节 “解决冲突” for an in-depth look at resolving conflicts.

选项

--depth ARG
--quiet (-q)
--recursive (-R)
--targets FILENAME

例子

如果你在更新时得到冲突,你的工作副本会产生三个新的文件:

$ svn update
C    foo.c
Updated to revision 31.
Summary of conflicts:
  Text conflicts: 1
$ ls foo.c*
foo.c
foo.c.mine
foo.c.r30
foo.c.r31
$

当你解决了foo.c的冲突,并且准备提交,运行svn resolved让你的工作副本知道你已经完成了所有事情。

[警告]警告

可以仅仅删除冲突的文件并且提交,但是svn resolved除了删除冲突文件,还修正了一些记录在工作副本管理区域的记录数据,所以我们推荐你使用这个命令。


名称

svn revert — 取消所有的本地编辑。

概要

svn revert PATH...

描述

Reverts any local changes to a file or directory and resolves any conflicted states. svn revert will revert not only the contents of an item in your working copy, but also any property changes. Finally, you can use it to undo any scheduling operations that you may have performed (e.g., files scheduled for addition or deletion can be unscheduled).

选项

--changelist ARG
--depth ARG
--quiet (-q)
--recursive (-R)
--targets FILENAME

例子

丢弃对一个文件的修改:

$ svn revert foo.c
Reverted foo.c

如果你希望恢复一整个目录的文件,可以使用--depth=infinity选项:

$ svn revert --depth=infinity .
Reverted newdir/afile
Reverted foo.c
Reverted bar.txt

最后,你可以取消预定的操作:

$ svn add mistake.txt whoops
A         mistake.txt
A         whoops
A         whoops/oopsie.c

$ svn revert mistake.txt whoops
Reverted mistake.txt
Reverted whoops

$ svn status
?       mistake.txt
?       whoops
[警告]警告

svn revert is inherently dangerous, since its entire purpose is to throw away data—namely, your uncommitted changes. Once you've reverted, Subversion provides no way to get back those uncommitted changes.

If you provide no targets to svn revert, it will do nothing. To protect you from accidentally losing changes in your working copy, svn revert requires you to explicitly provide at least one target.


名称

svn status (stat, st) — 打印工作副本文件和目录的状态。

概要

svn status [PATH...]

描述

Print the status of working copy files and directories. With no arguments, it prints only locally modified items (no repository access). With --show-updates (-u), it adds working revision and server out-of-date information. With --verbose (-v), it prints full revision information on every item. With --quiet (-q), it prints only summary information about locally modified items.

The first seven columns in the output are each one character wide, and each column gives you information about a different aspect of each working copy item.

第一列指出一个项目的是添加, 删除还是其它的修改:

' '

没有修改。

'A'

预定要添加的项目。

'D'

预定要删除的项目。

'M'

项目已经修改了。

'R'

Item has been replaced in your working copy. This means the file was scheduled for deletion, and then a new file with the same name was scheduled for addition in its place.

'C'

项目的内容(相对于属性)与更新得到的数据冲突了。

'X'

项目与外部定义相关。

'I'

项目被忽略(例如使用svn:ignore属性)。

'?'

项目不在版本控制之下。

'!'

Item is missing (e.g., you moved or deleted it without using svn). This also indicates that a directory is incomplete (a checkout or update was interrupted).

'~'

Item is versioned as one kind of object (file, directory, link), but has been replaced by a different kind of object.

The second column tells the status of a file's or directory's properties:

' '

没有修改。

'M'

这个项目的属性已经修改。

'C'

这个项目的属性与从版本库得到的更新有冲突。

The third column is populated only if the working copy directory is locked (see 第 6 节 “有时你只需要清理”):

' '

项目没有锁定。

'L'

项目已经锁定。

The fourth column is populated only if the item is scheduled for addition-with-history:

' '

没有历史预定要提交。

'+'

历史预定要伴随提交。

The fifth column is populated only if the item is switched relative to its parent (see 第 5 节 “使用分支”):

' '

项目是它的父目录的孩子。

'S'

项目已经转换。

The sixth column is populated with lock information:

' '

When --show-updates (-u) is used, the file is not locked. If --show-updates (-u) is not used, this merely means that the file is not locked in this working copy.

K

文件锁定在工作副本。

O

File is locked either by another user or in another working copy. This appears only when --show-updates (-u) is used.

T

File was locked in this working copy, but the lock has been stolen and is invalid. The file is currently locked in the repository. This appears only when --show-updates (-u) is used.

B

File was locked in this working copy, but the lock has been broken and is invalid. The file is no longer locked. This appears only when --show-updates (-u) is used.

The seventh column is populated only if the item is the victim of a tree conflict:

' '

项目不是树冲突的受害者。

'C'

项目是树冲突的受害者

第八列始终为空。

The out-of-date information appears in the ninth column (only if you pass the --show-updates (-u) option):

' '

这个项目在工作副本是最新的。

'*'

在服务器这个项目有了新的修订版本。

The remaining fields are variable width and delimited by spaces. The working revision is the next field if the --show-updates (-u) or --verbose (-v) option is passed.

If the --verbose (-v) option is passed, the last committed revision and last committed author are displayed next.

工作副本路径永远是最后一个字段,所以它可以包括空格。

选项

--changelist ARG
--depth ARG
--ignore-externals
--incremental
--no-ignore
--quiet (-q)
--show-updates (-u)
--verbose (-v)
--xml

例子

这是查看你在工作副本所做的修改的最简单的方法。

$ svn status wc
 M      wc/bar.c
A  +    wc/qax.c

If you want to find out what files in your working copy are out of date, pass the --show-updates (-u) option (this will not make any changes to your working copy). Here you can see that wc/foo.c has changed in the repository since we last updated our working copy:

$ svn status -u wc
 M            965    wc/bar.c
        *     965    wc/foo.c
A  +          965    wc/qax.c
Status against revision:    981
[注意]注意

--show-updates (-u) only places an asterisk next to items that are out of date (i.e., items that will be updated from the repository if you later use svn update). --show-updates (-u) does not cause the status listing to reflect the repository's version of the item (although you can see the revision number in the repository by passing the --verbose (-v) option).

The most information you can get out of the status subcommand is as follows:

$ svn status -u -v wc
 M            965       938 sally        wc/bar.c
        *     965       922 harry        wc/foo.c
A  +          965       687 harry        wc/qax.c
              965       687 harry        wc/zig.c
Status against revision:   981

Lastly, you can get svn status output in XML format with the --xml option:

$ svn status --xml wc
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<status>
<target
   path="wc">
<entry
   path="qax.c">
<wc-status
   props="none"
   item="added"
   revision="0">
</wc-status>
</entry>
<entry
   path="bar.c">
<wc-status
   props="normal"
   item="modified"
   revision="965">
<commit
   revision="965">
<author>sally</author>
<date>2008-05-28T06:35:53.048870Z</date>
</commit>
</wc-status>
</entry>
</target>
</status>

关于svn status的更多例子可以见第 4.3.1 节 “查看你的修改概况”


名称

svn switch (sw) — 把工作副本更新到别的URL。

概要

svn switch URL[@PEGREV] [PATH]

switch --relocate FROM TO [PATH...]

描述

The first variant of this subcommand (without the --relocate option) updates your working copy to point to a new URL—usually a URL that shares a common ancestor with your working copy, although not necessarily. This is the Subversion way to make a working copy begin tracking a new branch. If specified, PEGREV determines in which revision the target is first looked up. See 第 5 节 “使用分支” for an in-depth look at switching.

If --force is used, unversioned obstructing paths in the working copy do not automatically cause a failure if the switch attempts to add the same path. If the obstructing path is the same type (file or directory) as the corresponding path in the repository, it becomes versioned but its contents are left untouched in the working copy. This means that an obstructing directory's unversioned children may also obstruct and become versioned. For files, any content differences between the obstruction and the repository are treated like a local modification to the working copy. All properties from the repository are applied to the obstructing path.

As with most subcommands, you can limit the scope of the switch operation to a particular tree depth using the --depth option. Alternatively, you can use the --set-depth option to set a new sticky working copy depth on the switch target.

--relocate选项导致svn switch做不同的事情:它更新你的工作副本指向到同一个版本库目录,但是不同的URL(通常因为管理员将版本库转移了服务器,或到了同一个服务器的另一个URL)。

选项

--accept ACTION
--depth ARG
--diff3-cmd CMD
--force
--ignore-externals
--quiet (-q)
--relocate
--revision (-r) REV
--set-depth ARG

例子

如果你目前所在目录vendors分支到vendors-with-fix,你希望转移到那个分支:

$ svn switch http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/branches/vendors-with-fix .
U    myproj/foo.txt
U    myproj/bar.txt
U    myproj/baz.c
U    myproj/qux.c
Updated to revision 31.

To switch back, just provide the URL to the location in the repository from which you originally checked out your working copy:

$ svn switch http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/trunk/vendors .
U    myproj/foo.txt
U    myproj/bar.txt
U    myproj/baz.c
U    myproj/qux.c
Updated to revision 31.
[提示]提示

You can switch just part of your working copy to a branch if you don't want to switch your entire working copy.

Sometimes an administrator might change the location (or apparent location) of your repository—in other words, the content of the repository doesn't change, but the repository's root URL does. For example, the hostname may change, the URL scheme may change, or any part of the URL that leads to the repository itself may change. Rather than check out a new working copy, you can have the svn switch command rewrite your working copy's administrative metadata to refer to the new repository location. If you use the --relocate option to svn switch, Subversion will contact the repository to validate the relocation request (looking for the repository at the new URL, of course), and then do this metadata rewriting. No file contents will be changed as the result of this type of switch operation—this is a metadata-only modification to the working copy.

$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos test
A    test/a
A    test/b
…

$ mv /var/svn/repos /var/svn/newlocation

$ svn update test/
svn: Unable to open an ra_local session to URL
svn: Unable to open repository 'file:///var/svn/repos'

$ svn switch --relocate file:///var/svn/repos \
                        file:///var/svn/tmp/newlocation test/

$ svn update test/
At revision 3.
[警告]警告

Be careful when using the --relocate option. If you mistype the argument, you might end up creating nonsensical URLs within your working copy that render the whole workspace unusable and tricky to fix. It's also important to understand exactly when one should or shouldn't use --relocate. Here's the rule of thumb:

  • If the working copy needs to reflect a new directory within the repository, use just svn switch.

  • If the working copy still reflects the same repository directory, but the location of the repository itself has changed, use svn switch with the --relocate option.


名称

svn unlock — 解锁工作副本路径或URL。

概要

svn unlock TARGET...

描述

Unlock each TARGET. If any TARGET is locked by another user or no valid lock token exists in the working copy, print a warning and continue unlocking the rest of the TARGETs. Use --force to break a lock belonging to another user or working copy.

选项

--force
--targets FILENAME

例子

解锁工作副本中的两个文件:

$ svn unlock tree.jpg house.jpg
'tree.jpg' unlocked.
'house.jpg' unlocked.

解锁工作副本的一个被其他用户锁定的文件:

$ svn unlock tree.jpg
svn: 'tree.jpg' is not locked in this working copy
$ svn unlock --force tree.jpg
'tree.jpg' unlocked.

没有工作副本时解锁一个文件:

$ svn unlock http://svn.red-bean.com/repos/test/tree.jpg
'tree.jpg unlocked.

更多细节见第 8 节 “锁定”


名称

svn update (up) — 更新你的工作副本。

概要

svn update [PATH...]

描述

svn update brings changes from the repository into your working copy. If no revision is given, it brings your working copy up to date with the HEAD revision. Otherwise, it synchronizes the working copy to the revision given by the --revision (-r) option. As part of the synchronization, svn update also removes any stale locks (see 第 6 节 “有时你只需要清理”) found in the working copy.

For each updated item, it prints a line that starts with a character reporting the action taken. These characters have the following meaning:

A

添加

B

损坏的锁 (仅第三列)

D

删除

U

更新

C

冲突

G

合并

E

已经存在

A character in the first column signifies an update to the actual file, whereas updates to the file's properties are shown in the second column. Lock information is printed in the third column.

As with most subcommands, you can limit the scope of the update operation to a particular tree depth using the --depth option. Alternatively, you can use the --set-depth option to set a new sticky working copy depth on the update target.

选项

--accept ACTION
--changelist
--depth ARG
--diff3-cmd CMD
--editor-cmd CMD
--force
--ignore-externals
--quiet (-q)
--revision (-r) REV
--set-depth ARG

例子

获取你上次更新之后版本库的修改:

$ svn update
A    newdir/toggle.c
A    newdir/disclose.c
A    newdir/launch.c
D    newdir/README
Updated to revision 32.

你也可以将工作副本更新到旧的修订版本(Subversion没有CVS的sticky文件的概念;见附录 B, CVS 用户的 Subversion 指南):

$ svn update -r30
A    newdir/README
D    newdir/toggle.c
D    newdir/disclose.c
D    newdir/launch.c
U    foo.c
Updated to revision 30.
[提示]提示

If you want to examine an older revision of a single file, you may want to use svn cat instead—it won't change your working copy.

svn update is also the primary mechanism used to configure sparse working copies. When used with the --set-depth, the update operation will omit or reenlist individual working copy members by modifying their recorded ambient depth to the depth you specify (fetching information from the repository as necessary). See 第 7 节 “稀疏目录” for more about sparse directories.

2. svnadmin—Subversion Repository Administration

svnadmin is the administrative tool for monitoring and repairing your Subversion repository. For detailed information on repository administration, see the maintenance section for 第 4.1.1 节 “svnadmin”.

因为svnadmin直接访问版本库(因此只可以在存放版本库的机器上使用),它通过路径访问版本库,而不是URL。

2.1. svnadmin 选项

svnadmin 的选项是全局的,效果与他们在 svn 中一样:

--bdb-log-keep

(Berkeley DB-specific.) Disable automatic log removal of database logfiles. Having these logfiles around can be convenient if you need to restore from a catastrophic repository failure.

--bdb-txn-nosync

(Berkeley DB-specific.) Disables fsync when committing database transactions. Used with the svnadmin create command to create a Berkeley DB-backed repository with DB_TXN_NOSYNC enabled (which improves speed but has some risks associated with it).

--bypass-hooks

绕过版本库钩子系统。

--clean-logs

删除不使用的Berkeley DB日志。

--config-dir DIR

指导Subversion从指定目录而不是默认位置(用户主目录的.subversion)读取配置信息。

--deltas

When creating a repository dump file, specify changes in versioned properties and file contents as deltas against their previous state.

--fs-type ARG

When creating a repository, use ARG as the requested filesyste type. ARG may be either bdb or fsfs.

--force-uuid

By default, when loading data into a repository that already contains revisions, svnadmin will ignore the UUID from the dump stream. This option will cause the repository's UUID to be set to the UUID from the stream.

--ignore-uuid

By default, when loading data into an empty repository, svnadmin will set the repository's UUID to the UUID from the dump stream. This option will cause the UUID from the stream to be ignored.

--incremental

导出一个修订版本针对前一个修订版本的区别,而不是通常的完全结果。

--parent-dir DIR

当加载一个转储文件时,根路径为DIR而不是/

--pre-1.4-compatible

When creating a new repository, use a format that is compatible with versions of Subversion earlier than Subversion 1.4.

--pre-1.5-compatible

When creating a new repository, use a format that is compatible with versions of Subversion earlier than Subversion 1.5.

--pre-1.6-compatible

When creating a new repository, use a format that is compatible with versions of Subversion earlier than Subversion 1.6.

--revision (-r) ARG

指定一个操作的修订版本。

--quiet (-q)

Do not show normal progress—show only errors.

--use-post-commit-hook

When loading a dump file, runs the repository's post-commit hook after finalizing each newly loaded revision.

--use-post-revprop-change-hook

When changing a revision property, runs the repository's post-revprop-change hook after changing the revision property.

--use-pre-commit-hook

When loading a dump file, runs the repository's pre-commit hook before finalizing each newly loaded revision. If the hook fails, aborts the commit and terminates the load process.

--use-pre-revprop-change-hook

When changing a revision property, runs the repository's pre-revprop-change hook before changing the revision property. If the hook fails, aborts the modification and terminates.

--wait

For operations which require exclusive repository access, wait until the requisite repository lock has been obtained instead of immediately erroring out when it cannot be.

2.2. svnadmin 子命令

Here are the various subcommands for the svnadmin program.

名称

svnadmin crashtest — 方针进程崩溃。

概要

svnadmin crashtest REPOS_PATH

描述

Open the repository at REPOS_PATH, then abort, thus simulating a process that crashes while holding an open repository handle. This is used for testing automatic repository recovery (a new feature in Berkeley DB 4.4). It's unlikely that you'll need to run this command.

选项

例子

$ svnadmin crashtest /var/svn/repos
Aborted

很激动,不是吗?


名称

svnadmin create — 创建一个新的空的版本库。

概要

svnadmin create REPOS_PATH

描述

Create a new, empty repository at the path provided. If the provided directory does not exist, it will be created for you.[62] As of Subversion 1.2, svnadmin creates new repositories with the FSFS filesystem backend by default.

While svnadmin create will create the base directory for a new repository, it will not create intermediate directories. For example, if you have an empty directory named /var/svn, creating /var/svn/repos will work, while attempting to create /var/svn/subdirectory/repos will fail with an error. Also, keep in mind that, depending on where on your system you are creating your repository, you might need to run svnadmin create as a user with elevated privileges (such as the root user).

选项

--bdb-log-keep
--bdb-txn-nosync
--config-dir DIR
--fs-type TYPE
--pre-1.4-compatible
--pre-1.5-compatible
--pre-1.6-compatible

例子

创建一个版本库很简单:

$ cd /var/svn
$ svnadmin create repos
$

In Subversion 1.0, a Berkeley DB repository is always created. In Subversion 1.1, a Berkeley DB repository is the default repository type, but an FSFS repository can be created using the --fs-type option:

$ cd /var/svn
$ svnadmin create repos --fs-type fsfs
$



[62] 记住svnadmin只工作在本地路径,而不是URL


名称

svnadmin deltify — 修订版本范围的路径的增量变化。

概要

svnadmin deltify [-r LOWER[:UPPER]] REPOS_PATH

描述

svnadmin deltify exists in current versions of Subversion only for historical reasons. This command is deprecated and no longer needed.

It dates from a time when Subversion offered administrators greater control over compression strategies in the repository. This turned out to be a lot of complexity for very little gain, and this feature was deprecated.

选项

--quiet (-q)
--revision (-r) REV

名称

svnadmin dump — Dump the contents of the filesystem to stdout.

概要

svnadmin dump REPOS_PATH [-r LOWER[:UPPER]] [--incremental] [--deltas]

描述

Dump the contents of the filesystem to stdout in a dump file portable format, sending feedback to stderr. Dump revisions LOWER rev through UPPER rev. If no revisions are given, dump all revision trees. If only LOWER is given, dump that one revision tree. See 第 4.5 节 “版本库数据的移植” for a practical use.

By default, the Subversion dump stream contains a single revision (the first revision in the requested revision range) in which every file and directory in the repository in that revision is presented as though that whole tree was added at once, followed by other revisions (the remainder of the revisions in the requested range), which contain only the files and directories that were modified in those revisions. For a modified file, the complete full-text representation of its contents, as well as all of its properties, are presented in the dump file; for a directory, all of its properties are presented.

Two useful options modify the dump file generator's behavior. The first is the --incremental option, which simply causes that first revision in the dump stream to contain only the files and directories modified in that revision, instead of being presented as the addition of a new tree, and in exactly the same way that every other revision in the dump file is presented. This is useful for generating a relatively small dump file to be loaded into another repository that already has the files and directories that exist in the original repository.

The second useful option is --deltas. This option causes svnadmin dump to, instead of emitting full-text representations of file contents and property lists, emit only deltas of those items against their previous versions. This reduces (in some cases, drastically) the size of the dump file that svnadmin dump creates. There are, however, disadvantages to using this option—deltified dump files are more CPU-intensive to create, cannot be operated on by svndumpfilter, and tend not to compress as well as their nondeltified counterparts when using third-party tools such as gzip and bzip2.

选项

--deltas
--incremental
--quiet (-q)
--revision (-r) REV

例子

转储整个版本库:

$ svnadmin dump /var/svn/repos > full.dump
* Dumped revision 0.
* Dumped revision 1.
* Dumped revision 2.
…

从版本库增量转储一个单独的事务:

$ svnadmin dump /var/svn/repos -r 21 --incremental > incr.dump
* Dumped revision 21.

名称

svnadmin help (h, ?) — 求助!

概要

svnadmin help [SUBCOMMAND...]

描述

This subcommand is useful when you're trapped on a desert island with neither a Net connection nor a copy of this book.


名称

svnadmin hotcopy — 制作一个版本库的热备份。

概要

svnadmin hotcopy REPOS_PATH NEW_REPOS_PATH

描述

This subcommand makes a full hot backup of your repository, including all hooks, configuration files, and, of course, database files. If you pass the --clean-logs option, svnadmin will perform a hot copy of your repository, and then remove unused Berkeley DB logs from the original repository. You can run this command at any time and make a safe copy of the repository, regardless of whether other processes are using the repository.

选项

--clean-logs
[警告]警告

就像第 2.3.1 节 “Berkeley DB”描述的,热拷贝的Berkeley DB版本库不能跨操作系统移植,也不能在不同字节续的主机上工作。


名称

svnadmin list-dblogs — Ask Berkeley DB which logfiles exist for a given Subversion repository (applies only to repositories using the bdb backend).

概要

svnadmin list-dblogs REPOS_PATH

描述

Berkeley DB creates logs of all changes to the repository, which allow it to recover in the face of catastrophe. Unless you enable DB_LOG_AUTOREMOVE, the logfiles accumulate, although most are no longer used and can be deleted to reclaim disk space. See 第 4.3 节 “管理磁盘空间” for more information.


名称

svnadmin list-unused-dblogs — Ask Berkeley DB which logfiles can be safely deleted (applies only to repositories using the bdb backend).

概要

svnadmin list-unused-dblogs REPOS_PATH

描述

Berkeley DB creates logs of all changes to the repository, which allow it to recover in the face of catastrophe. Unless you enable DB_LOG_AUTOREMOVE, the logfiles accumulate, although most are no longer used and can be deleted to reclaim disk space. See 第 4.3 节 “管理磁盘空间” for more information.

例子

Remove all unused logfiles from the repository:

$ svnadmin list-unused-dblogs /var/svn/repos
/var/svn/repos/log.0000000031
/var/svn/repos/log.0000000032
/var/svn/repos/log.0000000033

$ svnadmin list-unused-dblogs /var/svn/repos | xargs rm
## disk space reclaimed!

名称

svnadmin load — Read a repository dump stream from stdin.

概要

svnadmin load REPOS_PATH

描述

Read a repository dump stream from stdin, committing new revisions into the repository's filesystem. Send progress feedback to stdout.

选项

--force-uuid
--ignore-uuid
--parent-dir
--quiet (-q)
--use-post-commit-hook
--use-pre-commit-hook

例子

这里显示了加载一个备份文件到版本库(当然,使用svnadmin dump):

$ svnadmin load /var/svn/restored < repos-backup
<<< Started new txn, based on original revision 1
     * adding path : test ... done.
     * adding path : test/a ... done.
…

或者你希望加载到一个子目录:

$ svnadmin load --parent-dir new/subdir/for/project \
                /var/svn/restored < repos-backup
<<< Started new txn, based on original revision 1
     * adding path : test ... done.
     * adding path : test/a ... done.
…

名称

svnadmin lslocks — 打印所有锁定的描述。

概要

svnadmin lslocks REPOS_PATH [PATH-IN-REPOS]

描述

Print descriptions of all locks in repository REPOS_PATH underneath the path PATH-IN-REPOS. If PATH-IN-REPOS is not provided, it defaults to the root directory of the repository.

选项

例子

显示了版本库/var/svn/repos中一个锁定的文件:

$ svnadmin lslocks /var/svn/repos
Path: /tree.jpg
UUID Token: opaquelocktoken:ab00ddf0-6afb-0310-9cd0-dda813329753
Owner: harry
Created: 2005-07-08 17:27:36 -0500 (Fri, 08 Jul 2005)
Expires: 
Comment (1 line):
Rework the uppermost branches on the bald cypress in the foreground.

名称

svnadmin lstxns — 打印所有未提交的事物名称。

概要

svnadmin lstxns REPOS_PATH

描述

Print the names of all uncommitted transactions. See 第 4.3.2 节 “删除终止的事务” for information on how uncommitted transactions are created and what you should do with them.

例子

List all outstanding transactions in a repository:

$ svnadmin lstxns /var/svn/repos/ 
1w
1x

名称

svnadmin pack — Possibly compact the repository into a more efficient storage model.

概要

svnadmin pack REPOS_PATH

描述

See 第 4.3.4 节 “打包 FSFS 文件系统” for more information.

选项


名称

svnadmin recover — Bring a repository database back into a consistent state (applies only to repositories using the bdb backend). In addition, if repos/conf/passwd does not exist, it will create a default passwordfile .

概要

svnadmin recover REPOS_PATH

描述

在你得到的错误说明你需要恢复版本库时运行这个命令。

选项

--wait

例子

恢复挂起的版本库:

$ svnadmin recover /var/svn/repos/ 
Repository lock acquired.
Please wait; recovering the repository may take some time...

Recovery completed.
The latest repos revision is 34.

Recovering the database requires an exclusive lock on the repository. (This is a database lock; see the sidebar 锁定的三种含义.) If another process is accessing the repository, then svnadmin recover will error:

$ svnadmin recover /var/svn/repos
svn: Failed to get exclusive repository access; perhaps another process
such as httpd, svnserve or svn has it open?

$

--wait选项可以导致svnadmin recover一直等待其它进程断开连接:

$ svnadmin recover /var/svn/repos --wait
Waiting on repository lock; perhaps another process has it open?

### time goes by…

Repository lock acquired.
Please wait; recovering the repository may take some time...

Recovery completed.
The latest repos revision is 34.

名称

svnadmin rmlocks — 无条件的删除版本库的一个或多个锁定。

概要

svnadmin rmlocks REPOS_PATH LOCKED_PATH...

描述

Remove one or more locks from each LOCKED_PATH.

选项

例子

这删除了版本库/var/svn/repostree.jpghouse.jpg文件上的锁定:

$ svnadmin rmlocks /var/svn/repos tree.jpg house.jpg
Removed lock on '/tree.jpg.
Removed lock on '/house.jpg.

名称

svnadmin rmtxns — 从版本库删除事物。

概要

svnadmin rmtxns REPOS_PATH TXN_NAME...

描述

Delete outstanding transactions from a repository. This is covered in detail in 第 4.3.2 节 “删除终止的事务”.

选项

--quiet (-q)

例子

删除命名的事物:

$ svnadmin rmtxns /var/svn/repos/ 1w 1x

很幸运,lstxns的输出作为rmtxns输入工作良好:

$ svnadmin rmtxns /var/svn/repos/  `svnadmin lstxns /var/svn/repos/`

从版本库删除所有未提交的事务。


名称

svnadmin setlog — 设置某个修订版本的日志信息。

概要

svnadmin setlog REPOS_PATH -r REVISION FILE

描述

设置修订版本REVISION的日志信息为FILE的内容。

This is similar to using svn propset with the --revprop option to set the svn:log property on a revision, except that you can also use the option --bypass-hooks to avoid running any pre- or post-commit hooks, which is useful if the modification of revision properties has not been enabled in the pre-revprop-change hook.

[警告]警告

修订版本属性不在版本控制之下的,所以这个命令会永久覆盖前一个日志信息。

选项

--bypass-hooks
--revision (-r) REV

例子

设置修订版本19的日志信息为文件msg的内容:

$ svnadmin setlog /var/svn/repos/ -r 19 msg

名称

svnadmin setrevprop — 设置某个修订版本的属性。

概要

svnadmin setrevprop REPOS_PATH -r REVISION NAME FILE

描述

Set the property NAME on revision REVISION to the contents of FILE. Use --use-pre-revprop-change-hook or --use-post-revprop-change-hook to trigger the revision property-related hooks (e.g., if you want an email notification sent from your post-revprop-change-hook).

选项

--revision (-r) ARG
--use-post-revprop-change-hook
--use-pre-revprop-change-hook

例子

The following sets the revision property repository-photo to the contents of the file sandwich.png:

$ svnadmin setrevprop /var/svn/repos -r 0 repository-photo sandwich.png

As you can see, svnadmin setrevprop has no output upon success.


名称

svnadmin setuuid — 重置版本库的UUID。

概要

svnadmin setuuid REPOS_PATH [NEW_UUID]

描述

Reset the repository UUID for the repository located at REPOS_PATH. If NEW_UUID is provided, use that as the new repository UUID; otherwise, generate a brand-new UUID for the repository.

选项

例子

If you've svnsynced /var/svn/repos to /var/svn/repos-new and intend to use repos-new as your canonical repository, you may want to change the UUID for repos-new to the UUID of repos so that your users don't have to check out a new working copy to accommodate the change:

$ svnadmin setuuid /var/svn/repos-new 2109a8dd-854f-0410-ad31-d604008985ab

As you can see, svnadmin setuuid has no output upon success.


名称

svnadmin upgrade — 升级版本库到支持的最新方案版本。

概要

svnadmin upgrade REPOS_PATH

描述

升级位于 REPOS_PATH 的版本库到支持的最新方案版本。

This functionality is provided as a convenience for repository administrators who wish to make use of new Subversion functionality without having to undertake a potentially costly full repository dump and load operation. As such, the upgrade performs only the minimum amount of work needed to accomplish this while still maintaining the integrity of the repository. While a dump and subsequent load guarantee the most optimized repository state, svnadmin upgrade does not.

[警告]警告

在升级之前,你永远都应该备份版本库。

选项

例子

Upgrade the repository at path /var/repos/svn:

$ svnadmin upgrade /var/repos/svn
Repository lock acquired.
Please wait; upgrading the repository may take some time...

Upgrade completed.

名称

svnadmin verify — 验证版本库保存的数据。

概要

svnadmin verify REPOS_PATH

描述

Run this command if you wish to verify the integrity of your repository. This basically iterates through all revisions in the repository by internally dumping all revisions and discarding the output—it's a good idea to run this on a regular basis to guard against latent hard disk failures and bitrot. If this command fails—which it will do at the first sign of a problem—that means your repository has at least one corrupted revision, and you should restore the corrupted revision from a backup (you did make a backup, didn't you?).

选项

--quiet (-q)
--revision (-r) ARG

例子

检验挂起的版本库:

$ svnadmin verify /var/svn/repos/ 
* Verified revision 1729.

3. svnlook—Subversion Repository Examination

svnlook is a command-line utility for examining different aspects of a Subversion repository. It does not make any changes to the repository—it's just used for peeking. svnlook is typically used by the repository hooks, but a repository administrator might find it useful for diagnostic purposes.

Since svnlook works via direct repository access (and thus can be used only on the machine that holds the repository), it refers to the repository with a path, not a URL.

如果没有指定修订版本或事物,svnlook缺省的是版本库最年轻的(最新的)修订版本。

3.1. svnlook 选项

Options in svnlook are global, just as they are in svn and svnadmin; however, most options apply to only one subcommand since the functionality of svnlook is (intentionally) limited in scope:

--copy-info

导致 svnlook changed 复制源显示详细信息。

--diff-copy-from

Print differences for copied items against the copy source.

--extensions (-x) ARG

Specifies customizations which Subversion should make when performing difference calculations. Valid extensions include:

--ignore-space-change (-b)

Ignore changes in the amount of white space.

--ignore-all-space (-w)

Ignore all white space.

--ignore-eol-style

Ignore changes in EOL (end-of-line) style.

--unified (-u)

Show three lines of unified diff context.

The default value is -u.

Note that when Subversion is configured to invoke an external diff command, the value of the --extension (-x) option isn't restricted to the previously mentioned options, but may be any additional arguments which Subversion should pass to that command. If you wish to pass multiple arguments, you must enclose all of them in quotes.

--full-paths

Causes svnlook tree to display full paths instead of hierarchical, indented path components.

--limit (-l) ARG

Limit output to a maximum number of ARG items.

--no-diff-deleted

Prevents svnlook diff from printing differences for deleted files. The default behavior when a file is deleted in a transaction/revision is to print the same differences that you would see if you had left the file but removed all the content.

--no-diff-added

Prevents svnlook diff from printing differences for added files. The default behavior when you add a file is to print the same differences that you would see if you had added the entire contents of an existing (empty) file.

--non-recursive (-N)

Operate on a single directory only.

--revision (-r)

指定你希望检查的版本号。

--revprop

Operates on a revision property instead of a property specific to a file or directory. This option requires that you also pass a revision with the --revision (-r) option.

--transaction (-t)

指定你希望检查的事务 ID。

--show-ids

Shows the filesystem node revision IDs for each path in the filesystem tree.

--verbose (-v)

Be verbose. When used with svnlook proplist, for example, this causes Subversion to display not just the list of properties, but their values also.

--xml

3.2. svnlook 子命令

svnlook 程序有多个子命令。

名称

svnlook author — 打印作者。

概要

svnlook author REPOS_PATH

描述

打印版本库一个修订版本或者事物的作者。

选项

--revision (-r) REV
--transaction (-t) TXN

例子

svnlook author垂手可得,但是并不令人激动:

$ svnlook author -r 40 /var/svn/repos 
sally

名称

svnlook cat — 打印一个文件的内容。

概要

svnlook cat REPOS_PATH PATH_IN_REPOS

描述

打印一个文件的内容。

选项

--revision (-r) REV
--transaction (-t) TXN

例子

这会显示事物ax8中一个文件的内容,位于/trunk/README

$ svnlook cat -t ax8 /var/svn/repos /trunk/README

               Subversion, a version control system.
               =====================================

$LastChangedDate: 2003-07-17 10:45:25 -0500 (Thu, 17 Jul 2003) $

Contents:

     I. A FEW POINTERS
    II. DOCUMENTATION
   III. PARTICIPATING IN THE SUBVERSION COMMUNITY
…

名称

svnlook changed — 打印修改的路径。

概要

svnlook changed REPOS_PATH

描述

打印在特定修订版本或事物修改的路径,也是在前两列使用svn update样式的状态字符:

'A '

条目添加到版本库

'D '

条目从版本库删除

'U '

文件内容改变了

'_U'

条目的属性改变了;注意开头的下划线

'UU'

文件内容和属性修改了

文件和目录可以区分,目录路径后面会显示字符/

选项

--copy-info
--revision (-r) REV
--transaction (-t) TXN

例子

This shows a list of all the changed files and directories in revision 39 of a test repository. Note that the first changed item is a directory, as evidenced by the trailing /:

$ svnlook changed -r 39 /var/svn/repos
A   trunk/vendors/deli/
A   trunk/vendors/deli/chips.txt
A   trunk/vendors/deli/sandwich.txt
A   trunk/vendors/deli/pickle.txt
U   trunk/vendors/baker/bagel.txt
_U  trunk/vendors/baker/croissant.txt
UU  trunk/vendors/baker/pretzel.txt
D   trunk/vendors/baker/baguette.txt

如下是显示文件重命名修订版本的例子:

$ svnlook changed -r 64 /var/svn/repos
A   trunk/vendors/baker/toast.txt
D   trunk/vendors/baker/bread.txt

Unfortunately, nothing in the preceding output reveals the connection between the deleted and added files. Use the --copy-info option to make this relationship more apparent:

$ svnlook changed -r 64 --copy-info /var/svn/repos
A + trunk/vendors/baker/toast.txt
    (from trunk/vendors/baker/bread.txt:r63)
D   trunk/vendors/baker/bread.txt

名称

svnlook date — 打印时间戳。

概要

svnlook date REPOS_PATH

描述

打印版本库一个修订版本或事物的时间戳。

选项

--revision (-r) REV
--transaction (-t) TXN

例子

显示测试版本库修订版本40的日期:

$ svnlook date -r 40 /var/svn/repos/
2003-02-22 17:44:49 -0600 (Sat, 22 Feb 2003)

名称

svnlook diff — 打印修改的文件和属性的区别。

概要

svnlook diff REPOS_PATH

描述

打印版本库中GNU样式的文件和属性修改区别。

选项

--diff-copy-from
--no-diff-added
--no-diff-deleted
--revision (-r) REV
--transaction (-t) TXN
--extensions (-x) ARG

例子

这显示了一个新添加的(空的)文件,一个删除的文件和一个拷贝的文件:

$ svnlook diff -r 40 /var/svn/repos/
Copied: egg.txt (from rev 39, trunk/vendors/deli/pickle.txt)

Added: trunk/vendors/deli/soda.txt
==============================================================================

Modified: trunk/vendors/deli/sandwich.txt
==============================================================================
--- trunk/vendors/deli/sandwich.txt	(original)
+++ trunk/vendors/deli/sandwich.txt	2003-02-22 17:45:04.000000000 -0600
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+Don't forget the mayo!

Modified: trunk/vendors/deli/logo.jpg
==============================================================================
(Binary files differ)

Deleted: trunk/vendors/deli/chips.txt
==============================================================================

Deleted: trunk/vendors/deli/pickle.txt
==============================================================================

If a file has a nontextual svn:mime-type property, the differences are not explicitly shown.


名称

svnlook dirs-changed — 打印本身修改的目录。

概要

svnlook dirs-changed REPOS_PATH

描述

打印本身修改(属性编辑)或子文件修改的目录。

选项

--revision (-r) REV
--transaction (-t) TXN

例子

这显示了在我们的实例版本库中在修订版本40修改的目录:

$ svnlook dirs-changed -r 40 /var/svn/repos
trunk/vendors/deli/

名称

svnlook help (h, ?) — 求助!

概要

Also svnlook -h and svnlook -?.

描述

Displays the help message for svnlook. This command, like its brother, svn help, is also your friend, even though you never call it anymore and forgot to invite it to your last party.

选项


名称

svnlook history — 打印版本库(如果没有路径,则是根目录)某一个路径的历史。

概要

svnlook history REPOS_PATH [PATH_IN_REPOS]

描述

打印版本库(如果没有路径,则是根目录)某一个路径的历史。

选项

--limit (-l) NUM
--revision (-r) REV
--show-ids

例子

This shows the history output for the path /branches/bookstore as of revision 13 in our sample repository:

$ svnlook history -r 13 /var/svn/repos /branches/bookstore --show-ids
REVISION   PATH <ID>
--------   ---------
      13   /branches/bookstore <1.1.r13/390>
      12   /branches/bookstore <1.1.r12/413>
      11   /branches/bookstore <1.1.r11/0>
       9   /trunk <1.0.r9/551>
       8   /trunk <1.0.r8/131357096>
       7   /trunk <1.0.r7/294>
       6   /trunk <1.0.r6/353>
       5   /trunk <1.0.r5/349>
       4   /trunk <1.0.r4/332>
       3   /trunk <1.0.r3/335>
       2   /trunk <1.0.r2/295>
       1   /trunk <1.0.r1/532>

名称

svnlook info — 打印作者, 时间戳, 日志信息大小和日志信息。

概要

svnlook info REPOS_PATH

描述

打印作者, 时间戳, 日志信息大小(字节)和日志信息,然后是一个换行符。

选项

--revision (-r) REV
--transaction (-t) TXN

例子

显示了你的实例版本库在修订版本40的信息输出:

$ svnlook info -r 40 /var/svn/repos
sally
2003-02-22 17:44:49 -0600 (Sat, 22 Feb 2003)
16
Rearrange lunch.

名称

svnlook lock — 如果版本库路径已经被锁定,描述它。

概要

svnlook lock REPOS_PATH PATH_IN_REPOS

描述

Print all information available for the lock at PATH_IN_REPOS. If PATH_IN_REPOS is not locked, print nothing.

选项

例子

这描述了文件tree.jpg的锁定。

$ svnlook lock /var/svn/repos tree.jpg
UUID Token: opaquelocktoken:ab00ddf0-6afb-0310-9cd0-dda813329753
Owner: harry
Created: 2005-07-08 17:27:36 -0500 (Fri, 08 Jul 2005)
Expires: 
Comment (1 line):
Rework the uppermost branches on the bald cypress in the foreground.

名称

svnlook log — 日志信息本身, 后接换行。

概要

svnlook log REPOS_PATH

描述

打印日志信息。

选项

--revision (-r) REV
--transaction (-t) TXN

例子

这显示了实例版本库在修订版本40的日志输出:

$ svnlook log /var/svn/repos/
Rearrange lunch.

名称

svnlook propget (pget, pg) — 打印版本库中一个路径一个属性的原始值。

概要

svnlook propget REPOS_PATH PROPNAME [PATH_IN_REPOS]

描述

列出版本库中一个路径一个属性的值。

选项

--revision (-r) REV
--revprop
--transaction (-t) TXN

例子

这显示了HEAD修订版本中文件/trunk/sandwichseasonings属性的值:

$ svnlook pg /var/svn/repos seasonings /trunk/sandwich
mustard

名称

svnlook proplist (plist, pl) — 打印版本化的文件和目录的属性名称和值。

概要

svnlook proplist REPOS_PATH [PATH_IN_REPOS]

描述

List the properties of a path in the repository. With --verbose (-v), show the property values too.

选项

--revision (-r) REV
--revprop
--transaction (-t) TXN
--verbose (-v)
--xml

例子

这显示了HEAD修订版本中/trunk/README的属性名称:

$ svnlook proplist /var/svn/repos /trunk/README
  original-author
  svn:mime-type

This is the same command as in the preceding example, but this time showing the property values as well:

$ svnlook -v proplist /var/svn/repos /trunk/README
  original-author : harry
  svn:mime-type : text/plain

名称

svnlook tree — 打印树。

概要

svnlook tree REPOS_PATH [PATH_IN_REPOS]

描述

打印树,从PATH_IN_REPOS(如果提供,会作为树的根)开始,可以选择显示节点修订版本ID。

选项

--full-paths
--non-recursive (-N)
--revision (-r) REV
--show-ids
--transaction (-t) TXN

例子

This shows the tree output (with nodeIDs) for revision 13 in our sample repository:

$ svnlook tree -r 13 /var/svn/repos --show-ids
/ <0.0.r13/811>
 trunk/ <1.0.r9/551>
  button.c <2.0.r9/238>
  Makefile <3.0.r7/41>
  integer.c <4.0.r6/98>
 branches/ <5.0.r13/593>
  bookstore/ <1.1.r13/390>
   button.c <2.1.r12/85>
   Makefile <3.0.r7/41>
   integer.c <4.1.r13/109>

名称

svnlook uuid — 打印版本库的 UUID

概要

svnlook uuid REPOS_PATH

描述

Print the UUID for the repository. The UUID is the repository's universal unique identifier. The Subversion client uses this identifier to differentiate between one repository and another.

选项

例子

$ svnlook uuid /var/svn/repos
e7fe1b91-8cd5-0310-98dd-2f12e793c5e8

名称

svnlook youngest — 显示最年轻的修订版本号。

概要

svnlook youngest REPOS_PATH

描述

打印一个版本库最年轻的修订版本号。

选项

例子

这显示了在实例版本库显示最年轻的修订版本:

$ svnlook youngest /var/svn/repos/ 
42

4. svnsync—Subversion Repository Mirroring

svnsync is the Subversion remote repository mirroring tool. Put simply, it allows you to replay the revisions of one repository into another one.

In any mirroring scenario, there are two repositories: the source repository, and the mirror (or sink) repository. The source repository is the repository from which svnsync pulls revisions. The mirror repository is the destination for the revisions pulled from the source repository. Each of the repositories may be local or remote—they are only ever addressed by their URLs.

The svnsync process requires only read access to the source repository; it never attempts to modify it. But obviously, svnsync requires both read and write access to the mirror repository.

[警告]警告

svnsync is very sensitive to changes made in the mirror repository that weren't made as part of a mirroring operation. To prevent this from happening, it's best if the svnsync process is the only process permitted to modify the mirror repository.

4.1. svnsync 选项

Options in svnsync are global, just as they are in svn and svnadmin:

--config-dir DIR

指导Subversion从指定目录而不是默认位置(用户主目录的.subversion)读取配置信息。

--no-auth-cache

Prevents caching of authentication information (e.g., username and password) in the Subversion runtime configuration directories.

--non-interactive

In the case of an authentication failure or insufficient credentials, prevents prompting for credentials (e.g., username or password). This is useful if you're running Subversion inside an automated script and it's more appropriate to have Subversion fail than to prompt for more information.

--quiet (-q)

请求客户端在执行操作时只显示重要信息。

--source-password PASSWD

指定你要同步的源 Subversion 服务器的密码。如果没有提供,或者不正确,在需要时,Subversion 会提示你输入。

--source-username NAME

指定你要同步的源 Subversion 服务器的用户。如果没有提供,或者不正确,在需要时,Subversion 会提示你输入。

--sync-password PASSWD

指定你要同步的目标 Subversion 服务器的密码。如果没有提供,或者不正确,在需要时,Subversion 会提示你输入。

--sync-username NAME

指定你要同步的目标 Subversion 服务器的用户。如果没有提供,或者不正确,在需要时,Subversion 会提示你输入。

--trust-server-cert

Used with --non-interactive to accept any unknown SSL server certificates without prompting.

4.2. svnsync 子命令

Here are the various subcommands for the svnsync program.

名称

svnsync copy-revprops — Copy all revision properties for a particular revision (or range of revisions) from the source repository to the mirror repository.

概要

svnsync copy-revprops DEST_URL [REV[:REV2]]

描述

Because Subversion revision properties can be changed at any time, it's possible that the properties for some revision might be changed after that revision has already been synchronized to another repository. Because the svnsync synchronize command operates only on the range of revisions that have not yet been synchronized, it won't notice a revision property change outside that range. Left as is, this causes a deviation in the values of that revision's properties between the source and mirror repositories. svnsync copy-revprops is the answer to this problem. Use it to resynchronize the revision properties for a particular revision or range of revisions.

选项

--config-dir DIR
--no-auth-cache
--non-interactive
--quiet (-q)
--source-password ARG
--source-username ARG
--sync-password ARG
--sync-username ARG
--trust-server-cert

例子

为单个修订版本重新同步修订版本属性:

$ svnsync copy-revprops file:///var/svn/repos-mirror 6
Copied properties for revision 6.
$

名称

svnsync help — 求助!

概要

svnsync help

描述

This subcommand is useful when you're trapped in a foreign prison with neither a Net connection nor a copy of this book, but you do have a local Wi-Fi network running and you'd like to sync a copy of your repository over to the backup server that Ira The Knife is running over in cell block D.

选项


名称

svnsync info — Print information about the synchronization of a destination repository.

概要

svnsync info DEST_URL

描述

Print the synchronization source URL, source repository UUID and the last revision merged from the source to the destination repository at DEST_URL.

选项

--config-dir DIR
--no-auth-cache
--non-interactive
--source-password ARG
--source-username ARG
--sync-password ARG
--sync-username ARG
--trust-server-cert

例子

Print the synchronization information of a mirror repository:

$ svnsync info file:///var/svn/repos-mirror
Source URL: http://svn.example.com/repos
Source Repository UUID: e7fe1b91-8cd5-0310-98dd-2f12e793c5e8
Last Merged Revision: 47
$

名称

svnsync initialize (init) — Initialize a mirror repository for synchronization from the source repository.

概要

svnsync initialize MIRROR_URL SOURCE_URL

描述

svnsync initialize verifies that a repository meets the requirements of a new mirror repository—that it has no previous existing version history and that it allows revision property modifications—and records the initial administrative information that associates the mirror repository with the source repository (specified by SOURCE_URL). This is the first svnsync operation you run on a would-be mirror repository.

Ordinarily, SOURCE_URL is the URL of the root directory of the Subversion repository you wish to mirror. Subversion 1.5 and newer allow you to use svnsync for partial repository mirroring, though — simply specify the URL of the source repository subdirectory you wish to mirror as SOURCE_URL.

选项

--config-dir DIR
--no-auth-cache
--non-interactive
--quiet (-q)
--source-password ARG
--source-username ARG
--sync-password ARG
--sync-username ARG
--trust-server-cert

例子

因为无法修改修订版本属性而初始化镜像版本库失败:

$ svnsync initialize file:///var/svn/repos-mirror http://svn.example.com/repos
svnsync: Repository has not been enabled to accept revision propchanges;
ask the administrator to create a pre-revprop-change hook
$

以镜像初始化版本库,包含已创建允许所有修订版本属性修改的pre-revprop-change钩子:

$ svnsync initialize file:///var/svn/repos-mirror http://svn.example.com/repos
Copied properties for revision 0.
$

名称

svnsync synchronize (sync) — 将所有未完成的修订版本从源版本库转移到镜像版本库。

概要

svnsync synchronize DEST_URL

描述

The svnsync synchronize command does all the heavy lifting of a repository mirroring operation. After consulting with the mirror repository to see which revisions have already been copied into it, it then begins to copy any not-yet-mirrored revisions from the source repository.

svnsync synchronize can be gracefully canceled and restarted.

选项

--config-dir DIR
--no-auth-cache
--non-interactive
--quiet (-q)
--source-password ARG
--source-username ARG
--sync-password ARG
--sync-username ARG
--trust-server-cert

例子

从源版本库拷贝未同步修订版本到镜像版本库:

$ svnsync synchronize file:///var/svn/repos-mirror
Committed revision 1.
Copied properties for revision 1.
Committed revision 2.
Copied properties for revision 2.
Committed revision 3.
Copied properties for revision 3.
…
Committed revision 45.
Copied properties for revision 45.
Committed revision 46.
Copied properties for revision 46.
Committed revision 47.
Copied properties for revision 47.
$

5. svnserve—Custom Subversion Server

当对远程源版本库使用svnsync时,使用Subversion的自定义网络协议。

svnserve允许Subversion版本库使用svn网络协议,你可以作为独立服务器进程运行svnserve,或者是使用其它进程,如inetd, xinetd(也是svn://)或使用svn+ssh://访问方法的sshd为你启动进程。

Regardless of the access method, once the client has selected a repository by transmitting its URL, svnserve reads a file named conf/svnserve.conf in the repository directory to determine repository-specific settings such as what authentication database to use and what authorization policies to apply. See 第 3 节 “svnserve - 定制的服务器 ” for details of the svnserve.conf file.

5.1. svnserve 选项

Unlike the previous commands we've described, svnserve has no subcommands—it is controlled exclusively by options.

--daemon (-d)

Causes svnserve to run in daemon mode. svnserve backgrounds itself and accepts and serves TCP/IP connections on the svn port (3690, by default).

--foreground

When used together with -d, causes svnserve to stay in the foreground. This is mainly useful for debugging.

--inetd (-i)

导致 svnserve 使用 stdinstdout 文件描述符,适用于 inetd 守护进程。

--help (-h)

显示有用的摘要和选项。

--listen-host HOST

svnserve监听的HOST,可能是一个主机名或是一个IP地址。

--listen-once (-X)

Causes svnserve to accept one connection on the svn port, serve it, and exit. This option is mainly useful for debugging.

--listen-port PORT

Causes svnserve to listen on PORT when run in daemon mode. (FreeBSD daemons listen only on tcp6 by default—this option tells them to also listen on tcp4.)

--log-file FILENAME

Instructs svnserve to create (if necessary) and use the file located at FILENAME for Subversion operational log output of the same sort that mod_dav_svn generates. See 第 6 节 “High-level Logging” for details.

--pid-file FILENAME

Causes svnserve to write its process ID to FILENAME, which must be writable by the user under which svnserve is running.

--root (-r) ROOT

Sets the virtual root for repositories served by svnserve. The pathname in URLs provided by the client will be interpreted relative to this root and will not be allowed to escape this root.

--threads (-T)

When running in daemon mode, causes svnserve to spawn a thread instead of a process for each connection (e.g., for when running on Windows). The svnserve process still backgrounds itself at startup time.

--tunnel (-t)

Causes svnserve to run in tunnel mode, which is just like the inetd mode of operation (both modes serve one connection over stdin/stdout, and then exit), except that the connection is considered to be preauthenticated with the username of the current UID. This flag is automatically passed for you by the client when running over a tunnel agent such as ssh. That means there's rarely any need for you to pass this option to svnserve. So, if you find yourself typing svnserve --tunnel on the command line and wondering what to do next, see 第 3.4 节 “穿越 SSH 隧道”.

--tunnel-user NAME

Used in conjunction with the --tunnel option, tells svnserve to assume that NAME is the authenticated user, rather than the UID of the svnserve process. This is useful for users wishing to share a single system account over SSH, but to maintain separate commit identities.

--version

显示版本信息,版本库后端存在和可用的模块列表,然后退出。

6. svndumpfilter—Subversion History Filtering

svndumpfilter is a command-line utility for removing history from a Subversion dump file by either excluding or including paths beginning with one or more named prefixes. For details, see 第 4.1.3 节 “svndumpfilter”.

6.1. svndumpfilter 选项

Options in svndumpfilter are global, just as they are in svn and svnadmin:

--drop-empty-revs

If filtering causes any revision to be empty (i.e., causes no change to the repository), removes these revisions from the final dump file.

--renumber-revs

在过滤后,重新分配版本号。

--skip-missing-merge-sources

Skips merge sources that have been removed as part of the filtering. Without this option, svndumpfilter will exit with an error if the merge source for a retained path is removed by filtering.

--preserve-revprops

If all nodes in a revision are removed by filtering and --drop-empty-revs is not passed, the default behavior of svndumpfilter is to remove all revision properties except for the date and the log message (which will merely indicate that the revision is empty). Passing this option will preserve existing revision properties (which may or may not make sense since the related content is no longer present in the dump file).

--targets FILENAME

Instructs svndumpfilter to read additional path prefixes—one per line—from the file located at FILENAME. This is especially useful for complex filtering operations which require more prefixes than the operating system allows to be specified on a single command line.

--quiet

不显示过滤统计。

6.2. svndumpfilter 子命令

svndumpfilter 有许多子命令。

名称

svndumpfilter exclude — 将包含指定前缀的项目从转储数据流中排除。

概要

svndumpfilter exclude PATH_PREFIX...

描述

This can be used to exclude nodes that begin with one or more PATH_PREFIXes from a filtered dump file.

选项

--drop-empty-revs
--preserve-revprops
--quiet
--renumber-revs
--skip-missing-merge-sources
--targets ARG

例子

If we have a dump file from a repository with a number of different picnic-related directories in it, but we want to keep everything except the sandwiches part of the repository, we'll exclude only that path:

$ svndumpfilter exclude sandwiches < dumpfile > filtered-dumpfile
Excluding prefixes:
   '/sandwiches'

Revision 0 committed as 0.
Revision 1 committed as 1.
Revision 2 committed as 2.
Revision 3 committed as 3.
Revision 4 committed as 4.

Dropped 1 node(s):
   '/sandwiches'

名称

svndumpfilter include — 将不包含指定前缀的项目从转储数据流中排除。

概要

svndumpfilter include PATH_PREFIX...

描述

Can be used to include nodes that begin with one or more PATH_PREFIXes in a filtered dump file (thus excluding all other paths).

选项

--drop-empty-revs
--preserve-revprops
--quiet
--renumber-revs
--skip-missing-merge-sources
--targets ARG

例子

If we have a dump file from a repository with a number of different picnic-related directories in it, but want to keep only the sandwiches part of the repository, we'll include only that path:

$ svndumpfilter include sandwiches < dumpfile > filtered-dumpfile
Including prefixes:
   '/sandwiches'

Revision 0 committed as 0.
Revision 1 committed as 1.
Revision 2 committed as 2.
Revision 3 committed as 3.
Revision 4 committed as 4.

Dropped 3 node(s):
   '/drinks'
   '/snacks'
   '/supplies'

名称

svndumpfilter help — 求助!

概要

svndumpfilter help [SUBCOMMAND...]

描述

Displays the help message for svndumpfilter. Unlike other help commands documented in this chapter, there is no witty commentary for this help command. The authors of this book deeply regret the omission.

选项

7. svnversion—Subversion Working Copy Version Info

名称

svnversion — 总结工作副本的本地修订版本。

概要

svnversion [OPTIONS] [WC_PATH [TRAIL_URL]]

描述

svnversion is a program for summarizing the revision mixture of a working copy. The resultant revision number, or revision range, is written to standard output.

通常在构建过程中利用其输出定义程序的版本号码。

TRAIL_URL, if present, is the trailing portion of the URL used to determine whether WC_PATH itself is switched (detection of switches within WC_PATH does not rely on TRAIL_URL).

When WC_PATH is not defined, the current directory will be used as the working copy path. TRAIL_URL cannot be defined if WC_PATH is not explicitly given.

选项

Like svnserve, svnversion has no subcommands—only options:

--no-newline (-n)

忽略输出的尾端新行。

--committed (-c)

使用最后修改的版本而不是当前的(例如,本地存在的最高修订版本)版本。

--help (-h)

打印帮助摘要。

--version

打印 svnversion 的版本,无错退出。

例子

如果工作副本都是一样的修订版本(例如,在更新后那一刻),打印的修订版本是:

$ svnversion
4168

You can add TRAIL_URL to make sure the working copy is not switched from what you expect. Note that the WC_PATH is required in this command:

$ svnversion . /var/svn/trunk
4168

对于混合修订版本的工作副本,修订版本的范围会被打印:

$ svnversion
4123:4168

如果工作副本包含修改,尾部会增加'M':

$ svnversion
4168M

如果工作副本已经切换,尾部会增加'S':

$ svnversion
4168S

svnversion will also inform you if the target working copy is sparsely populated (see 第 7 节 “稀疏目录”) by attaching the 'P' code to its output:

$ svnversion
4168P

Thus, here is a mixed-revision, sparsely populated and switched working copy containing some local modifications:

$ svnversion
4123:4168MSP

If invoked on a directory that is not a working copy, svnversion assumes it is an exported working copy and prints exported:

$ svnversion
exported

8. mod_dav_svn—Subversion Apache HTTP Server Module

名称

mod_dav_svn 配置指令 — 通过 Apache HTTP 服务器提供 Subversion 版本库服务的配置说明。

描述

This section briefly describes each Subversion Apache configuration directive. For an in-depth description of configuring Apache with Subversion, see 第 4 节 “httpd - Apache 的 HTTP 服务器”.

指令

These are the httpd.conf directives that apply to mod_dav_svn:

DAV svn

Must be included in any Directory or Location block for a Subversion repository. It tells httpd to use the Subversion backend for mod_dav to handle all requests.

SVNActivitiesDB directory-path

Specifies the location in the filesystem where the activities database should be stored. By default, mod_dav_svn creates and uses a directory in the repository called dav/activities.d. The path specified with this option must be an absolute path.

If specified for an SVNParentPath area, mod_dav_svn appends the basename of the repository to the path specified here. For example:

<Location /svn>
  DAV svn

  # any "/svn/foo" URL will map to a repository in 
  # /net/svn.nfs/repositories/foo
  SVNParentPath         "/net/svn.nfs/repositories"

  # any "/svn/foo" URL will map to an activities db in
  #  /var/db/svn/activities/foo
  SVNActivitiesDB       "/var/db/svn/activities"
</Location>
SVNAllowBulkUpdates On|Off

Toggles support for all-inclusive responses to update-style REPORT requests. Subversion clients use REPORT requests to get information about directory tree checkouts and updates from mod_dav_svn. They can ask the server to send that information in one of two ways: with the entirety of the tree's information in one massive response, or with a skelta (a skeletal representation of a tree delta) which contains just enough information for the client to know what additional data to request from the server. When this directive is included with a value of Off, mod_dav_svn will only ever respond to these REPORT requests with skelta responses, regardless of the type of responses requested by the client.

Most folks won't need to use this directive at all. It primarily exists for administrators who wish—for security or auditing reasons—to force Subversion clients to fetch individually all the files and directories needed for updates and checkouts, thus leaving an audit trail of GET and PROPFIND requests in Apache's logs. The default value of this directive is On.

SVNAutoversioning On|Off

When its value is On, allows write requests from WebDAV clients to result in automatic commits. A generic log message is auto-generated and attached to each revision. If you enable autoversioning, you'll likely want to set ModMimeUsePathInfo On so that mod_mime can set svn:mime-type to the correct MIME type automatically (as best as mod_mime is able to, of course). For more information, see 附录 C, WebDAV 和自动版本. The default value of this directive is Off.

SVNIndexXSLT directory-path

目录列表所使用的 XSL 的 URI。这个指示可选。

SVNListParentPath On|Off

When set to On, allows a GET of SVNParentPath, which results in a listing of all repositories under that path. The default setting is Off.

SVNMasterURI url

Specifies a URI to the master Subversion repository (used for a write-through proxy).

SVNParentPath directory-path

指定目录是 Subversion 版本库的父目录在文件系统的位置。在一个 Subversion 版本库配置块里,必须提供这个指示或 SVNPath,但不能同时存在。

SVNPath directory-path

这个指示指定 Subversion 版本库文件在文件系统中的位置。在一个 Subversion 版本库的配置块里,必须提供这个指示或 SVNParentPath,但不能同时存在。

SVNPathAuthz On|Off|short_circuit

Controls path-based authorization by enabling subrequests (On), disabling subrequests (Off; see 第 4.4.3 节 “禁用基于路径的检查”), or querying mod_authz_svn directly (short_circuit). The default value of this directive is On.

SVNReposName name

指定 Subversion 版本库在 HTTP GET 请求中使用的名字。这个值会作为所有目录列表(当你用浏览器察看 Subversion 版本库时会看到)的标题。这个指示是可选的。

SVNSpecialURI component

指定特定 Subversion 资源的 URI 组件(命名空间)。默认是 !svn,大多数管理员不会用到这个指示。只有那些必须要在版本库中放一个名字为 !svn 的文件时需要设置。如果你在一个已经使用中的服务器上这样修改,它会破坏所有的工作副本,你的用户会拿着叉子和火把追杀你。

9. mod_authz_svn—Subversion Apache HTTP Authorization Module

名称

mod_authz_svn 配置指令 — 通过 Apache HTTP 服务器提供基于路径授权的 Subversion 版本库服务的配置指令。

描述

This section briefly describes each Apache configuration directive offered by mod_authz_svn. For an in-depth description of using path-based authorization in Subversion, see 第 5 节 “基于路径的授权”.

指令

These are the httpd.conf directives that apply to mod_authz_svn:

AuthzForceUsernameCase Upper|Lower

Set to Upper or Lower to perform case conversion of the specified sort on the authenticated username before checking it for authorization. While usernames are compared in a case-sensitive fashion against those referenced in the authorization rules file, this directive can at least normalize variably-cased usernames into something consistent.

AuthzSVNAccessFile file-path

Consult file-path for access rules describing the permissions for paths in Subversion repository.

AuthzSVNAnonymous On|Off

Set to Off to disable two special-case behaviours of this module: interaction with the Satisfy Any directive and enforcement of the authorization policy even when no Require directives are present. The default value of this directive is On.

AuthzSVNAuthoritative On|Off

Set to Off to allow access control to be passed along to lower modules. The default value of this directive is On.

AuthzSVNNoAuthWhenAnonymousAllowed On|Off

Set to On to suppress authentication and authorization for requests which anonymous users are allowed to perform. The default value of this directive is On.

10. Subversion 属性

Subversion 允许用户在文件或目录上发明任意名称的版本化属性和非版本化属性.唯一的限制就是前缀不能是 svn:(这些被 Subversion 保留)。用户可以设置这些属性来改变 Subversion 的行为方式,用户不能发明新的 svn: 属性。

10.1. 版本控制的属性

These are the versioned properties that Subversion reserves for its own use:

svn:executable

如果出现在文件上,客户端会将此文件在 Unix 系统中的工作副本中设置为可执行。参见第 4.2 节 “文件的可执行性”

svn:mime-type

如果出现在文件,这个值表示了文件的多媒体文件类型。它允许客户端在执行更新时,判断是否可以基于行合并,同时也会影响使用浏览器浏览文件时的行为方式。参见第 4.1 节 “文件内容类型”

svn:ignore

如果出现在目录上,这是一组 svn status 和其它命令可以忽略的不受版本控制的名称匹配模式。参见第 5 节 “忽略未版本控制的条目”

svn:keywords

如果出现在文件上,这个值告诉客户端如何扩展文件中的特定关键字。参见第 6 节 “关键字替换”

svn:eol-style

如果出现在文件上,这个值告诉客户端如何处理工作副本中的文件的行结束符。参见第 4.3 节 “行结束字符序列”svn export

svn:externals

如果出现在目录上,则这个值就是客户端必须要检出的多个路径和 URL 列表。参见第 9 节 “外部定义”

svn:special

If present on a file, indicates that the file is not an ordinary file, but a symbolic link or other special object.[63]

svn:needs-lock

如果出现在文件上,告诉客户端在工作副本将文件置为只读,可以提醒我们在修改以前必须解锁。参见第 8.4 节 “锁定交流”

svn:mergeinfo

Used by Subversion to track merge data. See 第 3.4 节 “合并信息和预览” for details, but you should never edit this property unless you really know what you're doing.

10.2. 未版本控制的属性

These are the unversioned properties that Subversion reserves for its own use:

svn:author

如果出现,则保存了创建这个版本的认证用户名(如果没有出现,则修订版本是匿名提交的)。

svn:autoversioned

如果出现,则此版本是通过自动版本化特性创建,。参见 第 2 节 “自动版本化”

svn:date

保存了创建版本时 ISO 8601 格式的 UTC 时间。这个值来自服务器主机时钟,不是客户端的。

svn:log

保存了描述修订版本的日志信息。

svn:sync-currently-copying

Contains the revision number from the source repository which is currently being mirrored to this one by the svnsync tool. (This property is only relevant when it appears on revision 0.)

svn:sync-from-uuid

Contains the UUID of the repository of which this repository has been initialized as a mirror by the svnsync tool. (This property is only relevant when it appears on revision 0.)

svn:sync-from-url

Contains the URL of the repository directory of which this repository has been initialized as a mirror by the svnsync tool. (This property is only relevant when it appears on revision 0.)

svn:sync-last-merged-rev

Contains the revision of the source repository which was most recently and successfully mirrored to this one. (This property is only relevant when it appears on revision 0.)

svn:sync-lock

Used to temporarily enforce mutually exclusive access to the repository by svnsync mirroring operations. This property is generally only observed when such an operation is active—or when an svnsync command failed to cleanly disconnect from the repository. (This property is only relevant when it appears on revision 0.)

11. 版本库钩子

下面是 Subversion 提供的版本库钩子:

名称

start-commit — 开始提交的通知

描述

start-commit 在开始事务之前执行。通常用来确定用户是否有提交权限。

如果 start-commit 钩子程序返回非零值,提交就会在创建事务之前停止,stderr 的任何输出都会返回到客户端。

输入参数

传递给你钩子程序的命令行参数,按照顺序是:

  1. 版本库路径

  2. 认证过的尝试提交的用户名

  3. Colon-separated list of capabilities that a client passes to the server, including depth, mergeinfo, and log-revprops (new in Subversion 1.5).

普通用户

访问控制 (例如,因为某些原因,临时禁止提交)。

只允许支持某些特性的客户端访问。


名称

pre-commit — 在提交结束之前提醒。

描述

pre-commit 钩子在事务创建新版本之前运行。通常这个钩子是用来保护因为内容或位置(例如,你要求所有到一个特定分支的提交必须包括一个 bug 追踪的 ticket 号,或者是要求日志信息不为空)而不允许的提交。

如果 pre-commit 钩子返回非零值,提交会终止,提交事务被删除,所有 stderr 的输出会返回到客户端。

输入参数

传递给你钩子程序的命令行参数,按照顺序是:

  1. 版本库路径

  2. 提交事务的名称

Additionally, Subversion passes any lock tokens provided by the committing client to the hook script via standard input. When present, these are formatted as a single line containing the string LOCK-TOKENS:, followed by additional lines—one per lock token—which contain the lock token information. Each lock token information line consists of the URI-escaped repository filesystem path associated with the lock, followed by the pipe (|) separator character, and finally the lock token string.

普通用户

修改确认和控制


名称

post-commit — 成功提交的通知。

描述

post-commit 钩子在事务完成,创建新版本后执行。大多数人用这个钩子来发送关于提交的描述性电子邮件,或者用来提醒其它工具(例如问题跟踪),发生了提交动作。一些配置也使用这个钩子触发版本库的备份进程。

如果 post-commit 钩子返回非零值,提交不会终止,因为它已经完成。然后,所有 stderr 的输出都会返回到客户端,让诊断钩子的失败更容易。

输入参数

传递给你钩子程序的命令行参数,按照顺序是:

  1. 版本库路径

  2. 提交创建的修订版本号

普通用户

提交通知;工具集成


名称

pre-revprop-change — 修订版本属性修改的通知。

描述

pre-revprop-change 钩子在修改版本属性修改之前,正常提交范围之外被执行。不象其它钩子,这个钩子默认是拒绝所有的属性修改,钩子必须实际存在,并且返回一个零值,这样才能修改属性。

如果 pre-revprop-change 钩子不存在,不可执行,或返回非零值,就不会修改属性,所有的 stderr 的输出会返回到客户端。

输入参数

传递给你钩子程序的命令行参数,按照顺序是:

  1. 版本库路径

  2. 要修改属性的修订版本

  3. 企图修改属性的认证用户名

  4. 属性名称已修改

  5. 变更描述:A (添加的),D (删除的)或M (修改的)

此外,Subversion 通过标准输入将属性的新值传递给钩子程序。

普通用户

访问控制;变更确认和控制


名称

post-revprop-change — 修订版本属性修改成功的通知

描述

post-revprop-change 钩子会在修改版本属性修改后立即执行,在提交范围之外。可以从其配对 pre-revprop-change 知道,如果没有实现 pre-revprop-change 钩子,它就不会执行。它通常用来在属性修改后发送邮件通知。

如果 post-revprop-change 钩子返回非零值,修改动作不会终止,因为它已经完成。然而,任何输出到 stderr 的内容都会返回到客户端,让诊断钩子的失败更容易。

输入参数

传递给你钩子程序的命令行参数,按照顺序是:

  1. 版本库路径

  2. 已经修改属性的修订版本

  3. 做出修改的认证用户名

  4. 属性名称已修改

  5. 变更描述:A (添加的),D (删除的)或M (修改的)

此外,Subversion 通过标准输入将属性的前一个值传递给钩子。

普通用户

属性改变通知


名称

pre-lock — 路径锁定尝试的通知。

描述

pre-lock 钩子在每次有人尝试锁定文件时执行。可以防止完全锁定,或者用来创建控制哪些用户可以锁定哪些路径的复杂策略。如果钩子发现已存在锁,也可以决定是否允许用户窃取这个锁。

如果 pre-lock 钩子返回非零值,锁定动作会终止,任何输出到 stderr 的内容都会返回到客户端。

The hook program may optionally dictate the lock token which will be assigned to the lock by printing the desired lock token to standard output. Because of this, implementations of this hook should carefully avoid unexpected output sent to standard output.

[警告]警告

If the pre-lock script takes advantage of lock token dictation feature, the responsibility of generating a unique lock token falls to the script itself. Failure to generate unique lock tokens may result in undefined—and very likely, undesired—behavior.

输入参数

传递给你钩子程序的命令行参数,按照顺序是:

  1. 版本库路径

  2. 将要锁定的版本化路径

  3. 尝试锁定的认证用户名

  4. Comment provided when the lock was created

  5. 1 if the user is attempting to steal an existing lock; 0 otherwise

普通用户

访问控制


名称

post-lock — 成功锁定路径的通知。

描述

post-lock 在路径锁定后执行。通常用来发送锁定事件邮件通知。

如果 post-lock 钩子返回非零值,锁定动作不会终止,因为它已经完成。然而,任何输出到 stderr 的内容都会返回到客户端,让诊断钩子的失败更容易。

输入参数

传递给你钩子程序的命令行参数,按照顺序是:

  1. 版本库路径

  2. 锁定路径的认证用户名

此外,锁定路径通过标准输入传递给钩子程序,每行一个路径。

普通用户

锁定通知


名称

pre-unlock — 路径解锁尝试的通知。

描述

pre-unlock 钩子在某人企图删除一个文件上的钩子时发生。可以用来创建哪些用户可以解锁哪些文件的策略。制定解锁策略非常重要。如果用户 A 锁定了一个文件,允许用户 B 打开这个锁?如果这个锁已经一周了呢?这种事情可以通过钩子决定并强制执行。

如果 pre-unlock 返回非零值,解锁操作会终止,任何输出到 stderr 的内容都会返回到客户端。

输入参数

传递给你钩子程序的命令行参数,按照顺序是:

  1. 版本库路径

  2. 将要解锁的版本化路径

  3. 尝试解锁的认证用户名

  4. Lock token associated with the lock which is to be removed

  5. 1 if the user is attempting to break the lock; 0 otherwise

普通用户

访问控制


名称

post-unlock — 路径成功解锁的通知。

描述

post-unlock 在一个或多个路径已经被解锁后执行。通常用来发送解锁事件通知邮件。

如果 post-unlock 返回非零值,解锁过程不会终止,因为它已经完成。然而,任何输出到 stderr 的内容都会返回到客户端,让诊断钩子的失败更容易。

输入参数

传递给你钩子程序的命令行参数,按照顺序是:

  1. 版本库路径

  2. 路径解锁的认证用户名

此外,解锁路径通过标准输入传递给钩子程序,每行一个路径。

普通用户

解锁通知




[62] 记住svnadmin只工作在本地路径,而不是URL

[63] 此时,符号链接是唯一的特别对象。但是也许 Subversion 以后会有更多的特别对象。

附录 A. Subversion 快速入门指南

如果你渴望快速配置 Subversion 并运行(而且你喜欢通过实验学习),本章会展示如何创建版本库,导入代码,然后以工作副本检出,继续我们会给出本书的相关章节的链接。

[警告]警告

如果读者还不熟悉版本控制,以及在 Subversion 和 CVS 中使用的拷贝-修改-合并模型这些基础概念,那么建议在进一步学习之前,首先阅读第 1 章 基本概念

1. 安装 Subversion

Subversion is built on a portability layer called APR—the Apache Portable Runtime library. The APR library provides all the interfaces that Subversion needs to function on different operating systems: disk access, network access, memory management, and so on. While Subversion is able to use Apache HTTP Server (or, httpd) as one of its network server programs, its dependence on APR does not mean that httpd is a required component. APR is a standalone library usable by any application. It does mean, however, that Subversion clients and servers run on any operating system that httpd runs on: Windows, Linux, all flavors of BSD, Mac OS X, NetWare, and others.

The easiest way to get Subversion is to download a binary package built for your operating system. Subversion's web site (http://subversion.apache.org) often has these packages available for download, posted by volunteers. The site usually contains graphical installer packages for users of Microsoft operating systems. If you run a Unix-like operating system, you can use your system's native package distribution system (RPMs, DEBs, the ports tree, etc.) to get Subversion.

此外,还可以通过编译源代码包直接生成 Subversion 程序,尽管这不是一件简单的任务(如果你没有构建过开源软件包,你最好下载二进制发布版本!)。首先,从 Subversion 网站下载最新的源代码包,然后解压缩。然后,根据 INSTALL 文件的指示进行编译。需要注意的是,正式发布的源代码包中可能没有包含构建命令行客户端工具所需的全部内容,从 Subversion 1.4 开始,所有依赖的库(如 apr,apr-util 和 neon 库)以 -deps 为名称单独发布,这些库应该可以满足你在你的系统上的安装,你需要将依赖库解压缩到 Subversion 源程序相同的目录。但是一些可选的组件则依赖于其它一些程序库,如 Berkeley DB 和 Apache httpd。因此,如果想要进行完整的编译,请根据 INSTALL 文件中的内容确认这些程序库是否可用。

If you're one of those folks that likes to use bleeding-edge software, you can also get the Subversion source code from the Subversion repository in which it lives. Obviously, you'll need to already have a Subversion client on hand to do this. But once you do, you can check out a working copy from http://svn.apache.org/repos/asf/subversion[64]:

$ svn checkout http://svn.apache.org/repos/asf/subversion/trunk subversion
A    subversion/HACKING
A    subversion/INSTALL
A    subversion/README
A    subversion/autogen.sh
A    subversion/build.conf
…

上面的命令会检出最新(尚未发布)的 Subversion 源代码版本到你的当前工作目录的名为 subversion 的子目录中。很明显,你可以调整最后的参数改为你需要的。不管你怎么称呼它,在操作完成后,你已经有了 Subversion 的源代码。当然,你还是需要得到一些支持库(apr,apr-util 等等)—参见工作副本根目录的 INSTALL 以了解详情。

2. 快速指南

请确定你坐在了正确的位置,你的盘桌已经关闭,乘务员们,准备起飞 …。

这是一个快速教程,能够帮助你熟悉 Subversion 的基本配置和操作。在结束这个教程时,你应该对 Subversion 的典型用法有了一个基本认识。

[注意]注意

The examples used in this appendix assume that you have svn, the Subversion command-line client, and svnadmin, the administrative tool, ready to go on a Unix-like operating system. (This tutorial also works at the Windows command-line prompt, assuming you make some obvious tweaks.) We also assume you are using Subversion 1.2 or later (run svn --version to check).

Subversion 的所有版本化数据都储存在中心版本库中。因此我们需要先创建一个版本库:

$ cd /var/svn
$ svnadmin create repos
$ ls repos
conf/  dav/  db/  format  hooks/  locks/  README.txt
$

This command creates a Subversion repository in the directory /var/svn/repos, creating the repos directory itself if it doesn't already exist. This directory contains (among other things) a collection of database files. You won't see your versioned files if you peek inside. For more information about repository creation and maintenance, see 第 5 章 版本库管理.

在 Subversion 中没有项目的概念。Subversion 的版本库只是一个虚拟的版本化文件系统,可以存放你想要存放的任何文件。有些管理员喜欢为每个项目建立一个独立的版本库,而另外一些管理员则喜欢将多个项目存放到同一个版本库的不同目录里。这两种方式各有各的优点,关于这方面内容的论述,参见第 2.1 节 “规划你的版本库结构”。不论是哪种方式,版本库都只是负责管理文件和目录,而项目则是人为指定的概念。因此,尽管本书中遍布着项目这个词,但是请记住我们只不过是在谈论版本库中的某些特定目录(或者是一组目录)。

在这个例子中,我们假定已经有一些需要导入到 Subversion 版本库的条目(一组文件和目录)。接下来,我们需要把这些条目整理到一个名为 myproject 的目录(或者其它任意目录)里。在这个目录下,创建三个顶级子目录:branches, tagstrunk。将所有需版本化的数据保存到 trunk 目录下,同时保持 branchestags 目录为空:



/tmp/

   myproject/

      branches/

      tags/

      trunk/

         foo.c

         bar.c

         Makefile

         …

branches, tagstrunk 这三个子目录不是 Subversion 必须的。但这样做是 Subversion 的习惯用法,我们还是遵守这个约定吧。

准备好了数据之后,就可以使用svn import命令(参见第 2 节 “导入数据到你的版本库”)将其导入到版本库中:

$ svn import /tmp/myproject file:///var/svn/repos/myproject \
      -m "initial import"
Adding         /tmp/myproject/branches
Adding         /tmp/myproject/tags
Adding         /tmp/myproject/trunk
Adding         /tmp/myproject/trunk/foo.c
Adding         /tmp/myproject/trunk/bar.c
Adding         /tmp/myproject/trunk/Makefile
…
Committed revision 1.
$ 

现在版本库中已经保存了目录中的数据。如前所述,直接查看版本库是看不到文件和目录的;它们存放在数据库之中。但是版本库的虚拟文件系统中则包含了一个名为 myproject 的顶级目录,其中保存了所有的数据。

注意我们在一开始创建的那个 /tmp/myproject 目录并没有改变,Subversion 并不在意它(事实上,完全可以删除这个目录)。要开始使用版本库数据,我们还要创建一个新的用于存储数据的工作副本,这是一个私有工作区。从 Subversion 版本库里检出 myproject/trunk 工作副本的操作如下:

$ svn checkout file:///var/svn/repos/myproject/trunk myproject
A    myproject/foo.c
A    myproject/bar.c
A    myproject/Makefile
…
Checked out revision 1.
$

现在,myproject 目录下有一个版本库数据的个人副本。我们可以在这个工作副本中编辑文件,并将修改提交到版本库中。

  • 进入工作副本目录,编辑某个文件的内容。

  • 运行 svn diff,以标准差异格式查看你的修改。

  • 运行 >svn commit,将你的修改提交到版本库中。

  • 运行 svn update,让你的工作副本更新到版本库的最新版本。

完整的工作副本操作指南,请参见第 2 章 基本使用

现在,你可以选择将 Subversion 版本库发布到网络上。参见第 6 章 服务配置,以了解不同服务器软件的使用以及配置方法。




[64] Note that the URL checked out in the example ends not with subversion, but with a subdirectory thereof called trunk. See our discussion of Subversion's branching and tagging model for the reasoning behind this.

附录 B. CVS 用户的 Subversion 指南

这个附录可以作为 CVS 用户开始使用 Subversion 的指南,实质上就是在10000 英尺鸟瞰这两个系统之间的区别列表。在每一小节,我们会尽可能提供相关章节的引用。

尽管 Subversion 的目标是接管当前和未来的 CVS 基础用户,但是仍然需要一些新的特性和设计来修正一些 CVS 不好的行为,这意味着,作为一个 CVS 用户,你或许需要打破习惯—忘记一些奇怪的习惯来作为开始。

1. 版本号现在不同了

在 CVS 中,版本号是针对每个文件的,这是因为 CVS 使用 RCS 文件保存数据,每个文件都在版本库有一个对应的 RCS 文件,版本库几乎就是根据项目树的结构创建。

在 Subversion 中,版本库看起来像是一个单独的文件系统,每次提交导致一个新的文件系统树;本质上,版本库是一系列树,每棵树都有一个版本号。当有人谈论版本 54 时,他们是在讨论一个特定的树(并且间接来说,文件系统在提交 54 次之后的样子)。

技术上讲,谈论文件 foo.c 的版本 5 是不正确的,相反,一个人会说 foo.c 在版本 5 出现。同样,我们在假定文件的进展时也要小心,在 CVS 中,文件 foo.c 的版本 5 和 6 一定是不同的,在 Subversion 中,foo.c 可能在修订版本 5 和 6 之间没有改变。

Similarly, in CVS, a tag or branch is an annotation on the file or on the version information for that individual file, whereas in Subversion, a tag or branch is a copy of an entire tree (by convention, into the /branches or /tags directories that appear at the top level of the repository, beside /trunk). In the repository as a whole, many versions of each file may be visible: the latest version on each branch, every tagged version, and of course the latest version on the trunk itself. So, to refine the terms even further, one would often say foo.c as it appears in /branches/REL1 in revision 5.

关于此专题的更多细节,请参见第 2.2 节 “修订版本”

2. 目录的版本

Subversion 会记录目录树的结构,不仅仅是文件的内容。这是编写 Subversion 替代 CVS 最重要的一个原因。

以下是对你这意味着什么的说明,作为一个前CVS用户:

  • svn addsvn delete 现在也工作在目录上了,就像在文件上一样,还有 svn copysvn move 也一样。然而,这些命令会导致版本库即时的变化,相反,工作的项目只是调度添加和删除,在运行 svn commit 之前没有版本库的修改。

  • 目录不再是哑容器了;它们也有文件一样的版本号。(更准确的说,谈论版本 5 的目录foo/是正确的。)

让我们再讨论最后一点。目录版本化是一个困难的问题;因为我们希望允许混合版本的工作副本,有一些防止我们滥用这个模型的限制。

从理论观点,我们定义目录foo的版本 5 意味着一组目录条目和属性。现在假定我们从 foo 开始添加和删除文件,然后提交。如果说我们还有 foo 的版本 5 就是一个谎言。然而,如果说我们在提交之后增加了 foo 的版本号码,这也是一个谎言;还有一些 foo 的修改我们没有得到,因为我们还没有更新。

Subversion 通过在 .svn 区域偷偷的纪录添加和删除来处理这些问题,当你最后运行 svn update,所有的变更都会与版本库同步,并且目录的新版本号会正确设置。因此,只有在更新之后才可以真正安全地说我们有了一个完美的修订版本目录。在大多数时候,你的工作副本会保存不完美的目录修订版本。

同样的,如果你尝试提交目录的属性修改会有一个问题。通常情况下,提交应该会提高工作目录的本地修订版本号。但是再次说,这还是一个谎言,因为这个目录还没有发生添加和删除,因为还没有发生更新。因此,在你的目录不是最新的时候不允许你提交属性修改。

关于目录版本的更多讨论见第 2.4.3 节 “混合版本的工作副本”

3. 更多离线操作

近些年来,磁盘空间变得异常便宜和富余,但是网络带宽还没有,因此 Subversion 的工作副本为紧缺资源进行了优化。

管理目录 .svnCVS 有同样的目的,除了它还保存了只读的文件原始副本,这允许你做许多离线操作:

svn status

显示你所做的本地修改(见第 4.3.1 节 “查看你的修改概况”)

svn diff

显示修改的详细信息(见see 第 4.3.2 节 “检查你的本地修改的详情”)

svn revert

删除你的本地修改(见第 4.4 节 “修正错误”)

另外,原始文件的缓存允许Subversion客户端在提交时只提交区别,这是CVS做不到的。

列表中最后一个子命令— svn revert —是新的;它不仅仅撤销本地修改,也会取消如增加和删除的调度操作,这是推荐的恢复文件方式;删除文件,然后运行svn update也可以工作,但是这样侮辱了更新操作的作用,而且,我们在这个主题…

4. 区分状态和更新

在Subversion,我们已经设法抹去cvs statuscvs update之间的混乱。

命令 cvs status 有两个目的:第一,显示用户在工作副本的所有本地修改,第二,显示给用户哪些文件是最新的。很不幸,因为 CVS 的输出难以阅读,许多 CVS 用户并没有充分利用这个命令的好处。相反,他们慢慢习惯运行 cvs updatecvs -n update 来快速查看区别,如果用户忘记使用 -n 选项,副作用就是将还没有准备好处理的版本库修改合并到工作副本。

对于 Subversion,我们通过修改 svn status 的输出,使之同时满足阅读和解析的需要来努力消除这种混乱。同样,svn update 只会打印将要更新的文件信息,而不是本地修改。

4.1. 状态

svn status 打印所有本地修改的文件。缺省情况下,不会连接版本库。然而这个命令接受一些选项,下面是是一些最常用的:

-u

访问版本库检测并显示过期的信息。

-v

显示所有版本控制下的文件。

-N

非递归方式运行(不会访问子目录)。

svn status 命令有两种输出格式。默认是格式,本地修改的输出就像这样:

$ svn status
M       foo.c
M       bar/baz.c

如果你指定--show-updates(-u)选项,就会使用较长的格式输出:

$ svn status -u
M             1047   foo.c
        *     1045   faces.html
        *            bloo.png
M             1050   bar/baz.c
Status against revision:   1066

在这个例子里,增加了两列。第二列的星号表示了文件或目录是否过期。第三列显示了工作副本的版本号。在上面的例子里,星号表示如果进行更新,faces.html 会被修改,而 bloo.png 则是版本库新加的文件(bloo.png前面的版本号为空,表示这个文件在工作副本不存在)。

For a more detailed discussion of svn status, including an explanation of the status codes shown in the previous example, see 第 4.3.1 节 “查看你的修改概况”.

4.2. 更新

svn update会更新你的工作副本,只打印这次更新的文件。

Subversion 将 CVS 的 PU 合并为 U。当合并或冲突发生时,Subversion 会简单的打印 GC,而不是大段相关内容。

关于 svn update 的详细讨论,参见第 4.1 节 “更新你的工作副本”

5. 分支和标签

Subversion 不区分文件系统空间和分支空间;分支和标签都是普通的文件系统目录。这恐怕是 CVS 用户需要逾越的最大心理障碍。所有信息在第 4 章 分支与合并

[警告]警告

因为 Subversion 把分支和标签作为普通目录看待,你项目不同的开发线可能位于主项目目录的不同子目录里。所以记住要检出你所要的保存特定开发线的 URL,而不是项目的根 URL。如果你错误的检出了项目的根,你会惊讶的发现你的项目副本包含了所有的分支和标签。[65]

6. 元数据属性

Subversion 的一个新特性就是,你可以对文件和目录任意附加元数据(或者称为属性)。属性是在工作副本中文件或目录关联的任意名称/值对。

使用 svn propsetsvn propget子命令,可以设置或得到属性名称。列出对象所有的属性,使用 svn proplist

更多信息见第 3 节 “属性”

7. 解决冲突

CVS 使用嵌入冲突标志来标记冲突,并且在更新或合并操作时打印 C。历史上,这导致了许多问题,因为 CVS 做得还不够。许多用户在它们快速闪过终端时忘记(或没有看到) C。即使出现了冲突标记,他们也经常忘记,然后提交了带有冲突标记的文件。

Subversion solves this problem in a pair of ways. First, when a conflict occurs in a file, Subversion records the fact that the file is in a state of conflict, and won't allow you to commit changes to that file until you explicitly resolve the conflict. Second, Subversion provides interactive conflict resolution, which allows you to resolve conflicts as they happen instead of having to go back and do so after the update or merge operation completes. See 第 4.5 节 “解决冲突” for more about conflict resolution in Subversion.

8. 二进制文件和行结束标记转换

在大多数情况下,Subversion 比 CVS 能更好的处理二进制文件。因为 CVS 使用 RCS,它只能存储已经修改的二进制文件的完整副本。但是 Subversion 使用二进制差异算法来表示文件的区别,不管文件是文本文件还是二进制文件。这意味着所有的文件是以增量的(压缩的)形式存放在版本库。

CVS 用户需要使用 -kb 选项来标记二进制文件,防止数据的混淆(因为关键字扩展和行结束符号的转换)。他们有时候会忘记这样做。

Subversion 使用更加异想天开的方法。第一,如果你不明确的告诉它(详情见第 6 节 “关键字替换”第 4.3 节 “行结束字符序列”)这样做,它不会做任何关键字扩展或行结束符号的转换操作。缺省情况下,Subversion 会把所有的数据看作字节串,所有的储存在版本库的文件都处于未转换的状态。

第二,Subversion 维护了一个内部的观念来区别一个文件是文本文件,还是二进制文件,但这个观念在工作副本非常重要。在执行 svn update 期间,Subversion 会对本地修改的文本文件执行基于上下文的合并,但是对二进制文件不会。

为了检测一个基于上下文的合并是可能的,Subversion 检测 svn:mime-type 属性。如果没有 svn:mime-type 属性,或者这个属性是文本的(例如 text/*),Subversion 会假定它是文本。否则 Subversion 认为它是二进制文件。Subversion 也会在执行 svn importsvn add 命令时通过运行一个二进制检测算法来帮助用户。这些命令会做出很好的猜测,然后(如果可能)设置添加文件的 svn:mime-type 属性(如果 Subversion 猜测错误,用户可以删除或手工编辑这个属性)。

9. 版本化的模块

不像 CVS,Subversion 工作副本会意识到它检出了一个模块。这意味着如果有人修改了模块的定义(例如添加和删除组件),然后执行 svn update 会适当的更新工作副本,增加或删除组件。

Subversion定义了模块作为一个目录属性的目录列表:见第 9 节 “外部定义”

10. 认证

通过 CVS 的 pserver,你需要在读写操作之前登陆到服务器(使用 cvs login 命令)—即使是匿名操作。当 Subversion 版本库使用 Apache 的 httpdsvnserve 作为服务器时,你不需要在开始时提供认证凭证—如果一个操作需要认证,服务器会要求你的凭证(不管这凭证是用户名与密码,客户证书,还是两个都有)。所以如果你的工作副本是全球可读的,在所有的读操作中不需要任何认证。

相对于CVS,Subversion会一直在磁盘(在你的~/.subversion/auth/目录)缓存凭证,除非你通过--no-auth-cache选项告诉它不这样做。

这个行为也有例外,当使用基于 SSH 隧道的 svnserve 服务器时,使用 svn+ssh:// 的 URL 方案。在这种情况下,ssh 会在通道刚开始时无条件的要求认证。

11. 迁移 CVS 版本库到 Subversion

或许让 CVS 用户熟悉 Subversion 的最好办法就是让他们的项目继续在新系统下工作,这可以简单得通过平淡的把 CVS 版本库的导出数据导入到 Subversion 完成,或者是更加完全的方案,不仅仅包括最新数据快照,还包括所有的历史,从一个系统到另一个系统。这是一个非常困难的问题,包括推导保持原子性的修改集,转化两个系统完全不同的分支策略等。但是还是有许多工具声称,至少部分具备了转换 CVS 版本库为 Subversion 版本库的能力。

最流行的(好像是最成熟的)转换工具是 cvs2svn(http://cvs2svn.tigris.org/),它是最初由 Subversion 自己的开发社区成员开发的一个 Python 脚本。这个工具只运行一次:它会多次扫描你的 CVS 版本库,并尽可能尝试推断提交,分支和标签。当它结束时,结果是 Subversion 版本库或可移植的 Subversion 转储文件。参见其网站,以了解详细的指令和附加说明。




[65] 如果在检出完成之前没有消耗完磁盘空间的话。

附录 C. WebDAV 和自动版本

WebDAV 是 HTTP 的一个扩展,作为一个文件共享的标准不断流行。当今的操作系统变得极端的 web 化,许多内置了对装载 WebDAV 服务器导出的共享的支持。

如果你使用 Apache 作为你的 Subversion 网络服务器,某种程度上,你也是在运行一个 WebDAV 服务器。这个附录提供了这种协议一些背景知识,Subversion 如何使用它,Subversion 如何与支持 WebDAV 的软件交互工作。

1. 什么是 WebDAV?

DAV 的意思是 Distributed Authoring and Versioning。RFC 2518 为 HTTP 1.1 定义了一组概念和附加的扩展方法来把 web 变成一个更加普遍的读/写媒体。基本思想是一个 WebDAV 兼容的 web 服务器可以像普通的文件服务器一样工作;客户端可以通过 HTTP 加载(类似于 NFS 或 SMB) WebDAV 共享文件夹。

悲惨的是,RFC 规范并没有提供任何版本控制模型。基本的 DAV 客户端和服务器只是假定每个文件或目录只有一个版本存在,可以重复的覆盖。

因为 RFC 2518 遗漏了版本概念,几年之后,另一个委员会负责撰写 RFC 3253。新的 RFC 为 WebDAV 增加了版本概念,将 V 加入 DAV—也就是DeltaV。WebDAV/DeltaV 客户端和服务器经常叫做 DeltaV客户端和服务器,因为 DeltaV 包含了基本的 WebDAV。

最初的 WebDAV 标准得到了广泛的成功,所有的现代操作系统拥有内置的(后面有详细资料)对普通 WebDAV 的支持,许多流行的应用程序也可以使用 WebDAV—仅举几例,如 Microsoft Office,Dreamweaver 和 Photoshop。在服务器方面,Apache 从 1998 年就开始支持 WebDAV,并被认为是一个事实上的开源标准。也有几个商业的 WebDAV 服务器,例如 Microsoft 自己的 IIS。

不幸的是,DeltaV 没有这样的成功,很难寻找到任何 DeltaV 客户端和服务器。只有一些不太出名的商业产品,因此很难测试交互性。不清楚为什么 DeltaV 这样停滞。一些人说规范太复杂了,还有些人认为尽管 DeltaV 的特性有很大的吸引力(即使最新的技术用户也喜欢使用网络文件共享),版本控制特性对大多数用户还不是这样有趣和必要。最后,有些人认为 DeltaV 还这样不流行主要是因为一直没有开源的服务器产品实现它。

当 Subversion 还在设计阶段时,使用 Apache 的 httpd 作为主要网络服务器就是一个很好的想法。它已经有了支持 WebDAV 服务的模块。DeltaV 是一个较新的规范。希望 Subversion 服务器模块(mod_dav_svn)最终能够成为一个开源的 DeltaV 参考实现。但非常不幸,DeltaV 的版本模型过于具体,并且与 Subversion 的模型并不匹配。虽然有些概念可以对应起来,但有些则不能。

这是什么意思呢?

首先,Subversion 客户端不是一个完全实现的 DeltaV 客户端。它需要从服务器得到 DeltaV 不能提供的东西,因此非常依赖于只有 mod_dav_svn 理解的 Subversion 特定的 REPORT 请求。

其次,mod_dav_svn 不是一个完全实现的 DeltaV 服务器,许多与 Subversion 不相关的 DeltaV 规范还没有实现。

A long-held debate in the Subversion developer community about whether it was worthfile to remedy either of these situations eventually reached closure, with the Subversion developers officially deciding to abandon plans to fully support DeltaV. New versions of Subversion will, of course, continue to provide the same DeltaV feature support already present in older releases, but no new work would be done to increase coverage of the specification—in fact, Subversion would intentionally begin to move away from strict DeltaV as its primary HTTP-based protocol.

2. 自动版本化

因为 Subversion 客户端不是完整的 DeltaV 客户端,Subversion 服务器也不是完整的 DeltaV 服务器,但仍有值得高兴的交互特性:叫做自动版本化

自动版本化是 DeltaV 标准中的可选特性,一个典型的 DeltaV 服务器会拒绝一个对版本控制之下文件的 PUT 操作。为了修改一个版本控制下的文件,服务器只会接受一系列正确的版本请求:例如 MKACTIVITY, CHECKOUT, PUTCHECKIN。但是如果 DeltaV 服务器支持自动版本化,服务器会接受基本 WebDAV 客户端的写请求。服务器的行为就像客户端已经发出了一些列正确的版本请求,执行了提交。也就是说,DeltaV 服务器可以与一个对版本化一无所知的普通 WebDAV 客户端交互。

因为有许多操作系统已经集成了 WebDAV 客户端,所以这个特性的用例适用于管理员与非技术用户一起工作。假设一个办公室有许多使用 Microsoft Windows 或 Mac OS 的普通用户。每个用户装载了一个 Subversion 版本库,看起来就是普通的网络共享文件夹。他们操作这个目录就像普通目录一样:打开文件, 编辑它们,保存它们。同时,服务器自动的版本化所有东西。任何管理员(或博学的用户)可以一直使用 Subversion 客户端来查询历史来检索旧版本的数据。

This scenario isn't fiction—it's real and it works. To activate autoversioning in mod_dav_svn, use the SVNAutoversioning directive within the httpd.conf Location block, like so:

<Location /repos>
  DAV svn
  SVNPath /var/svn/repository
  SVNAutoversioning on
</Location>

当激活了 Subversion 自动版本化,来自 WebDAV 的客户端请求会导致自动提交,每个修订版本会自动附加一个通用的日志信息。

然而,在激活这个特性之前,需要理解你做的事情。WebDAV 会做许多写请求,导致产生数量非常巨大的自动提交版本。例如,当保存数据时,许多客户端会使用一个 PUT 请求来创建一个 0 字节的文件,然后紧跟一个 PUT 请求写真实的文件数据。一个单独的文件写操作产生了两个不同的提交。考虑到许多应用程序隔几分钟的自动保存,这会产生更多的提交。

如果你有发送邮件的 post-commit 钩子程序,你可能想完全禁止发送邮件,或者只针对部分目录发送邮件;它依赖于你认为大量的邮件通知是否还有价值。另外,一个聪明的 post-commit 钩子也应该能够区分自动版本化和 svn commit 产生的事务。技巧就是检查修订版本的 svn:autoversioned 属性。如果有,则提交来自一个原始的 WebDAV 客户端。

Another feature that may be a useful complement for Subversion's autoversioning comes from Apache's mod_mime module. If a WebDAV client adds a new file to the repository, there's no opportunity for the user to set the the svn:mime-type property. This might cause the file to appear as a generic icon when viewed within a WebDAV shared folder, not having an association with any application. One remedy is to have a sysadmin (or other Subversion-knowledgeable person) check out a working copy and manually set the svn:mime-type property on necessary files. But there's potentially no end to such cleanup tasks. Instead, you can use the ModMimeUsePathInfo directive in your Subversion <Location> block:

<Location /repos>
  DAV svn
  SVNPath /var/svn/repository
  SVNAutoversioning on

  ModMimeUsePathInfo on

</Location>

这个指示允许 mod_mime 在使用自动版本化添加新文件时,尝试自动检测新文件的 MIME 类型。这个模块查看文件的扩展名,有可能的话还包括检查内容;如果文件符合某个通用模式,就会自动设置文件的属性 svn:mime-type

3. 客户端交互性

所有的 WebDAV 客户端分为三类 — 独立应用程序,文件浏览器扩展,或文件系统实现。这些分类清楚的定义了 WebDAV 用户可用的功能。表 C.1 “常用的 WebDAV 客户端” 将支持 WebDAV 的常见软件进行了分类,并提供了的简短描述。可以在后面的章节找到这些软件的详细信息。

表 C.1. 常用的 WebDAV 客户端

软件类型WindowsMacLinux描述
Adobe Photoshop独立的 WebDAV 应用程序X  图像编辑软件,允许对 WebDAV 的 URL 直接读写
cadaver独立的 WebDAV 应用程序 XX命令行 WebDAV 客户端,支持文件传输,目录树显示和锁定操作
DAV Explorer独立的 WebDAV 应用程序XXX浏览 WebDAV 共享的 Java GUI 工具
Adobe Dreamweaver独立的 WebDAV 应用程序X  Web 创作软件,可以直接读写 WebDAV 的 URL
Microsoft Office独立的 WebDAV 应用程序X  Office 产品套件,有几个组件可以直接读写 WebDAV 的 URL
Microsoft Web 文件夹文件浏览器 WebDAV 扩展X  GUI 文件浏览器程序,可以对 WebDAV 共享执行目录树操作
GNOME Nautilus文件浏览器 WebDAV 扩展  XGUI 文件浏览器,可以对 WebDAV 共享执行目录树操作
KDE Konqueror文件浏览器 WebDAV 扩展  XGUI 文件浏览器,可以对 WebDAV 共享执行目录树操作
Mac OS XWebDAV 文件系统实现 X 内置支持加载 WebDAV 共享的操作系统。
Novell NetDriveWebDAV 文件系统实现X  为远程 WebDAV 共享分配 Windows 驱动器盘符的驱动映射程序
文件传输软件,可以将 Windows 驱动器加载为远程的 WebDAV 共享WebDAV 文件系统实现X  文件传输软件,也就是可以为加载的远程 WebDAV 共享赋予 Windows 驱动器盘符。
davfs2WebDAV 文件系统实现  X允许加载 WebDAV 共享的 Linux 文件系统驱动


3.1. 独立的 WebDAV 应用程序

WebDAV 应用使用 WebDAV 协议与 WebDAV 服务器通讯。我们将会介绍一些支持 WebDAV 的流行程序。

3.1.1. Microsoft Office,Dreamweaver,Photoshop

On Windows, several well-known applications contain integrated WebDAV client functionality, such as Microsoft's Office,[66] Adobe's Photoshop and Dreamweaver programs. They're able to directly open and save to URLs, and tend to make heavy use of WebDAV locks when editing a file.

需要注意尽管这些程序也存在于 Mac OS X,但是在这个平台上并不是直接支持 WebDAV。实际上在 Mac OS X,File→Open 对话框完全不允许人们输入路径或 URL。这好像看起来 Macintosh 版本的应用程序不会支持 WebDAV 特性了,但实际上是因为 OS X 已经实现了底层的文件系统级的 WebDAV 支持。

3.1.2. Cadaver,DAV 浏览器

Cadaver 是一个简单的 Unix 命令行的 WebDAV 共享浏览和修改程序。就像 Subversion 客户端,它使用 neon 的 HTTP 库 — 毫不奇怪,因为其作者就是 neon 的作者。Cadaver 是一个自由软件(GPL 许可证),可以通过 http://www.webdav.org/cadaver/ 访问。

使用 cadaver 与命令行 FTP 程序类似,因此它在基本 WebDAV 调试中非常有用。它可以用来在紧急情况下上传或下载文件,也可以用来验证属性,并复制, 移动, 锁定或解锁文件:

$ cadaver http://host/repos
dav:/repos/> ls
Listing collection `/repos/': succeeded.
Coll: > foobar                                 0  May 10 16:19
      > playwright.el                       2864  May  4 16:18
      > proofbypoem.txt                     1461  May  5 15:09
      > westcoast.jpg                      66737  May  5 15:09

dav:/repos/> put README
Uploading README to `/repos/README':
Progress: [=============================>] 100.0% of 357 bytes succeeded.

dav:/repos/> get proofbypoem.txt
Downloading `/repos/proofbypoem.txt' to proofbypoem.txt:
Progress: [=============================>] 100.0% of 1461 bytes succeeded.

DAV Explorer 是另一个独立运行的 WebDAV 客户端,使用 Java 编写。采用类 Apache 的许可证,网站是 http://www.ics.uci.edu/~webdav/。DAV Explorer 与 cadaver 的功能差不多,优点可移植,并有一个用户友好的 GUI 程序。它也是最早支持 WebDAV 访问控制协议(RFC 3744)的客户端之一。

当然,在这种情况下 DAV Explorer 的 ACL 支持没有任何用处,因为 mod_dav_svn 不支持 ACL。事实上,Cadaver 和 DAV Explorer 支持的一些有限的 DeltaV 命令也并不是很有用,因为它们不允许 MKACTIVITY 请求。但是这都不相干;我们假定这些客户端都是针对自动版本化版本库工作。

3.2. 文件浏览器的 WebDAV 扩展

一些流行的文件浏览器 GUI 程序支持 WebDAV 扩展,允许用户将 DAV 共享当作本地文件夹访问,在共享的项目上执行基本的树编辑操作。例如 Windows 浏览器可以以网络位置方式浏览 WebDAV 服务器。用户可以拖入和拖出文件,或者是改名, 复制或删除其中的文件。但是因为它只是文件浏览器的一个特性,所以 DAV 对普通应用不可见。所有的 DAV 交互必须通过浏览器界面。

3.2.1. Microsoft Web 文件夹

Microsoft 是 WebDAV 规范最早的支持者,从 Windows 98 开始提供客户端,被称作网络文件夹。这个客户端在 Windows NT 4.0 和 Windows 2000 上也存在。

最早的网络文件夹客户端是浏览器的扩展,它是浏览文件系统的 GUI 程序。它工作良好。在 Windows 98,如果我的电脑里没有网络文件夹,这个特性需要明确安装。在 Windows 2000,只需要添加一个新的网络位置,输入 URL,WebDAV 共享就会弹出让你浏览。

伴随着 Windows XP 的发行,Microsoft 开始了网络文件夹的新实现,叫做WebDAV Mini-Redirector.。这个新的实现是文件系统级的客户端,允许 WebDAV 装载到驱动器盘符上。不幸的是,这个实现充满难以相信的问题。客户端经常会尝试把 HTTP 的 URL(http://host/repos)转化为 UNC 共享符号(\\host\repos);它也经常使用 Windows 域认证来回应 HTTP 基本认证,按照 HOST\username 格式发送用户名。这类互操作性问题在网络上大量传播,使大量用户受挫。即使是 Apache WebDAV 的作者 Greg Stein 也建议不要对 Apache 服务器使用 XP 的网络文件夹。

Windows Vista's initial implementation of Web Folders seems to be almost the same as XP's, so it has the same sort of problems. With luck, Microsoft will remedy these issues in a Vista Service Pack.

However, there seem to be workarounds for both XP and Vista that allow Web Folders to work against Apache. Users have mostly reported success with these techniques, so we'll relay them here.

On Windows XP, you have two options. First, search Microsoft's web site for update KB907306, Software Update for Web Folders. This may fix all your problems. If it doesn't, it seems that the original pre-XP Web Folders implementation is still buried within the system. You can unearth it by going to Network Places and adding a new network place. When prompted, enter the URL of the repository, but include a port number in the URL. For example, you should enter http://host/repos as http://host:80/repos instead. Respond to any authentication prompts with your Subversion credentials.

On Windows Vista, the same KB907306 update may clear everything up. But there may still be other issues. Some users have reported that Vista considers all http:// connections insecure, and thus will always fail any authentication challenges from Apache unless the connection happens over https://. If you're unable to connect to the Subversion repository via SSL, you can tweak the system registry to turn off this behavior. Just change the value of the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\WebClient\Parameters\BasicAuthLevel key from 1 to 2. A final warning: be sure to set up the Web Folder to point to the repository's root directory (/), rather than some subdirectory such as /trunk. Vista Web Folders seems to work only against repository roots.

In general, while these workarounds may function for you, you might get a better overall experience using a third-party WebDAV client such as WebDrive or NetDrive.

3.2.2. Nautilus,Konqueror

Nautilus 是 GNOME 桌面(http://www.gnome.org)的官方文件管理/浏览器,KDE 桌面(http://www.kde.org)的则是 Konqueror。两个应用程序都是浏览器级别的 WebDAV 客户端,对自动版本化的版本库工作良好。

在 GNOME 的 Nautilus 中,选择 File→Open location,在显示的对话框中输入 URL。版本库就会象其它文件系统一样显示。

在 KDE 的 Konqueror 中,你需要在地址栏使用 webdav:// 方案来输入 URL。如果你输入 http:// URL,Konqueror 会像普通的 web 浏览器。你会看到 mod_dav_svn 输出的普通 HTML 目录列表。通过输入 webdav://host/repos,而不是 http://host/repos,Konqueror 就成为了一个 WebDAV 客户端,并且按照文件系统的方式显示版本库。

3.3. WebDAV 的文件系统实现

WebDAV 文件系统实现被认为是最佳的 WebDAV 客户端。它通过低级的文件系统模块实现,通常在操作系统的核心。这意味着 DAV 共享像网络的其他文件系统一样装载,就像在 Unix 下面装载 NFS,或者在 Windows 下装载一个 SMB 共享。结果就是这种客户端为所有程序提供了对 WebDAV 的透明访问,应用程序甚至意识不到发生了 WebDAV 请求。

3.3.1. WebDrive,NetDrive

WebDrive 和 NetDrive 都是优秀的商业产品,允许将 WebDAV 绑定到 Windows 的盘符。从而你可以同对真实硬盘一样操作这些 WebDAV 后端支持的共享。WebDrive 可以从 South River Technologies(http://www.southrivertech.com) 购买。Novell 的 NetDrive 可以在网络上免费下载,但用户还是需要有一个 NetWare 许可证。

3.3.2. Mac OS X

Apple 的 OS X 操作系统是集成的文件系统级的 WebDAV 客户端。通过 Finder,选择 Go→Connect to Server 菜单项。输入 WebDAV 的 URL,会在桌面显示一个磁盘,就像其它装载的卷。你也可以从 Darwin 终端通过 mount 命令装载类型为 webdav 的文件系统:

$ mount -t webdav http://svn.example.com/repos/project /some/mountpoint
$

注意如果 mod_dav_svn 是 1.2 之前的版本,OS X 不能装载为可读写,而是会成为只读。这是因为,OS X 坚持要读写共享支持锁定,而锁定文件出现在 Subversion 1.2。

OS X 的 WebDAV 客户端有时候对 HTTP 重定向很敏感。如果 OS X 不能装载版本库,你或许需要开启 Apache 服务器 httpd.conf 中的 BrowserMatch 指令:

BrowserMatch "^WebDAVFS/1.[012]" redirect-carefully

3.3.3. Linux davfs2

Linux davfs2 是一个 Linux 内核的文件系统模块,开发主页是 http://dav.sourceforge.net/。一旦安装 davfs2,你就可以使用通常的 Linux mount 命令装载 WebDAV 网络共享:

$ mount.davfs http://host/repos /mnt/dav



[66] 由于某些原因,Microsoft Access 不再支持 WebDAV,但是其它 Office 软件仍旧支持 WebDAV。

附录 D. 版权

Copyright (c) 2002-2011 Ben Collins-Sussman, Brian W. Fitzpatrick, C. Michael Pilato.

This work is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution License. To view a copy of this license, visit http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/2.0/ or send a letter to Creative Commons, 559 Nathan Abbott Way, Stanford, California 94305, USA.

A summary of the license is given below, followed by the full legal text.

You are free:

    * to copy, distribute, display, and perform the work
    * to make derivative works
    * to make commercial use of the work

Under the following conditions:
	
Attribution. You must give the original author credit.

    * For any reuse or distribution, you must make clear to others the
      license terms of this work.

    * Any of these conditions can be waived if you get permission from
      the author.

Your fair use and other rights are in no way affected by the above.

The above is a summary of the full license below.

====================================================================

Creative Commons Legal Code
Attribution 2.0

CREATIVE COMMONS CORPORATION IS NOT A LAW FIRM AND DOES NOT PROVIDE
LEGAL SERVICES. DISTRIBUTION OF THIS LICENSE DOES NOT CREATE AN
ATTORNEY-CLIENT RELATIONSHIP. CREATIVE COMMONS PROVIDES THIS
INFORMATION ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. CREATIVE COMMONS MAKES NO WARRANTIES
REGARDING THE INFORMATION PROVIDED, AND DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR
DAMAGES RESULTING FROM ITS USE.

License

THE WORK (AS DEFINED BELOW) IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS
CREATIVE COMMONS PUBLIC LICENSE ("CCPL" OR "LICENSE"). THE WORK IS
PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT AND/OR OTHER APPLICABLE LAW. ANY USE OF THE
WORK OTHER THAN AS AUTHORIZED UNDER THIS LICENSE OR COPYRIGHT LAW IS
PROHIBITED.

BY EXERCISING ANY RIGHTS TO THE WORK PROVIDED HERE, YOU ACCEPT AND
AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE. THE LICENSOR GRANTS
YOU THE RIGHTS CONTAINED HERE IN CONSIDERATION OF YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF
SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS.

1. Definitions

   a. "Collective Work" means a work, such as a periodical issue,
      anthology or encyclopedia, in which the Work in its entirety in
      unmodified form, along with a number of other contributions,
      constituting separate and independent works in themselves, are
      assembled into a collective whole. A work that constitutes a
      Collective Work will not be considered a Derivative Work (as
      defined below) for the purposes of this License.

   b. "Derivative Work" means a work based upon the Work or upon the
      Work and other pre-existing works, such as a translation,
      musical arrangement, dramatization, fictionalization, motion
      picture version, sound recording, art reproduction, abridgment,
      condensation, or any other form in which the Work may be recast,
      transformed, or adapted, except that a work that constitutes a
      Collective Work will not be considered a Derivative Work for the
      purpose of this License. For the avoidance of doubt, where the
      Work is a musical composition or sound recording, the
      synchronization of the Work in timed-relation with a moving
      image ("synching") will be considered a Derivative Work for the
      purpose of this License.

   c. "Licensor" means the individual or entity that offers the Work
      under the terms of this License.

   d. "Original Author" means the individual or entity who created the Work.

   e. "Work" means the copyrightable work of authorship offered under
      the terms of this License.

   f. "You" means an individual or entity exercising rights under this
      License who has not previously violated the terms of this
      License with respect to the Work, or who has received express
      permission from the Licensor to exercise rights under this
      License despite a previous violation.

2. Fair Use Rights. Nothing in this license is intended to reduce,
   limit, or restrict any rights arising from fair use, first sale or
   other limitations on the exclusive rights of the copyright owner
   under copyright law or other applicable laws.

3. License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License,
   Licensor hereby grants You a worldwide, royalty-free,
   non-exclusive, perpetual (for the duration of the applicable
   copyright) license to exercise the rights in the Work as stated
   below:

   a. to reproduce the Work, to incorporate the Work into one or more
      Collective Works, and to reproduce the Work as incorporated in
      the Collective Works;

   b. to create and reproduce Derivative Works;

   c. to distribute copies or phonorecords of, display publicly,
      perform publicly, and perform publicly by means of a digital
      audio transmission the Work including as incorporated in
      Collective Works;

   d. to distribute copies or phonorecords of, display publicly,
      perform publicly, and perform publicly by means of a digital
      audio transmission Derivative Works.

   e.

      For the avoidance of doubt, where the work is a musical composition:

         i. Performance Royalties Under Blanket Licenses. Licensor
            waives the exclusive right to collect, whether
            individually or via a performance rights society
            (e.g. ASCAP, BMI, SESAC), royalties for the public
            performance or public digital performance (e.g. webcast)
            of the Work.

        ii. Mechanical Rights and Statutory Royalties. Licensor waives
            the exclusive right to collect, whether individually or
            via a music rights agency or designated agent (e.g. Harry
            Fox Agency), royalties for any phonorecord You create from
            the Work ("cover version") and distribute, subject to the
            compulsory license created by 17 USC Section 115 of the US
            Copyright Act (or the equivalent in other jurisdictions).

   f. Webcasting Rights and Statutory Royalties. For the avoidance of
      doubt, where the Work is a sound recording, Licensor waives the
      exclusive right to collect, whether individually or via a
      performance-rights society (e.g. SoundExchange), royalties for
      the public digital performance (e.g. webcast) of the Work,
      subject to the compulsory license created by 17 USC Section 114
      of the US Copyright Act (or the equivalent in other
      jurisdictions).

The above rights may be exercised in all media and formats whether now
known or hereafter devised. The above rights include the right to make
such modifications as are technically necessary to exercise the rights
in other media and formats. All rights not expressly granted by
Licensor are hereby reserved.

4. Restrictions.The license granted in Section 3 above is expressly
   made subject to and limited by the following restrictions:

   a. You may distribute, publicly display, publicly perform, or
      publicly digitally perform the Work only under the terms of this
      License, and You must include a copy of, or the Uniform Resource
      Identifier for, this License with every copy or phonorecord of
      the Work You distribute, publicly display, publicly perform, or
      publicly digitally perform. You may not offer or impose any
      terms on the Work that alter or restrict the terms of this
      License or the recipients' exercise of the rights granted
      hereunder. You may not sublicense the Work. You must keep intact
      all notices that refer to this License and to the disclaimer of
      warranties. You may not distribute, publicly display, publicly
      perform, or publicly digitally perform the Work with any
      technological measures that control access or use of the Work in
      a manner inconsistent with the terms of this License
      Agreement. The above applies to the Work as incorporated in a
      Collective Work, but this does not require the Collective Work
      apart from the Work itself to be made subject to the terms of
      this License. If You create a Collective Work, upon notice from
      any Licensor You must, to the extent practicable, remove from
      the Collective Work any reference to such Licensor or the
      Original Author, as requested. If You create a Derivative Work,
      upon notice from any Licensor You must, to the extent
      practicable, remove from the Derivative Work any reference to
      such Licensor or the Original Author, as requested.

   b. If you distribute, publicly display, publicly perform, or
      publicly digitally perform the Work or any Derivative Works or
      Collective Works, You must keep intact all copyright notices for
      the Work and give the Original Author credit reasonable to the
      medium or means You are utilizing by conveying the name (or
      pseudonym if applicable) of the Original Author if supplied; the
      title of the Work if supplied; to the extent reasonably
      practicable, the Uniform Resource Identifier, if any, that
      Licensor specifies to be associated with the Work, unless such
      URI does not refer to the copyright notice or licensing
      information for the Work; and in the case of a Derivative Work,
      a credit identifying the use of the Work in the Derivative Work
      (e.g., "French translation of the Work by Original Author," or
      "Screenplay based on original Work by Original Author"). Such
      credit may be implemented in any reasonable manner; provided,
      however, that in the case of a Derivative Work or Collective
      Work, at a minimum such credit will appear where any other
      comparable authorship credit appears and in a manner at least as
      prominent as such other comparable authorship credit.

5. Representations, Warranties and Disclaimer

UNLESS OTHERWISE MUTUALLY AGREED TO BY THE PARTIES IN WRITING,
LICENSOR OFFERS THE WORK AS-IS AND MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND CONCERNING THE WORK, EXPRESS, IMPLIED,
STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES OF
TITLE, MERCHANTIBILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
NONINFRINGEMENT, OR THE ABSENCE OF LATENT OR OTHER DEFECTS, ACCURACY,
OR THE PRESENCE OF ABSENCE OF ERRORS, WHETHER OR NOT
DISCOVERABLE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, SO SUCH EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.

6. Limitation on Liability. EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED BY
   APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL LICENSOR BE LIABLE TO YOU ON ANY
   LEGAL THEORY FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE
   OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS LICENSE OR THE USE OF THE
   WORK, EVEN IF LICENSOR HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
   DAMAGES.

7. Termination

   a. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate
      automatically upon any breach by You of the terms of this
      License. Individuals or entities who have received Derivative
      Works or Collective Works from You under this License, however,
      will not have their licenses terminated provided such
      individuals or entities remain in full compliance with those
      licenses. Sections 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, and 8 will survive any
      termination of this License.

   b. Subject to the above terms and conditions, the license granted
      here is perpetual (for the duration of the applicable copyright
      in the Work). Notwithstanding the above, Licensor reserves the
      right to release the Work under different license terms or to
      stop distributing the Work at any time; provided, however that
      any such election will not serve to withdraw this License (or
      any other license that has been, or is required to be, granted
      under the terms of this License), and this License will continue
      in full force and effect unless terminated as stated above.

8. Miscellaneous

   a. Each time You distribute or publicly digitally perform the Work
      or a Collective Work, the Licensor offers to the recipient a
      license to the Work on the same terms and conditions as the
      license granted to You under this License.

   b. Each time You distribute or publicly digitally perform a
      Derivative Work, Licensor offers to the recipient a license to
      the original Work on the same terms and conditions as the
      license granted to You under this License.

   c. If any provision of this License is invalid or unenforceable
      under applicable law, it shall not affect the validity or
      enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this License,
      and without further action by the parties to this agreement,
      such provision shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary
      to make such provision valid and enforceable.

   d. No term or provision of this License shall be deemed waived and
      no breach consented to unless such waiver or consent shall be in
      writing and signed by the party to be charged with such waiver
      or consent.

   e. This License constitutes the entire agreement between the
      parties with respect to the Work licensed here. There are no
      understandings, agreements or representations with respect to
      the Work not specified here. Licensor shall not be bound by any
      additional provisions that may appear in any communication from
      You. This License may not be modified without the mutual written
      agreement of the Licensor and You.

Creative Commons is not a party to this License, and makes no warranty
whatsoever in connection with the Work. Creative Commons will not be
liable to You or any party on any legal theory for any damages
whatsoever, including without limitation any general, special,
incidental or consequential damages arising in connection to this
license. Notwithstanding the foregoing two (2) sentences, if Creative
Commons has expressly identified itself as the Licensor hereunder, it
shall have all rights and obligations of Licensor.

Except for the limited purpose of indicating to the public that the
Work is licensed under the CCPL, neither party will use the trademark
"Creative Commons" or any related trademark or logo of Creative
Commons without the prior written consent of Creative Commons. Any
permitted use will be in compliance with Creative Commons'
then-current trademark usage guidelines, as may be published on its
website or otherwise made available upon request from time to time.

Creative Commons may be contacted at http://creativecommons.org/.

====================================================================

索引

符号

冲突,“拷贝-修改-合并”方案
冲突标记,延后解决冲突
复审,交互式的查看冲突区别
正在解决,解决冲突
解决,丢弃你的修改而接收新获取的修订版本
交互,交互式的解决冲突区别
手工,手工合并冲突
推迟,延后解决冲突
分支,推荐的版本库布局什么是分支?
基础内容,检查你的修改
属性,属性
工作副本
commit,工作副本基本交互操作
update,工作副本基本交互操作
创建,工作副本基本交互操作
已经定义,工作副本Subversion 的工作副本
混合版本,混合版本的工作副本
差异,检查你的修改
并行版本系统,序言
日志信息,检查你的修改
正在提交 (见 工作副本,提交)
正在更新 (见 工作副本,更新)
版本
全局,修订版本
关键字,修订版本关键字
BASE,修订版本关键字
COMMITTED,修订版本关键字
HEAD,修订版本关键字
PREV,修订版本关键字
已经定义,修订版本
日期,版本日期
版本库
hooks
post-commit,post-commit
post-lock,post-lock
post-revprop-change,post-revprop-change
post-unlock,post-unlock
pre-commit,pre-commit
pre-lock,pre-lock
pre-revprop-change,pre-revprop-change
pre-unlock,pre-unlock
start-commit,start-commit
已经定义,版本库
版本控制
模型
复制-修改-合并,“拷贝-修改-合并”方案
锁定-修改-解锁,“锁定-修改-解锁”方案
版本控制系统,Subversion 是什么?版本控制基础概念
统一差异,检查你的本地修改的详情
补丁,检查你的本地修改的详情
软件配置管理,Subversion 是什么?
项目根目录,推荐的版本库布局规划你的版本库结构

C

checkout (见 工作副本,创建)
CollabNet,Subversion 的历史
COMMITTED,修订版本关键字
CVS (见 并行版本系统)

M

mod_dav_svn,Subversion 的组件

S

SCM (见 软件配置管理)
Subversion
历史,Subversion 的历史Subversion 有什么新东西?
已经定义,Subversion 是什么?
架构,Subversion 的架构
组件,Subversion 的组件
svn,Subversion 的组件
子命令
add,开始修改 svn add
blame,svn blame (praise, annotate, ann)
cat,svn cat
changelist,svn changelist (cl)
checkout,工作副本基本交互操作创建工作副本svn checkout (co)
cleanup,svn cleanup
commit,工作副本基本交互操作svn commit (ci)
copy,开始修改 svn copy (cp)
delete,开始修改 svn delete (del, remove, rm)
diff,检查你的本地修改的详情svn diff (di)
export,svn export
help,求助!svn help (h, ?)
import,导入文件和目录svn import
info,svn info
list,svn list (ls)
lock,svn lock
log,svn log
merge,svn merge
mergeinfo,svn mergeinfo
mkdir,开始修改 svn mkdir
move,开始修改 svn move (mv)
propdel,svn propdel (pdel, pd)
propedit,svn propedit (pedit, pe)
propget,svn propget (pget, pg)
proplist,svn proplist (plist, pl)
propset,svn propset (pset, ps)
resolve,svn resolve
resolved,svn resolved
revert,修正错误svn revert
status,查看你的修改概况svn status (stat, st)
switch,svn switch (sw)
unlock,svn unlock
update,工作副本基本交互操作更新你的工作副本svn update (up)
语法
URL,版本库的地址
选项,求助!
svnadmin,Subversion 的组件
子命令
crashtest,svnadmin crashtest
create,svnadmin create
deltify,svnadmin deltify
dump,svnadmin dump
help,svnadmin help (h, ?)
hotcopy,svnadmin hotcopy
list-dblogs,svnadmin list-dblogs
list-unused-dblogs,svnadmin list-unused-dblogs
load,svnadmin load
lslocks,svnadmin lslocks
lstxns,svnadmin lstxns
pack,svnadmin pack
recover,svnadmin recover
rmlocks,svnadmin rmlocks
rmtxns,svnadmin rmtxns
setlog,svnadmin setlog
setrevprop,svnadmin setrevprop
setuuid,svnadmin setuuid
upgrade,svnadmin upgrade
verify,svnadmin verify
svndumpfilter,Subversion 的组件
子命令
exclude,svndumpfilter exclude
help,svndumpfilter help
include,svndumpfilter include
svnlook,Subversion 的组件
子命令
author,svnlook author
cat,svnlook cat
changed,svnlook changed
date,svnlook date
diff,svnlook diff
dirs-changed,svnlook dirs-changed
help,svnlook help (h, ?)
history,svnlook history
info,svnlook info
lock,svnlook lock
log,svnlook log
propget,svnlook propget (pget, pg)
proplist,svnlook proplist (plist, pl)
tree,svnlook tree
uuid,svnlook uuid
youngest,svnlook youngest
svnserve,Subversion 的组件
svnsync,Subversion 的组件
子命令
copy-revprops,svnsync copy-revprops
help,svnsync help
info,svnsync info
initialize,svnsync initialize (init)
synchronize,svnsync synchronize (sync)
语法
URL,版本库的地址
svnversion,Subversion 的组件svnversion

V

VCS (见 版本控制系统)